=a 


AK 


^< 


)  ANALYTICAL  AND  PRACTICAL 


GRAMMAR 


il 


OF    THK 


}l 


I  f 
J) 


ENG^^H  LAMUAGE.  >^ 


4 


BY  REV.  PETER  BULLION,  D.  D. 


REVISED  RV 

^Itev.fJ.  CRAVEN,  D.D, 


^  KALEIGH  : 

PUBLISHED    BY    THE    N.    C.    CHRISTIAN    ADVOCATE 

PUBUSHINQ    COMPA]^y. 

1S64. 


Ic!,.v 


P^' 


-'^ 


ik 


T^U 


TI 


R 


\)  J\^''i 


THE  ETHEL  CARR  PEACOCK 

MEMORIAL  COLLECTION 


Main's  amori  monumentum 


TRINITY  COLLEGE  LIBRARY 

DURHAM,   N.  C. 
1903 


Gift  of  Dr.  and  Mrs.  Drcd  Peacock 


f     •.. 


Tk.. 


DUi 


1903 


Gift  of  Dr.  and  Mrs.  Dred  Pc^ 


AX 


ANALYTICAL  AND  PRACTICAL 

11 


GRAMMAR 


OF  THE! 


ENGL.18II  LANGUAGE. 


Ry  Rev.  PETER  BUI.LIONS,  D.  R. 

REVISED   BY 
Rev.  B.  CRAVEX,  D.  D, 


S 


RALEIGH,  N.  C. 


rUGLTSHED  BY  THE  N.   C.   CHRISTIAN    ADVOCATE 
^  PUBLISHING  COMPANY. 

^  1864. 


ra:H'=r 


fti'rqnri  -^y-^r  einT 


^eiljoS  ?.'/■  J  of  tff  jiiorft 


(siift'jorfaB 


;::;r;  ,i..y;r:i».r    rf-v     'iii^  ;:•  ;  - 'iuJafffl^  no  •' 


7/T;  i.'f  -ft. ;  ly  tij.'^  iV'j':  r.: !      .  / 


^^\i:;xirJi 


,^AV 


GRAMMAR 


"t:^l3^4&iiA^4&  fe(!)tii>  sCiliNCt  and'ai?  A^  "^  f] 
2.  4-S;  a-j  scjENCE;  it  investigates  the  priiici'gtos*'of  lan- 
guage in  general  :*as  tin  art,  it  teaches  the  right  method 
of  applying  these  principles  to  a  prtrticular  hmgnage,  so 
•as  thereby,  to  express  our  thoughts  in  a  com-ect  and  proper 
manner^ xt eCicyjcUjig  to.  .Q^JjibliBh^ed.  usage^ 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

3;  English -Grammar  IB  the' art 'of  speaking  a-iid  Nvrit- 
ing  the  English  language  with  propriety. 

4.  Language  is  either  spoken  or  written. 

5.  The  elements  of  spoken  language,  are  vocal  and  articulate 
souads...  -       -  .^'^r.:r  9fif  :i.l  v^codjcqi-i'i  A 

C.  The  elements  of  written  language,  are  characlei^'  oi' 'kacrs 
which  represent  these  sounds. 

7.  Letters  are  formed  into  i-yllables  and  words  .  words  into  sen- 
tences ;  and  by  these,  properly  uttered  or  written,  mcii  communi- 
cate their,  'houghts  to  eaeh  other. 

8.  G|iAM$j^  is  divided  into  four  parts;  namely,  Or- 
thography, which  treats  of  letters  )  Etymology,  ol\\ ox (\^  ; 
Syntax,  Qi-:ti^i^nQ^'^^r\d,{Bro&)dy,  of^locution -and  vcr- 
r^itication,'''  ■  rov  .■■•  -ciAi-n  --A  ■■■/.rA  '-fl',.  .  .,-  I,-...',-. 


EXG-LI6H  GRAMMAE. 


PARTI. 


OBTIIOtfEAPitt; 

ORTHOGRArHY  teachcs  the  rature  and  powers  of  Let- 
ters, and  the  correct  method  of  spelling  words. 

A  Letter  is  a  cimriictor  represeating  a  particular  sound  of 
tlie  Ijuman  voice.  '  - 

'     There  are  2f?0(?ft/y-5/x  letters  in  tlic  Kn^^lish  Alphabet. 
*     Lot  tors' are  either  Vowels  or  Consdnants.  '  '■- 

A ' VoWfe?]  is  ti'  letter  which'  repffesents  a  simple  iimHiculdLtc 
Boufid:aiid  in  a' word  or  syllable  may  be  sounded  alone.  They 
arc  a,  e,  i,  o,  u,  and  to  and  y.  not  beginning  a  syllable. 

A  Cons^onant  is  a  letter  which  represents  an  ariictUaie  sound: 
and  in  a  word  or  syllable  is  never  sounded  alone,  but  always  in 
connection  witli  a  vowel.  They  are  b,  c,  d,f,  ff,  hj,  k,  I,  m,  n, 
p,  q,  r,  s,  t,  V,  X,  z,  and  w  and  y  beginning  a  sylbible. 

A  Diphthong  is  the  onion '(^"  two  vowels  in  one  sound.  Thcy 
arc  of  two  kinds,  proper  and  improper. 

A  Proper  Diphthong  is  one  in  which  both  the /VOwcls  are 
sounded,  as  cum  out;  oiin  oil  ;  oiv  in  cou\ 

An  Lnpropsr  Diphthong  or  digraph  is  one  in  which  only  one 
of  the  vOwjbIs  is. sounded,  as  ou  in  court;  oa  in  mat. 

A  Triphthong  is  Ihe  union  of  three  vowels  in  one  sound  as  eau 

.  ■■■■.■■.)■•    ')  .*">iij  '•vyyj .  :■■  •  ■;_■':  • 
THE  POWERS  OF,  l4ET!]p;E]?.,S.  .,,  ^.^.^.j    .; 

Ill  analyzing  words  into  t^eir  elenrentiary  BOiancls,''iV^  neces- 
sary to  distinguish  between  the  name  of  ia'le tier  audits  jjomnc;-. 
■^    The  name  of  a  letter  ia  that  by  whioh  it  is  nsnally  called  ;  as  A, 
hp',  sc,  de,  &'c.  ■       -'   ■    '^^'   '*'  ^-'     ''  "''''  .    /•  ^ '• 

Thej^owgy  of  ftVelter  i'8  the.effe^t  which  it  hfaft;  elitk^  by  itself 
or  combined  with  other  letters,  in  forming  a  word  or  syllable. 


ORTHOaRAPHr, 


sPEi^ma. 


Spelling  is  the  art  of  expressing  a  word  by  its  prop^ 
er  letters,  and  rightly  ^iividing  it  into  syllables. 

The  OrthDgraphy  of  the  EngHah  language  is  so  anomaious* 
and  in  many  cases  arbitrary,  that  proficiency  in  it  can  be  acquir- 
rd  only  by  practice  and  the  use  of  the  Spelling  book  or  Dictiona- 
ry.— The  following  rules  are  of  a  general  character,  though  even 
to  these  there  may  be  a  few  exceptions, 

RULES  rOR  SPELLING  WORDS. 

EuLE  1.  MoDo^syilablos  and  words  accented  on  the 
last  Bj'Uable,  ending  with  a  single  consonant  preceded 
by  a  short  vowel,  double  that  consonant  before  aa  ad- 
ditional syllabic  beginning  with  a  vowel;  as,  rob^  ruh 
bcr  ;  admit,  admittance^  admitttd.  Es^cept  5;  and  7f,  which 

are  never  doubled,  ,■o^  ,,^Vxv/.y^.ri  .o  ■y:l^i^^y^\ 

But  when  a  diphthong-  precedes,  or  the  accent  is  no* 
on  the  last  syllable,  the  consaiiant  is  not  doubled  u^ 
boil^  boiling,  boiler  ;  ^;?'^^V,  visited.  « 

EuLE  2.  Words  ending  with  II  generally  drop  one  I 
before  the  tcrmintitions  ness^  less,  (y,  arid  fxdl;  hu^^/ul 
ncss,s7ciUess,/u^^i/,sk'7/td.  ■''  -  -^^  ,^'0  ' 

EuLE  3.  Words  ending  m  ^"prececieciB^  a  cor/so)§ar.t 
change^  into  i  before  an  additional  letter  or' syfla^^le  ; 
a;^,  .<:p^,  spies  ;  happ?/.  happier,  happiest;  carry,  carr^er^  car- 
ried;  fanvy^  fanciful.    ,       ^^  ,,   ,     ;    ,.,  .',u/.\  ,.r  V    .  / 

Exception  1.  EatVv'ia' not' cliahged  before  ing ;  as, 
deny, denying.  .       .,,••.    .,      .,      .,,,,,,,,,-,    ^,..  ^ 

Exception  2.  v^ords  cndiug  i,iL,^  pi^eceded  by  a  vow- 
el, retain  the  y  unchanged  ;  ns,  hoy.  bo^/s^  hoyiah,  boyhood. 

Exceptions.     Lay,  pay,  sa3%  make,  laid,  paid,  said. 

Other  rules  for'  spelling,  are,  encumbered  with  so  many  ex- 
ceptious  a^  to  render  them  nearly  useless.  They  are  therefore 
omitted. 


8    -  SNGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

PART  II. 


ETTMOLOGY. 

10.  EtymolooT  treats  of  the  different  sorts  of  xv'oi'Js, 

.  ■    ■  1 .  '  -  •  ■       •  ■      ..•'■■'-'--.  J'  i 

their  various  modification?,  and  their  derivations.    , 


WbEDS. 

''■-  il,  A -Word  is  an  articnkte  sound  used  by  common 
consent  HS  the  sign  of  an  idea. 

12.  Wonls,  in   respect  to  their  Forynation,  aro  either 
Primitive  OT  Derivaiive,  Simjole  or  Compound.    -"    ■      ' 

13.  A  Primitive  word  is  one  that  is  not  derived,  from  an^y^^ther 
word  in  tbe  language;  as,  bey,  Just,  father.  :'■  aiKOl  crlt  .q^- 

14.  A  Derivative  word  is  one   that   is-  dc?i\red'-from  i'oaie  'otlier 
word;    a?,  boyish,  justice, fatherly.  [■/:?.\:ic'-  '    .'''  Jj-^. 

15.  A  >Sj7n;j^e  word  is  one  that   is   not  combined  iWltiLjafl^^ptjJfer 
■word;  as,  man,  house,  cify.  ..,'•.'., 

16..A  Compound  wQvd  is  one  that  is^madeupof  twioormpr^^ple 
-wovds ;  AS,  manhood,  hprseman.  ...  .    ~  ..    -  . 

17.'  Words,  in  respect  of  JPbm,ai^  either'  l)e€ltmihWx)r 
Indeclinable.  .  ;^^    .        ,..    .u- 

18.  A  Dedipabl^  word  is  one  which  un(iei!goe^cc'rto.in-ch(i|)ge8 
'otfdrm 'orYermihaHd'tht'io  expreiis  the  different  rciiitions'^rgen-' 
der,  number,  case,  person,  &g.,  usually  termed  in 'Grn.mmar 
Accidents  ;  as,  77i£rM,  men  ;  love,  loves,  hvecL  '''^'^■ 
•'19.  fn  the  changes  which  they  undergo,  Nouna  artd  Prioiiotios 
are^^said  to  he^declmed,  Vierbs,  to  be  inflected.  •'  ^     ■-"  - 

-^'  20iAri' Indwell hahlevHyrd.  is  one  which  undergoes tfo'c^Vanj^o  of 
'p>tta\  SkB,  good,  some,  perlt'<ips.  "'• 


ETYMOLOGY — WORDS  9 

21.  In  respect  oi Signification  and  Use,  worJs  are  divi- 
ded inio  diflferent  classes,  called  Parts  of  Speech. 

22.  Parsing  is  the  art  of  resolving  a  sentence  intc  its  el- 
emenis  or  parts  of  speech  ;  stating  the  accidents  or  giarn- 
maiical  properties  of  each  word,  and  pointing  out  its  re- 
lation to  other  words  with  which  it  is  connected. 

23;  Parsing  is  distinguislied  into  Etymological  and  Syntactical. 

24.  Avfovd  is  I'urecilEtymologically  by  stating  the  class  of 
words  to  which  it  belongs,  with  its  accide7Us  or  grammatical 
properties. 

25,  A  word  is  parsed  Sij ntacticnl/ 1/  hy  staWng,  in'additioii,  the 
relation  in  which  it  stands  to  other  words,  and  the  rules  accord- 
ing to  which  they  are  combined,  in  phrases  and  sentences. 

2^,  These  two,  though  related,  are  perfectly  distinct,  and  should  not 
be  mixed  up  in  the  early  part  of  the  student's  course,  by  anticipating  at 
the  outset  what  he  can  be  supposed  to  know,  onl^'  at  a  more  advanced 
stage.  Such  a  course  may  seem  to  bo  more  intellectual,  but  its  tendency 
is  only  to  perplex  and  darken  the  subject.  Let  the  student  learn  one 
thing  ata  time,  each  thing  thoroughly  in  itsproper  order,  and  continue 
to  combine  things  learned,  as  far  as  it  can  be  d'  ne  without  anticipating 
what  is  future.  In  this  way  the  process  will  be  simple  and  eaf  y  ;  every 
step  will  be  taken  in  the  light,  and  when  completed,  the  result  will  be 
satisfactory.  Besides,  the  student  must  be  able  to  parse  etymologically 
with  great  ease  and  promptness',  before  he  can  Avith  any  advantage  be- 
gin the  study  of  syntax.  This  promptness  he  will  acquire  in  a  very  short 
time,  and  almost  without  effort,  if  the  class  is  properly  drilled  on  the  ex- 
eroises  furnished  at  every  step  in  the  following  pages. 


QLESTIONS. 

What  is  Grammar  ?  What  does  it  do  as  a  Science  '  What 
does  it  do  as  an  Ar«  1  What  is  English  Grammar  ?  Into  how 
many  parts  is  Grammar  divided  ?  Of  what  does  each  part  treat  1 
Of  what  does  Etymology  treat  1  What  is  a  word  1  How  many 
kindsof  words  in  respect  of  formation  ?  What  is  Parsing?  How 
many  kinds  of  parsing  '?  Repeat  the  substance  of  the  2Gth  sec^ 
tion. 

u 


10  EXGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

PARTS  OF  SPEECH. 

28.  The  Parts  OF  Spfech  in  English  are  nine:  viz.  Noun^ 
Article,  Adjective,  Pfonoun,  Verh^  Adverb,  Preposition,  In- 
terjection,-Aud   Conjunction. 

29.  Of  these,  the  Noun,  Pronoun,  and  Verb,  are  declin- 
ed*3  the  rest  are  indeclinable. 

NOUNb. 


Oi 


>0.  A  Noun  is  the  name  of  any  person,  place,  or  thing ; 
aa,  John,  London,  book.     Hence, 

The  names  of  persons,  places,  or  tUngs,  are  Nouns. 

31.  Nouns  are  of  two  kinds,  Proper  and  Common. 

82.  A  Proper  Noun  is  the  name  applied  to  an  individual 
only  ;  as,  John,  London,  America,  the  Ohio. 

33.  A  Common  Noun  is  a  name  applied  to  all  things  of 
the  same  sort ;  as,  man,  chair,  table,  book. 

OBSERVATIONS    ON    NOUNS. 

34.  When  a  proper  noun  is  used  to  denote  a  whole  class,  it  be- 
comes common,  and  generally  has  an  article  before  it;  as,  "The 
t^relve  Ccesars,"  "  He  is  the  Ckero  of  his  Jige,"  "  A  Daniel  come  to 
judgment." 

35.  Common  nouns  become  proper  when  personified,  and  a^s^ 
when  used  as  proper  names;  us,  Hail,    Liberty!  The  Park, 

30.  Under  common  nouns  are  usually  ranked — 

1.  Collective  nouns,  or  nouns  ot  multitude,  which  signify  many 

in  the  singular  number  ;   as,  army,  people. 

2.  Abstract  nouns,  or  names  of  qualities  .  as,  'picty,  wickedness. 
o.   Verbal  nouns,  or  the  names  of  actions.  &c. ,   as,  reading, 

writing,  sleeping. 
4.  Diminutive  nouns,  or  nouns  derived  from  other  nouns,  and 
denoting  a  small  one  of  the  kind  ;  as,  stream,  streamlet', 
leaf,  leaflet  :  liHl,   hillock,  &c.  , 


ETy:.I0LOGY— NOUKS.  ll 

37.  To  iho  class  of  nouns  belongs  everything,  wlitther  word,  leU«r, 
mark,  or  character,  of  w'aieh  vya  c{iu  thiafe,  speak,  or  write,  regarded 
merely  as  an  object  of  thougli  ,  even  wiieo.  as  sometimes  happens,  we  do 
not  give  itanaxe.  Thus  M'hfn  w*.  say,  *'Good"  is  aa  adjective,  a  is  8 
vowel,  6  id  a  consonant,  A  is  a  capita-  4  is  an  even  number,  i  is  a  frac- 
tion, ?  is  a  mark  of  interrogation— C'oorf,  a,  6,^,4,  i,*?,  are  all  to  be  re- 
garded as  n('ung. 

S**.  Remark  — A  noun  is  also  called  ^  suhatantive  But  this  term  for 
convenience  is  hp^re  ns^d  in  a  m(  re  comprehensive  sense,  to  mean  nount, 
personal  pronouns,  or  phrases  used  as  noUQS,  and  usually  called  ''  iub- 
.  stantive  i  hrases."  Thus  in  su^u  a  rule  as  this,  "An  adjective  agrees 
with  a  substantive,"  <fcc  ,  the  word  substantive  may  meaa  either  a  noan, 
or  pronoun,  or  substantive  phrase. 

EXERCISES, 

1.  In  the  following  list  distinguish  proper  nouns  from  commoa,  and 
give  a  reason  for  the  distincli  i > : — 

Albany,  city,  tree,  natioii,France,  Phillip,  dog,  horse, 
house,  garden,  Dublin,  Edinburarh.  London,  river,  Hud- 
eon,  Ohio,  Thames,  countries,  America;  England,  Ire- 
land, Spain,  sun.  , 

2.  In  the  following  sentences  point  out  the  nouns.     Say  why  they  aro 
nouns  ;  tell  whether  they  aro  proper  or  common,  and  why.    Th'is :  "  Ta 
bJe"  a  noun,  bccaujo  thena"ao  of  a  tniog;  c-mmon,  because  applied  to 
all  things  of  the  sam^  port. 

The  table  and  chairs  in  this  room  belong  to  John  ;  the 
book-case,\vriting-desk,and  books,  to  his  brother.  Time 
and  tide  wait  for  no  miiu. 

3.  Writ9  a  short  true  sentence  with  each  of  the  following  words; 

Man,  pen,  Confederacy,  tree,  June,  fish,  religion,  heav- 
en, riches,  rair.. 


QUESTIONS. 

How  many  parts  of  spcrcii  ?  Name  them.  Namo  th'ise  that 
are  declinable,  rsame  the  indeclinable.  What  is  a  noun"? 
iJuw  many  kinds  of  nouns?  What  is  a  proper  'H.un  ?  What 
is  a  common  noun  ?  Wiien  does  a  proper  noun  bt'(3«>me  com- 
mon ?  What  is  a  collective  noun '^  An  alstvact  i  f  un  ?  A  ver- 
bal uonn?  A  diminutive  noun  ?  What  other  things  luuy  be 
regurdcd  as  nouns "? 


12  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

ACCIDENTS  OF  THE  NOUN. 

39.  To  novins  belong  Person^  Gender^  Number,  and 
Case. 

1\,,7E.— These  properties  belong  also  to  personal  and  relative 
pronouns. 

PERSON. 

40.  Person,  in  Grammar,  is  the  distinction  of  nouns 
as  used  in  discourse,  to  denote  the  speaker,  the  person 
or  thing  spoken  to,  or  the  person  or  thing  spoken  of.— 

Hence, 

41.  rhere  are  three  persons,  called  Firsts  Second  and  Third. 

42.  A  noun  is  in  the  first  person,  when  it  denotes  ihe  speak- 
er; as,*'  I,  Pauf,  have  wriiten  ii." 

43.  A  noun  is  in  the  second  person,  when  it  denotes  the  per- 
son or  thing  addressed;  as.  "  Thou,  God,  seest  me."— "  HaiJ, 
Liberty ! " 

44.  A  noun  is  in  the  third  person,  when  it  denotes  tlio  person 
or  tiling  spoken  of;  as,^*  Washhiffion  waahrave,"--"  TruiJiis 
mighty." 

45.  Remark. — The  third  person  is  used  som'^times  for  tbe/r»<;  as, 
«•' Thy  8en;aHt  bfcaine  surety  for  the  lad  to  my  father."  Gen.  xliv. 
32  SometimeF,particularly  in  the  language  of  supplioation, for  the  sec- 
ond; 3.8,  "  0  let  not  the  Lord  be  angry."  Gtn.  xviii.  80.  "Will  the 
Lord  bless  us  ! " 

OBSERVATIONS    OX    PERSON. 

46.  The  first  and  the  second  person  can  belong  only  tonouns 
denoting  persons,  or  things  personified  ;  because  persons  only 
can  speak  or  be  spoken  to.  The  third  person  may  belong  to  all 
nouns. 

47.  A  noun  can  be  the  subject  of  a  verb  only  in  the  third 
person  A  noun  in  the  Jirst  or  second  person  is  never  used  as 
the  subject  of  a  verb,  but  only  in  apposition  with  the  first  or 
Ipecond  personal  pronoun,  for  the  sake  of  explanation  oreniph^v 


ETYMOLOGY — GENDER.  13 

fiis  ;  and  sometimes  in  the  second  person,  without  the  pronoun,, 
as  the  object  addressed,  T 


QUESTIONS. 

What  is  person  ?  How  many  persons  ?  What  does  each  per- 
son denote  '!  How  can  you  ascertain  the  person  of  a  noun  ?  Is 
the  third  person  ever  used  for  the  first  ?  When  can  nouns  be 
in  the  first  or  second  persons  ?  When  a  noun  is  the  subject 
of  ft  verb,  in  what  person  must  it  be  ? 


GENDEFt. 

48.  Gender  is  the  distinction  of  nouns  -with  regard 
to  sex. 

49.  There  arc  three  genders,  Masculine,  Feminine^ 
and  Neuter. 

50.  Nouns  denoting  males  are  Masculine;  as,  man, 
boy. 

51.  Nouns  denoting  females  are  Feminine;  as,  wo- 
man, girl. 

52.  Nouns  denoting  neither  males  nor  females,  i.  e., 
things  without  sex,  are  Neuter ;  as,  house,  hook,  tree. 

•53.  Nouns  which  denote  either  raa!es  or  females,  such  as^a- 
rent,  neighbor,  friend,  kc,  are  sometimes,  for  the  sake  of  conve- 
nience, said  to  be  of  the  Common  Gender^  i.  e.,  either  masculine 
or  feminine. 

54.   There  arc  three  ways  of  didiaguiahing'the  sexes. 

1.     Bv  different  words;  as, 


Masculine. 

Feminine. 

Masculine, 

Feminine. 

Batchelor 

maid 

Horse 

mare 

Beau 

belle 

Husband 

wife 

Boy 

girl 

King 

queen 

Brother 

sister 

Lord 

lady 

BucH 

doe 

^l?vn 

wQroan 

4 

14 


ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 


Masculine!. 

Feminine. 

Masculine. 

Feminine. 

Bull 

cow 

Master 

mistress 

Drake 

duck 

Nephew 

niece 

Earl 

countess 

Ram,  buck 

ewe 

Father 

mother 

Son 

daughter 

Friar 

nun 

Stag 

hind 

Gander 

gooBe 

Uncle 

aunt 

Hart 

roe 

Wizard 

witch 

2.     By  a  difference  of  tormmation  ;  as, 

Masculine. 

Femini7ic. 

Masculine. 

Femiriine. 

Abbot 

abbess 

Landgrave 

landgravine 

Actor 

actress 

Lion 

lioness 

Administrator 

ad  Jiinistratrix 

Marquis 

marchioness 

Adulterer 

adulteress 

Mayor 

mayoress 

Ambassador 

ambassadress 

Patron 

p'troness 

Arbiter 

arbitress 

Peer 

peeress 

Author 

authoress 

Poet 

poetess 

Baron 

baroness 

Prle^it 

priestess 

Bridegroom 

bride 

Princo 

princess 

Benefactor 

benefiictress 

Pricr 

prioress 

Count 

countess 

Prophet 

prophetess 

Deacon 

deanoness 

Protector 

protectress 

Duke 

duchess 

Sh^y-iiord 

shepherdess 

Elector 

electrcss 

Songster 

bongstress 

Emperor 

empress 

Sorcerer 

sorcerer 

Enchanter 

enchantress 

Suilaa 

(  sultana.or  sul 
I      taness 

Executor 

executrix. 

Governor 

governess 

Tiger 

tigress 

Heir 

heiress 

Traitor 

traitress 

Hero 

heroine 

Tutor 

tutoress 

Hunter 

hunhcss 

Viscount 

viscountess 

Host 

hostess 

Votary 

votaress 

Jew 

jowess 

Widower 

widow 

3.     By 

prefixing  a  distinguishing  word  ;  as, 

Masculine. 

Feminine. 

•    Sparrow. 

A  cock 

'iparrow. 

A  he^i  sparrow. 

Goat. 

A  he  goat. 

A  she  goat. 

Servant. 

A  man 

Fprvant, 

A  maid  servant. 

'  Child. 

A  wiaZe  child. 

A  female  child. 

Desccpdants.          Male  deecendante 

Fma(edes«?endant8 

ETYMOLOGY — GENDER.  l5 

OBSERVATIONS  ON  GENDER. 

55.  Many  mascaliao  nouns  have  no  corresponding  feminine; 
as,  baher,  brewer,  &c. :  and  some  feminine  nouns  have  no  corres- 
ponding masculine;  as,  laundress,  seamstress,  &.c. 

56.  Some  nouns  naturally  neuter,  are  often,  by  a  figure  of 
speech,  converted  into  the  masculine  or  feminine;  as,  when  we 
say  of  the  sun,  "  He  is  setting;"  of  the  moon,  "  She  is 
eclipsgd;"  or  of  a  ship,  "  She  sails.'* 

57.  In  speaking  of  animals  whose  sex  is  not  known  to  U6,  or  not  re- 
garded, we  assign  the  masculine  gender  to  those  distinguished  for  bold- 
ness, fidelity,  generosity,  size,  strergth,  &,c.,  as  the  dog,  the  horse,  the 
elephant.  On  the  other  hand,  we  assign  the  feminine  gender  to  animals 
characterized  by  weakness  and  timidity  ;  as,  the  hare,  the  cat. 

68.  In  speaking  of  animals,  particularly  those  of  inferior  size,  we  fre- 
quently consider  them  without  sex,  or  of  the  neuter  gender.  Thus,  of 
an  infant,  we  say,  "It  is  a  lovely  creature  " 

59.  When  the  male  and  female  is  expressed  by  distinct  terms;  as. 
shepherd,  shepherdess,  the  masculine  term  has  sometimes  also  a  gen- 
eral meaning,  expressing  both  male  and  female,  and  is  always  to  be 
used  when  the  oflBce,  profession,  occupation,  Ac,  and  not  the  sex  of 
the  individual,  is  chiefly  to  be  expressed.  The  feminine  term  is  used 
only  when  the  discrimination  of  sex  is  necessary.  Thus,  when  it  is 
said,  "  the  Poets  of  jthis  country  are  distinguished  for  correctness 
of  taste,"  the  term  "Poet"  clearly  includes  hothmale  and yema^  wri- 
ters of  poetry.  But,  "the  best  Poetess  of  the  age,"  would  be  said 
when  speaking   only  of  females. 

60.  Collective  nouns,  when  the  reference  is  to  the  aggregate 
as  to  one  whole,  or  when  they  are  in  the  plural  number,  are 
to  be  considered  as  neuter;  but  when  the  reference  is  to  the  ob- 
jects composing  the  collection  as  individuals,  they  take  the  gen- 
der of  the  individuals  referred  to. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  What  is  the  feminine  of — Father,  prince,  king,  mas- 
ter, actor,  friar,  priest,  heir,  hero,  Jew,  host,  hunter, 
sultan,  executor,  horse? 

2.  What  is  the  masculine  of — Lady,  woman,  girl,  niece, 
nun,  aunt,  sister,  mother,  shepherdess,  songstress,  wid- 
ow? 


1^'  ENGLISH  GEAMMAK. 

3.  Tell  of  what  gender  the  following  nouns  tire,  and  why  : 

Man,,  horse,  tree,  field,  father,  house,  mother,  queen, 
count,  lady,  king,  prince,  castle,  tower,  river,  stone, 
hen,  goose. 

4.  Write  a  sentenca  on  each  of  the  pracading  words. 


QLESTIONS, 

What  is  Gender  ?  How  many  genders  ?  What  does  each 
denote?  What  is.  meant  by  C(>mrfton  gender?  How  many, 
Hud  what  are  the  different  ways  of  distinguishing  the  gexl — 
Mention  some  masculine  nouns  that  have  no  feminine.  What 
gender  is  assigned  to  animals*  of  inferior  size  1  What  gfenera{ 
meaning  do  masculine  terms  sometimes  have  ^  When  are  col- 
lective nouns  regarded  as  neuter  ? 


NUMBER, 

61.  I^UMBER  is  that  property  of  a  noun  by  which  it 
expresses  one,  or  more  than  one. 

62.  Nouns  have  two  numbers,  the  Singular  and  the 
PluraL  The  singular  denotes  one;  Rf^y  book,  tree :  ihei 
plural,  more  than  one ;  as,  books,  trees, 

GENERAL  RULE. 

63.  The  plural  is  commonly  formed  by  adding  s  to 
the  singular;  a?*,  booh^  books. 

SPECIAL   KULKS. 

04.  liuLE  1. — Nouns  ending  in  s,  sh,  ch,  soft,  z,  x,  or 
0,  form  the  plural  by  adding  es  ;  txaMiss, 3fisses ;  brush, 
brushes  ;  match,  matches;  topaz,  topazes;  fox,  foxes;  he- 
ro, heroes. 

65.  Exceptions. — Nouns  in  to,  vo,  and  yo,  have  s  or\\y  \  cameo, 
cameos;  folio,  folins ;  embryo,  embin/os.  So,  also,  canto,  cantos. 
.lu.nt.o,  ty.ro,  grotto^  ppytipo,   solo,  I'ulo,  quarto.,  forjinerly  hacl 


ETYMOLOGY — NUMBER,  17 

only  s  in  the  plural ;  but  now  more  eojumonly  take  es  under  the 
Rule:  as,  juflto/juntoe^,  &b.  Nouns  in  ch  sounding  like  ky  add 
5^  only.,  as,  monarch,  monarchs.   iOKii' -u  ,    JXu'^ 

66.  VVhenever  s  or  e^  will  not  coalesce  with  the  final  syllable, 
-t  adds  a  syllable  to  the  word  ;  as,  age.  pi.  ages;  box,  boxes. — 
But  where  5  or  cs  will  coaleFce,  it  does  not  add  a  syllable:  as 
'-jooJc,  books  :  cargo,  cargoes.'  The  5  will  make  an  additional  syl- 
lable only  after  e  final,  preceded  by  g,  or  an  ^-sound  :  as,  cage, 
cages ;  race,  races  :  rose,  roses.  Es  will  coalesce,  and  does  not  add 
a  syllable  only  after  o  :  as,  ccJto,  echoes. 
,,67.  Rule  2. — Noiv^is  in  g  after  a  ponsonant,  chango  g 
^jito  iesin  the  pluFal;.  as,  lady,. ladies.  But, 
.,  No*uns  in  ?/ aflcra  vowe!,  and  all  proper  nouns  m  g 
follow  the  general  rule  (03)  ;  as,  dag,  days ;  the  Fomp- 
eys,ihe'Tullys,  Szc: 

=«'?"78.  RutE"^.— ^Nouns  in / or/e,  change  /  orfe  into  vcs 
HdJmthcx  plural;  as,  loaf ,  loaves  ;  life,  livts:  "  ' 

69.  Exceptions. --^'DvfRYt,  scarf,  reef ;  brief,  chief,  grief;  ker^ 
chief,  handkerchief,  mischief :  gulf,  turf,  surf,  safe,  fife,  strife: 
proof,  hoof,  reproof,  follow,  the  general  rule.  Also  nouns  in  j^', 
have  their  plural  in  s;  ns,  imiff',  mvff's ;  except  s^trj^,  plural 
staves;  but  its  com poands-urc  regular ;  as,  fagsiaff,  Jlagsiafs ; 
ioharf  h ai ■  e i t h> o p,  wJiarfs  x>v  mhar ue&.  • 


L^EBCl^EB., 

1.  fi^Ve'the  the  plural  of  the  following  nouns  and  the  rule  for  forpa- 
ing  it ;  tlrtlP,  Fox,  foxes,  Jiufe-^'^ovLXis  in  *,  sh,  ch,  soft,  ?,  ,r,  or  o, 
form  thoplfiral  by  adding  ^.  Or,  more  briefly  ;  nouns  ending  in  x 
form  tl^plqral  by  adding  .(5*.  •  • 

Foxj.  book,  leaf,  candle,  box,  coacli,  duly,  knife,  eclio, 
JosSy.ca-i'go,  wife,  story,  eliurch,  stone,  house,  glory, 
hope,  flower,  city,  difficulty,  distress,  wolf. 

!<-.  Day,  chimney,  journey,  valley,  arm}^,  vale,  monnreh, 
'two, 'grotto,   nuncio,   gulf,  handkerchief,'  hoof,  Ptaff, 

'^xiff,'^ reef,  safe,  wharf,  fife. 


18 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 


2.  Of  what  number  is — Book,  trees  globoB.  planets, 
glass,  etfite,  foxes,  house,  bill,  river,  ecenee,  6tar^,ber- 
ries,  peach  ? 


,  NOU^■S  IRRZuCLAR   IK  THE  PLURAL. 

'■^^70.  Somo  nouns  are  irregular   in  tho  formation  of  tl>€irplu- 
*"rdl; -sa-oh  as —     "'"'"'"' 


Singular^ 

I'lural 

8i}iyular. 

Plural. 

Man 

men 

Tooth 

teeth 

Woman 

women 

Goose 

geeS6 

ci.iia 

chiMreii 

Mouse 

mioo 

Foot 

i'eet 

Louse 

lico 

Ox     . 

oxen 

Cow 

kitic 

71. 


but  now  regular,  cqws. 
Some  nouns  lin.ve  both  a  re;:ular  and  an  irregular  facm 


of  the  plural,  but  different  8ignifi^**'*'i^^^s  J  ^9—  .!^ft 

Singular.  :    :      .  ■  •  •  Plurals i  > ' -■ 

(otto  oflliQsame  family)  brothers 

(one  of  the  same  society)  brethren 

(in  stamp  for  coining)  dies 

(a  small  cube  for  gaming)  dice 

(men  of  genius)  geniuses 

(a  kind  of  spirit)  genii 

(a  table  of  reference)  indexes 

(a  sign  in  algebra)  indices 

_^,^^    (as  a  distinct  seed)  peas 

-  vf  (as  a  species  of  grain)  pease 

Tan  individual  animal)  sows 

(the  species)  swine 

(a  coin )  pennies 

(a  sum  or  value)  pence 
72.  Note  -r-Thpiigh  pence  is  plural,  yet  such  expressions  ns 

fourpence,  sixpence,  kc,  as  t]>e  name  of  a  sum,  or  of  a  <>oin  vpp 

resenting  that  sum  is  often   rcg-arvled  a*?  Blngular,  and  capable 

of  a  plural 


Brother 

Brother 

Die 

Die 

Genius 

Genius 

Index 

Index 

Pea 

Pea.,;.. 

So'v 

Sow  or  swine 

Penny 

Penny 


10       .tSi'^q 


ETYMOLOGY^ — SLUMBER.  1 9 

A  Z3.  .Cffmpouode  ending  in  ful  or  fully  and  generally  those 
^-bich  bate  the  important  word  last,  form  the  plural  regularly; 
'ai-,  spoon-ful,  ciip-fid,  codch-ful,  handful,  mouse-trap,  ox-cart, 
cdmera-ohscura,  &c  ;  plural,  spdon-ftds,  ciip-frils,  coack^fulii, 
•fee. 

74.  Compounds  in  which  the  principal  word  stands  first,  plu- 
ralize  the  first  word  ;  as — 

Singular.  Plural. 

Commander-in-  chief  Commanders  in-chief 

Aid-de-camp  aids-de-camp 

Knight-errant  knights- errant 

Court-martial  courts- martial 

Cousin-german  cousins-german 

Father-in-law,  &c.  fathers-in-law,  S:c. 

Man-'Servani  changes  both  ;  as  men- servants.  So  also,  women- 
servants,  knights-templars. 

75.  The  compounds  of  -man  form  tlie  plural  as  the  simple 
word;  as, Jishennan,  fishermen.  But  nouns  accidentally  end- 
ing in  WMiTt,  and  not  compounds  o^  man,  form  the  plural  by  tho 
general  rule  ;  as,  Turcoman,  Mussulman,  talisman  ;  plural, 
TurcomanSy  Mussulmans,  &c. 

76.  Proper  names,  when  pluralized;  and  oiher  parts  of  speech 
used  as  nouns,  or  mere  names,  form  the  plural  like  nouns  of 
similar  ending,  as,  the  Arisfotles,  the  Solans,  the  Mariuses,  the 
Pmnpeys,  the  Ciceros ;  the  ai/es  and  noes',  the  ins  and  outs  ;  by 
sixes  and  sevens,  hyf fties  ;  three  fourths,  t'wo  halves;  "His  ands 
and  his'or*  ;"  '-One  of  the  buts  is  superfluous." 

77.  Exception.— Such  words  ending  in  ij  after  a  consonant, 
follow  the  general  rule,  and  noc  the  special  rule  ;  as,  the  Livi/s 
the  Tullys,  the  Henrys — "The  lohys  and  the  hys.'" 

78.  Letters,  marks,  and  numerical  figures,  are  made  plural  by 
adding  's;  as,  "  Dot  your  Vs  and  cross  your  fs:' — "Your  s's 
are  not  well  maJe." — "  The  *;S  and  X's  are  not  in  line." — "Four 
(Vs  «=eight  3'.?"' — 9'5  give  place  (0  0"5''. 

79.  Words  adopted  without  change  from  foreign  languages, 
generally  retain  their  original  plural.  As  a  general  rule,  nouns 
in  nm  os  on^  have  a  in  the  plural.     Latin   nouns   in  ?>,  in  the 


e^o 


PJf^LI^H  GRAMMAR. 


plural  change  is  inioes;  Greek  nouns  in  is,  change  w  into  t<i€5' 
^  ^4"'^tin  nouns  in  a,  change  a  into  oi ;  but  Greek  nouns  change  a 
V  into  ata  in  the  plural.  -  The  following  are  the  roost  commpn, 
some  of  which,  however,  from  common  use,  have  beeome  so 
much  a  part  of  the  language  as  to  have  also  the  regular  Ijig- 
lish  foi;m  of  the  plural.  lu  the  iollowing, table  th^se  areiadica- 
ted  b^  the  letter  R.  ,    .     v 


Singular, 

Plural. 

Singular. 

PiliraL 

Alumnus 

aluinni 

Chrysalis., 

chrysalides 

Alumna 

alumrjie 

Crisis 

crises 

Amanueusi.s 

ams^nqcnsus 

Criterion 

criteria 

Aiialysis 

analyses 

Datum 

data. 

Animalculum 

animalcula,  R, 

Desideratum 

desidetftta 

Antitheso^^',,,, 

antitheso:i 

Dioeresis 

diierases 

Apex  ,  /    ^ 

apices,  R. 

Effluvium 

effluvia 

Appcncjix 

appendices,  R. 

Ellipsis 

ellipses 

.  Arcanum 

arcana 

Emphasis 

emphases 

l^utomaton 

automata,  R. 

Encomium 

encomia,  R. 

J.  Axis 

axes 

Ephemeris 

ephemeridesi  ; 

r  pandit 

bandi-tti 

Erratum 

errata       ^r-o-i^ 

Basis 

bases 

Focus 

foci 

Beau 

beaux,  K.   ' 

Formula 

forniBl«,R 

C^^^    :  o;liI  \n- 

;  calces.  R. 

Fungus 

fungi,  funguses 

Cherub...  >f  ^ 

ycherubjm,  R.. 

Genius 

genii 

r^^n4Vl.i:^y" 

genera    ,  '^  . 

Nebula 

nebulas 

.Gymnasium 

gymnasia,  R. 

Oasis 

oases 

'Hypothesis 

Iiyputhe6c!.s 

Parenthesis 

parentheses 

Ignis  fatuus 

ignrjsfafui 

Phenomenon 

phenomenq, 

lnde.x(a  point' 

•)iil(Jexc3 

Radius 

radii 

]ndex(in  algcb)iiidicuy    -  , 

.Scholium 

BchoH.^  H.:: 

Lamina 

laniinaj. 

.  Seraph 

seraphim,  K. 

Larva. 

larvjc    '.\', 
magi      ■' 

Speculum 
Stamen 

stiltiiiM,  t, 

•iHedttfirr 

niedi<i,.  R. 

{Stimulus 

Btim^^^^^ 

,  ^lemoraiidmu 

nicnioranda 

Stratum 

fitrata 

Metamorphosis  metamorphoses  Thesis  theses 

Miasma               miasmata            Vertebra  vertebrae 

JVIomentum         momenta,  R.       Vertex  vertices,  H. 

Monsienr '          jne68i<^urs            Viptu<)So  viHudlSoS   '" 

..Ali%i(matti;cv)     mcssrtj(ihastjcrs)YotliCiJ  •;  ^  r,  :-.Tprticcs,^ii? 


ETY  MOLOG  Y— NTt  WBEt?^.^  2t^'" 

OBSERVATrONS.  ON  NUMBKU. 


80.  Some  poans  arc  used   in  ike  singular  only.   jS,ifch,5are  the 
names  o{  mctaU^  virtuoi,  vices,  arts,  soitniccs,   abaiixicl  qifaliiio}, 
and  things,  v^eir/hcdQv  measured  ;,axs  goldyjnji^liuiss  i^^^ht^. 
neas,  intemperance,  sQulptiui'e,  geomelrii^  yjisi^myjlour,  'if^il}cydc^.^j^ 
Except  when  ditforent  sorts  of  things  a^re  expressed  :  ^s,    vines, 
teas,  sugars,  liquors,  d'v. 

81.  Some  nouns  are  used  in  theplnrg.1  only:   as,  annals,  an>yri a 
tijiodes,  archives,  asseU,  ashes,  l)illimds,.hitierSrJ)recches,  clothes,  ,,;. 
calends,  colors,  (militciry  banners),  dj-egs^  good Sy  hysterics yidcs; . 
intestines,  literati,  lees^  letters   Cliterature),    mimiiice,    mannprs^^, 
morals,  nones,    orgiesy    pTeiads   or  pleiades,  shambles,   tidings^^ 
thatiks,  ifhpcrs^  uitaU,  victuals'.'  And  tKinVfs  consisting   of  two 
parts';  as,  heUoii's^'  drairer^.^hffsc^'  nippers, 'plhc'rvSj  jdih-Sj  sn'vff- 
ers,  scissors^'shears,  tongs,  f('<\  'H 

A  few  words  nsaally    plural,    viz:    hmr.'/s,    nnhers,    entrails',^ ''^ 
lungs',  have  sipmetimes  a  singular,  denoting  a  part  or  portion  o'P 
that  expressed  ny  the  Piural ;  ,as,  oowel,  Tung,  ,a;r, 

82.  Some  nouns  are  alike  in  both  numbers  ;  as,  deer,  sheep, 
sicine,  vermin,  scdmon,  perch  ;  apparatus,  hiatus,  series,  conge- 
ries., species,  superficies  ;  head  (in  the  sense  of  an  individual), 
cd!/<Ze;  also^^Zf,  and  sometimes ^/J>w;Z,  denoting  the  class;  but 
denoting  individ-uals,  they  have  the  regular  plural:    as,  fishe^. 

fowls.        ■-..•.,-,,,:,,,.,,.-,....•„,    ...,,-,,% ^^r--       f 

83.  T\\Q  VI ovdis,  brace,  couple, pair,  yoke,   dozen,   score^   gross^  ,, 
hundred,  thousand,  and  eome  others,  after   adjectives    of  nuin-, 
ber,  are  either  singular  or  plural ;  as,  a  brace,  a  Sozen,  a   hun-' 
€?rer?;  two  brace,  three  dozen,  sfv  hirt}dre&^((''c. '  ^fedt'H^itholtt  art 
adjective  ot  humber,"or  in  othei*  conistructionSj  and  particular- 
ly afier  in,  by,  rfv.,  in  a  distrlbutiv'.?  sense,  most  of  these  words,'/'" 
in  the  plural,  assume  a  plural  form  ;  a!?;'"lri  brac(fi  and  <:/o?<??».<f."'''* 
'*By  sdores'  iindhnndyrds.-'—  '>  Worth  thousancfs-.^^''  '^^  i   •.!▼*'  :ij'd    i, 

84.  1.  Thfe  lollowing  words,  plural  in  fbl^ni;  'nf« '8(HilVe'tirt»ei'-f''i 
singular,  but  Di?«t  commonly  pfiiral  in  sJ^nitication,  Viz  ?'*^ 
amends,  Trteans,  ricftes,  pains  {metkt\\ng  laborious  efforts),-'  ddd's.  ^^1 
alms,  wages  yoin^  the  names  of  certain  sciences  ;    as^   mafhernal-^''^ 


tl  ENGLISH    tIRAMMAR. 

*t'3,  ethics^  optics,  acQusticdy    vKitaphynica,   poliiicd,   pncuiuatici^ 
hydroaiatioif  <£c 

2.  Means  and  amends,  referring  to  one  objoct.  aro  Kin;;ular :  ' 
to  more  than  one,  plural.  Mean,  in  the  singular  form,  is  now 
used  to  signify  the  middle  between  two  extremes.  Alms  {eel- 
messe  Anglo-Snxon)  and  riches)  richesse,  French)  ate  really 
singular,  thou;;!!  now  used  commonly  in  a  plural  sense.  News, 
formerly  singular  or  plural,  is  now  mostly  singular.  Molasses 
and  measles,  though  ending-like  a  plural,  are  singular,  and  are 
80  used.  Oats  is  generally  plural ;  gallows  is  both  singular 
and  plural,  though  a  distinct  plural  form,  (jalloioses,  is  also  in 
use. 

85.  The  following  are  singular  in  form,  but  in  oonstruciion 
various;  thus,  ybo^  and  hcrse,  meaning  bodies  of  troops,  and 
people,  meaning  pe7'50?25,  aro  always  construed  as  plural ;  can- 
non, shot,  sail,  cavalry,  infantnj,  as  singular  or  plural.  People^ 
when  it  signifies  a  community  or  body  of  persons,  is  a  colleciivo  , 
noun  in  the  singular,  and  sometimes,  thongh  rarely,  takes  la^  , 
plural  form  ;  as,  "Many  peoples  and  nations,"'  Rev.  x.  11 . 


■  THE  ri-uRAi.  or  peopeb  n.\me9 

80.  Proper  names  for  the  most  part  want  the  plural  ;    but--  ^ 
1.  Proper  numeg  without  a  title  aro  used  in  the  plural,  wheh"  ^ 

they  refer  to  a  race  or  family  ;  as,  the  *'  Campbells'^  "the,  /S<?V   . 

arts  ;  '  or  to  several  persons  of  the  saipe  name.  , 

•  •<•';•    .-f  J-    .790 

3  Proper  names  with  the  title  of  Mrs.  prefixed,  or  wiib,  ap^y  ». 
title,  preceded  by  the  numerals,  two,  three,  kG  ^  pluialize  thjp-j,,^ 
name  and  not  the^title  ]  as,  "  The  Mrs.  Howards  ;"  "the  tw,o  , 
Miss  Mortons  f\  ;'the^  two  Mr.  Henrys:'  ,^  ^. 

3.  But  when  several  persons  of  the  same  riame  are  spoken  o^^'> 
individually,  and  distinguished  by  a    particular   appellation,  ov' 
when  persons  of  ditferent  names  are  spoken   of  together,  the  ti-,,i;, 
tie  only,  and  not  the  name  is   made  plural  ^  fl!?j./.*^»55R  J.ujjft,v;^p 
and  Mary  Robinson."  ...rr  edj  fcnr v,  Mc^jiwr  .ts^in 


ETYMOLOGY — CASE.  23  ^. 

Tiius  far,  usage  and  the  rule  are  settled  and  uuifoiuj  ^ — 

4.  But  in  other  casoa,  usage  is  still  unsettled.  Some  writurs, 
perhaps  the  majority,  pluralize  ibeiiUe  and  not  tho  name;'  as 
^*Th«  Misses  Brown,''  "the  3fe3srs.  Harper."'  Others  of  equal 
authority,  regnrding  the  title  as  a  sort  ot  adjective,  or  the  whole 
as  a  compound  name,  pluralize  the   name  and  not  the  title ;  as. 

The  Miss  Brmoiis  r^  "the  Mr.  Harpers."'  This  form  is  mora 
common  in  conversation,  and,  being  less  stiff  and  iormal,  is  more 
likely  to  prevail  A  few  improperly  pluralize  both  name  and 
title;  as,  ''The  Misses  Broions ;''   "the  Messrs.  Harpers.'' 

5.  Names,  with  other  titles  prefixed,  follow  the  same  analo- 
gy;  ns,  "Lords  Wellington  and  Lyndhurst;  ■'  "the  locds  bishops 
of  Durham  and  St.  David's;"  "the  generals  Scott  nod  Taylor."  jL 

■  viJon.oiii  .  BXERGISES.  :.r,|^,)o    3r|i    ^^km^h    oT  ,  1 

Gjvethc  plural  o/— wor.an,  penny,  0V'f<3crt,  "child, 
goose,  die,  son-in-law,  erratum,  radius,  axis,  index,  c-her* 
ub. 

QUPSTIONB. 

What  is  number '?     How  many  numbers'?     How  is  the  plu- 
ral commonly  f(;rmed  ?     What  nouns  add  es  ?     When  do  s  and 
*s  ddd  a  pyjlable  to  the  word  ?     How  do  nouns  in  y  niter  a  con- 
sonant form  the  plural '?     How   do    nouns  endin/r   in  ?/ after  aifs 
vowel  form  the  plural  ■?     How,  nouns  ending  in/ or /c?     How 
do  Compounds  of  wan  form  the  plural  '?     How  do  proper  nninrn 
fortt  the  plural  ?     What  is  ihe  rule  for  nouns  adopted  from  for- 
eign languages?     What  nouns  are  used   only  in  the  singular  '^ 
U' hat   nouns  are  used    only  in   the  plural  7     What  nouns   are 
the  same  in  both  numbers  ?     Wliat   nouns  plural    inform    are  ^'' 
singular   in   signification  I     Of  what  number   are  means   and  (< 
amends'^     When  are  proper  names  used  in  the  plural  V  What 
istlie  rule  for  proper  names  with  a  title   us  Mrs  prefixed  ? 


CASES  OF  ^^OUN^.   '- 

'  .$7,  Case  is  tbe  state  or  condition  of  .s^Tioun.-^iith  re^?  .  : 
Dect  to  .the  other  w^i'ds  in  a  sentence..  i.>;a        y'  j,.j  j^u 


L'4  KNOLTf^TI    GRAMMA?.. 

88.^9jifns. in  English  li;\\ 
//re,  Po^GS^i.ve,  and  Objc.ctioL.     . , 
89,  The.  iVowjjV(//iv  oasQ  is  used—  .        .       ..    , 

l.When  a  noun  is  used  simpiy  as  the  muhe  D£*n  ot)j'^?fcor!t(wi 
3br.Wb;en  it  is  used  as  that  of  ivhicli  soniothing  Is-iftfl^rwiech  ' 
•-.■vtva«,  •' JoA?i  roads.?.-     ■   V  .     '  ^^^■;..  r.; 

3.  When  it  is  used  as  a  descriptive;  as,  *'John  is  a  f^ood7;m/.' 

4.  When  it  is   used  absolutely,    or  independent  of  txny   other 


word  ;  ^'- O.Absalom,  my 


.fnnj  '^  .■■■  vv^  <  ,:t.'( 


■'V 


00.  The  Fossrssilr.  Cfise  cOntvects  \f ith  tW4  l^hnl'e  of  jflTfloli^'ect , 
the  idea  oi*o/^^m,  jioss^ssion,'  6\'4iin<if.rff'}'a^  The  .^/«}\- rayf: ; 
.yoZ( w'.9 *book  ;  a  ^>o?/'.*  cap  ;7w!<?n'^  .shoes'.  ' 

91.  The  Objective  case  is  used — 

1.  To    denote    the    olyect  of  a  transitive    verb  in  the   aotivr 
,f..'     voice  ;, as.  "James  as^istg  7 /<o>;^/^M-.-'.     '•••  ij!       ,^.\ '-/:,. 

2.  To  denote  the  object  of  a,  rtlatioae^pfessedr.b^  a  p^^pcti- 

tion  ;  as,  "  They  live  in  Louihu,"  ~  , . 

3.  To  denote  time,  value,  weighty  or  measure,  without  a 
governing  word  ;  as,  "James  is  ten  j/ear.^  old.'" 

.       '\  "i  ,;  •       CiENfiR.\L   RULES,         *    ,    _ 

9.^^  l^be  nominative  and  the   objective  of- noun 
alike. 

9'3.  The  possei'-sivc  .siugahir  is  foniiod  by  addin^in' 
apostrophe  and  s  to  tire  nominative;  as,  Joh7i's<<  « .!; 

94.  When   the   plural   ends  iii  ;s,  the   possessive  i« 
formed  by   adding  a,n  aposti'ophe ,  only j    a^s,  ladies'. 
But  when  the  plural  does  not  6n4  ins,  both  die  apostro 
])he  and  s^  arc  add^dj'a^,  ii^e^j^sy.'cAj^^rW'.?. 

nECLEXSION  OF  NOUNS. 

D5.  Nouns  are  thus  declined— ' 

Siuf/ular.  PluraL     ;  _  i^higulav. 
Nom.         Lady        ladies  Man 

Pos8.  Ladys      ladies'  Man's 

Obj.  Lady         ladiee  Man 


PluraL 

Stiu/idai 

nion 

Juhn 

men's 

John's 

mcD^  -  '■ 

-    itlabn 

ETYxMOLOGrr— CASE.  .   25 

OG.   l^-(-)pcr  nanicb  fur  tlie  most  part  want  the  plural. 

07.  ..When  the  nonnnative  singular  ends  in  ss,  or   in  letters  of 

a  faimilur  sound,  the  j  al'ter  the  ^ipostiophe  is  sometimes  omitted 

1  order  to  avoid  harahness,  or«ioo  cIo»e  a  succession  .of  hissing 

■  undo /as-;  '-Fgr  goodness' tsako /'   "for  couscienco' sako,  "  Da- 

vieb' ourvcyin^/'    -.Mu^jeti'  di.-oii.les ,''  "Jci^iis' feet,'? 


lAriElNG     THB    NOUN, 

98.  A  lioiin  ib  parsed  etymologically,  by  stating  itjf 
acc'idonts,  or  ;.';rai"i"ii\iaiical  properties,  kind  of  noun,  per- 
son, gender,  iiunil'cr,  and  case. 

99.  NoTE.-^The  pussosaivo  is  easily  known  by  its  form.  As  the 
nomiaativrf  and  objectivo  of  jiouas  are  a'iUe,  in  parsing  noons  in  tli& 
f"l!owiDg  list.^-,  all  U'luriJ:'  not  iu  the  pogsesiivu  may  be  said  to  bo  la 
Ibe^nomiiiaHvo. 

100.  The  student  n)a_y  parse  the  vford  house  tiifs— 
lIouEz,  Nquii,  Common,  Xeutcr,  Siny  luir,  2^ominaiivc. 

The  teacher  tuay  then  aek,  bp  a  tort  of  r^icw,  why  do  vou  call 
Tmuae  a  itouu  ? — why,  counnuu  ? — v/hy,  neuter? — ^why  «J/ija/ar  ?— why, 
t  le  nomiiiativc  ? — rcq  nrin^  a  dutinct  answer  to  each  question.  ^n(l 
lastly,  he. m.iy  r  oulra  the  pupil  tu-^tato  thosa  rcasonfc  in  order,  with- 
uut  the  iiucstioDS  ;  tliio 

li    '  '  i\'jj^'i  because  the  nam 0  of  u  thing  ; 

Co;;?;;io;f, because  it  belongs  to  all  things  of  tliO  surtj 

XculcV;  because  without  sex,; 

Sinjuun;  because  it  denotes  one,  plural,  houses  ; 

yuiHiiidiivj,  because  it  ib  used  only  as   a  name— • 

By  repeatii  g  this  f  roocra  a  ftw  timo^,  a'l  tbatbelongB  to  the  pars- 
ing of  a  noan  Will  bdcom^  uo  fauiiliar;  aadsj  cloarly  under&tood,  as 
to  be  aUvaj  6    bui>y. 

EXEUClSiTrf.  ' 

Father,  brothers,  moihor'a,  boy^.book,  loaf,  arms,  wifo, 
hals^  siotor^',  bride's,  bottles,  brii;sh,  goose,  eagles',  wings 


2G  E^s^GLISH    GRAMMAR. 

echo,  ox's  horn,   mouse,   kings,   qiieeiis,  hread,  child's 
■toy,  grass,  Looih,  tongs,  eandlCj  chair,  Jane's  boots,  Bob- 


\\  ii:iL  i>>  I  .iM  .  in,»v  iw.ii.y -M.;os  !  When  is  the  nominative 
MScd?  What  doo5?  the  possessive  case  <lo'-  When  is  the  oh- 
iectlvo  used?  Wliat  cases  are  alike  ?  How  is,  the  possessive 
formed  ?  Decline  several  nouns.  How  is  the  possessive  form- 
ed when  the  noun  (  ncis  in  .9  or  >f.s  '^  How  is  a  noun  parsed  ?  — 
IVhat  arc  'the  p;raiiimatical  propcrlics  of  a  noun  1 


THE  AirrxGLi:. 

101.  An  AivrtCLE  is  a  word  put  Tjeforc  a  noun,  to  indi- 
cate the  manner  in  wbieh  it  is  used. 

102.  There  iire  two  lu'ticles,  a  or  an  and  ihc. 

103.  ^  or  an  is  called  tiie  inrlefinite  article,  because  it 
RhoVs  tliftt  ita  noun  dc?iotes  a  person  or  thing  indpjitntehi,  ov 
\Vithbut  distinction  ;  as,  ^1  man,  i.  e.  any  man,  or  some  man: 
"withbut  stating  which  one. 

104.  A  is  used  before  a  copsonont;  a,?,  a  book  ^  also  before  a 
vowel,  or  diphthong,  whreh  combines  with  its  sound  the  power 
of  initial  ?/,  or  ?/j  ;  as  a  iniU,  g^ii^c,  a  eulogiij,  a  cur,  many  a  one. 

105.  ^71  is  used  before  a  vowel  or  silent  A ;  as,  an  age,  an. 
lionr :  also  before  words  beginning  with  h  sounded,  when  the 
accent  is  on  the  second  syllable;  as,  an  heroic  action,  an  JiifUo- 
rimZ  account  ;—lDecause  h  in  such  words  is  but  slightly  sound- 
ed. 

IOC.  ^or  an  i«  sometimes  used  in  the  sense  of  one,  each,  er- 
eri/;  as,  "  Six  cents  a  pound;'  "two  shillings  a  yard  ;''  "  one 
dollar  a  day  ;''  *'  tour  hundred  a  year.' 

1^7.  RemAUK — lo  tho  eyj}rc^s\o\is  a  hntlnff,  n  fishing,  a  huildtng, 
and  the  lit<«  a  is  cqn  va^ent  to  at,  to-,  in,  on,  rtnd  is  not  to  be  regard- 
ed,  ji8  an  article,  but  as  a  pror.  ositlon  or  |relix. 


ETYMOLOGY — ARTICLES.  .  27 

108.  The  is  called  the  definite  article,  because  ii  tihows  that 
its  noun  is  used  definitely,  and  reCcrs  to  seme  particular  person 
or  tiling  ;  as,  the  man,  i.  e.,  some  particular  man  atfccrtaincd  or 
pointed  out. 

109  Parsing. — Thearlicie  isparsed  by  .staliiitj  wliolh- 
er  it  isdeJiJiilc  ov indeJinUe^  aud  to  what  noun  it  bclono-s  • 
ihu.'^,  ^'  A  book." — A  is  the  ijidcliiiilc  article,  and  bclonp-s 
to  book. 

EA'EUCISLIS. 

Is  it  proper  to  say — a  in  an,        oi-  an  man  ?  why  ? 

a  apidc,      or  an  apple  I-*  vrhv  >* 

a  liou^e,      oranlioii.se':'  Avhy'/ 

a  hour,        or  an  lioiirT  why  i* 

aiinicoin,   or  an  unicorn?  why  ;^ 

a  owe,         or  an  owe?  mIiv  ? 

1.  Trefix  the  indefinite  article  a  or  an  correctly  to  the  following 
words. 

2.  Tell  which  words  aro  noun5,  ami  why  -parse  them— decline 
them. 

Chair,  table,  horse,  cart,    book,  house,  garden,  bird 
owl,  Qgg,  car,  eye,  tree,  cow,  unit,  use,  old  man,  young- 
man,  word,  hook,  pot,  bench,  desk,  room,  oven,  oi  Ic 
eulogy,  ewe,  uncle,  aunt; — open  wagon,  useful  contriv- 
ance, round  stone,  old  hat,  new  coat,  iee-honse,  kc. 

3.  In  the  following,  correct  surh  »s  aro  -wrong-,  and  give  a  reason 
for  the  change;— parse  the  articles  and  nouts. 

An  cup,  a  door,  a  apple,  a  pear,  a  ounce,  a  pound,  an 
hat,  an  wig,  an  eulogy,  an  3'outh,  a  honor,  a  heir,  a 
crow,  a  ostrich,  a  pen --a  ugly  beast,  a  useful  tree,  an 
huBimino'-bird. 


•  QUESTIONS. 

What  isan  Article  ?  How  many  articles  ?  When  \9 a  used  ' 
When  18  an  used  '?  Fn  \^\\\\t  sense  are  a  and  an  sometimea 
used  ?    How  is  i^n  article  parsed  } 


28  ENGLl^U    CIRAMMAR. 

THE  ADJECTIVE.    • 

llO.  An  Adjective  is^a  word  used  to  qualify  a  sub. 
staiitivcf  as,  "A  good  boyj"  "a  .^nvarr  bo^J•"  '^-ten  dol- 
•lars;"  "wc  found  liirn  poor." 

111.  A  noua  U  «^"t/(/ic(Z  by  an  adjecii.c,  *.  t^wi.  wi^;  vij.  v.t  uaiued  is 
ihtviAiy  deHcribed,  limited,  or  di<,tingui»hed  from  Other  things  ol  the 
same  uame.     Tbib  is  doue  two   ways:  — 

J.  Certain  aJjactivos  connect  wi'h  ^heir  nouns  soma  qualili/ hy 
•which  the  oljec's  named  are  dotcribed  or  4ijtingiiishod  from  others 
(.f  the  same  kind;  a?,  "A  red  fing;"  "an  afhubiwj  BtOTj."  fc'uch  are 
i.ui)niion  and  participial  adjectives. 

ji.  Others  merely  limit,  without  expressing  any  quality  ;  as,  "An 
AhifricuH  book;"  ''(en  doUiirs;"  "luitl  week;"  "this  yearj"  ^'every 
day;"  Ac.     fciuch  are  circimibtantial,  m'nneral,  and  definitive  adjeotires 

JI2.  AJjectives,  ;is  pa-edicates,  may  qualify  aji  infinitive 
iiioud,  or  clause  of  a  seutcnco  used  as  a  bubstantiTe ;  as,  '"To 
play  13.  pleasant." — T/ial  the  rich  are  haypy  is  not  always  true." 

113.  tSevei-al  adjectives  sometimes  qualify  the  same  noun; 
iii,''X  smootJi   round  stone." 

114.  An  adjective  is  sumotiiiios  used  to  qualify  the  meaning 
«.l  another  adjective,  both  forming  a  sort  of  compound  adjec- 
tive; its,  "x\.  hri'jhi  red  color;"'  -a  dark  blue  coat;''  '-a  vast- 
iron  ball." 

115.  Nouns  become  adjectives  when  they  are  used  before 
other  nouns,  to  express  a  quality  or  property  bolon^^iug  to 
them  ;  as.  ''A  gold  ring  ;">  "a  iyilver  cup  ;"  '-sea  w^ter." 

116  On  the  contrary,  adjectives  witbout  a  substantive  are 
Eometimes'  used  aE<  nouns;  as,  '-God  rewards  the  good,  an^  pun- 
ishes the  had" — "The  virtuous  are  the  most  Jiappg."  Adjec- 
tives used  in  this  way  are  usually  preceded  by  the,  and,  whea 
applied  to  persons,  aio  for  the  most  part  considered  plural. 

NUMERAL    AD.JECTIVES. 

117.  Adjectives  expieseing  number  are  called  Nu^ 
meral  adjectives.  They  are  of  tvro  kinds^  Cardinal 
Tind  Ordinal. 


ETYMOLOGY— ADJECTIVE.^.  29 

118.  The  Cardial  numbers  indicate  Jioio  mamj  ;  llicy' 
are  owe,  two^  three^four^  &c. 

119.  ThaOrdinal  numbers  iHdicate  irh'ch  oneofanum' 
her;  they  are /r.s^,  {second,  tJii'rd,  &c.  In  compound  num- 
bers, the  last  only  has  the  ordinal  f.^rm  -,  as,  hrentij- 
FIRPT  ;  f wo  .hundred  and  fi/f^'-TlURD. 

120.  Numeral, adjective.^,  being  also  7iamc<;  of  r.nml  crs  nre  often 
used  as  nouns,  and  so  have  ibe  inflection  and  construction  of  ncuns  ; 
thus,  by  tu-os,  by  tens,  hy  fifties.  For  icn's  sake,  for  iiccnly'r,  sake. 
One  and  one  are  Hvo.     Tvco  is  an  even  number. 

Note — In  scmo  arithmetics  the  Janguape  cmj,lay?d  in  the  opera- 
tion of  lEuUiplyiDg  is  tuch  as,  "Twice  two  arc. Icur,  twice  three,  arc 
six" — is  incorrect.  It  shfubl  be,  ''Twice  two  I's  fcur,"  <fec. ;  fortbe 
word  two  is  used  as  a  singular  noun — the  name  of  a  Buajbir.  The 
adverb  "twice"  is  not  in  constrvction  with  it,  and  con?cqueDtly  does 
not  raaVe  it  plural.  The  meaning  i.-,  "The  nuniber  ti  ken  twice  is 
equal  to  four."  For  the  sime  reason  w  3  should  sny,  "Three  times  two 
is  six  "  because  the  meaning  i«»,  "7'fco  taken  three  ■^imes  is  six  "  If 
we  say,  "Ihrce  tinies  one  are  ihiee,"  we  ii.iiku'  f.'vies"  the  subject  of 
the  verb,  wherea"-  the  fubjfct  of  the  vcib  really  is  "onr,"  and  *  timc^" 
is  in  the  objective  cf  Eumber.  2:4::fi:l'*,  should  be  read, 
"As  2  is  f>  4,  so  is  a  to  12  ;  not  "As  two  are  to  Icur,  so  are,"  &c.— 
But  wbsn  numerals  denoting  more  than  one,  ars  used  as  adjectives, 
with  a  substantive  expressed  or.understood,  th'^j  n-n-:t  havo  a  plural 
construction. 

121.  Adjectives  in  English  are  indeclinp.blc.  • 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVKf^. 

ID.j.   Most,  common  nnd  participle  adjeclivcs  have  thice 
forma  cal!e*i  degrees  of  comparison  ;  namely.  Positive^  Com- 
parative, and  Superlative. 
■*     122.  The  Pos/frt'e  expresses  a  qua. ity  simply  ;  a<!,  "Gold 

is  heavy y  * 

"    128.  The  Comparative  expres^e^    a  quality  in  a  higher 
dogr^^e  in  one  oHjeot  th.n   in    f.r.otber,   or  in  sev 


;;U  .  KXGLISII     GRAMMAR. 

ei;il   taken  taken    togetlier ;  aa,  *'Ctukl  is  hciivler 

than  silver."     ''He  is  v:tscr  tlian  his  tenclicrs."     • 
]  2j.     The  Siipcflatioe  expresses  n  qualliy  in  one  olject  in 

iho  highest  degree  compared  with  several  others  ; 

as''(io!d  ia  the  most  ■precions  of  the  metal?." 
126.  Rkmahk. — The  superlativo  degree,  whan  made  hy  prefixing 
the  adverb  ///'>«t^  is  ofoen  used  to  express  a  very  big'i  degree  of  the 
quality  in  an  oVijdct,  without  directly  comparing  it  with  others  ;  as» 
*^  lid  is  a,  must  ilistunjulnhecf  man."  Thus  used,  it  is  called  the  super- 
lative of  (j/(n*f  »cr, -and  commonly  has  a  or  avi  before  it,  if  the  noun 
ia  singular;  or  it  is  without  an  article,  if  the  noun  is  plnral.  The 
saujp  thing  is  expressed  by  prefixing  the  adverb  very,  exctedinybj,  Slq.  ) 
a?,  "  A  Lcri/ distiiif/uishcd  m.a,n."  The  superlittive  of  comparison  com- 
monly has  (he  before  it. 

UULES  FOR  COMPARISON, 

127.  Rule  1.  Adjectives  of  one  syllable  form  the  com- 
]iiirative  by  adding  er  to  tiie  positive,  and  the  superla- 
tive by  adding  est]  hh, sweet,  sweeter,  sweetest. 

Words  ending  in  e  muto,  drop  e  before  er  and  e?/* ;  as,  tanie, 
hayer,  larrjcat. 

•  128.  IluLK  2.  Adjectives  of  more  than  one  syllable, 
are  conunordy  compared  by  prefixing  more  and  most  to 
tlie  postive  ;  as,  inunerouSy  'more  numerous,  most  numerous, 

129.  RKMARK'.--ri»ough  this  rule  indicates  the  prevailing 
usage,  yet' adjectives  of  two  syllablop  are  not  unfrequently  eom- 
parcJ  hy  er  and  r.<^/ ,•  as.,  "Our  ienderest  cares  :"  '•  The  co?«- 
ntnneal  materials."  "fH.s.syllables  in  le  and  ?/ are  generally  com- 
paredfcin  ihi.s  way;  as  uttk  abler,  ablest.  All  adjectives  in  y  af- 
ter a  consonant,  change  //  into  /  before  er  and  est;  as.  dr^,  drier^ 
ihie:!f ;  ?i((j)iii/,  happier,  hapj/iesi;  but//  after  a  vov?el  is  not 
Change(l ;  as.  (ja'j,  f/ai/er,  (jai/csi. 

130.  A  lower  degree  of  quality  in  one  object  compared  with 
another,  and  the  lowest  compared  with  several  odiers,  is  ex- 
pressed by  prefi.King/t'6'.9  and  least  to  the  postive  ;  as,  sweet,  less 
sweet,   least  siocct.    This,   by   way  of  distinction,  is  sometimes 


ETYMOLOGY — ADJECTIVES, 


81 


culled   the  comparison  of  diminution,  or  corr.parisoa  descend- 

131.  The  meaning  ofth-e  positive  is  sometimes  diminislied  without 
cmployiiig  comparison,  by  annexing  the  syllable  I'a/t ;  as,  n-hite,  whit-^ 
is-h;  hl<(cl-j  blackish.  These  may  ba  called  diminutive  adjectives.  So 
also  various  shades,  degrees,  or  modifications  of^uality  are  frequent- 
ly expressed  by  connecting  with  the  adjective  such  words  as  rather, 
domeivhat,  slujlitli/,  a  little,  too,  very,  greatly,  &Q.,  and  in  the  compara- 
tive and  superlative,  by  such  words  as  umch,  far,  altofjcthcr,  by  far, 
rfc. 

IRREGULAR  COMPARISON. 


\?il.  The  following- acljeclivcs  ai'O' oomp 
iai'ly,  viz. :  •  ' 


1    irreo'U- 


Fositivt'.  Comfaratire,  ■■,:■  .". 'uiv. 

Good  lietter  beat 

Bad,  evil,  or  ill  worse  *  worst 

I^'ittle  less,  sometmies  lesser  least 

Much  or  many  more  most 

I^ate  ^  later^  irregular,  latter  latest  or  last 

Ne«r    .  nearer  -.  nearest  or  next 

Far  farther  farthest 

Forth  (obsolete)  further  furthest 

Fore  tonuer  foremost  or  first 

Old  older  or  elder  oldest  or  eldest 

133.  Much  is  applied  to  things  wCTghed  or  mcatured  ,  many,  to 
things  that  are  numbered;  more  and  most,  to  iToth.  Farther  and 
farthest  generally  denote  place  or  distance;  as,  "The  farther  they 
went,  L!iO  //tore  interesling  was  the  scene ^ ',  further  and  furthest  re- 
fer to  quantity  or  addition;  as,  "I  have  nothing  further  lo  say." 
Oil!,',-  Mud  i'liicst  are  a])plied  to  peisous  or  things,  and  refer  to  age  er 
duration  :*  a;;,  '•  Homer  is  nu  older  poet  than  Virgil ;  "  *"  The  pyramids 
are  older  than  the  pantheon."  jt/cA/-  and  tldc^l  (from  the  obsolete 
eld)  are  applied  only  to  persons  ot  the  same  fuiuily,  and  denote  pri- 
ority of  birth  ;  as,  "  An  elder  brother."  Later  &ndlat€st  have  respect 
to  time;  latter  and  last,  to  position  or  order.  '      . 

134,  Souie  superlatives  are  formed  by  anneiing  inost,  sometimes 
to  the  comparative,  and  sometimes  to   tho  word  from  Tvhich  tUe 


comparfitlvfi  is  forniL'u  ;  :i, ,,;••.,., -w-,, ».->.,  or  vpmosi,  ?rom  vp; 
•nether^  ncthermont ;  innfr,  hmrrmosi,  or  wnwst,  from  in  ;.  hinder^  hindrr- 
inosty  or  hindmorf,  from  hhuJ':  outer,  oitlermokf,  6r  xitmont.Uom  out 

ATiJECTlVES  NOT  COV.PAr.Er*. 

135.  AcljGCtivcs  avIjosq  signification  C\oo<^  n^t  admit  c4 
increaesor  climifinlion,  cnn  n^f  ^.rdynM-iy  l>o  r'oni].ni\'il. 
These  are — 

1.  Numerals;  ns,  oiu-,  iiCS^;  nunl.f'.urlli,  Izc. 

2.  Fropcr  adjectives  ;  a?,  Ihigllsh.,  American,  romni:. 

3.  Adjectives  that  denote  ^^^J/r^*,  s/ifTi?^,    or  mater'ail ;  n^,rirni'ar, 

square,  toooden,C<.c. 

4.  Such  adjectives  as  denote  2^os!i.'rc  or  jiosUion  ;  f.?,  2'*frpc7Uhcii- 

l^r,  horl.tonlal. 

f).  Definitives ;  as,  wc-//,  prr?-.'/,  r^7^,  so^^,  i5;c. 

C.  Adjectives  of  an  r/i.<toZ?//(^  or  viperlativr  signification;  as,  .'.':/':  ■ 
2}crfeH,  ziniversai,  chirf,  cxlrcmc.  wjitrilc,  ccvipJcte. 

13G.  Remark. —  Of  these  last,  however,  corrparative  a^d  snocrli?- 
tive  forms  are  sometimes  used,  cither  to  give  greater  force  to  the  ex- 
pression, or  when  the  words  are  used  in  a. sense  not  stn'ctlj  nbsolule 
or  Euperlative.     The  following  are  examples  :— 

ExtremB, — ''The  extrenfest  of  evils." — 

Chief. ^"  Chief  est  of  the  herdsmen."-  Bihl" 

Perfect. — "Having  ?«orej^ie>/cc«  knowTcdi-e  of  that  wny,"  i.  e.  knowl- 
edge nearer  to  perfection. — Lille.     ''Lesn perfeft  imit  ition."— Moraif^ 

'■'■  '     « 

More  rnni2)lef*;  mont  cornplelejless  cornplefe,  arc  coiViiMon. 

Parsing. — h\  parsing  an  acljoc'tive  fully  :  1.  State  its 
class,  2.  Compare,  if  admittinii;  comp;ii'ison,  and  if  not 
compared,  so  state  it.  o.  Tell  Its  degree  of  comparison, 
jf  compared.  4.  The  noun  wiiielv  it  onalifies.  Do  tliir, 
nlways  m  the  "^■^ni"  ovr'-M*,  imd  in  tlio  fewe^-t  ".vords 
possible. 

EXAMPLE?. 
"  A  wise  son  rcrikeUi  a  (/lad  father. '■ — "  "WisJom   is  mere  prccicvs 


ETYMOtOSY — ADJECTIVES.  38 

tiieu  that  can  render  a  reason. — "  Ikying  lips  are  an  abomination 
to  the  Lord." — ^^  Blessed  are  the  ^mr^  in  heart." 

Wise  ia  a  common  adjective,  compared  by  er  and  eat,  positive,  and 
qualifies  ton. 

Qlad  is  a  common  adjective,  ccmpared  by  er  and  est,  positive,  and 
qualifies  father. 

More  precious  is  a  common  adjective,  compared  by  more  and  monl-. 
comparative,  and  qualfies  iciadom. 

Wiser  is  a  common  adjective,  compared  by  er  nnHest,  comparative, 
and  qualifies  aluggard. 

Seven  ia  A  numeral  adjective,  cardinal,  not  compared,  and  quali- 
fies men. 

Blessed  is  a  participal  adjective,  compared  by  more  and  must,  pos- 
itive, and  qualifies  /nen  understood. 

Pure  id  a  common  adjective,  compared  hy  er  and  ett,  positive,  and 
qualifies  ynen  understood. 

•    EXERCISES. 

1.  Compare — Biight,  diligent,  thin,  noble,  bad,  pretty, 
fearful,  brave,  warm,  active,  woithy,  cold,  large,  indus- 
trious, aflfable,  wise,  obedient,  gloomy,  able,  sad,  little, 
strong,  near,  dutiful,  serene,  big,  good,  careless,  hot, 
late,  fruitful. 

A.dd  to  each  of  these  adjectives  a  noun  which  it  can  properly  qual- 
ify, as,  *' A  hTighi  day,"  "a  diligent  student,,"  Ac. 

2.  In  what  form  arc  the  fvllowlng  adjectives  f — Mild, 
est,  better,  high,  more,  uttermost,  happiest,  worthless 
le^st,  whiter,  lowermost,  worse,  cruel,  eldest,  gentle, 
magnificent,  best,  many,  less,  gayest-,  peaceful,  vir- 
tuous, sweetest,  evil,  inmost,  happier,  miserable,  tem- 
perate, useful,  honorable. 

Compare  each  of  these  adjectives. 
Add  to  each,  a  noun  which  it  can  properly  qualify. 
3.  In  the  following  phrases,  tell  which  words  are  nouns,  and  which 
are  adjectives.     Parse  each  word  carefully. 

A  good  man  ;  a  kind  heart ;  a  clear  sliv  ;  the  benevo* 
lent  lady  ;  the  highest  hill  ;  a  skillful  artist ;    an  older 

2b 


14  EXGLLSn    ORAMMAB. 

companion-  man's  chief  concern  ;  a  lady's  lap  clog; 
most,  splendid  talents;  the  liveliest  disposition;  a 
p'easant  temper,  the  raging;  billows;  temples  magnlfi- 
eont;  silent  shades;  excellent  corn;  a  loftier  tower; 
n  happier  disposition  ;  the  third  day;  a  round  ball;  a 
square  table;  one  good  l)Ook  is  better  than  many  bad 
books. 


QUESTIONS. 

"What  is  an  aJjcctlvo?  When  is  a  noun  said  to  be  qualified  by 
an  adjective?  What  are  participal  adjectives?  Can  an  adjective 
qualify  anything  but  a  noun?  Can  more  than  one  adjective  qual- 
ifv  a  noun  at  the  same  time?  When  do  nouns  become  adjectives? 
When  do  adjectives  Jaecome  nouns?  Wliat  are  numeral  adjectives  ? 
]Io\v  many  kirds?  Are  adjectives  declinable?  How  many  de- 
grees of  comparison?  What?  What  do  they  denote?  flow  are 
the  degrees  formed?  How  is  the  positive  diminished?  In  what 
degree  are  superior^  inferior ^o,  ?  How  are  much  and  many  applied  ? 
HovV  are  /iir/Afr  and //////ifr  applied?  In  what  degree  are  upper - 
771031,- inmost,  kc.l  What  classes  of  adjectives  cannoJ  properly  be 
compjrod?     How  i?  an  adjective  parsed'' 


PRONOUxXS. 

137.  A  pRoxouN  is  a  word  used  instead  of  a  noun  ; 
as,  "John  is  a  good  boy;  Ac  is  diligent  in  his  studies.'* 

138.  The  noun  whicfi  the  pronoun  represents  or  designates,  is 
called  its  antecedent,  because,  in  the  third  person,  it  usually  stands 
Ififore  the  pronoun';  and,  in  tfie  first  and  second,  the  person  inten- 
ded is  indicated  by  the  pronoun  its(df. 

139.  Pronouns  of  the  third  person  are  used  in  writing  and  speak- 
ing, to  prevent  the  frequent  and  awkward  repetition  of  the  nouu. 
Thus,  without  the  pronoun,  the  above  example  -would  read,  ^^  John 
is'a  good  boy  ;  Joliji  is  diligent  in  Johns  studies." 

140.  A  pronoun  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  another  pronoun; 
fts,  "  Vou  and  /must  attend  to  ocii  duty." 

141.  Pr.onouns  may  bo  divided  into  Personal,  Rela- 
tive-j  I'yferroffmtive  and  Adjective. 


ETYMOLOaY — PP:ONOTJ.27j,'  ^5""*, 

i.     PERSOXAL  PEONOUN^S.    .       ,  .      . 

l-i2.   I\..=o)ial  Prnnomis  are  those   v,'hicli '(irsfinguish.  | 
the  pcnon  \^y  tln-ir  form.     They   arc    either   Smple  or 
Cnrvprnniil. 

l4  3.  Tlie  simple  personal  proiiorms  slyq  Ij  ruouj  ne, 
nhr-,  it ;  with  their  plurals,  ive^  you  theif,       _     ,•  • 

144.  Of  these, /is  of  the  first  perion,  and  denotes,  thc^^aeaArer; 
thou  is  of  the  Eccoijd,  and  denolec  the  person  addressed ;  he,  she^  tt, 
are  of  the  third,  and  denqie  the  person  or  thinj;  spoken  of. 

Ho.  The  pronouns /and  ^//CM  (icnote  the  s^^caker,  and  the  per- 
son addressed,  without  jrevioas  in?ntion,  or  even  knowledge  of 
their  nhme?,  tiie  persona  ir'.eiidod  je>ig  suniciently  indicated  by 
their  presence,  or  some  other  cirGuniPtance.  The  pronouns  of  the 
third  person  refer  to  name  person  or  thing  previon^lr  mentioned,  ■ 
or  easily  understood  Jroin  the  conicxt,  or  frc:n  the  nature  of  the 
sentence. 

146.  IFc,  cJtr^  and  f/inf,  are  frequoi>tiy  used   as' general   teTms  la 
the  beginning  of  a  .<;enteace,  equivalen*  to  -^the  person,"  &c.,  witb- 
oat  reforeiice  to  a  noun  going  before  ;  a?,  "  IIo,[Uio  person]    that    ' 
loveth  jdeasure  sh.ail  be  a  poor  man.'-  -   ..    ,  •  n  ■..         ^ :.  i.  ■ 

14T.  They  is  abo  yscd  in  a  vague  sen^e  for  ''.people,''  ia  sucU 
expressions  as,  "  They  say,"  like  the  French  o/i,  or  the  .Germ an  wau.  -^ 

148.  -10  persoiuil  pronouns,  liko^nouiis,  belong.Per^Q?^, 
(render]  Ninnber,  and  O/se.     The}'  are  thus  deolined: : — ' 


RIN'GULAR. 

PtURA-t. 

X:jm. 

/0.'5. 

OIiJ. 

.\' 

F0S3. 

Obj. 

.V.  or  F. 

1 

mine 

mo 

•  ^  (• 

ours 

us 

M.  or  F. 

Tliou 

thine 

thee 

You 

yours 

you 

(    Masc. 
'    Fern. 

He 

his 

liini 

Thc7 

\heirs 

them 

Siie 

hers 

her 

Th.y 

theirs 

thorn 

1    Ncut. 

It 

its 

it 

Th<-y 

theirs 

them 

OESF.RV.LTIOXS     OX    PERSONAL    PRONOUNS. 
140.  In  many  Grammar?;  the  po.?sessIve  of  all  the  pronouns,  ex- 
cept he  and  it,  has  t^vo  forms  as  follows  :  Mt/  or  mine;  thy  or  thine; 
her  or  hers;  our  or  ours  :  your  or  yours;  their  or  theirs.     Accordiag 


^  e:ta3lish  grammar. 

to  ihia  arrangement,  ihe  first  form,  »?y,  th>/,  .ic.,  is  always  lucd  be- 
fore a  noun  denoting  the  object  possessed;  the  second  form,  min.-, 
ihim,  AC,  never  before  that  noun,  but  only  ref<irrlng  to  it  as  previ- 
ously mentioned,  or  evident  from  the  connexion.  The  possessive 
case  of  nouns,  is  used  in  both  ways  To  this  classificnllon,  there  ii 
no  important  objection  ;  and  such  as  prefer  it  may  readily  adopt  if. 
though  for  reasons  assigned,  a  different  classification  is  here  pre- 
ferred. Mine  and  thin-^  arc  sometimes  u'od  ai  possessive!  for  m>i 
and  thy, 

160.  In  this  manner,  may  be  explained,  tao  u?e  of  llio  possessive 
after  transitive  verba  in  the  active  voice,  and  after  prepo  itions  ; 
thus,  "Jamas  lost  his  books,  and  I  garo  him  //h"/i^,"  meaning  my 
»ooi».— "A  pictura  of  the  king's,"  in  a  piolure  of  (i.  o  ,  from)  the 
king's  pictures.  So  "A  book  of  mino,"  is  a  book  of  (from)  my 
books.  "A  friend  of  yours,"  is  a  friend  of  (from)  your  friends.  It 
l9  worthy  of  notice,  that  though  this  uso  of  tho  possessive  after  of, 
«riginally  and  strictly  implies, selcpllcn,  or  a  i^art  only,  it  has  ioeen- 
si^ly  eome  to  ba  used  when  no  sueh  selection  is,  or  ever  can  b",  in- 
tanded.  Thus  we  may  any,  "  that  house  of  yours,"  '  that  farm  of 
yours,"  without  intending  to  imply  that  any  other  houses  or  farma 
belong  to  you  ;  and  when  wo  say,  ''That  head  of  yours,"  seleolion  is 
obviously  eseluded  by  the  sense. 

151.  In  proclamations,  charters,  editorial  nrlicles,  and  the  like, 
ii:e  is  frequently  applied  to  one  person. 

152.  Ihou  13  now  used  only  in  the  solcniu  stj'^c,  in  adjresses  to 
the  Deity,  or  to  some  important  object  iu  nature,  or  to  mark  spe- 
cial emphasis,  or  in  the  language  of  contempt.  Ff,  the  plural  of 
iJioUy  is  seldom  used  (except  as  the  subject  of  the  imperativfj,  and 
onlj  in  the  solemn  style. 

163.  You,  the  common  plural  of  thou,  in  now  us.;d  also  to  denote 
©na  person,  but,  even  when  it  does  so,  it  always  tnkej  a  iihiral  verb. 
This  usage  has  become  so  fixed  and  uniform,  that  some  eminent 
grammarians  contend  for  its  boin.^  regarded  as  singular.  No  a>lvan- 
tage,  however,  would  bo  gained  by  adopting  (his  proposal,  and  it 
aeems  to  accord  much  more  with  simplicity,  as  Ay«il  as  with  fact,  t  > 
regard  it  as  a  plural  which  has  coma  by  use  to  bo  app.'iod  in  this  man- 
ner. In  certain  kinds  of  writing,  we  is  us»id  in  the  same  way,  and 
«o  also  is  the  corresponding  primoun  in  French,  and  soma  other  mui- 
em  languages,  in  ^hicb,  however,  it  \z  aUvay  •  rp7ar..1,-d  ai  a  piural 
fona. 


ETY  MOLOQ  Y — rRo:f  oir.Ns .  37 

131.  The  prono'.ui  iL  is  used  in  a  variety  of  ways  :-- 
1  Properly  it  is  used  instead  of  a  neuter  noun,  word,  or  sub- 
stantive phra3e ;  aa,  "/yi/t;is  short;  «7  should  be  well  im- 
proved.'^ 7l/fl?2  is  a  noun  ;  j7  is  irregular  in  the  plural." — 
"  Jamer.  is  a  good  scholar,  and  he  knows  ity  viz.,  that  he 
is  a  good  scholar.  ''And  the  burden  that  was  upon  it 
shall  be  cut  off;  for  the  Lord  hath  spoken  ii" — U.  \%\\.  25. 

2.  ft  is  used  as   an  indefinite  subject  of  the   verb  ro ///?,    followed 

by  a  predicate   in  any   person   or    number;  a9>  "  Tl  is  I ; 
"  h   is  you  ,"  "  [(  is  they."  kc. 

3.  It  is  used  in  the  same  manner  after  the  veib  to  be,  in  interrog- 

ative sentences  ;  as,  "  Who  is  it  ?"  "  What  is  it?  &c. 

4.  It  is  prefixed  as  an  introductory  subject  to   such  words   as  to 

br,  to  happen,  to  become,  and  the  like,  referring  to  an  infini- 
tive mood,  or  substantive  phrase  which  follows  the  verb 
and  is  its  true  subject;  as,  "/Ms  an  honor  for  man  to 
cea'<e  from  strife:  i.  e.,  To  cnase  from  strife  is  an  hnuor  for 
man. 
C.  It  is  used  indefinitely  before  certain  verbs,  to  denote  some 
cause  unknown,  or  general,  or  well  known,  whose  action 
is  expressed  by  the  verb;  as,  "  If  rains  ;  "/?  snows;" — 
Verbs  before  which  it  is  thus  used,  are  said  to  be  imper- 
sonal. 
c.  It  is  sometimes  used  as  a  mere  expletive  ;  "Come  find  trip  it 

as  you  go.'' 
taf).  The  possessives,    hcxs,  it,  ours,  your.^,  theirs,  should  never  be 
written  hcr's,  it's,  our  a,  yours,  theirs. 

*1.tO.  ///.?  and  iV,"*  before  a  noun,  are  possessive  pronouns  ;  with- 
out a  noun  following,  they  are  the  possessive  case,  ffer,  before  a 
noun  is  the  possessive  pronoun:  without  a  noun,  it  is  the  objec- 
tive ca?r\ 


COALPOT^ND    PERSONAL     PRONOUNS. 

157.  }[y?.elf  (ourse/f),  thyself  (yourself),  himself,  herself,  itself, 
\y\\\\  iheh  phwiih,  ourselves, yourselves,  themselves,  are  called  Com- 
pound personal  2>ronoiins.  They  are  used  in  two  cases — the  nomi- 
native and  the  objective.  In  the  nominative  they  are  erapbatic, 
and  are  added  to  their  respective   personal  pronouns,  or  are  used 


38-  EXGLTSTT  oram:mar. 

in:tefiil  of  ihc-m  ;  as,  "  I  myfclf  did  it."  ^'  Uiin:se[f  sliull  como.' — 
J n  thf  objective  tlicv  nve  rc/Zfr/rr,  sliowinpr  that  the  nrrent  is  alst* 
The*  object  of  his  own  act;  ns,  "  Jnd.is    went  and   hanged  himsiif." 

I'lS.  The  simple- prononn<5,  also,  are  t»omettmes  used  in  a  reflex- 
ive «;ense  :  n?,  •'  Thou  h.^?t  hewed  ihff  out  ft  sepnlchre.  as  he  that 
hewe  h  him  out  a  sepulchre  on  hi((h."' — Bihh. 

"ISO,  OurscJ/  and  yovmelf.  are  used  as  compounds,  corrcspon- 
dinpf  to  wp  and  yov,  applied  to  an  individual ;  as,  "  We  oiirself  will 
loUow."    You  must  do  it  yonndf.''' 

160.'  The  possessive  cntphpiic  or  reflexive^  is  nmde  by  adling  the 
word  own  to  the  possesfjives  ;';.v.  thji.  Iris  her,  kf.  ;  a?,  •'  God  created 
ni:in  in  his  n>'7?  image." 

J'AdSixa. 

Kjl.  Por.^onMl  pronuims  ;)re  parsed  nearly  like  the 
substantives  for  wliicli  thcybtninl.  Th.is,  "  I  love"— 
/  i.s  :i  pronoun  of  the  lir.st  person,  masculine  or  femi- 
nine, in  the  nominative  sing'i.lar. 

162.  As  an  additional  exjrcise,  a  reason  may' be'' assigned  for  each 
statement,  thus :—  '        .  >. 

I  is  a  jyronoun,  b9f  ausc  it  stands  for  n  noun  or  name, 
2)rrsonal, — its  form  determines  its  person. 
iint  person, — it  represents  the  Spc;vker. 
MascuVcne  or  Feminmr, — it  denotes  male  or  female. 
Xornhnilioc, — subject  of  locf. 
Shfy7ihr.~\(  deuot  .s  but  one. 

iGo.  Parsr  (Jic  j'ofl'.iicing  lisf  as(Ii)r<ictl. — 1  th(;u,v\'e,mOj 
us,  thine,  lie,  liim,  s]»e,  hers,  they,  thco,  them,  its,  tlieir^, 
you,  her,  ours,  3'ours^  m'ne,  liis,  it; — myself,  ourselves, 
yourself,  liimself,  themselves. 

2.  Select  the  yjersonal  pronouns  in  tlte  following  sentences,  and 
pa'se  them  t  if  of  the  first  or  seoiond  p^rsm,  state  what  they  desig- 
nate :  if  of  the  third;  fctite   the  nouns  for  vrhiea  the}'  stand. 


ETYMDLO(>Y — PRONOUNS.  dixf 

James  says  he  is  older  than  I,  but  T  ain  taller  than 
he.  That  book  is  mine;  take  it  anr?  reixd  it.  Lot  tliein 
do  it  themselves.  When  you  learu  the.  lesson,  come 
to  rae,»and  I  will  hear  you  say  it.  They  will  go  when 
we  return.  Thou  art  the  man.  Your  knife  is  sharper 
than  mine;  lend  it  to  me,  if  you  please,  till  I  mend 
my  pen. 

2.  WTfte  Bontonces,  eaoh  of  wbi^^h  oball  contain  a  pronoun  ia  the 
nominative  case — In  the  objectiTe  case. 

.  S.  Ch9nge  the  following  sentences,  eo  that  tV  shall  bo  opiiUed,  and 
t\»6  subject  or  thing  spoken  of  shall  stand  first. 

It  is  pleasant  to  see  the  sun.  It  i§  criminal  to  de- 
ceive. It  is  manifest  that  you  have  been  deceived. — 
It  is  jsaid  the  cholera  has  ;«ppeared  in  England.  It  is 
easy  to  talk, 

4.  "Write  tenteooefl  of  thi?  iiind  both  wavs. 


QUESTIONS. 

What  is  a  pronouD?  What  is  tho  antecedent?  Why  are  pro- 
)  nouns  U3od?  Into  vrhat  olaasos  are  pronoun3  divided?  What 
are  Personal  Pronon^is?  IIow  many  simple  personal  pronouns? 
I  What  do  they  denote  ?  How  ore  //c,  -fAe  and  they  /rcquentl}'^  used? 
What  belong  to  personal  prononns  ?  Decline  each  of  tho  simple 
pmuouns  ?  How  many  toim^j  has  the  p/)S3e.«3ive  case  of  the  pro- 
uoms  ?  How  are  ihev  explained  ?  Wln-n  i.i  vf  aprdiod  to  ('ne 
person?  How  is  ?//o^/  used  ?  Of  what  numher  is  you?  In  what 
different  ways  is  it  used?  Waat  fs  the  caution  in  No.  156?  Ex^^ 
plain  the  variation  in  the'  use  of  his  and  its  ?  What  are  myself, 
himself,  &c.  How  are  they  used?  In  what  cases?  How  ia  the 
possessive  emphatic  formed  ? 


II.  RELATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

164.  A  Rehitivt  Pronoun  is  one  that  relates  to,  and 
connects  its  c'ause  with  a  noun  or  pronoun  before  it 
called  the  antecedent ;  ns,  '•  The  master  tt^Ao  taught  us/' 


40  i:?tQLia«i  oRAMiiiR. 

1G5.  The  autoceJeut  of  a  relative  maj  be  a  uouu,  a  prououu,  au 
iD6nitlve  mood,  a  clauac  of  a  sentence,  or  any  fact  or  thing  im-- 
plied  in  it  ;  aa,  "A  kinj  who  is  just,  makes  his  people  happy;'* 
'*  fTe  that  is  wise,  is  wise  for  himself;"  "  He  who  reads  all  will  not 
be  able  t»  think,  wllhoat  which  it  i.s  impertinent  to  read  ;  nor.to  «ci, 
witheut  tvAkh  it  Is  impertinent  to  think  ;'  "  We  are  bound  to  obey, 
the  Dicint  laio,  which  we  can  not  do  without  Divine  aid  ;"  "  The 
maa  was  said  to  be  i/t/iocent^  which  he  was  not." 

160.  Relative  pronouns  are  of  two  kinds,  Sim}^e  and 
Compound. 

107.  Thp  simple  relative  pronouns  are  t^jAo,  ivhtch, 
ifiaf  and  what.  That  and  ivhat  are  indeclinable,  and 
used  only  in  the  nominative  and  objective.  Who  is 
masculine,  or  feminine,  "and  which  is  masculine,  femi- 
nine, or  neuter.     They  are  declined  thus  : — 

Singular  and  Plural.  Singular  p7id  Plural. 
Norn.                Who  Which 

Fobs.  Whose  Whose 

OhJ.  Whom  Which 

1G8.  Who  is  applied  to  persons  only;  as,  ^'  The  boy 
'icho  reads." 

1G9.  Whieh  is  applied  to  inferior  animals,  and  things 
without  lifo;  as,  *' The-dog  ?(?AicA  barks"—*"  The  book 
which  was  lost." 

170  The  relative,  as  in  Latin,  sometimes,  for  the  Rake  of  greater 
p«r«plcui*y,  has  its  antecedent  repeated  after  it;  ai,  "  I  gave  him 
an  ivcry  handle,  icAioA  A/(j/e  he  fltili  has."  this  construction,  hew- 
iver,  is  inelegant,  and  should  he  avjoided. 

171.  Which  is  applied  also  to  collective  nouns,  expressing  collec- 
tions of  persons,  when  the  reference  is  to  the  collection,  and  not 
to  the  persons  composing  it ;  as,  "  The  committee  which  was  ap- 
pointed." Also  to  names  of  persons  considered  only  as  a  word  ;  as, 
''^  Nero  ivhich  is  only  another  name  for  cruelty," 

172.  IFAwA  has  for  its  possessive,  wAos^;  as  A  religion  icho$e 
origin  is  Divine."     Instead  of  "  whose,"  however,  the  objective  with 


ETYMOLOGY — rKOXOUXS.  41 

of  before  it  is  more  common  ;  a?,  "  A  religion  the  origin    of  which 
is  Divine."' 

iT^'i.  Tiifd  is  npi  lied  to  botli  ]^ol^sol1^^  an»J  tliinrr'^;  us, 
'Mhc./>07/  that  reads;  <'•  tlic  aog  ih-if  larks;"  "the 
look  Ihaf  was  ]orI'.''^ 

'74  What  is  ap-died  lO  Z,^////;;-:  on]}-,  and  is  rover 
nr-cd  but.  when  fhe  antere(]e;!t  is  ornitlc.J  ;  as.  *' This  is 
irliat  I  wanted-'' 

im}'^^-  ^°  the  aI)Ovo  e:?amplp,  pr  perly  ?p?aklng,  7r/m/  neither  t^ic^ff^f"? 
♦he  antecetlent,  norbns  it  ucflers  l.io(l,  in  the  oniinary  oense  of  that 
.expression.  If  it  includrd  (be  anteoeJeut,  then  nlmt  woiilil  be  of 
two  ca^es  at  the  same  time^  wbirh,  if  not  absurd,  is  an  anoma'y 
not  to  be  read .ly  admitted.  If  the  anttce-eDt  were  .unilerstood,  it 
pfuld  J)e  Fiipplied,  ajid  th<n  thp  sentence  wtuld  siand,  "Ihia  is  the 
/7/?"7»«7  jf/m/ I  wanted."  J\x\i  this  is  notlngU-h.  The  truth  is,  ic/ur/ 
is  a  fiajple  rehiti^e,  havijic:,  wht never  npeil,  like^  nil  other  relative?, 
but  one  rase;  Int  yet  il  has  this  i)rculisTiiy  of  usage,  that  it  always 
refers  to  a  gpneral  antecedent,*  oniittn),  JMjt  ear.ily  £\;p|.li*d  by  the 
naicd,  and  to  which  belongs  the  other  r.-i.^e  in  the  eorstiuction.  _  The 
nnteredcnt  leferrod  to  is  aiw^ys  the  word  "  thine f  ox  "  ihinfjf),"  or 
some  gentval  or  indefinite  term,  obvious  from  the  sense.  M'hen  thii' 
anteeedent  is  exptcssed,  the  relatiA'e  folloTning  nan?t  be  vJiieJi  or  that 
but  never  7cJint.  Thus,  "'Th's  is  what  I  wanted,"  is  equivalent  to 
•'  This  is  fhiit  wliuh,  or  the  ihhui  whi<h,  I  wanted."  Henee,  though  it 
is  trno  that  vhnt  is  equivalent  in.rceaning  to  thni  uhivlt  or  ///«  thrit<t 
■irliich,  yet  the  error  to  which  11  ishfjs  imprreeptibly  led,  \'.7..,\\\fiiv:hnt 
is  a  omnound  relskivr,  ai  d  inclu-^"--  the  a!\teepdent,  should  be  eare- 
fully  avnid-d. 

17*».  Tlie  onieo  of  the  reiriiive  i.s  twofold  :  — 

V  ' 

.1.  It,  is  somelimos  moroly  <';(/</,7,'/v,.r.n(]  conr.eels  itf  ('laur:.e  ^it.h 
the  nntercdent,  for  the  purpose  of  lurtiier  describing,  without  mod- 
ifving  it  ;  thiif?  used,  it  ia  a  more  ronnectivp.  nearly  equivalent  to 
and  with  a  pfr^.onal  pronoun  he,  .v//^  ;7,  kc  :  "  Light  is  a  l)ody  n-hivli 
•moves  with  great  releiitv"r='-'Li/7lit  ir  a  body,  and  it  moves  with 
great  celerity." 

2.  It  is  more  commonly  resiridivc.  and  connects  its  clause,  a?  an 
a<ljunct.  with  the  antecedent,  in  order  to  modify  or  restrict  its  mean- 
ing.    Thus  used,  the  relative  with  its  Cinuso  is  equivalent  to  an  nd<- 


A 

^2  EN*GLTSII  GRAilMAK. 

jfctive  ;  as,  "  Kvery  thing  ichich  has  life  is  nn  auimar'=' Even- 
livhif/  thing  fs^n  nnimal.'"  .  Whea  used  Iq  this  way,  the  relative 
can  not  be  resolvej  into  and  with  a  personal  pronoun,  lor  we  can  not 
say,  "Every  thing  is  an  animal,  and  il  ha^life." 

177.  The  relative  w/io  and  2t7i?c7t  are  used  in  both  senses.  That 
13  used  in  restrictive,  more  commonly   than  in   descriptive  clauses. 

178.  Which  is  sometimes  used  as  a  demonstrative  adjective  pro*- 
noun,  equivalent  to  this  or  these,  and  agrees  with  a  substantive  fol- 
lowing it ;  as;  "  Which  things  are  an  allegory"="  These  fhings  are 
an  allegory." 

179.  la  English,  a  relative  must  always  be  in  the  same  ssntence 
with  its  antecedent,  and,  if  restrictive,   in  cloSe  connexion  with  it. 

ISO.  In  8uch  sentences  as  the  following:  "Shun  such  ua  are  vi- 
eiouB" — "Send  such  an  you  have"— some  grammarians  consiTler  the 
word  n*  a  relative  :  in  the  first  example,  as  tho  nominative  to  ore  ; 
and  in  the  second,  .as  the  objective,  governed  by  hace.  Others,  more 
properly,  regard  it,  in  all  such  sentSncea,  as  a  conjunction,  and  tho  i 
expressions  as  elliptical— to  be  supplied  thus  :  '•  Shun  such  as  [those  ] 
who.]  are  vicious"--"  Send  such  as  [those  which]  you  have."  1 


COMPOUND   PERSONAL   PRONOUNS. 

181.  The  relatives  who,  which,  and  what,  with  cva-  or  son-cr  annex- 
ed, are  called  comjmund  relatictn.  They  are  used  instead  of  tho  sim- 
ple relative  and  a^general  or  indetiQita  antecedent;  as,**  Whoaocvtr 
commit'eth  sin  is  the  servant  of  sin  j"  that  is,  "  A))>/  one  or  ev%ry  oiu-  • 
n/tn  committeth  sin,"  Ac.  *  Whatever  is  evil  should  be  avoide  i ;  ' 
that  is.  "  Ecery  thing  which  is  evil,"  &,c. 

1S2.  Like  the  relative  vhnt,  the  compound  relatives   are  used  only    i 
when  the   inaefioite  antecedent  is   om'tted.    Whenever   that   is   ex-- 
pressed,  tho  simple  lelative  *t//o,  ?(7n>/(,  or  ^//a^,  should  be  used   as  in   ) 
the  preceding  examples. 

18'}.  It  is  therefore  not  correct  to  tay,  either  that   these   relatives 

include  the  antecedents,  and  so  have  two  cases,  or  that  the  antecedent 

is  understood.     The  same  rea3-»ning   triat  is   applied  to   theirelativo 

iti^a^,  is  equally  applicable   to   the  compound  relatives,  only  it  must 

be   remembered   that  the  aniecedent   referred    t-j   in    these,  and  to 

which  one  of  the  cases  properly  belongs,  is  always  a  general   or  in- 

defioite  term. 

184,  In  old  writings  the  antecedent  word   is  sometiaaes   expressed, 


ETYMOLOGY — PRONOUNS.  43 

cither  before  or  after  the  compound  relative,  fur  the  sake  of  greater 
eraphasia  or  precision;  as,  •*  Blessed  is  he,  ichosorver  shall  not  be  of- , 
fended  in  ni.e." — Eng.  Bible.     **"  Whoiioevcr,  will,  let  him  take   the  wi- 
ter  of  life."     This  usage,    however,  is  now  nearly   obsolete,   except 
with  (he  word  whateoer  ;  as,   *•*'  Whatever -yoxx  do,  let  it  be  done  well."' 

185.  Whoso,  formerly  used  in  the  sense  of  whoever  or  v:hosoever,  is 
now  obsolete. 

186.  Whatever,  whatsoever,  whichever,  and  mhichsoe.^er,  sve  often 
used'  before  substantives,  as  a  Fort  of  indefiaica  adjective  j  as, 
"  Whatever  course  you  take,  not  uprightly."  Whea  thug  used,  the 
noun  is  sometimes  placed  between  ichat,  which,  or  u-hose,  and  soever  ; 
as-  "  What  course  soever"--  ''  Into  whose  house  soever  ye  enter." 

PARSTNCI. 

187.  The  relativo  is  parsed  by  slating  itB  gender, 
number.  case,anj  antecedent  (Ihe  gender  and  number) 
being  always  the  same  as  those  of  the  antecedent  ; 
thus  : 

*'  The  boy  loko  studies  tchat  is  useful,  will  improve." 

Who  iis  9.  relative  pronoun,  masculine  in  the  nominative   singular, 

and  refers  to  "boy,"  as  its  antecedent. 
What  is  a  relative  pronoun,  neuter  in  the  nominative  singu'ar,  and 

refers  to   '''thing,"   or  ''that,"    as  its  antecedent,  omitted  :    if 

supplied,  ii/m/;  must  be   changed  itiio  which  ;  thus,    the    thing 

uhich,  or  that  which. 
The  pupil  may  assign  reasons  for  the  atateraenl?  maie  in  parsing. 

EXERCISES    ON    THE    RELATIVE. 

1.  Write  on  the  blackboard  a  list  of  nouns,  arr.inged  in  a  column 
on  the  left  side,  and  write  after  each  its  ]  roper  lelative  j  thus,  "The 
man— who ;"  "  The  bird — which." 

2.  In  the  following  eentencos,  point  out  the  relative,  and  the  ante- 
cedent, or  word  to  which  it  relates.  Alao  state  whether  it  is  addi- 
tive or  restrictive  (175  ) 

A  man  who  is  generous  will  be  lionored.  Got!,  by 
wjiose  klnduess  we  live,  whom  we  worship,  wlio  created  all 
thing?,  is  eternal.     That  is  the  book  which  I  lost.   He  who 


44  KN-GTJr.TI  GRAMMAR. 

steals  my  purse,  steals  trasli.  Thia  is  the  boy  whom  we 
met.  Tlii-<isiiie  man  who  did  it.  The>ft  aro  the  books 
ihat  3'oii  bonpljt.  The  person  \\ho  dcQ^  no  ^^ood,  do03 
harm.  The  woman  who  was  Innf,  is  wol!.  Tlii/5  is  the  cat 
thjt  Iviiled  the  rat,  tlint  nte  t!io  mab,  that  \f\y  in  the  house, 
that  Jack  built. 

y>.  In  earii  of  the  following  Fentenoe?,  print  out  the  compouDd  rel- 
ative—  mention  the  auti-cedent  omitted.to  which  it  refer.s.  Icsertihe 
iinteceilenf  in  each  soutence,  and  make  the  necessary  change  iu  the 
reUtive  (St  ) 

AYho-oev(  r  stcal.s  my  piirae,  steals  trash.  Whoever  does 
no  ,£;ood,  does  bivm.  Whatever  piiiilles  the  heart.  fortifio'B 
ir.  \Vliat>oever  ye  would  th.-^it  men  should  do  to  you,  do 
ye  to  them  also.  VVli never  sins,  will  suffer.  I  love  who- 
c\^r  loves  me  Now  wbatsoever  God  hath  raid  to  thee, 
ch>.     Whatsoever  I  command  yon,   do  it. 

4,  In  the  follovfing  sentences,  wherever  it  can  be  doud,  change  the 
relative  aud  anfc^csuent  for  the  compound  rel.ilive:   - 

Bvinir  with  3^011  everj'thing  which  yoii  see.  Any  one 
who  told  Rucb  a,  story,  has  been  misinTormed.  Any- 
thing that  is  wortb  doing  at  a'l,  is  worth  doing  well. 
Anything  tliat  gives  pain  to  others,  deserves  not  the 
name  of  pleasure,  li^very  one  who  lovt.s  pleasure,  will 
be  a  poor  man.  From  eveiy  one,  to  whom  nmcii  is 
•riven,  shall  much  be  reqniied. 


Til    INTEKHOOATIVE   PROXOT'NQ. 

188.  WhOy  loliifh,  and  what  when  nsed  in  asking  ques- 
tions, are  railed  Interrogative,  Pronouns;  aa,  '*  Who  is 
there  ?" — "  Tl'A/cA  will  you  take  ?''— "  ^Vhat  did  he  say  :" 

189.  Who  and  xchich  are  declined  like  the  relatives. 

190.  In  questiong,  wAo  is'equivalent  to  u-hai  perscn  ;  uhich  and 
u-hat  have  a  noun  following,  to  which,  like  an  adjective,  tl.ey  belong. 


^  ETYMOLOGY — PliOXOUXS.  45 

•V: 

or  refer  to  one  understood,  but  easily  supplied  ;  thus,  '•  Who  [what 
person]  is  there?'" — '-Which  [book]  will  you  take?" — 'What 
[thing]  did  he  say  V 

191.  Who  applies  to  perconG  only  ;  ivhich  and  what  to  per^^ons  cr 
things. 

192.  As  applied  to  p«3rsous  ;  u-fio  ioquires  for  the  name;  wJiich  for 
the  individual;  »'7io<  for  the  character  ^r  ocoupatijn;  as,  ''Who 
wrote  that  book  ?"—"  Mr.  Webster,"—'*  W/tic/i  of  of  theui  ?"— "  Xoah. 
Webster" — "  What  io  he?--"  A  Ivxicographer." 

VJ'.i.  The  Kame  pronouns  used  responaively,  in  the  beginning  of  a 
dependent  daut'C,  or  in  what  is  cal'ed  the  indirect  question  ( i.  e.,  in 
a  way  which,  in  an  ir.dcpcndeut  cliuso,  would  be  a  direct  question), 
are  properly  neither  intcrrof/niicca  nor  rcltitiveti,  but  a  sort  of  iudejl- 
iiite pronoaus.     This  will  b»  best  illustrated  by  an  example:  — 

Jnlen-ogative  — '*  ITAu  tcrotc  that  letter?" 

Eelative.—'[l'kQO-y  the  person  who  wrote  that  lotterT'that  is,  I 
ata  acquainted  with  him. 

Indefinite' — "Iknowu7ij  wrote  that  letter;*'  that  i?,  I  know  by 
whom  the  letter  was  written. 

194.  It  id  necessary  to  these  words  bein^  regardt^d  as  indeliniti.'S — 

,  That  they  beg'u  a  deptudeut  clause  ;  2.  That  fi^^y  do  not  ask  a 
question  ;  3.  That  an  anteooiicut  can  not  be  supplied  without  changing 
the  sense  ;  and  4.  Ihat  the  whole  clause  be  cit>»er  the  subject  of  a 
verb  or  the  object  of  a  verb  or  preposition.  These  remarks  will  ap- 
ply to  all  the  folloTWDg  examples  ;  '•  I  know  who    wrote  that  letter." 

Tell  vxQ  viho  wrote  that  letter."  "D)  you  know  v:ho  wrote  that 
letter?"  "Nobody  knows  who  he  is."  "  U7io  he  is,  can  not  be 
known."  "Did  he  tell  you  a-uy  he  io?"  *•  We  cannot  tell  whkh  is 
he."  "I  know  not  wliat  I  shall  do."  It  is  uncertain  to  whom  that 
book  belongs.     "  Teach  me  what  is  tru'.h,  aud  vshat  is  error." 


PARSIXG.  , 

195.  Interrogative  pionouDS,  in  both  the  «JirccL  aud 
the  indirect  questions,  arc  parsed  by  stating  thtir  gen- 
der,  numhflBt/'and  cas3  ;  thus  :-- - 

"  Who  comes  ?     I  kno'wnot  I'ho  comes." 

Who  is  an  interrogative  pronoun,  masculine  or  feyji.,in8  in  the 
nominative  singular. 


46  ENGLISH   GRAMMAR. 

Who  itf  an  indefinite  pronoun  (or  an  interrogative  pronoun  ufed  re. 
epoutj'.vfly),  maeculine  or  feminine,  iu  the  nominative  singu- 
lar. 

Reasons  may  be  assigned  for  each  statement,  as  exemplified  (162). 


EXERCISES. 

1.  Point  out  in  which  of  the  following  eenttnces,  u^Jio^  which,  and 
trhot,  are  i-ekitivcn  ;  and  in  ■which,  iiirfr/inlteft. 

AVho  steals  my  purse,  steals  trash.  To  Avhom  did  you 
give  that  book  ?  What  I  do,  thou  kiiowest  not  now. 
Who  you  arc,  Avhat  you  are,  or  to  whom  you  belong,  no 
one  knows.  What  shall  Ido  ?  Who  built  that  house? 
J)o  3-ou  know  by  whom  that  house  was  built !  Is  that 
the  man  who  built  that  house '/  Which  book  is  yours  ? 
Do  you  know  Avhich  book  is  yours?  I  saw  a  book 
which  was  said  to  be  yours.  I  know  which  book  is 
yours-  What  in  me  is  dark,  illumine.  What  is  crook- 
ed, can  not  bo  made  straight.  Wha^t  is  wanting,  can 
not  be  numbered.  AVhat  is  wanted?  I  know  what  is 
wanted. 

2.  Write  sentence?,  ench  of  which  shall  contain  one  of  the  pronouns 
in  one  or  the  other  of  these  diflferent  senres. 


QUESTIONS. 

What  is  n.  relative  pronoun?  What  niaj  the  antecedent  be? 
TIow  many  kinds  ?  Name  the  simple  relatives.  Decline  them. 
How  arc  they  ppplied?  When  is  w/'Wi  applied  to  collective  nouns? 
Is  7'-'/?f//'.  a  simple,  or  a  cornpo^ind  relative?  (1V4).  What  are  the 
oRice5  of  the  relative  ?  Stato  the  difference  between  the  additive  and 
the  restrictive  relative?  When  is  i&hich  a  demonstrative  adjective  pro- 
noun? Is  rt5  a  relative?  What  are  compound  relatives?  What 
kind  of  an  antecedent  have  they?  When  are  whatever,  vt'hichever, 
*c.,  indefinite  adjectives?  How  is  ft  relative  parsed?  What  are 
interrogative  pronouns?  How  are  they  applied,  \ybftt  do  they 
enquire  for  when  applied  to  persons  ?•  How  may  the  indefinite  pro- 
noun be  known  ?    (193),    How  are  interrogative  pronouns  parsed  ? 


ETYMOLOGY— PRONOUNS.  47 

IV.     ADJECTIVE  PrvOxXOUNS. 

196.  Adjective  Pronouns  are  words  used,  sometimes 
like  adjectives,  to  qualify  a  noun,  and  sQmctimes  Ike 
pronouns,  to  stand  intead  of  nouns. 

191.  Adjectives  used  as  notins,  or  willi  a  noun  understood,  com- 
monly take  the  article  (he  before  tiioni ;  as,  f/ie  young ;  (he  old  ;  ifie 
good,  &c.     Adjcc'ivc  pronouns  do  not. 

193.  Of  the  adjective  pronouns,  the  Possc^sivcs  clearly  hare  a 
double  character.  As  an  adjective,  they  qualify  a  noun,  and  as  a  pro- 
noun, stand  inftead  of  anoun.  The  DisfyibutU-ee,  Dcmonstmiircs,  and 
IiidejhiHes,  a*adjcctivcs,  qualify  a  noun  expressed  or  u.nderstood.  or 
they  Etand  instead  of  a  noun,  and  thus  may  be  regarded  eouietimei? 
as  adjcctiTcs.  and  sometimes  as  pronouns.  Hence  they  are  classed 
by  pome  grauitnaTians  as  adjectives,  and  called  y>ro»o/;<(»<7/' orZ/cc^iVrs  ,• 
and  by  others  as  pronouns,  and  oslled  ctdjertive  jjrovouus.  The  latler 
classification  and  name  are  here  preferred,  because  they  have  been 
admitted  into  the  grammars  of  almost  all  languageg  ;  and'  because  a 
change  o'  established  nomenclature  is  an  evil  of  so  serious  a  kind 
that  it  shouM  not  be  incurred  unless  for  the  mo;t  urgent  reasons. 

190-  Adjective  Pronouns  are  divided  into  lour  class- 
es :  rosscssivr,  Distril)utit*e,  Veuionstratlvc  and  Jndefiyiite^ 

POSSESSIVE    PRONOUNS. 

200.  The  Possessive  Pronouns  -arc  such  as  denote 
possession.  They  arc  mij,  thij,  hi^,  her,  ifs, — our,  your 
their, — own.  ^  ' 

201.  The  possessive  pronouns  are  derived  from  the  personal,  anl 
ccmbinothe  office  of  the  adjective  and  pronoun,  for  they  a'ways  lim't 
one  noun  denoting  the  object  posfefsei-t,  and  stand  instead  cf  another 
denoting  the  possessor.  They  agree  viVh  the  pos-e68;ve  cape  of  the 
personal  pronoun  in  mea-ning,  but  diff.r  frcm  it  in  construct'on.  The  ^ 
possessive  pronoun,  like  the  adjective,  is  always  followed  by  its  n'un  • 
as.  "This  is  >H//book;"  tho  possessive  case  of  the  personal  is  never 
follow'ed  by  anonn.bH  refers  to  one  known  or  previoue'y  expresred; 
a.",  "This book  is  mine."  The  possessive  ease  of  nouns  is  used  botlx 
ways;  as,  "  This  is  Jolm's  book  ,;  "  or,  "  This  book  is  John'e." 


48  EXGLISII    GllAMMAIl. 

202  Former'^  ;.i.';;c  and  f/i!';ie  were  u-cd  before  a  vowel,  or  the  let- 
tor /<,,  iostBad  of  my  aiid- thi/ ;  as,  ''B'.ot  out  all  mine  iniquities  j '* 
'•  Commune  wih- i/ific  heart."     TLio  fo'm  is  still  in  use. 

20,j.  Hie,  Ii"'-,  and  itn,  when  fuUowod  by  a  subotautive,  are  posses- 
eive  pronouns,  not  f  I'lowed  by  a  substative,  his  is  thu  possessive 
case  ot  he  ;  hir.  tHeobjecti\e  case  of  o/ie  y  a::d  it«,  the  posteij.sire  case 
of  it.  Iq  theE  jg'ith  liiblo,  h'a  is  neuter^aa  well  as  masculinp,  and  is 
used  wliere  iis  now  would  bj  u>eJ-  Sjc   Fruv.  xxiii.  ;U  ,  /«.  Is.  22. 

204.  Orn  is  not  used  "a^  a  possessive  pronouu  by  itaelf,  but  is  ad- 
ded to  the  other  posec-ssive  pronoijnb,  or  to  the  possessive  case  of 
Doun.->,  to  render  the  poso'ea^ion^eipresscd  by  tbtm  emphatic ;  as, 
<' My  oif;)  book  ;"  *' The  possessive  proQuuu,  with  uuii,  following  it, 
may  have  it3  eubitantivo  uadcrctood;  m,  *'  This  boyU  iis  utij  own." . 

JJlBTRlBUTIVE    rilONOUI.'G. 


205.  Tliie  Distr[buriue''Y>vouonnH  ropresont  objects  us 
taken  soparatoiy.     They  arc  each^   everj/,  either,  neither. 

206.  F'lch  deuoles  two  or  more  objects  taken  separately. 

207.  Eccry  denotes  each  of  more  ih  in  tvyo  objects  taken  individ- 
ually, and  coiuprebeuds  thfem  .Ml. 

208.  £Uher  means    one  ol  two,   but    not  both.     It  is  sometimes 

used  lor  each  ;  a;,  '-On  eUhcr   side  of  the  river." 

209.  Tbe  distrihutivco  are  always  o!  the  lliird  person  singular, 
even  when  Ihcy  relate  lo  the  persons  s[i«rtkia;;,  Or  to  tlt^se  spoken 
to  ;  as,  "Each  of  </6— eacll  ot  _//o«— each  ul'  /A';.!};i— has    his  faults,' 

DEMUNSTUATIVE    I'UONUU^Isfi. 

'JlU.  The  D^moii6trattoe  proiiouia.a    point   out    objects 
defiiii  cly.     They  ;irc  f/?/'5  ami    ///t,/,^^  with    thoi**  plurals, 
'  %lie&e  and,//io5c'. 

2 J. I.  Yon  and  whi<  h,  before  a  nuiir  ^  bceui  more  properly  to  beloug  to 
this  class  of  wnrda  than  to  any  o' j^gr-  as,"  Yon  trembling  coward  ;" 
••  }'e»  tall  cliff;"  "  Whivh  things^  „,ye  an'al  egory  :".--.*' These  lUiogs,' 
Ac. 

2:2.  Fanner  and  latter,  Ji ^^^f  ^ud  lant,  with  ihv  prefixed,  though  of- 
ten used  like  that  and  th]^^  rcferiing  to  wndt  ^OLtiafctcd^  arc  prop 
ejly  adjectives.  -  .   • 


KTYMOLOGY—PRONOUNS.  49 

INDEFINITE   PRONOUNS. 

213.  Tlie  liidejiiiite  pronouns  designate  objects  indef- 
initely. The}'  arc,  noney  any,  all,  such,  whole,  some,  both, 
one  (used  indefinitely),  other,  another.  The  three  last 
are  deciined  like  nouns. 

214.  To  these  maj'  be  added,  vo,  much^  viany,  few^  several,  BXi^WiQ 
like;  also,  who^  whic/i,  and  whaf,  used  responsively  (102.) 

215.  One,  denoting  a  definite  number  is  a  numeral  adjective  ;  as« 
"  One  man  is  sufficient ''  Bui  one,  referring  indefinitely  to  an  indi-« 
viJual,  is  an  indefinite  pronoun.  Thus  used,  with  its  noun  following, 
it  is  indeclinable  like  the  adjective ;  as  "One  man's  interest  ia  not 
to  be  preferred  to  another's,"  Without  its  noun  following,  it  is  botht 
singular  and  plural,  and  is  decliiiable,  like  the  substantive  ;  as,  "  Ona 
is  as  good  as  another  ;"  "One's  interest  is  as  good  as  another's ;"  "  Ho 
took  the  old  bird  and  left  the  young  ones."     "  One  might  say." 

The  same  remark  is  applical)le  to  the«indefinites,  other  and  another.. 

216.  None  [no  one)  is  used  in  both  numbers,  and  is  never  fol*. 
lowed  by  a  substantive  ;  as,  "  None  is  so  rude;"  'Among  noM 
is  there  more  sobriety. 

217.  (So we  is  used  with  numerals,  to  signify  ahoiit ;  as,  ^*  Som^ 
fifty  years  ago.''     This  should  not  be  imitated. 

218.  The  expressions,  each  other  and  one  another,  form  what  may 
be  called  reciprocal  pronouns,  and  express  a  mutual  relation  betweea 
different  persons.  They  have  this  peculiarity  of  construction,  that 
the  first  word  of  eaeh  pair  is  in  the  nominative,  in  apposition  witk 
the  pluiral  subject,  which  it  distributes,  and  the    second   in   the  ob** 

iective,  governed  by  the  transitive  verb  or  preposition  j  as,  "  They 
loved  each  other,"  i.  e.,  They'loved,  each  the  other ;  "They  wrote  to 
one  another,"  i.  e.,  one  to  another.  Each  other  applies  tO  two;  one  an- 
other, to  more  than  two. 

219.  Some  of  these  indefinites,  and  words  of  similar  signification, 
are  sometimes  used  adverbially  with  the  comparative  degree ;  ag, 
**  Are  you  ttfiy  better?"  '*  I  am  some  better  ;"  *'  He  is  none  the  bet- 
ter ;  -all   the   better,"  i.  e.  ;  •'  Are  you  better  in  any  degree  V[  Ac. 

PARSING. 

Aijjective  Pronouns  are  parsed  by  stating  the 
class  to  which  they  belong^  and  the  word  whiQh  they 
qualify,  thus  :  — 


6(J  KTTGLTSH  GRAl^mAK. 

irsrr.f~rr 

L 

I    f^  Evfry  day  brings  77'  nun  duties." 

JCiery  \&  a  distributive  adjective  pronoun.  i|ualif)ijif^  "  i/oi/." 

//*  is  a  possessive  adjective    pronoun  :  eiuphiitic,  qualit^iug   "  rft*. 

tUt." 
Own  is  a  dependent  possesgive  aJjcctive  pronoun  joined  with   its, 

(^  to  render  the  possession  expressed  emphatic. 

^    '  .         EXERCISES    ON   ADJECTIVE   PRONOTXNS. 
)' 

1.  Point  out  the  adjective  pronouns  in  the  following  phrases  and 
^lentences;  and  parse  them  : 

Every  man  is,  to  some  extent,  the  areliitcct  of 
Jiis  own  fortune.  ^Do  good  to  all  men— iiijury  to 
Jione.  All  things  coiy.^  alike  to  all.  Your  own  friend^ 
and  your  father's  friend,  forsake  not.  This  one,  or 
that  one,  will  answer  \nj  purpose;  both  are  good. — 
^orne  men  love  their  money  more  than  their  honor. 


I  EXERCISES    ON   PRONOUNS    PROMISCUOUSLY. 

In  the  following  phrases   and   sentences,  point  out   the  pronouns, 
jiu'd  parse  them,   as  already  directed:---  ^ 

Train  up  a  child  in  the  way  he  should  go,  and  when 
iie  is  old,  he  will  not   depart  from  it.    Eemember  th}^   ' 
Creator  and  thy  Redeemer,  in  the  daj'S   of  thy  youth, 
Peeble  are  all  those  pleasures  in. which  the    heart  hag    1 
XiO  share.  > 


EXERCISES  ON  ALL  THE  PRECEDING  PARTS  OP  SPEECH. 

'  Id  the  following  Sentences,  point  out  the  nouns,  articles,  adjec. 
iives,  and  pronouns,  in  the  order  in  which  they  occur,  and  parse 
them:  .,«!  --,  .^i, 

My  son,  forget  not  my  law  ;  but  let   thy  heart  keep 

my  commandments:  For  length  of  days,  and   long  life, 

and  peace,  eball  tbey  add  to  thee.     Let  not  mercy  and 


ET^YMOLOGY — VERBS.  51 

ti-utli  foi'8iike  llicc  :  biiul  them  about  tliy  neck,  write 
them  upon  the  tabic  of  tli}'  iicavt.  Honor  tlie  Lord 
with  thy  substance,  and  with  the  first-fruits  of  all 
thine  increase  :  So  shall  thy  barns  be  filled  with  plen- 
ty, and  thy  presses  shall  burst  out  with  new  wine. — ■ 
Happy  is  the  man  that  findeth  Wisdom.  Length  of 
daj's  IS  in  her  right' hand,  and  in  her  left  hand,  riches 
and  honor.  Her  w^a3's  are  ways  of  pleasantness,  and 
all  her  pat  lis  are  peace." 


QUESTIONS. 

Wlmt  are  Adjective  Pronouns?  Do  they  take  an  article  be- 
fore them  ?  What  are  the  two  characters  of  the  Possessive?  Into 
what  classes  are  Adjective  Pronouns  divided  ?  AVliich  are  Pos- 
sessives  ?  Can  they  be  used  without  a  noun?  How  were  minr 
and  thine  iormcrly  used?  Wiiat  is  said  of  hi.s,  Iter  and  its  in  No. 
201  ?  How  is  ou-n  used  ?  What  are  Distributive  pronouns  ?  Wtjat 
are  the  words  and  what  does  each  of  Ihem.niean?  What  are  De- 
monstrative pronouns?  What  words?  What  is  said  of  ?/6?/, 
what,  former  ami  latler  ?  What  are  Indefinife  pronouns?  Name 
thera?  What  is  said  of  £)«<• .?  What  is  said  o\  none  Kt\(\  some? — 
How  are  Adjective  pronouns  parried  ? 


THE    VERB. 

220.  A  Verb  is  a  w^ord  used  to  express  the  act,  being, 
or  state,  or  its  subject;  as,  "John  runs -/'  "The  bo}' 
sleeps;"  '^\Sq  are;"  ''lie  is  loved."     Hence — 

A  word  that  expresses  the  act,  heing,  or  slate  of  a  thing,  is  .i 
verb.  Thus,  w^  say  runs  is  a  verb,  because  it  expresses  the  act  of 
Jqhii, 

221.  The  subject  of  a  verb  is  that  person  or  thing,  whose  act,  heiug, 
or  state,  the  verb  expresses.  Thus,  ia  the  preceding  examples,  **  runs" 
expresses  the  act  of  John" — "sleeps/'  the  state  of  *'  ho^" — "are," 


52  EXGLTSTT    GRAMMAR. 

the  being  or  existence  of"  //v,"  ami  "is  loved,"  the  state  of  "he"  as 
the  object  acted  upon.  In  like  manner,  in  the  sentences,  *'  Let  him 
come;"  "I  saw  a  iiiau  <  »7^'».7  wood;"  "  Zc^"  expresses  the  act  of 
thou  uQderstood,  denoting  the  person  addressed—  "  mmr,"  the  act  of 
"him,"  and  *'  onttinij"  the  act  of  *'/»«»." 

222.  Verbs  are  of  two  kind.S;  Transitive  and  Intrans- 
itive. 

223.  A  Transitive  verb  expresses  an  act  done  by 
one  person  or  tiling  to  another;  as,  ^' James  strikes 
the  table." 

224.  An  Intransitive  verb  expresses  the  being  or 
state  oi  Ms  subject,  or  an  aci  not  done  to  another;  as, 
''I^m;"  Vlq  sleeps-/^  '<  You  runj' 

225.  In  this  division,  Transitive  (passing  over,)  verbs  include  all 
those  which  express  an  act  that  2)a8fic>i  over  from  the  actor  to  an  ob- 
ject; or  the  n  caning  of  which  has  such  a  reference  to  an  object,  a« 
to  render  the  expression  of  it  necessary  to  complete  the  sense ;  as, 
'^  lie  LOVES  ns  ;"  "I  HEAR  i/ov  :"  "James  RESE^fBLES /<("'<  brother;" 
*'  He   HAS  a   hook." 

Intransitive  verbs  include  all  tly)se  which  are  not  transitive 
whether  they  can  express  action  or  uot*;  as,  "  I  ain  .-"  "  You  valk  ;" 
"  They  rnn." 

226.  These  two  classes  of  verbs  may  be  thus  distinguished  : — 

1.  Transitive  veibs  ic  the  active  voice  require  an  ohject  after  them 
to  complete  the  sense;  as,  "  James  {<</'j7.(?8  the  tahlc  ;" — Jntrausitive 
verbs  do  noti  require  an  object  after  them,  but  the  sense  is  complete 
without  it ;  as,,"  He '•/Vs  ;"  ''You  ride:"  The  wind  hlovs  ;"  "  Ihe 
wheel  tnrnn." 

2.  As  the  object  of  a  transitive  active  verb  is  in  the  objective  case^ 
any  verb  which  makes  sense  with  me,  thee,  him,  her,  it,  them,  after 
it,  is  transitive.  A  verb  *hat  does  not  make  sense  with  one  of  these 
words  after  it,  is  intransitive;  thus,  xtrihei  is  transitive,  because  we 
can  say,  "James  strikes  mr  ,-"  sleeps  is  intransitive,  because  we  can 
not  aay,  "James  sleeps  ?»<>."  Hence  — 

When  a  verb  in  the  active  voice,  has  an  object,  it  is  transifice  : 
when  it  has  not  an  ^bject,  it  is  inlransitice. 

3.  In  the  use  of  trausiiive  verbs,  three  things  are  always  implied — 
the  actor,  the  art,  and  the  ohjcet  acted  upon  ;  in  the  use  of  intransitire 
verbs,  there  are  only  two— the  s»/yVc^,  and  the  heiny,  state,  or  act, 
a<;cribed  to  it.  , 


ETYMOLOGY — VERBS.  63 

227.  Intransitive  verbs  are  sometimes  rendered  transitive — 

1.  When  followed  by    a  noun   of  the   same,  or  similar  significa- 

tion,   as    an  object;  as,    intransitive y '■^l  run ;'  transitive^ '■'■  I 
run  a  race." 

2.  By  the  addition  of   another  word  ;  as,  intransitive,  "I  laucfh;" 

transitive,  "  1  lauf/h  at." 

228.  The  same  words  are  sometimes  used  in  a  transitive,  and 
sometimes  in  an  intransitive  sense.  Thus,  in  the  sentence,  "Char- 
ity thinkcth  no  evil,"  the  verb  is  transitive.  In  the  sentence, 
"  Think  on  me,"  it  is  intransitive. 

329.  So  also  verbs,  really  transitive,  are  intransitive,  when 
they  have  no  object,  and  the  sense  intended,  being  mcre)y  to  denote 
an  exercise,  is  couaplete  without  it.  Thus,  when  we  say,  "  That  boy 
reads  and  inritcn  well" — "  rendu"  and  ''  writes,"  are  really  transitive 
verbs;  because  a  person  who  reads  and  writes,  must  read  or  write 
aomHhiu'j.  Yet  as  the  sense  is  complete  without  the  objfect  nothing 
more  being  intended  than  simply,  "  That  boy  is  a  good  reader  and 
writer,"  the  verbs,  as  here  used,  are  intransitive. 

EXERCISES. 

In  the  following  sentences,  tell  which  words  are  verbs,  and  why — 
which  are  intransitive,  and  why. 

That  boy  studies  grammar.  The  girls  play.  Grass 
grows  in  the  meadows.  The  former  ploughs  his  field, 
and  sows  his  grain.  Eomuhis  bnill  Eomc.  The  sun 
shines.  The  winds  blow.  The  tree  fell.  Biing  your 
books,  and  prepare  your  lessons.  Have  you  recited  'i 
Who  read  last?  God  created  the  heavens  and  the 
earth.     Columbus  discovered  America. 


QUESTIONS. 

What  is  a  verb  ?  What  is  the  subject  of  a  verb  '  How  man/ 
kinds  of  verbs  ?  What  is  a  transitive  verb?  What  is  an  intransi- 
tive verb  ?  Do  intransitive  verbs  express  action  ?  What  do  tran- 
sitive verbs  require  alter  them  ?  How  may  a  transitive  verb  be 
known?  What  three  things  ore  required  in  the  use  ol  transitive 
verbs?  How  are  intransitive  verbs  rendered  transitive?  When 
may  transitive  verbs  be  used  intransitively  ? 


54  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

DIVISION   (tF   VERBS. 

230.  In  respect  of  form,  vcrb.s  arc  divided  into  Ecouhir, 
Irregular,  and  Df/'trfire. 

2ol.  A  REGi  LAR  verb  is  one  that  forms  its  j}((sf  fmse  in 
the  indicative  actUc,and  its j>«.s7^>«/7ic ?)>/(;, by  adding  <f  or  cd 
to  the  present  3  as,  present,  love ;  past,  loved  ;  past  partici- 
ple, loved.     ^ 

232.  An  IRREGULAR  verb  is  one  that  docs  not  form  its 
2'>ast  tense  in  the  indicative  active,  and  its  j^ttaf  participle,  hy 
adding  d  or  cd to  the  present ;  aS;  present,  /crile  ;  past,  tcrotc ; 
past  participle,  vriltrn. 

233.  A  DEFECTIVE  vcrb  is  one  in  Avliich  some  of  the 
parts  arc  wanting.  To  this  class  belong  chiefly,  Aux- 
iliary and  Impersonal  verbs. 

AUXILIARY  VERBS. 

201.  Auxiliary  (or  helpina)  veibs  are  iliosy  by  the 
help  of  which  othor  verbs  are  iuflecieJ.  They  are  do,  hare, 
be  ; — shall,  will ; — may,  can,  must :  and  except  he,  they  are 
used  odI}''  in  the  present  and  past  tenses;  thus,— 

Present.      Do,      have,      shall,       will,      may,      can,      must. 

Fast.  Did,      had,       should,    would,  might,   could,  . 

Be,  do,  and  hai:c,  are  alto  principal  verbs. 

ShaIl  and  Will,  expressing  resolution,  purpose,  <j-c. 

235.  Will  denotes  the  purpose,  resolution,  or  inclination,  of  a  per- 
Bon,  in  reference  to  his  own  acts;  and  aliall,  his  purpose,  Ac,  in  ref- 
erence to  the  acts  of  vthcrs  over  Avhom  ho  has  authority  or  power. 

236.  Fixed  purpose  or  determination  is  expressed  in  a  more  positive 
and  absolute  manner  in  the  first  pct^on  by  sludl  than  by  «:<7/,  because 
in  this  way,  the  person,  as  it  were,  divests  himself  of  will,  and  puts, 
himself  entiroly  at  the  disposal  of  another.  Thus,  a  person  may  say 
*■  I  nhalt  go,  though  much  against  my  inclination." 

For  this  reason,  s//((;ns  more  polite  and.  respectful  iu  a  promise, 
and  more  olicnsivc  in  a  throat,  than  wili. 


ETYMOLOaY — VERBS,  So 


Interrorfatively. 

237.  Iq  asking  questions,  these  auxiiiaries  in  this  sense,  ht4 
used  with  reference  to  the  will  of  the  second  person,  to  whom  a  ques- 
tion is  always  supposed  to  he  addressed,  and  hence  arc  used  as  iii 
the  second  of  the  above  forms;  thus-r- 

Shall  I  write  ?      Will  you  write?    Shall  he  write  :•'— Equivalent  to-- 
Is  it  your  purpose  that  I  ehall  write  ?  — you   wilt  write  ? — he   »Ao?A 
write  ? 

Shall  and  Will  exprossinr/  fuluridj, 

■  238.  In  regard  to  simple  futurity,  the  \is(i[of  ghull  and  o-i(l  is  di- 
rectly the  reverse  of  what  it  is  in  the  expression  of  resolution  :  that 
is,  will  takes  the  place  of  shali,  and  shull  takes  the  place  of  icilF, 
In  other  word?,  when  a  person  in  reference  to  himself  foretells  whafc 
is  future," «^a//  is  used:   and  in  reference  to  others,  icill  is  used. 

33y.  But  when  the  thing  foretold  is  regarded,  either  as  pleasing  oc 
repugnant  slwll  is  used  with  reference  to  the  first  person^  even  whea 
others  are  repr«jsented  as  foretelling. 


Interrogatively  respecting' tlu  future. 

240.  Shall  is  used  interrogatively  in  the  first  and  the  second  per- 
son, and  11- ill  in  the  third. 

241.  Shall  is  used,  instead  of  v:ill,  after  the  connectives,  if,  "provided, 
(hou'fh,  unless,  Ac. ---the  adverbs  ichen,  tohile,  nutil,  after,  bi'fove,  Ac— W 
and  also  after  nhofoncr,  or  a  relative  pronoun  in  a  restrictive  clause*' 

242.  Should,  the  past  tense  of  '■^hall,  a,T\d  notdd,  the  past  tense  of 
icill,  are  auxiliaries  of  the  past  potential;  and  in  dependent  clause* 
are  used  in  the  same  manner  after  a  past  tense,  that  shall  and  mil 
are  uFcd  after  the  present  or  future. 


M'li/^  C(in,  must — mighty  could — to  be. 

213.  ^Uig  denotes  present  liberty  or  permission;  can,  ptyeaent  abil- 
ity ;  and  must,  present  obligation  or  necessity. 

244.  Jlay  sometimes  denotes  mere  possibility. 

245.  J/t'.y,  before  th^  subject  of  a  verb,  is  used  to  express  a  wish  or 
prayer  ;  as,  "  Jlay  you  bo  happy  [" 

246.  Jfiijht  iind  could  express,  ia  past  ticne,  the   same  ideas  genay-' 
a.11^  that  a^rc  expressed  by  ma^i  and  aut  iu  the  present. f  ■''v.;9'j\';  . 


56^  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

247.  Might,  before  the  subject,  is  also  uEed  to  express  a  wish  ;  as, 
*'  Might  it  but  turn  out  to  be  no  worse  than  thiaJ" 

248.  The  verb  "  to  be,"  in  all  moods  and  tenses,  i^  used  as  an  aux- 
iliary in  forming  the  passive  voice.  Also  in  the  progressive  form  of 
the  active  voice  ;  af<,  "  I  a;>»  writing;"  "He  //rr*  writing." 

249.  All  these  auxiliaries  are  sometimes  used,  without  their  verb, 
io  express,  by  elipais  the  same  thing  as  the  full  form  of  the  verb,  to- 
gether with  its  adjuncts,  when  that  is  used  immediately  before,  eith- 
er in  the  same  or  in  a  dilVerent  tense;  thus,  "Ho  writes  poetry  as 
Tfell  as  I  do." 

,  250.  The  verb  do  (not  auxiliary)  is  sometimes  used  as  the  su^-sti- 
tute  of  another  verb  or  phrase  previously  used;  as,  "We  have  not 
•yeifoxmd  them  all,  nor  over  shall  do."~  -Milton.—'"  Lucretiiis  wrote  on 
the  nature  of  things  in  Latin,  as  Empedocles  had  already  done  in 
.Gre'ek." — ActQu. 


EXERCISES. 

1.  Correct  the  errors  in  the  following  sentences,  and  give  a  reason 
for  the  correction :  — 

I  will  be  a  loser  by  that  bargain.  I  will  be  di owned  and 
Jiobody  shall  help  me.  I  will  be  punished  if  I  do  wrong. — 
You  Bhall  be  punished  if  you  do  not'reforui.  It  shall  prob- 
ably rain  to-morrow.  If  you  shall  cooie  1  shall  come  also. — 
I  will  be  compelled  to  go  home.  I  am  resolved  that  I  ebail 
do  my  duty.  I  purposed  that  if  you  would  come  home  I 
should  pay  you  a  visit.  I  hope  that  I  will  see  him.  I  hoped 
that  I  would  see  him.  You  promised  that  you  should 
"write  me  soon,  lie  was  of  opinion  that  we  should  hear 
^  good  lecture,  lie  shall  come  of  his  own  accord,  if  encour- 
agement will  be  given. 

2.  In  the  following,  tell  which  expressions  are  right,  and  which 
are  wrong,  and  why  :-  - 

It  is  thought   he  sliall    come.     It  will  be    impossible  to 
get  ready  in  time.     Ye  will  come  to  me.     He   shall  have 
.  your  reward.     They  should  do  as  they  ought.     We  are   re- 
solved that  we  will  do  our  duty.  They  are  resolved  that  they 


ETYMOLOGY — VERBS.  57 


shall  do  tlieir  duty.     1  am  determined  that  you  will  do  your 
duty.     I  am  sure  you  will  do  your  duty. 


QUESTIONS. 

^,  What  is  a  regular  verb  ?  An  irregular  ?  A  Defective?  What 
are  auxiliary  verbs  ?  Nutne  them.  Give  the  present^an(l[past  teuse 
of  each.  Which  are  also  principal  verbs?  What  docs  n<VMe- 
nDte?  What  docs  sliall  denote?  How  is  fixed  purpose  expressed  ? 
How  are  shall  and  will  used  in  interrogations  ?  How  are  shall  and 
«v7^  used  in  expressing  futurity?  When  is  shall  used  with  the 
first  person  ?  What  is  the  rule  for  shall  and  ivill  used  interroga- 
tively? What  is  the  rule  with  ?T./i/()('/(/r(/,  &c.,  ?  What  does  7«r/y 
express?  Might?  How  is  the  verb  to  be  used?  Ho^  man^  aux- 
iliaries be  used ?     For  what  is  do  sometimes  used? 


INFLECTION   OF  VEEiBS. 

251.  To  the  itiflcctiun  of  verbs  belong,  Voices^  3IoOds, 
Tenses,  JShimbcrs  and  Persons. 


01-     VOICE. 

252.  Voice  is  a  particular  lorni  of  the  verb,  "vvhich 
shows  the  relation  of  the  suljcct  or  thing  spoken  of,  to 
the  action  expressed  by  the  verb. 

253.  Transitive  verbs  have  two  voices,  called  the 
Actice  and  the  Passive. 

'   254.  The  Active  voice  represents  the  ^subject    uf  tUc 
verb  as  actmj/ ;  as,  ''James  strikes  the  table.'' 

255.  The  Passive  voice  represents  the  subject  of  the 
verb  as  acted  upon  -,  as,  "  The  table  is  struck  by  James." 

In  other  words,  the  verb,  in  the  active  voice,  expresses  the  act  of 
its  subject — in  the  passive,  it  expresses  the  state  of  its  subject^  as 
affected  by  the  act.  In  the  active  voice,  the  subject  of  the  verb 
acts — in  the  passive,  it  U  acted  upon. 

OB 


58  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

256.  IntransiUve  verbs  can  have  no  distinction  of  voice,  because 
they  have  no  object  which  can  be  used  as  the  subject  in  the  pas- 
sive. Their  form  is  generally  active  ;  as  "  I  stand  ;"  I  runJ'^  A 
few  are  also  used  in  the  passive  form,  but  with  the  same  sense  as 
in  the  active  ;  as,  "  He  is  come  ;"  "They  are  gone  :"  equivalent  to, 
"  He  has  come  ;"  "  They  hat^e  gone." 

25Y,  Intransitive  verbs  are  sometimes  rendered  transitive,  and  so 
capable  of  a  passive  form  — 

1.  By  the  addition  of  another  word  thus,  "  1  lovgh^'  is  intransi- 
tive ;  I  hiurjh  at  (him)"  is  transitive  ;  passive,  "He  is  laughed  at 
(by  me)." 

2.  Intransitive  verbs  are  transitive,  when  followed  by  a  uoim 
of  similar  signification  as  an  object  ;  as  intransitive,  "  I  run;" 
transitive,  "  I  ruji  a  race;"  passive,  "  A  race  is  run  by  me." 

3.  Intransitive  verbs  become  transjlive,  when  used  in  a  causitivc 
sense ;  that  is,  when  they  denote  the  causing  of  that  act  or  state 
which  the  verb  properly  expresses  ;  as,  "  Walk  your  horse  round 
the  yard."    "  The  proprietors  run  a  stage  coach  daily." 

4.  Many  verbs  in  the  active  voice,  by  an  idiom  peculiar  to  the  En- 
glish, are  used  in  a  sense  nearly  allied  to  the  pa.ssive,  but  for  which 
the  passive  will  not  always  bo  a  proper  substitute.  Thus  we  say, 
''  The  field  phmr/hs  well"-  "  These  lines  rrad  Fmoothlj"'  --"The  fruit 
ins/es  bitter."  When  used  in  this  sense,  they  may  properly  be  ranked 
with  intransitive  verbs,  as  thay  are  never  followed  by  an  objeetive 
case. 


^>UEST10Ni5. 

What  belong  to  the  iiilleclion  of  verbs V  What  i.-^  voice?  How 
many  voices?  What  does  the  active  voice  represent?  What  does 
the  passive  voice  represent  ?  Have  intransitive  verbs  any  distinc- 
tion of  voice  ?  What  form  have  they?  What  are  the  three  ways 
by  which  intransitive  verbs  are  rendered  transitive?  What  pecu- 
Ifar  form  of  the  verb   is  sometimes  ii^ed? 


MOODS. 

258.  MooLt  is  the  /node  or  iiiiiniier  of  exprcs.sitig  the  sig- 
uiScation  of  ihe  verb. 


ETYMOLOGY — MOODS^  59 

250.  The  moods  in  English  hKe' Jf^e;  namely,  the  Tiu 
dicdfioe,  Potential,  Subjuncfive,  Imperative,  and  hifinitive. 

2G0.;/nie  Indicative  mood  declares  the  fact  expressed  by 
the  verb,  s«my</ and  without  limitation;  as,  "Hez5"— «' 
*'  lie  loves  "— "  He  ?6-  loved'' 

261.  The  Potential  mood  declares,  not  the  fact  expressed 
by  the  veib,  but  only  its  possibility,  or  the  liberty,  power, 
will,  or  obligation,  of  the  subject  with  respect  to  it ;  as  "  Thd 
wind  may  blow  "— "  We  may  walk  "— "  I  can  swim  "— ^ 
''R^  would  not  5^a?/ "—*' Children  should  obey  their  pa- 
rcDls." 

In  other  words,  the  potential  mood  expresses,  not  what  the  Sub- 
^  ject  does- or  is,  &c.,  but  what  it  maif,  can,  must,  might,  could,  would, ov 
should  do  or  be,  &c. 

262.  Both  the  indicative  and  potential  mood  are  used  interrogoth-dy* 
at),  "Dies  helovt?"  Cau  he  write?"  They  are  also  used  without 
dependence  on  another  verb,  and  express  a  complete  idea  ia 
themselves.  "James  writes  a  letter/*  and  "James  can  writo  a  let- 
ter," are  equally  complete  and  independent  sentences. 

263.  Tho  b'lEJU.N'OTivE  mood  represents  the  fact  express- 
ed bv  the  veib,  not  as  actual,  but  as  conditional,  desirable, 
or  oontingct^t';  as,  "  If  he  study,  he  will  improve." — '*  0  tha(; 
thoM  v't'rt  asjny  brother!" 

2'U.  TLis'mood,  as  its  uamo  implies,  is  always  subjoined  to,  aud 
dependent  on,  another  verb  expressed  or  understood.  "Jf  he  etudy, 
he  \cill  iinpyocc.'^     "  0  [I  wish]  that  thou   u.-ert,"  &c. 

?65.  The  condition  a- ity  or  contingency^&c.,  expressed  by  thif  mood, 
i<^  usual'j"  intimated  by  guch^conjunctions  as  if,  though,  lest,  unlett,  to, 
itc  ,  pn  fixed,  which  however,  make  no  part  of  the  verb. 

2(10. ^Thi  same  tling  is  eomefcimes  expressed  without  the  conjuno-' 
tioa,  by  mrrely  putting  t1)c  verb  or  auxiliary  before  the  subject  or 
uomioativo  ;  as,  *'  Had  I,"  for  "  1/  I  had."  "  Were  he,"  for  "  1/  he 
irfi.re.:'     <'  Had  hp  gone,"  for  "  Tf  he  had  gone,"  &.C. 

207.  The  Imperative  mood  comwanc;?^,  exhorts,  entreats 
ov  permits;  as  "Do  ibi^  "— "i?6mem66r  thy  Creator"— 
■''fcvT/-,  O  my  people  "'— "  Go  thy  way  for  this  time/' 


60  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

tf  2^8.  The  Ij^FINitivb  mood  expresses  the  raeaniiig  of  the 
verb  in  a  general  manner,  without  any  distiuction  of  person 
or  number ;  as,  to  love. 

260.  The  infinitive  is  often  used  as  a  verbal  noun  in  the  nomina- 
tive case,  as  the  subject  of  a  verb  ;  as,  ^^  To  jjIhi/  is  pleasant.'  On 
in  the  objective,  as  the  object  of  a  transitive  verb  in  the  active 
voice,  or  of  a  preposition  ;  as,  "  Boys  love  (o  jihn/' — "  He  is  oboi/f  to 
^o" — "  What  went  ye  out /or  to  sec?  " 

270.  The  infinitive  mood  generally  has  no  subject  ;  yet  tho  art,  be- 
"luf/,  or  ttafr.  expressed  by  it,  is  referable  to  some  word  connected 
■with  it.  Thus,  in  tho  above  examples,  to  ploy  is  referable  to  boi/a, 
JBut  when  the  infipitive  as  a  subject  has  its  own  subject,  it  is  in  the 
objective  case,  introduced  by /o/- ;  as,"  For  n»  ^WfV,  is  base."  But 
■when  the  infinitive  with  its  subject  is  the  object  of  a  transitive  verb, 
that  subject  in  the  objective  case  needs  no  connecting  word;  as, 
*'  We  believe  him  to  be  sincere."     Here,  Inm  is  the  subject  of  to  be. 

271.  The  infinitive  active,  by  an  anomaly  not  uncommon  in  other 
languages,  is  sometimes  u9ed  in  &  passive  sense;  as,  "You  are  to 
hlomt,"  (to  be  blamed).  "A  house  to  hf."  "A  road  to  make." 
1^'  Goods  madQ  to  sell."    "  Knives  to  <jri»d,"  &c. 


QUESTIONS. 

What  is  mood?  How  many,  and  what  are  the  moods?  What 
distinguishes  the  indicative  mood  ?  How  docs  the  potential  de- 
clare a  fact  ?  What  does  the  potential  express  ?  How  does  the  sub- 
junctive represent  a  fact?  Upon  what  is  this  mood  always  depend- 
ant? What  indicates  the  contingency  of  this  mood?  How  may 
contingency  be  expressed  without  a  conjunction  ?  Describe  the  im- 
perative mood.  Define  the  infinitive.  How  is  the  infinitive  often 
iiscd?  D«es  the  infinitiveJiave  a  subject?  What  anomaly  occurs 
in  the  use  of  the  infinitive. 


TENSES. 


2^2.  Tenbes  are  certain  forms  of  the  verb,  which-  serve  to 
point  out  the  distinctions  of  time. 

2'73»  The  tensea  in  English  are  six — the   Fi'esentj  the 


ETYMOLOGY TENSE.  61 

■Presents-perfect,  the  Past^  the  Past-perfect,  the  Future^  and 
the  Future-perfect. 

274.  Of  these,  the  present  and  the  past  only,  in  the  indicative 
mood,  and  the  present  in  the  subjunctive,  are  simple  tens»s,  consist- 
ing of  the  verb  only  ;  as,  "  T  h,vr  " — "  I  hjrcd."  AH  the  rest  are  com_ 
pound,  consisting  of  the  auxiliary  aid  the  verb;  a"s,   "I  have  loved.'* 

»  TEN6ES  OF  THE  INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

27a.  The  Present  tense  expresses  what  is  going  on  nt  the 
present  tiaie  ;  as,  "  1  love  " — '•  I  am  loved." 

276.  This  tense  is  lued  also  to  express  what  is  Ixihlttrol  or  f^ln-aijf: 
true  ;  as,  "  Virtue  in  its  own  reward."  It  is  used,  in  anima«cd  Darra- 
tiop,  to  express  past  events  with  force  and  interest,  as  if  they  were 
present;  as,  "Cassar  Icai-rf,'  Gaul,  cros>it8  the  Rubicon,  and  (ntera 
Italy." 

2?7.  It  is  used  sometimes,  intead  of  the  ]>i cacitt  per/f't  iensc,  \n 
speaking  of  authors  long  since  dead,  when  reference  is  made  to  their 
works  which  still  exist;  as,  "Moses  ^t//«us  who  wtre  the  descend- 
ants of  Abraham." 

2*78.  The  Present-perfect  tense  represents  an  action  or 
event  as  completed  at  the  present  time,  or  in  a  period  of 
which  the  present  forms  a  part  ;  as,  "  I  have  sold  mv  horse" 
—  •'  I  have  walked  six  miles  lo-day  " — "John  has  heen  busy 
this  week. 

279.  The  sign  of  the  present-perfect  is  //arc— inflected,  h(is(,  h-Jt,  or 
hath. 

280.  This  tense  is  used  to  express  an  act  or  state  continued  through 
a  perioi  of  time  reaching  to  the  present;  "He  ho8  nfndicd  grammar 
six  months." 

281.  It  is  used  to  express  acts  long  since  completed,  when  the  refer- 
ence is  not  to  the  ac\  of  finishing,  but  to  the  thing  finished  and  still 
existing;  as,  "Cicero  hus  aritttn  orations." 

282.  Sometimes  this  tense  is  used  in  eflfect  to  deni/  the  present  ex- 
istence of  that  of  which  the  verb  expressesHhe  completion  ;  "I  have 
hten  young  "—meaning,  this  is  now  finished — I  am  young  no  more. 

283.  The  Past  tense  exprssres  what  took  place  in  past 
time ;  as^  "  In  the  beginning  God  created  the  heavens"— 


62  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

''  God  said,  Let  there  be  light" — "  The  ship  saik^  when 
the  mail  arrived." 

281.  The  time  expressed  by  this  tense^is  regarded  ae  entirdy  past' 
and,  however  near  to  the  present,  it  does  not  embrace  it:  as,  "I  saw 
your  friend  a  mf  mentago." 

285.  This  tense  is  used  to  express  what  w.i3  customary  in  past  tiuce  : 
as,  "  She  attended  church  regularly  all  her  life." 

286.  The  Past-perfect  tense  represents  an  action  o^ 
event  as  completed  at  or  before  a  certain  past  time ;  as,  "  1 
had  walked  six  miles  that  day  '' — "  John  had  Jbtcn  busy 
that  week." 

287.  Thcsjgu  of  the  past-perl'ect  is  had  :  second  pcrscn,  liud^il. 

288.  The  Future  tense  expresses  what  will  take  place 
in  future  time;  as,  "  I  will  see  you  again,  and  your  hearts 
shall  I'c/'oire." 

2F9.  The  Bigna  of  the  future  arc  .<*/;«//.  I'i/f. 

2U0.  The  FuTURE-PERFF.(T  tense  intimates  that  an  ac- 
tion or  event  will  be  completed  at  or  befoie  a  certain  time 
yet  future  ',  as,  "  I  shall  have  (jot  my  lesson  by  ten  o'clock/" 
— *•  He  icill  have  finished  hi.s  letter  before  you    are  ready. '^ 

291.  The  signs  of  the  future  perfect  are  ihull  have,  uill  have. 

TENSES  OF  THE  POTENTIAL  MOOD. 


292.  The  Potential  mood  has  ./'"t    tenses — the   Frcrent^ 
the  Present  perfect,  the  Pasty  and  tbe  Past-perftct. 

293.  The /'/•ef«'«^  potential  C'ipres&e.s  inescnt* liberty,  power;    or 
obligation.    The  signs  of  the  Present  are,  mai/,  can^  must.        ' 

294.  The  signs  of  the  Present  perfect   iMitcnIiar  aire,  via^  have,  (.(at 
hnvf,  muHf  hnre.   '  ..,  ^^ 

295.  The  signs  of  the  Past  prtentijil  nre.  uni/h'f,  could,  KOuld,  shovid, 
290.  The  8ij|Tifi  of  the  Pa>it-perfect  potei  Jial  "are,  iiti^/ht ,yffn e.  ci>ii/d 

lace,  woidd  hare,  shovid  hare.        v^:.:"l'^  ■   '^'    '  ^  ''-^'-'   ■'  ^'  ^^  ^     •^•' "- 

297.   The  F>/fin->'  atiil  Fnhirc-ph-ftd  arc  wanlinjr  in  tlurrulcudal. 


ETYMOLOGY — TENSE.  63 

TENSES  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 

29^      The   Subjunctive  mood,  in   its   proper   forno,  has  only  the 
Present 'tense.     The  verb  "  to  be"  has  the  present  and  the  past. 

299.  The  Present  subjunctive,  in  its  proper  form,  according  to 
present  approved  usage,  has  always  a  future  reference;  thus,  •'  If  he 
write,^'  is  equivalent  to,  "  If  he  should  write,"  or,  "  I(  he  shall  write."' 
Uncertainty  or  coutiugency  respecting  a  supposed  presait  action  or 
state,  is  expressed  by  the  present  indicatire  used  sulfjunctively;  as, 
"  If  he  writes  as  well  as  he  reads,  he  will  succeed." 

300.  The  Present-perfect  subjunctive  is  only  the  same  tense  of 
the  indicative,  used  subjunctively. 

301.  The  Past  subjunctive  is  used  in  two  senses — 

1.  It  is  used  to  express  a  past  action  or  state,  as  conditional  or 
contingent;  as,  "  If  he  u-rote  that  letter  he  deserves  credit,  and  should 
be  rewarded." 

2.  It  expresses  a  suppooition  with  respect  to  something  present 
and  implies  a  denial  of  the  thing  supposed  ;  as,  '•  If  I  had  the  money 
now,  I  would  pay  it,"  implying,  I  have  it  ugt. 

TENSE  OF  THE  IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

302  The  Imperative  mood  has  only  the  present  tense,  and  thakhas 
respect  to  the  time  of  the  command,  or  exhortation. 

TENSES -OF  THE  INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

308.  The  Intinitivc  mood  has  two  tenses,  the  Present 
and  the  Fer/'ecf.  These  do  not  so  properly  denote  the 
th/ie  of  the  action,  &c.,  as  its  sfafe  ;  as,  "  To  write  " — '•'  To 
have  written." 

304.  The  Present  inhnitivc  expresses  an  act  or  slate  not  finished, 
indefinitely,  or  at  any  time  referred  to,  expressed  or  implied  ;  as,  "  I 
wish  to  write'' — ''  I  wished  tn  go'' — "  Apt  tn  teavh.-^ 

;^.0i>.  The  sign  of  tlio  pre.sent  infinitive  'i9,  (<>. 

:i06.  After  the  verl»  to  t,i\  the  present  infinitive  is  "  sumotiiues  used 
to  expres-s  a  future  action  or  event:  as,  "  He  is  to  r/o;"'  "If  we  were 

to  fJO." 


04  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

307.  The  Fii/tTt  iufiuitivo  expresses  an  act  or  state  as  perfect  or 
finished,  at  any  time  referred  to,  expressed  or  implied;  as,  "  He  is 
said  (o  have  ivritlen."  ', 

308,  The  sign  of  the  perfect  infinitive  is,  to  have. 

H09.  In  the  use  of  the  infinitive,  it*  is  necessary  to  observe,  that 
the  Present  must  never  be  used  in  circumstances  which  imply  a,  jinish- 
ed  act;  nor  the  Ptr/x-t  in  circumstances  which  imply  an  act  not  fin- 
ished. 


QUESTIONS. 

What  are  tenses  ?  How  many,  and  what  are  they?  Which  of 
them  are  simple  tenses?  Explain  the  uses  of  the  present  tense  des- 
cribed in  Nos.  *27t),  2Y7  ?  What  does  the  present-perfect  represent? 
W^hat  is  its  sign  ?  What  is  its  use  in  Nos.  280-1-2  ?  What  does  the 
past  tense  express  ?  What  other  uses  has  it  ?  What  does  the  past- 
perfect  represent?  What  is  its  sign  ?  How  many  tenses  has  the 
potential  mood  ?  Name  thera.  What  does  the  present  express? 
What  are  the  signs  of  each  of  the  tenses?  .How  many  tenses  has 
the  Subjunctive  ir^ood,  properly?  Give  the  substance  of  299. 
What  are  the  two  senses  of  the  past  ?  How  many  tenses  has  the 
imperative  mood  ?  How  many  has  the  infinitive  ?  What  does  each 
of  thera  express  ?     What  are  their  signs  ? 


PARTICIPLES. 

olO.  A  Participle  is  a  word  which,  as  a  verb,  express- 
es an  action  or  slate,  and,  as  an  adjective,  qualifies  a  noun  ; 
as,  "J/e  came  seeing'' — •' Having  finished  our  task  wem^y 
play." 

311.  Verbs  have  three  participles — ihQ  present^  the  7)«sif 
and  iha  perfect ;  as,  loving^  loved,  having  loved,  in  the  active 
voice ;  and  being  loved,  loved,  having  been  loved,  in  the  pas- 
sive. 

312  The  present  participle  active  always  ends  in  ruff.  In  all 
Teibs  it  has  an  active  signification,  and  denotes  an  action  Or  state 
as  continuing  and  progressive;  as,  "James  is  building  a  house. ^ 


ETYMOLOGY — PARTICIPLES.  65 

313.  The  Present  participle  passive  has  always  a  passive  signifi- 
cation, but  it  has  the  same  difference  of  meaning  with  respect  to  the 
time  or  state  of  the  action  as  the  present  indicative  passive. 

3lt.  The  P'ist  participle  has  the  same  form  in  both  voices.  In  the 
active  voice  it  belongs  equally  to  transitive  and  intransitive  verbs- 
has  always  an  active  sense  forms,  with  the  auxiliaries,  the  Present- 
perfect  and  the  Past  perfect  tenses  and  is  never  found  but  thus  com- 
bined ;  as,  "has  loved,"  "had  loved,"  k^,  In  the  pnsaive  voice  it  has 
always  a  passive  sense,  and,  with  the  verb  to  he  as  an  auxiliary, 
forms  the  passive  voice;  as,  "lie  is  loved;"  or  without  it,  qualifies 
a  noun  or  pronoun  :  as,  "A  man  loved  by  all,  hated,  by  none."  The 
difference  between  Ifee  active  and  the  passive  participle  will  be  seen 
in  the  following  example,  viz.  Active  "He  ha?  comenled  a  dagger 
under  his  cloak;"  PAssiVE---"He  has  a  dagger  co/icta/rd  under  his 
cloak." 

."US.  The  r<yf<et  participle  is  always  compound,  and  represents  an 
action  or  state  as  completed  at  ihe  time  referred  to.  Ithas  always  an 
active  sense  iu  the  active  voice,  and  a  passive  sense  in  the  passive  : 
as,  AcTiTji:  ''Huvinyjinished  our  task,  jtc  may  play."  Passivk  :  "Our 
task  hariiuj  been  finished,  we  may  play. 

3l<!.  The  Prf5f;i^  participle  active,  tind  the  Fast  participle  pas- 
eive,  when  separated  from  the  idea  of  time,  become  adjectives,  and 
are  usually  called /?(/;'^jt7/)mi  adjectives;  as,  ^^  An  amusing  sioxy^' — 
"  A  bound  book." 

3 IV.  The  participle  in  m^  is  often  used  as  a  verbal  /?own,having  the 
nominative  and  objective  cases,  but  not  the  possessive.  In  this 
character,  the  participle  of  a  transitive  verb  may  still  retain  the 
government  of  the  verb  ;  as,  "  In  keepinfj  his  commandments  there  is 
great  reward  ;''"  or,  it  may  be  divested  of  it  by  inserting  an  article 
betore  it,  and  the  preposition  o/ after  it ;  as,  "  In  the  keeping  o/hia 
commandments."  When  q/"  follows  the  participle,  Me  should  precede 
it.     But  o/can  not  be  used  before  a  preposition. 


NUMBER  ANJ3  PERSON. 

318.  Every  tense  of  the  verb  has  two  Numbers,  the  Singular  and 
the  Plural^  corresponding  to  the  singular  and  plural  of  nouns  and 
pronouns. 


66  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

319.  In  each  number,  the  Terb  has  tbree  Persons,  called  the 
first,  second,  and  ihird.  The  first  asserts  of  the  person  speakuvj ;  the 
eejond,  of  the  person  spnhpn  tn  ,-  uud  the  tliiril  (•('  I  lie  person  or 
thing  spoken  of. 

A'lO.  The  subject  of  the  verb,  in  the  fir^t  peraon  lingular,  is  al- 
ways 7,  in  the  plural  we :  in  the  second  person  singular  thou  ;  in 
the  plural,  >/e  or  j/oii :  in  the  third  person,  the  su\iject  is-  llie  name 
of  any  person  or  thing  spoken  of,  or  a  pronoun  of  the  third  per- 
^jou,  in  its  stead  ;  a^so  it  may  be  an  inlinitivc  mood,  or  a  claus,^  of 
a  sentence,  or  any  thing  of  which  a  person  can  thiiik  or  .speak. 

32 J.  In  ordinary  discourse,  the  ini[ierative  mood  has  only  the^ 
second  i>crsou,  because  a  comnittml,  cxftordilion,  &c.,  can  lie  address- 
ed only  to  the  jicrson  f<}>vlc/i  to. 

32?.  In  such  expressions  as  '  f.'i  119  fort"---  '  L>i  him  A. »■-•"-. -"./c« 
///.cw;t /ut-e"-  -phrases  by  which  the  first  .and  the  third  person  of  the 
imperative  in  some  languages  are  rendered' --let  is  the  proper  imper- 
ative in  the  second  person,  with  tJioa  or  ^utt  as  its  subject  underPtocd, 
and  loie  the  infinitive  without  the  si^n.  Thus,  "Let  [f/ion]  us  love,"  ' 
<tc. 

3211  This  mode  of  expression  is  sometimes  used,  when  no  definite 
individual  is  addressed;   as,  "  Lot  there  be  li^bt." 

.H24.  Among  the  poet?:,  however,  we'  sometimes  fiud  a  jlr.'^t  and  a 
third  in  the  imperative  :  as,  '**  Confide  tre  in  ourselves  alone"  - 
"  With  virtue  we  be  armed."'— -//'/^t's  Ta^so.  "And  refit  ^'-rhere,  Ma- 
tilda said."- --/S''■o^^  .    \ 

825.  Such  oxprcssutns  as  *'  Hallowed  ba  thy    uama'"-  —  '*  Thy  king-    j 
dom  come,''---"  Bo  it  enacted"---"  So  be  it,"    Ac,  may    be  regarded    \ 
cither  as  examples  of  the  third  person  iu  the  imperative,  or  as    ollip- 
tioal  for  "  '/"^/'  or  "  Let  ii  bft  enacted"--  "  Let  it  bo  so,"  Ac. 

826.  The  zp_//»(7itc',  because  it  usually  has  no  subject,  has  neither 
number  or  person. 


CONG  LIGATION. 

327.  The  CON  (u;<  J  ATI  ON  of  a  verb  is  the  regular  combi. 
nation  and  arrangement  of*  i(:s  several  voices,  Dmnds,  teiut^. 
numbers  and  pcrwn^. 


ETYMOLOGY — COXGUGATION.  67 

328.  In  the  active  voice  iiioat  verbs  have  three  forms — the  Com- 
mon, the  Progressive,  and  the  Emphatic. 

1.  The  Common  form  expresses  the  simple  existence  of  the  tact  ; 

as,  "He  speaks" — "She  tcrites" — "They  (xlk.'' 

2.  The /'roy7T5«u' e  form    represents   an    action    as  begun,  and  in 

progress,  but  not  com})letcd^  It  is  formed  by  annexing  the 
present  participle  to  the  verb  *7o  be,'  through  all  its  moods 
and  tenses;  as,  ^'■I am  tvriling,"  &c. 

3.  The  Eiitphaik  expresses  a  fact  with  empliasis.     It  is  formed  by 

prefixing  do  in  the  present  and  did  in  the  past ;  as,  "7  do 
learn" — ^'I  did  leurn," 

329.  To  these  may  be  added,  the  nofciim  form  of  the  third  person 
singular,  present  indicative,  ending  in  (h,  or  <;'/',  instead  of  the  lu/*/ - 
vion,  in  s  or  c«.  Thus — solemn  fornc,  lovcth,  hath  lorn/;  common, 
lofr.8,  has  loccd. 

330.  The  tenses  of  the  verb,  iutiected  without  an  auxiliary  are 
called  Simple  tenses,  those  inflected  with  an  auxiliary  are  called 
Compound  tenses. 

331.  The  only  regular  terminations  added  to  the  verbs  are — 

1.  The  tejisc^ndings :  dov  cr/ of  the  past  tense  ;  andm^  of  the  present . 

participle. 

2.  The  personal  cndinys  ;  si,  or  est,  of  the  second  person  singular; 
.    and  *,  <^6',  or  c^/i,  of  the  third.     The   other   changes  are  made 

by  auxiliaries. 

332.  In  the  present  and  past  tenso,  when  xi  will  easily  coalesce 
with  the  final  consonant,  it  is  added  in  the  s:imc  syllable  ;  as,  miidnt, 
lovedst.  But  when  it  will  not  easily  coalesce,  or  the  verb  ends  in  a 
vowel  sound,  cut  is  commonly  added,  and  forms  another  syllabic;  as, 
icishcst,  (eacheat,  lovcst,  ijoest,  draiorst,  sai/cnf,  vcjcsf,  bleHnext,  &g. 

33J.  In  the  present  indicative,  the  endings  of  the  third  person  sin- 
gular, H  or  en,  are  subject  to  the  rules  for  tbe  plural  number  of  nouns  ; 
as,  Kits,  reads,  xcishcs,  teaches,  lovcn,  (joes,  draics,  carrtci,  suijs,   <tc. 

32^4.  In  the  solemn  style,  instead  of  s  ores,  the  third  person  singu- 
lar ha^  e'h,  which  always  ad^s  a  syllable,  except  in  doth,  hath,  naitlt 
for  doeth,  harefh,  saycth. 

335.  The  verb  need  is  often  used  in  the  third  person  singular  of  the 
present  tense,  without  the  personal  ending;  as,  'The  truth  «ec(^  not 
be  disguised" — **It  need  net  be  added." 

o30.  The  principal  parts  of  the  vcrlt  arc  llic  Prescul 
indicative^  the  Past  indicative  and  the  Fast  participle.     lo 


08 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 


parsing,  the  mentioning  of  these  parts  is  called  congu-l^ 

gating  the  verb.     Thus  : —  i 

Present.                 Past.  Past  particiflc* 

Reguhtr                Love,                      loved,  loved. 

Irregular'             AVrile,                   wrote,  ^       written. 

237.  The  irreguhir  and  intrHnsitive  verb  "^  6r,"  is  used  as  a  prin- 
cipal verb,  and  also  as  an  auxiliarj  in  the  passive  voice,  and  in  the 
progressive  form  of  the  active  voice.  It  is  thus  inflected  through 
all  its  moods  and  tenses. 


CONGUGATION    OF    THE  VERB  TO  BE. 

Present.,  ».m.  7'<^6/,  was,  Past  pa rticij)le,  been. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


Sinf/ular 

1.  I  am. 

2.  Thou  art. 

3.  He  is. 


rUESENT  TEXSE. 


Plural. 

1.  We  are. 

2.  You  are. 
'.J.  Thej  are. 


1.  I  have  been. 

2.  Thou  hast  been. 
3^  He  has  been. 


rUEtJEiNT-rERFECT  TENSE. 

Sign.  have. 

1.  Wo  have  been. 


2.  You  have  been. 

3.  Thev  have  been. 


1.  I  was. 

2.  Thou  wast. 

3.  He  was. 


PAST  TENSE. 

1.  We  were. 

2.  You  were. 

3.  They  were. 


I>AST-1'EUFEC'J 


Sign,  ?ia(f. 


.    I  had  been. 

2.  Thou  hadst  been! 

3,  He  had  been. 


1.  We  had  been. 

2.  You  had  been.' 

3.  They  had  been. 


ETYMOLAGY — CONGUGATION.  60 

FUTURE  TENSE. 

Signs, s/<«//,  loill, — Inflect  with  each. 
Singulars  Plural. 

1.  I  shall  be.  1.  We  shall  be. 

2.  Shon  Shalt  be.  2.  You  shall  be. 

3.  He  shall  be.  3.  They  shall  be. 

PUTURE-PERPKCT   TENSE.  ' 

Signs,  shallhave,  willhave. — Inflect  with  each. 

1.  I  shall  have  been.  1.  We  shall  have  been. 

2.  Thou  sbalt  have  been.         »   *2.  You  shall  have  been. 

3.  He  shall  have  been,  3.  The}'  shall  have  been. 

POTENTIAL  MOOD, 

PRESENT    TENSE. 

Signs,  may,  can,  must. — Inflect  with  each. 

1.  I  maybe.  1.  We  may  bo. 

2.  Thoumaystbe.        •  2.  You  may  be. 

3.  He  may  be.  3.  They  may  be. 

PRESENT-PERFECT  TENSE. 

Signs,  may  have,  can  have,  or  munt  have  — Inflect  with  each. 

1.  I  may  have  been.  1.  We  may  have  been. 

2.  Thou  mayst  have  been.  2.  You  may  have  been. 

3.  He  may  have  been.  3^  They  may  have  been 

PAST  TENSE. 

Signs,  might,  could,  would,  sho>uld. — Inflect  with  each  = 

1.  I  might  be,  1.  We  might  be. 

2.  Thou  niightst  be.  2.  You     might  be 

3.  He  might  be.  3.  They  might  be. 

PAST- PERFECT  TENSE. 

Signs,  might  have,  could  have,  would  have,  should   have Inflect  with 

each. 

1.  I  might  have  been.  1.  Wgrnighthave  been. 

2.  Thou  mightst  have  bepu,  2,  You  might  have  been. 

3.  He  Bttight  have  been.  3.  They  mighthave  been. 


72  ENOLTSIT    OTIAMMAR. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 

PKKSKXr  tenSe. 
Singular.  Plural. 

■•1.  If  I  be.  1.  If  we  he, 

2.  If  thou  be.       '  '  2.  If  you  be. 

3.  If  he  be.  3.  If  ihey  be. 

PAST*  TENSE. 

1.  If  I  were,  1.  If  we  were.  1 

2.  If  thou  wert,  or  wore.  2.   If  you  were. 

3.  If  he  were.  3.  Iflheywere. 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

Siuguhtr.  Plural. 

1.  Be,  or  be  thou  2.. Be,  or  be  ye  or  you. 

INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

PRESENT  TENSE.  PERFECT  TENSE. 

To  be.  To  h.ave  been. 

PARTICIPLES. 
Present,  Being.         Past,  Been.  Perfect,  Having  been, 

1:538.  All  the  tenses  of  the  indicative,  and  also  of  the 
potential  mood,  are  used  siibjunctively,  by  placing  the 
conjunction  before  them,  thus  :  Present — *'lfl  am,"  "If 
thou  art,"  ^'Ifhe  is,"  &e.  Prcaenf perfect — "If  I  have 
been,"  &e.     Past—'-lil  was,"  &c. 

'..'59.  The  verl)  to  //<•  followed  by  an  inflnitive,  forms  a  particular 
future  tense,  which  often  expresses  </"/.'/,  ii'-res^ili/,  or  ^<»/7)o»c  ;  as, 
.'Government  is  to  be  .suppi  rted." — "Wemr  to  pay  onr  debts." 


T^ARSTNG. 

340.  A  verb  is  parsed  by  stating  irs  class  (transitive 
or  intran?;itive),  its  /orm  (regular  or  irregular)^  conguga' 


ETVAroT.nriY  — PK^po^TTT^>^^i^.  71 

ting  it^Sind  staling  its  t^isfi,  moo(f,  voice, person^  an»i  num- 
ber, and  also  the  snhject  of  which  it  affirms ;  thus, 

'•He  ii  " — h  is  a  verh,  intransitive,  irregular— «»?,  was,  been — f«)und 
in  the  present,  indir-ative,  active  -thini  person,  singular,  and  nffirraa 
of  its  subject,  Ir. 

M\.   Parsinu;  witli  llic  reasons  : 

Is  — a  vcrh,  because   it  afTirms  being  or  existence  of  " ffi." 

intraiisitire — it  has  no  object. 

in-rrjular — Its  past  tense  and  past  particicle  do  not  end  in  eJ— 
am,  iiuifi,  been. 

present — it  refers  to  present  time. 

7'H/^//oa^"re— it  declares  simply  and  without  limitation. 

active — its  subject  is  not  acted  upon. 

third  pcrfioii — its  subject  in  spoken  of, 

singular — -it  asserts  cf  but  one,  "He," 

PROPOSITIONS. 

;M2.  Every  proposition  must  liavc  &  snhject  tiwd predL 
cafe.  Tlie  subject  may  be  a  noun ,  pronoun,  or  j^^^^^^j^^^ 
must  always  be  in  the  nominative  case.  The  predicate 
must  be  a  verb,  in  the  indicative,  subjunctive  or  poten- 
tial mood.  Ifllie  predicate  is  the  verb  "to  be,"  it  will 
be  followed  by  a  noun,  pronoun,  adjective  or  phrase^ 
which  is  called  the  (lescriptive. 


^     EXERCISES, 

1  Stato^the  innee,  moody  fu-Ron  and  nuinler,  of  the  terb  "to  bi<,"  in 
the  following  examples  :  thus,  "Am,"  present  indicative,  active,  Grst 
person,  singular. 

Am,  is,  art,  I  was,  we  were,  tliey  are,  you  have  been, 
she  had.been,  he  was,  he  will  be,  they  shall.be,  we  had 
been,  htist  been,  hadst  been,  wast. 

We  may  be,  they  may  have  been,  he  might  be,  you 
might  have  been,  you  must  be^they  should  havebe^n 


72  ENGLISH    r.KAMMAE. 

if  I  be,  thou  wert,  though  lie  were,  if  I  luid  been,  though 
I  were,  if  we  coukl  have  been,  they  might  be. 

13e,  to  be,  do  ihou  be,  be  ye,  to  have  been,  being,  been, 
having  been,  be  thou. 

2.  la  tae  following  propositions,  tell  the  suhject,  predicate  and 
descriptive,  and  parse  each  word  carefully. 

Snow  is  white.  Soh)nian  was  a  wise  man.  Time  is 
preeious.  Trutli  is  powerful.  Falsehood  is  base.  Al- 
exander was  a  great  conqueror.  You  shou  d  be  dili- 
gent. The  telegraph  is  a  useful  jnvention.  If  you  be 
attentive,  3'ou  will  be  a  good  scholar.  If  they  had  beeji 
diligent,  they  would  have  been  wiser.  Be  careful. 
Honesty  is  the  best  policy.  "  Wisdom  is  the  principal 
thing."     "  Counsel  is  mine,  I  am  under.-tanding." 

CONJUGATION    OF    THE    REr,ULAR    VERB,  "  TO    LOVE." 

o43.  The  regular  transitive  verb  "  To  love''  is  Inflect- 
ed through  all  its  moods  and  tenseSj  as  follows  : — 

ACTIVE  VOICE. 

PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 

Pre3e?it,  love.  Past,  loved.  Ftiftt pariici/jle,  loved, 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

PRKSENT  TENSE. 

Singular.  Plural. 

1.  I  love.  ],  We  love. 

2.  Thou  lovest.  2.  i^ou  love. 
3-  He  loves  {or  loveth).  H.  They  love, 

PRESENT- PERFECT  TENSE. 
Sign,  hni'^. 

1.  I  have  loved.  1.  We  have  loved. 

2.  Thou  hast  loved.  2.  You  have  loved/ 
9.  He  has  loved.  3.  They  have  loved. 


*v- ^^•^i■ic^•■::'s^-s«!p:^^f . 


I 


ElYMOLOGY — CONJUaATION,  ^^ 

PA'^T  TENSK. 

1.  T  loved.  1.  We  loved. 

2.  Thou  lovedst.  2.  You  loved.    . 

i.  He  loved.  3.  They  loved.  ,      J 

Past  PERFECT  tense. 
Sign,  hud. 

1.  I  had  loved.  1.  We  had  loved. 

2.  Thou  hadst  loved,  2.  You  had  loved. 

3.  He  had  loved.  3.  T^hcy  "bad  loved. 

future  tense. 
SigQF,  shaU,  will. — Inflect  with  each. 

1.  I  shall  love.  1.  We  shall  love. 

2.  Thou  Shalt  love.  '  2.  You  shall  love. 

3.  He  sh  ill  love.  3.  They  shalUove. 

FUTURE  PERFECT    TKN.SE. 
Signs,  shall  have,  will  have. — Inflect  with  each. 

1.  I  shall  have  loved.  1.  We  shall  have  loved. 

2.  Thou  shult  have  loved,  2.  You  shall  have  loved. 

3.  He  shall  have  loved.  3.  They  shall  have  loved. 

POTENTIAL  MOOD. 

o 
PRESENT  TENflE. 

Sign-?,  mat/  can,  inuf.i. — Inflect   With  each. 

Singular.  Plural. 

1.  I  may  love.  1,  We  may  love. 

2.  Thou  mayst  love,  2.  You  may  love. 

3.  He  may  love.  3.  They  may  love. 

Present-perfect  tense, 

Signs,  may  have,  cdn  hive,  must  have. — Inflect  with  each, 

1.  1  may  have  loved.  1.  We  may  have  lovac" 

2.  Thou  mayst  have  loved.  2.  You  may  have  JO^^d. 
9t   He  may  have  loved.                    3<  They  may  have  loved. 


EXGLL^n    ORAMMAB. 


FAST  Tf:NSE. 


Signs,  iiii'jht,  co'uldj  irunhl,  sJinvld. — Tnllect  with  CAch. 
,      1.   I  might  love.  1.  Wc  might  love. 

2i  Thou  mightst  love.  '-.   Voii  might  love. 

3.  He  might  love.  3.  They  iuii^'hl  love. 

PAST  PFRVKCT  tt:n.sf:. 

UignS,  might  have,  couhf   hare,  v^^nhl  hare,    ahorilif    have. — loflicivvith 
each. 

1.  I  thigbt  have  loved.  1.  We  might  hojie  loved. 

2.  Thou  mightst  have  loved.  2.  Von  might  have  loved. 

3.  He  might  have  loved..  3.  They  miglit  have  loved. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


PRESENT  TL'KSE. 

/Singular,  rUiral. 

1.  If  I  love,  1.  If  we  love. 

2.  If  thou  love.  -.   If  you  love. 

3.  If  he  love.  3.  It  they  love. 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

l^hiijuhir.  riural. 

Common  form ^       2.  Love,  &/•  love  thou,-    2    Love,  or  love  ye  o;- yoil 
Emphatic prm.      2.  Do  thou  love.  2.  Do  ye  o;- you  love. 

INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Prksent,  to  love.  I^krfkct,  to  have  loved 

r 

.     PARTTCTPLES. 
Present,  loving.     Past,  loveil.         Pr.uKKrT,  having  loved. 
T'ARRTN(K 

344.  John  loves  learning. 

*'L(fve8." — db  verb,  transitive,  reijHhir,  coajugated  ^orf,   loced,    hv- 
•fd — f9UU4  IX^  ti)a,9  J>rQ8eiit  indicative,  avtlv»,  third  jierio'i,  Bingularp    and 


tTl'MOLOGt — PARSING  <5 

■"..'■  » 

exp^egse^  the  act  of  "John."     This  is  called  parsing,    iu  which  the 

pame  order  of  statement  should  always  be  olse  ved. 
'  315.  This  may  be  extended,  by  giving   tbo   reas  ns    of   each  state- 
ment, as  follows  :  , 
•  'Loves."— a  r^rb,  because  it  expresses  an  dct  of  ita  subject. 

trAnaititf,  because  it  has  an   object — feaniuifj. 

reijiilnr',  because  its  past  tense  and  participle  ends  in  eci. 

coiiJu<ja\ed,  lov*,  love  J,  loved. 

prt^^eiit,  it  exprofises  what  Joha  does  'iiov;, 

iiidirnticc,  it  expresses  the  act  aimjjfjj, 

liciiiti,  it  represents  the  subject  as  mtiog. 

third  person.  \U  subje<?t  is  spokeo  of. 

HI ny alar,  it  ass  rts  of  only  o;i*, 

T^XERCISE    T. 

Inflect  the  following  irregular  veibs  in  tie  same  n: at nerae  the  verb 
'  to  love"  : 

Present.  Pusl.  Pasi  participle. 

Go  went  gone 

Write  wrote  writtea 

Do  -         vdid  .  done 

Fall  IVll  fallen 

Give  gHve  giveti 

Have  had  bad 

ITJCERCISE  TT. 

Name  the  parts  of  each  proposition,  and  parse  all  the  words.— 
The  auxiliaries  are  not  taken  separattlv  :  thus,  7/«*  loitd,  is  a  verb, 
•fee,  mUfht  have  loved  is  a  Verb,   Ac. 

He  lovos.  Wo  have  loved.  lie  l.ved.  They  had 
loved.  You  shall  love.  The}'  may  ht  vo  Ic.ved.  Wo 
might  love.  Love  thou.  To  love.  You  had  gone. — ■ 
They  will  go.  To  have  gone.  We  will  write.  They 
may  write.  They  should  go.  lie  has  fallen.  You  had 
given  We  might  have  gone.  James  has  written.—. 
Robert  loves  to  write.  To  write  is  useful.  Having 
written.     We  gave.     They  have  given.     They  will  give, 


76  ENGLISH    QRAMMAJl. 

316.  A  transitive  verb  in  the  activQ  voice,  must  havo  a  noun  Oj 
pronoun  as  its  t-bject,  wliich  is  always  in  the  objective  case.  Hence 
a  transitive  verb  ui;\kes  a  tran?itivo  proposition.  In  the  following 
exercise,  name  the  parts  of  the  propositjori,  and  parse  each  word. 

lie  lovcR  US.  I  Will  love  him.  Good  boy?  stiuly 
their  lossons.  Cli'ldicn  love  to  play.  God  created  iho 
world.  Uemcinbci*  thy  Creator.  Do  goo^l  to  all  men. 
Forgive  your  enemii'S.  You  slioitld  stud}''  grammar. — 
AVe  should  read  the  best  books.  Bad  books  injure  the 
character.  War  makes  rogues,  peace  hai.gs  them. — 
ChiUlrcn  obe}'  j^our  parents.  A  good  cause  makes  a 
strong  arm.  Time  flics.  Evil  communications  corrupt 
good  manners.  Punctuality  begets  confidence.  Co- 
lumbus discovered  America. 

317.  The  verb  is  made  to  deny,  by  placing  the  word  not  after  the 
simple  form. 

348.  In  the  infinitivo  and  participle?,  the  negative  is  put  first  :  as, 
«  Not  to  love^'— "Not  loving." 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


PllKSfiNt.       1 

I  do  not  love. 

2. 

Thou  dost  not  love,  kc. 

PbK3-Pi:u.  1. 

I  have  not  loved. 

2. 

Thou  hast  not  loved,  &c. 

Past.           1. 

I  did  not  love. 

2, 

Thou  didst  not  love,  &c. 

Past-Picr    I. 

I  had  not  loved. 

•2. 

Thou  hadst  not  loved,  &c. 

Future.      1- 

I  will  not  love. 

2. 

Thou  wilt  not  love,  &c. 

FuT  Pkr.    1. 

I  shall  not  have 

2. 

thou  Shalt  not  have  loved, 

loved. 

&c. 

POTENTIAL  MOOD. 

Present.     1.  I  can  not  love.  2.  Thou  canst  not  love,  &o.     •    « 

Pues-Pkr    1.   I  may  nothave  loved.  2.  Tliou  raayst  not  have  lovedjj' 


2.  Thou  mightst  not  love,  &c.  .  '   j 

Past.            1-  I  might  not  love. 

Past  Pi  R.   1.  I  raigljt  not  have 

2.  Thon  mightst  not  have  iov-'"  1 

loved. 

ed,  &c.            ■      '    ■          '^  1 

„ 

^1 

ETYMOLOGY — CONJUGATION.  77 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present.     1.  1/ 1  do  not  love  2,  T^tboudo  not  love,  &c, 

lAJPI^RATlVE  MOOD. 
Singular.  Plural. 

2.  Love  not,  or  do  not  thou  love.  2.  Love  not.  or  do  ye  not  love, 

INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Present.     Not  to  love.  PaiiFECx.     Not  to  bvivc  lovtd, 

PARTICIPLES. 

Pretext.     Not  loving.  Past.     Not  loved. 

Perfect.     Not  having  loved. 

Intcrrogat lie  form  o/ the  Tcrh. 

319.  The  verb  is  made  to  ask  a  question  by  plating  the  nomina- 
tive or  subject  after  the  simple  form  ;  as,  "Lovcst  thou?  "  and  be- 
tween the  au.xiliary  and  the  verb  in  the  compound  forms  ;  "  Do  I 
love?"  When  there  are  two  auxiliaries,  the  nominative  is  placed 
between  them;  as,  "Shall  I  have  loved?" 

350.  The  subjunctive,  imperative,  infinitive,  and  participles,  can 
not  have  the  interrogative  form. 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 


Present. 

Do  I  love  .' 

o 

Dost  thou  love.'  &c. 

Pres.-Per 

Have  I  loved  .' 

2 

Hast  thou  loved  .•  &c. 

Pa'T. 

Did  I  love' 

') 

Didst  thou  love.'  cS:c. 

Past  Per. 

Had  I  loved  .' 

2_ 

Hadst  thou  loved  .'  &c. 

Future. 

Shall  I  love.' 

O 

Wilt  thou  love.'  kG. 

Fut,-Per. 

Shall  I  have 
Q  loved  ,' 

2. 

Wilt  thou  have  loved  .'  &c. 

POTENTIAL  MOOD. 


Preseivt. 

1. 

May  I  love  ? 

Pre8.-Per. 

1. 

May  I  have 
loved  .' 

Past. 

1. 

Might  I  love  ': 

Pabt-PkR 

1. 

Might  I  have 
loved  ' 

Canst  thou  love  '  &.C. 
Canst  thou  have  loved  ?  &c. 

Couldst  thon  love.'  &c. 
Couldst  thou  have  loved  .'  &c. 


78  ENGLISH   GRAMMAE. 

851.  lutorrogativc  sentences  are  made  negative  by  placing  the 
negative  either  before  or  after  the  nominative  ;  as,"  Do  1  not  love  ?" 
or,  "  Do  not  I  love  '  " 

Proijressive  fori)}  of  ihe  Acfh-e  Voire. 

352.  The  PiiOGREbi-ivK  form  of  the  verb  is  inflected  b}'  prefixing 
the  verb  to  be,  through  all  its  moods  and  ten&cs,  to  the  present 
participle  ;  thus — 

Presetvi'.       1,  I  am  writing.       2.  Thoxi  art  writing,  kc. 
PRKs.-rER.    1.  I  have  been  wri-  2    Thou  h;i:^t  been  writing,  &c. 

ting 
pA(*T.  1    I  wa:>  writing.      2.  Thou  wast  writing.  &c. 

Past-Per.     1.  1  had  been  wri-  2.  Thou  liadst  been  writing,  &,c. 

ting.  . 
FrruE.  ]     I  bhall  be  wri-     2.  Thou  shalt  be  writing,  &c. 

ting. 
Fut.-Per.     1.  1  shall  (>r  will       2.  Thou  shalt  or  wilt  have  been 
have  been  writing.  writing,  &c. 

353.  EMPHATIC  FORM. 

PRESKiNT    TEXSK. 

1    I  do  love.  1.  We  do  love. 

2.  Thou  dost  love.  2.   You  do  love 

3.  He  does  love.  3.  They  do  love. 

PAST  TENSK. 

1.  I  did  love.  1.  We  did  love. 

2.  Thou  didst  love.  2.  You  did  love. 

3.  He  did  love.  3.  They  did  love.  ' 

EXERCISES.  O 

1.  Change  the  following  verbs  from  tho  simple  into  the  progressive 
and  emphaHc  form.s  :  — 

He  writes.  They  road.  Tliou.  tt^acliest.  W.o.  have 
learned.  He  bad  written.  They  go.  Y«  u  will  build. 
Iran.      John  has  done  it.      We  taught.      He  stands. 


ETYMOLOGY— CON  JUG  AT  roN";  ^79 

Ho  .slu(xl.     Tlioy  will   stand.     They   may   read.     We 
c  »n  sew.     You  should  study.  .  We  iiiigbt  have  read. 

2.  Change  tbc  followiog,  from  the  progrtvji-,  o  into  the  simple  and 
emphatic  fbrins  :— ' 

We  arc  writing.  They  were  Fingiog.  They  havo 
been  riding.  We  might  be  walking.  I  ma}' have  been 
sleeping.  They  are  coming.  Thou  art  teaching.  They 
have  been  eating.  He  has  been  moving.  W^o  havo 
been  defending. 

9.  Parie  tKe'Ke  verbs,  in  each  lortn  ;  thus,"  We  nr<'  n-riting" — "arti 
vritiiiq"  is  a  verh.  tranBitive,  irregular — n:ritc,  irrote,  nridev — in  the 
pre»er»t,  indie itiv.\.  active,  first  i>crson,  plural,  pregressive  form. 


f»AS.SIYE  VOICE. 

.3^4.  The  Passive  voice  is  inflected  b}'  adding  tho 
past  partiQJple  to  Uie  verb '' /o  te,"  as  an  auxiliary, 
through  all  its  moodts  and  tenses,  thus  : — 

TRINCIPAL    TAUrS. 

Pffscni,  Am  luvcd.       Past,,  Was  loved.       Paf^t  participle,  loved, 
INDICATIVE    M<)')D 

.  .      ,  rUtSENT    TKNSi:. 

Singular  Plural. 

1    I  am  loved.  1.  We  are  loved. 

2.  Thou  art  loved  2.  You  arc  loved. 

3.  He  is  level.  o.  They  are  loved. 

rRKSi:N T-1'KKH:CT    TENSi:. 

1.  T  Imve  been  loved.  1.  Wc  have  been  loved. 

2.  Thou  hast'^ been  loved.  2.  I'ou  have  been  loved. 
8    Jle  lias  been  loved,                     3.  They  have  been  lovef]. 


so  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

PAST  TENSE. 

1.  I  was  loved.^  1.  We  were  loved. 

2.  Thou  wast  loved.  2.  Vou  were  loved. 
;).  lie  was  loved.                             3.  They  were  loved. 

PAST-PERFKCT  TEN"»E.l 
Sign,    had. 

1.  1  had  been  loved.  1.   We  hnd  been  loved. 

2.  Thou  luidstbeen  loved.  2.  You  had  been  lovfedii- 
8.  lie  had  been  loved.                    3,  Thej  had  been  loved. 

FUll'UE     TENSE. 

Signs,  shall,  will. — Inflect  with  encb. 

1.  T  shfill  be  loved.  1.  We  shall  be  loved. 

2.  Thou  sbalt be  loved.  2.  You  shall  beloved. 

3.  He  shall  be  loved.  3.  They  shall  be  loved. 

FUTURE-PERFECT    TENSE. 
Signs,  iJiall  have,  uill  have. — Inflect  with  each. 

1.  I  shall  liave  bccu  loved.  1    We  shall  have  bee)CJ  loved. 

2.  Thou  sbalt  have  been  loved.     2.  You  shall  have  been  loved. 

3.  He  shall  have  been  loved.         3.  They  shall  have  been  loved. 

POTENTIAL  MOOD. 

PRESENT  TENSE, 

Signs,  may,  ran,  nmst. — Inflect  with  each*. 
Singular.  Pltual. 

1.  I  may  be  loved.  1.  We  may  be  loved. 

2.  Thou  mayst  be  loved.  2.   You  may  be  loved. 

3.  lie  may  be  loved.  3.  They  may  be  loved. 

PRESENT-PERFECT     TENSE. 
Siprns,  may  have,  can  have,  must  have. — Inflect  with  each, 

1.  I  may  have  been  loved.  1 .  We  may  have  been  loved. 

2.  Thou  mayst  have  been  loved     2.  You  may  have  been  loved. 
6.  He  may  have  been  loved.  3.  They  may  have  i>een  lovedt 


ETYMOLOGY — ^^C()NJIJ(JAT10N.  81. 

PAST  TENSE. 
SignF,  might,  could,  ico'uld,  «Aoj«?c/.— Inflect  with  each. 

1.  I  might  be  loved.         '  1..  We  might  be  loved. 

2.  Thou  mightst  be  loved.  2-   You, might  be  loved, 
Sf.  tic  might  be  loved.  '  3.  They  might  be  loved, 

PAST-PERFKCT  TENSE. 

Signs,  might  have,  could  hare,  tcdttld   have,  should   have. — Inflect    with 

each. 

I.  I  might  have  been  loved.  1.  W6  might  have  been  loved. 

I.  Thou  mightst  have  been  loved.     2    You  might  have  been  loved. 
3.  He  might  have  been  loved.  3.  They  might  have  been  loved. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

PRESENT    TENSE. 

Singular.  Plural. 

1.  If  I  beloved.  1.  If  wc  be  loved. 

2.  If  thou  be  loved  2.  If  jou  be  loved 

3.  If  ho  be  loved.  .  A.  If  they,  be  loved. 

P.\ST  TKNSE. 

1.  If  I  were  loved.  1.   If  wc  were  loved, 

1.  If  thou  wertt»/ were  loved.         2.  If  you  were  loved. 
3.  If  he  were  loved.  .   3    If  they  were  loved. 

IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 

iiinf^ular.  Plural. 

2,  Be  thou  loved.  2.  Be  ye  o/  you  loved. 

.  INFINITIVE   MOOD. 
Present,  To  be  loved.  Perfect,  To  have  been  loved 

PARTICIPLES. 
Pres..  Being  loved.       Past,  Loved.        Per.,  Haying  been  loved. 

4b 


82  ENGLISH  GKA31MAR. 


PROGRESSIVE   PASSIVJE. 


355.  Nearly  all  gratnmarians  condemn  the  use  of  the 
progressive  passive  as  improper  ;  but  if  the  practice  of  the 
best  speakers  and  writers,  is  a  legitimate  standard,  such 
forms  must  be  accepted.  "The  house  is  heivg  huih;" 
''  The  money  teas  beivg  raised,"  are  samples  of  this  form. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  In  the  following  txercisee,  tell  the  tpnsr  mnod,  vo'cr,  nvnihcr  and 
person,  and  always  in  thie  order,  viz  :  "Is  loved  " — present  indica- 
tive, passive,  third  person,  singular. 

They  are  loved  ;  we  were  loved ;  thou  art  loved;  it  is 
loved  )  she  was  loved ;  he  has  been  loved  ;  you  have  been 
loved  ;  I  have  been  loved  -,  thou  hadatbecn  loved  ;  we  shall 
be  loved  ;  thou  wilt  be  loved  ;  they  will  be  loved ;  I  shall 
have  been  loved ;  you  will  have  been  loved. 

He  can  be  loved ;  thou  mayst  be  loved ;  she  must  be 
loved  ;  they  might  be  loved  ]  ye  would  be  loved ;  they 
should  be  loved;  I  could  be  loved;  thou  mayst  have  been 
loved ;  it  may  have  been  loved ;  you  might  have  been  loved  ; 
if  I  be  loved ;  thou  wcrt  loved  ;  we  be  loved ;  they  be 
loved.  Be  thou  loved ;  be  ye  loved  ;  you  be  loved.  To  be 
loved ;  loved  ;  having  been  loved ;  to  have  been  loved ;  be- 
ing loved. 

2.  Put  the  above  exercisep,  first  in  the  negative  form,  and  then,  ia 
the  indicative  and  the  potential  mood,  in  the  interrogative  form. 


QUESTIONS. 

Conjugate  the  verb  to  he  through  all  its  moods  and  tenses.  Give 
all  the  signs  of  the  tenses.  AVhat  is  a  tense  sign  ?  How  are  the 
indicative  and  potential  moods  use  subjunctively  ?  What  parlicn- 
Jar  future  is  formed  by  ^o  6e .^     How  ie   a   verb  parsed?     Parse  is 


ETYMO^LOGY — VERBS — IRREGULAR. 


83 


both  ways.  How  many  parts  hns  a  proposition?  What  may  the 
subje.ctbe?  What  case?  What  runy  the  predicate  be  ?  What 
m6od?  When  the  verb  to  be  is  predicnto,  what  mnst  follow?  Con- 
jugate the  verb  to  love.  Parse  loves  both  way?.  When  a  transitive 
verb  is  predicate  what  n^ust  follow?  How  many  parts  has  a  transw 
itive  proposition  ?  Give  the  negative  form  of  the  verb.  Give  thft. 
interrogative  form.  Conjugate  fhe  progressive  form.  The  emphat- 
ic form.  How  is  the  passive  voice  formed  ?  Conjugate  the  passive. 
What  is  said  of  the  passive  progressive  "i*  - 


LREEGULAI^  VEEBS. 


35G.  An  IRREGULAR  vcrb  is  cue  that  does  not  form  itk'^ 
past  tense  in  tlio  ttidicalivo  active,  and  its  past  partici- 
ple by  addin;;-  rd  lothc  ]!rof?cnt. 

457.  The  following  Hat  couijjrisfs  nearly  all  the  irregular  verbs 
in  tbelanguago.  These  conjugated  regularly,  aa  well  as  irre|rular!y. 
aretnarkod  with  an  R.  Those  in  >'UrI>c^  are  obsolete,  or  obsolescent* 
and  DOW  but  HI  tic  used  ••  •? 


Present. 

r.Mt. 

I'asl  Farik'q>ie^ 

Abide 

abode 

abode 

Am 

was 

been 

AriiiC 

arooc 

ai'iseu 

Awake 

nwokc;  U 

awaked 

Bake 

bakod 

baked, bakcn 

Bear,  to  ht  ifig  frrt/i 

bore,  hair 

born 

Bear,  (o  carrj/ 

boro.  bare 

borne 

Beat 

beat 

beaten,  beat 

Begin 

began 

begun 

Bend 

bent,  R 

bfeut.  K. 

Bereave 

bereft.  R 

bereft,  R 

Beseech 

besought 

besoi!g!-it 

Bid 

bid,  bade 

bidden,  bid 

Bind,  un- 

bound 

bound 

Bite 

bk. 

bitten,  bit 

Bleed 

bkd 

bled 

Blow 

blew- 

blown 

Break 

broke  ;6r«/ie 

broken,  brok^. 

S4 


ENGLISH  GEAMMAB. 


Tresent, 

Past, 

Past  Participle. 

Breed 

bred 

bred 

Dring 

brought 

brought 

Build,  re- 

built,  R, 

built,  R. 

Burn 

burnt.  R. 

burnt,  R 

Burst 

burst 

burst 

Buy 

bought 

bough  t 

Cast 

cast 

cast 

Catch 

caught  R. 

caught,  R, 

Chide 

chid 

chidden,  chid 

Choose 

chose 

chosen 

Cleave,  to  adhere 

cleaved,  clave 

cleaved 

Cleave,  to  split 

cleft,  clave 

cleft,  R.  cloven 

Cling 

clung 

clung 

Clothe 

clad,R. 

clad.  R 

Come,  Ac- 

came 

come 

cost 

cost 

cost 

Creep 

crept 

crept 

Crow 

crew,  R. 

crowed 

Cut 

cut 

cut 

Dare,  to  venture 

durst 

dared 

Dare  to  challenge, 

R.  dared 

dared 

Deal 

dealt 

dealt,  R 

Dig 

dug,  R. 

dug,  R. 

Do,  mis-  un- 

did 

done 

Draw 

drew 

drawn 

Dream 

dreamt,  R 

dreamt,  R. 

Drink 

drank 

drank, drunk 

Drive 

drove 

driven 

Dwell 

dwelt,  R. 

dwelt,  R. 

Eat 

ate,  eat 

eaten 

Fall,  he- 

fell 

fallen 

Feed 

fed 

fed 

Feel 

felt 

felt 

Fight 

fought 

fought 

Find 

found 

found 

Flee 

fled 

fled 

Fling 

flung 

flung 

Fly 

flew 

flown 

ETYMOLOGY — VERBS — IR  REGULAR. 


85 


Present. 


Past. 


Forbear 

forbore 

Forget 

forgot 

Forsake 

forsook 

Freeze 

froze 

Get,  be- for- 

gotj  gat 

Gild 

gilt,  R. 

Gird,  be-  en- 

girt,  R, 

Give, /or-  mis- 

gave 

Go,  under - 

went 

Grave,  en-  R, 

graved 

Grind 

ground 

Grow 

grew 

Hang 

hung 

Have 

had 

Hear 

heard 

Heave 

hove,  R. 

Hew 

heved 

Hide 

hid 

Hit 

hit 

Hold,  be-  with- 

heid 

Hurt 

hurt 

Keep 

.    kept 

Kneel 

knelt,  R. 

Knit 

knit,  R, 

Know 

knew 

Lade,  to  load 

laded 

Lay 

laid 

Lead,  mis- 

Led 

Leave 

left 

Lend 

lent 

Let 

let 

Lie,  to  recline 

lay 

Light 

lighted,  lit 

Lose 

lost 

Mflkc 

made 

Mean 

meant 

Xlcet 

met 

Mow 

mowed 

Past  Participle. 

forborne 

forgotten,  forgot 

forsaken 

frozen 

gotten,  got 

gilt,  R. 

^vi,  R. 

gi^en 

gone 

graven,  graved 

ground 

grown 

hung 

had 

heard 

hoven, R. 

hewn,  R. 

hidden,  hid 

hit 

held,  holden 

hutt 

kept, 

kjjelt,  R. 

kni*^  knitted 

known 

laden 

laid 

led 

left 

lent 

let 

lain,  lien 

lighted,  lit 

lost 

made 

meant 

met 

mown 


86 


ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 


Present. 

Past 

Past  participle. 

Pay,  re- 

•  paid 

p"aid 

Ton,  to  enclose 

pentjR. 

pent,  R. 

Put 

put 

put 

Quit 

■  quit,  R; 

quit,  R. 

Read 

read 

lead 

Rend 

rent 

rent 

Rid 

rid 

rid 

Ride 

rode,  rid 

ridden,  rid 

Ring 

rang. rung 

lung 

Rise,  a- 

rose 

lisen 

Rive 

rived 

riven,  R. 

Rot 

rotted 

rotten,  R 

Run 

ran.  f  ftn 

run 

Saw 

sa'wed 

sawed,  R. 

Say 

said 

snid 

See 

saw 

seen 

Seek 

sought 

sought 

Seethe 

seethed, sod 

seethed,  sodden 

Sell 

sold 

Fold 

Send 

sent 

sent 

Set,  Ac- 

set 

get 

Shake 

ebook 

shaken 

Shape,  mis- 

eliaped 

shapen, R 

Shave 

thaved 

shaven, R 

Shear 

sheared 

shorn,  R* 

Shed 

shed 

shed 

Shine 

shone,  R' 

shone,  R. 

Shoe 

shod 

shod 

ShoDt 

shot 

shot 

Show 

showed 

shown,  R 

Shrink 

shrunk,  sh) aiik 

shrunk 

Shred 

shred 

shred 

Shut 

shut 

shut 

Sing 

sang,  sung 

<-ung 

Sink 

sunk,  sank 

sunk 

Bit 

sat 

sat 

Slay 

slew 

slain 

Sleep 

slept 

slept 

ETYMOLOGY —  VERBS— 

-IKREGULAR. 

Present, 

Past. 

Past  participle. 

Slide 

slid 

slidden,  slid 

Sling 

slung,  slang 

slung 

Slink 

slunk 

slunk 

Slit 

slit 

slit,  slitted 

Smite 

smote 

smitten 

Sow,  to  scatter 

sowed 

sown,  K. 

Speak,  he- 

spoke,  spake 

spoken 

Speed 

sped 

sped 

Spell 

6pe?t.  R. 

spelt,  R. 

Spend,  mis- 

spent 

spent 

Spill 

spilt,  R. 

'  spilt,  R.     . 

Spin 

spun,  span 

spun 

Spit,  be- 

spit,  spat 

spit 

Split 

split 

split 

"Spread,  be- 

spread 

spread 

Spring 

sprang,  sprung 

sprung 

Stand,  with-.  &c- 

stood 

stood 

Steal 

stole 

stolen 

Stick 

stuck 

stuck 

Sting 

stung 

stung 

Stride,  be- 

strode,  strid 

stridden,  strid 

Strikc 

^ truck 

struck,  stricken 

String 

strung 

strung 

Strive. 

strove 

striven 

Strew,  6c- 

strewed 

strewed,  strewn 

Strow,  Re- 

strowod 

strewed,  strown 

swear 

swore,  sware 

sworn 

Sweat 

sweat,  R. 

sweat,  R. 

Sweep 

swept 

swept 

Swell 

swe'led 

swollen,  R. 

Swim 

swam  ur  swum 

swum 

Swing- 

swung 

swung 

Take,  6c-,  &c, 

took 

taken 

'J  each,  mis-  re- 

taught 

taught 

Tear 

tore, ^rt re 

torn 

Tell 

told 

told 

Think  be- 

(■bought 

thought 

Thriye 

thrived,  throve 

thriven,  R. 

8T 


88 


ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 


,,      .    y 

■  '{TA 

Present. 
Throw 
Tlr  ust 
Tread 

Past. 
thiew 
thrust 
trod 

Past  participle. 
thrown 
tlirust 
trodden, trod 

Wax 

wuxed 

waxen,  R. 

Wear 

•were 

worn 

''  '' 

Weave 

wove 

woven 

Weep 
Wet 

wept 
wet,  R, 

wept 
.wet,  R. 

Whet 

whet,  R. 

whet.R. 

Win 
Wind 

won 
wound,  R. 

won 
wound 

Work    • 

wrought,  R. 

wrought,  R. 

Wring 
Write 

.wrung,  R. 
wrote 

wrung 
written 

DEFECTIVE  VEKBS. 

358.  A  Defective  verb  is  one  in  which  some  of  the 
parts  are  Avanting.  The  following  list  comprises  the 
most  important.     They  are  irregular,  and  chiefly  aux- 


iliary  : — 
Present. 

Past. 

Present. 

Past. 

Can 

could 

Shall 

should 

May 
Must 

might 

Will 

Wist 

would 
wist 

Ought 
Quoth 

359.  Ought, 

origin 

quoth 
Imperatii 
ally    the  y 

)asi 

Wit,      ) 

Wot     5 

-Beware. 

t  teusc  of  owe, 

U 

wot 
now  used  to 

signify  present 

duty, 

and  must, 

to 

denote  present 

obligation  or  ne» 

cessity. 

IMPiJRFONAL  VERBS. 


360.  hvjycrsonul  verbs  arc  thok'  which  assert  ihe  ex- 


ETYMOLOGY — EXERCISES.  89 

* 

istence  of  some  action  or  state,  but  refer  it  to  no  par- 
ticular subject.  They  are  always  in  the  third  person 
eingufar,  and  in  Englisli  are  preceded  by  the  pronoun 
k ';  as,  ''It  rains"— It  hails"— ''It  hehooves,*'  &c.     ■  '^"^^  " 

361.  To  this  class  of  words  belong  the  expressions,  /n^TAin^*, 
methought ;  nusectns,  ?iiesccvicd  ;  someiimes  used  for ''Jt  seems 
to  me"— "It  appears  to  me"  &c. 

EXERCISES. 

1.  Cpnjugato  tho  following  irregular  verba,  and  tell  which  are  tran- 
»itive,  and  which  are  also  regul.ar, 

Take,  drive,  creep,  begin,  abide,  buy,  bring,  arise, 
catch,  bereave,  am,  burst,  draw,  drink,  fly,  flee,  faJI,  get, 
give,  go,  feci,  forsake,  grow,  have,  hear,  hide,  keep, 
know,  lose,  pay,  ride,  ring,  shake,  run,  seek,  sell,  see, 
fit,  slay,  slide,  smite,  speak,  stand,  tell,  win,  write, 
weave,  tear. 

EXERCISES  ON  THE  PRECEDING  PARTS  OF  SPEECH. 

Tell  what  kind  of  a  preposition  and  give  the  parts  ;  parse  each 
word  carefu'lj-, 

[The  words  in  Italics  are/'ro/'osi7io;?cS,  and  the  nouns  oriiroripuns 
following  them  are  in  the  objective  case.] 

The  wind  f^hakes  the  trees.  The  apples  fell  ^o  the 
grou'  d.  Cod  created  all  things.  The  heavens  are  the 
work  of  his  liands. 

Alexander  the  Great  conquered  many  countries.  The 
sun  shines.  The  fields  are  covered  with  grain.  The 
crops  are  excellent.  The  rivers  run  into  the  sea.  A 
good  man  shows  pity  to  the  poor.  The  fear  of  the  Lord 
is  the  beginning  of  wisdom.  Eemember  thy  Creator  in 
the  days  o/ thy  3'outh.  Time  flies.  All  things  come 
foanerid.  A  bad  man  can  not  be  happy.  Redeem 
time.     Do  good  to  all  men.    Truth  is  mighty. 


90  ENGLISH    GRAAIMAR. 

ADYEEBS. 

332.  An  Adveri;  is  a  word,  j'^ined  to  a  i^erb,  ah  «<:?- 
;>(:?ii;e^  or  another  mhuiih,  to  inudify  it,,  or  lo  denoie 
some  ci rciinistanpe  respect ini;-  i  L ",  as .  '*  A n  r.  speaks  dk- 
tinctlff  ;  she  in  remar/uibly  diligent,  and  rcadn  very  car- 
recthj," 

'^^?>.  Anadrerl)  li  geneT-ally  rnuivulent  to  fi  modifying  pbrapp.  or 
a-^juDct  of  the  wori  to  wbich  it  is  joined.  Thus,  in  the  i  re'«cding 
example,  '  ditilinclfj/"  mettni^,  in  a  dint'w.-l  vnuincr  ;  "rcmoihnhhf,"  i'»  a 
rtiu'ii  ktible  decree.  Ilenco,  a-'verbs  ard  adv  rbial  a<)juiicts  are  often 
u»ed  indiscriminately  in  modifying  verbs,  adjectives,  aiid  adver'be. 

864,  On  the  eaiuo  }irinciplo  that  an  jidverb  modifies  another  adverb, 
it  somotirnes  also  modirt^a  an  a'lju'^ct,  a  phrase,  or  a  s'onteno,  ;  as, 
*  I   met  your  brother  far  front,  home."  ,■ 

365.  An  adjunct,  .without  tiie  word  to  which  it  belongs,  is  called 
an  adverbial  j^hrase ;  as,  in  $h<or  t,  in  vain,  «"  ffentral,  a(  most,  at  least, 
al  all,  on  hiyh. 

CLASSIFICATION   OF    ADVEUBS. 

366.  Adverbs  have  been  divided  into  various. chis^ies, 
according  to  their  signitication  The  chief  of  tliesoare 
the  following  :  — 

1.  Adverbs  of  ncanner  ;  ii$,Ju:stli/,  hravdy,  soJ'Ui/,  kv. 

2.  Oi  Place ;  as,  here,  there,  where — hither,- thence,  k\:, 

3.  OfTme  ;  &B,  now.  thert,  tohen,  soon,  often,  never,  &c. 

4.  Ot  Direction  ;  &^,  uptv  ard,  downward,  forward,  kc. 

5.  0(  Affirmation  ;    as,  ye*,  verily,' certainly,  doubtless,  &c. 

6.  0^  Negation;   as,  nay,   no,  not,  nowise,  kc. 

T:  Of  Interrogation  ;  as,  hdxo  ?  why  ?  mlien  ?  where  ?  whither  ?  &o» 
-8,'  Of  Comparison  ;  as,    more,  7nost,hss,as,  so,  thus,  &c^'''liju.   u 
9.  OL  Quantity  ;  iks,  much, .some,  little,  ".aoujhjSiilficienlly  ,&,<!. 
lo.  Of  Orde,r  ;  as,  Jirst,  fieco'tdly,  thirdly,  nccf,  &c. 
367.   There,  commonly  used  as  an  adverb   of  place,  is, often  used  as 
an  inii'odiK'for}/  4' .ptfiiiu-  to  the  ve'l)'}  lo  hf,  to  cnnr,   to  nj,pcar,  and  some 
others,  wh  n  the  subject,  ia  de.daratory  aantonees,  follows  the  verb  ; 
sbSf  as,  "Tl^ora  is  no.doul^t  qX  the  fs^ot." 


ETTl^ULOGY — ADVERBS, 


91 


•  Then  Joes  not  always  rcfar  to  time,  but  it  is  used  to  indicate  a  cer- 
tain cirru-nkancc,  or  a  case  supposed  ;  a?,  "If  you  will  go,  ihen  [that 
is,  ih  that  case]  say  so." 

Nqv:  is  6 '.n?.© times  used  without  reference  to  t'me,  merely  \o  indi- 
cate the  trangitibn  from  r>n^  sentence  to  another  ;  a?,  "Not  this  man, 
bat  Barabbas.     Now  liarabbas  uas  a  robber." 

?6S.  The  words  io  day,  to  nlijhi,  to  utorroir,  i/cHlLidt>i^  used  ae  ad- 
juncts, ttiBy  be  called  adveibs  oftjme,  or  they  may  be  regarded  as 
nouns  in  the  objective  caPC,  without  the  governing  word. 

369.  In  comparison,  f«8  aud*o,  in  the  at  teoedent  clause,  are  usual- 
ly reckoned  advc.b?,  because  they  modify  an  adject' ve  or  an'ther 
adverb.  The  corroppontsing  f»«  and  «*>,  sometimes  called  conjunctions, 
are  properly  adverbs  also,  because  resglvable  into  an  adjunct. 

H70.  Therefore,  ic/icrcj'orc,  aho,  sometimes  called  conjunctions,  are 
more  prwperly  adverbs,  because  used  for  the  a.<iyiiicli-,  fur  thin  reason, 
for  which   re((:-'ju,  in  additio),. 

CONJUNCTIVE    ADVERBS. 

371.  A  Covjii nctive  Adi-erbH  QWQ  ih^i  stands  for  two  adjuncts, 
one  of  which  contains  a  relative  pronoun,  and  the  other  its  ante- 
cedent ;  thus,  "I  will  see  you   iL-hcn  you  come.*' 

These  adverbs  perform  a  double  office;  they  mo  ify  ti^o  d  fferftnt 
words,  and  connect  the  clauses  to  which  they  belong.  They  are  when, 
where,  while,   whither. 

FORMATION   AND   UElilVATION  cF  ADVERBS. 

372.  Adverbc  are  formed  and  derived  from  other  words  tn  various 
ways  :  — 

1.  A  few  adver'^'s  are  primitive,  or  dcrivei  from  no  other  words  in 
the  language  :  aP,  ye.v,  no,  noi,  here,  there,  nov,    then,   Sec. 

2.  Many  adverbs  of  quality  or  manner,  are  derived  from  adjectives 
by  adiinj?  ly  ;  as  dUiyent,  diHyently  ;  hopjiy,  hnjipily  ;  or  by  changing 
le  into  ly  ;  as  ahlt,  »,bly  ;  Diinpfc]  simply. 

S  Many  coHfj;oi/jK)?  adverbs  are  formed  by  combining  words  together, 
60  as  of  two  or  more  words  forming  an  adjunct,  (o  make  one  com- 
pound term  ;  as,  indeed,  hereby,  thereby,  n^hereuith,  therefore,  xihereso- 
ever,  nertrthdcss,  <f-c.  , 

4.  Some  nouns  and  other  words  are  converted  into  odverbs  by  pre- - 
fixiug  «,  signifying  at,  in,  an,  &c.  j  as,  abed,  ashore,  aloft,  ahead,,  astern 
af/round,  apart,  ad-sft,  afrenk,  alike,  asleep,  <fc';. 


1^2  ENCJLISII     GRAMxMAR. 

'5.  Circums^an  03  of  time,  pi  ape,  manner,  Ac  ,  aro  <'ftcii    cxfrccsed 
by  two  or  more  words  constituting  an  adrcrbiitl  phrase  ;  as,  at  length 
not  At  nil,   hi/  no  7nraus,  \n  vain,  in  order  l<>n</  ayo,  hj-itnd  hif,  all  over,     \ 
to  and  fro,  for  ever,  lie.     ^ucb  plirascs  may   bu  takeu    <<)</t-</ttr  as  one    I 
word, 

COMPARISON  OF    Aini  RBS. 

373  Adverbs  of  qiialitj-,  derived  from  udjepiives,  and 
a  fcvy  otherfei,  admit  of  comparison  like  adjectives;  as, 
nobly,  more  nobly,  most  r.ohly  ;  soon,  sooner,  sooned. 

The  following  are  compaicl  irregularly  ;   as — 

Fos.  Comp.  Si'P- 

Badly  or  ill  worse  worst 

Far  farther  farthe.-t 

Little  less'  least 

Much  more  most 

Well  belter  best 

PARSING. 

374.  An  Adverb  is  parsed  by  s'ating  what  part  of 
speech, — the  class  to  which  it  belongs — the  word  which 
it  modifies —  its  derivation  and  comparison,  if  derived 
and  compared.     Thus: — 

"He  speaks /Mg?2%." — Fluently  an  adverb  of  manner,  and  modi-, 
fieg  "  s/ea^*  ;"  derived  kom  fluent  ;  and  compared  more  flucnthj^  mo.^t 
fluently. 

EXEHCISES. 

Tell  to  wkat  to  class  the  following  adverbs  belong— wbetber  primi- 
tive or  derivative  if  not  primitive,  how  f^cy  are  formed — compare, 
if  compared  ; — 

Justly,  wisely,  happily,  beautifully,  (iishionably,  suf- 
l^cientl3^  thirdly,  nearly,  almost,  perfectly. 

Here,  there,  anywhere,  hither,  thither,  yes,  no^ therice, 
Somowhere — now,  then,  to-day,  hereafter.  • 


ETyMOtO(3Y — I>REPaSlTiONS.  93 

EXRRCISE3    ON  ADVERBS.  IRREGULAR  VERB3,  <SrC. 

Parse  the  following  exercise?,  and  tell  the  parts  of  the  proposi- 
tion :  — 

Peter  wept  bitlcrly.  He  is  here  now.  She  went 
away  3^esteFcliiy.  They  came  to-day.  They  will  per- 
haps'buy  some  tomorrow.  Ye  shall  know  heroafter. 
She  sung  sweetly.  Great  men  are  not  alwa3\s  wise. — 
Mary  rose  up  ha^til3^  They  that  have  enough  may 
soundl}^  sleep  Cain  wickedly  slew  his  brotlier.  Isaw 
him  long  ago.  He  \»  a  very  good  man.  Sooner  or  la- 
ter all  must  die.     You  read  too  little. 

QUESTIONS. 

What  isanadrerb?  Adverbs  are  equivalent  to  what?  Ex- 
plain 364.  Slate  the  classes  of  adverbs,  t^ive  cxaaiples  of  each 
class.  Explain  there.  What  is  said  of  then,  jiioiv,  to-day  as  and  so 
therefore?  What  is  said  of  conjunctive  adverb?  Name  them. — 
Wbatis  a  simple  adverbs  ?  A  derivative,  a  compound  ?  How  are 
some  nouns  converted  into  a<lverbs  ?  WUiat  are  adverbial  phra- 
ses ?     Are  adverbs  compared?     How  is  an  adverb  parsed? 


PREPOSITIONS. 

375.  A  Preposition  is  a  word  wiiieh  show^s  the  reta^ 
tion  between  a  noun  or  pronoun  following  itj  and  some 
other  word  In  the  sentence  ;  as,  "The /ore  of  moneys ^-^ 
^^  Come 'TO  me." 

"  ,376.  Instead  of  a  noun.or  pronoun  a  preposition  maybe  followed 
by  an  infinitive  mood,  or  clause  of  a  sentence,  used  as  a  substan- 
tive; as,  "  We  are  about  to  Je^iart." — "Honored  for  having  done  his 
duty." — "The  Qv'xmo.oV being  a  young  many 

377  The  preposition  and  ila  object  nnitel  nre  called  an  (tdptnct;  — 
aiijuncts  are  used  to  explain  either  substantives,  or  verbs,  and  hence 
are  equivalent  either  to  adjectives  or  adverbst 


94 


ENQLtSil    GRAM  MA  ti. 


378.       LIST  Of  I'KEPOSITIONS. 


About 

Above 

Across 

After 

Agrtinst 

Betwixt 

Beyond 

But 

By 

Concerning 

Down 

During 

Except 

Excepting 

For 

From 

379.  The  prefix  a  in 


To  be  got  accaratcly  by  heart. 
Around 
At 

Athwart 
Before 
Bt'hind 


Along 

Aii.id      \ 

Atuid^t  j 

Among 

Amongst 

In 

Into 


NotwilhstandingR 


Hound 

Save 
ince 


Btlow 
Beneath 
■Boside      "> 
Besides.  / 
Between 
rnderuenth 
Vntil 
Into 
Tp 
Upon 
With 
Within 
Without 


Of  Through 

Off  Throughout 

On  Till 

Over  To 

Out  of  Toui'bihg 

Past  Toward      \ 

Regarding  Towards    j 

Respecting  Fnder  • 

the  seoee  of  at,  in,  oti,  &c.,  seeras-to  have  the 
force  of  a  prepoKitiop  in  such  expressions  as  a  vemliitf),  a  nmnifig,  a 
gciiiy,  a  huntinfj,  dc,  and  may  be  parsed  as  such. 

380.  To,  the  sign  of  the  iafinitivc  miiuil,  shA)ubl  not  be  regarded  as 
a  prepositioQ,  but  as  a. sort  of  prefix  bcdouging  to  the  form  of  the  verb 

in  that  part. 

381.  When  a  piejoition  has  not  an  object,  it  becomes  an  «(//-fri  ,•  as, 
«'He  rides  about."  But  in  such  phrases  as  cost  nj,,  hold  out,  fall  on, 
(i'c.,  up,  out,  on,  should  ba  considered  as  a  part  of  the  verb  to  whii  b 
they  are  joined,  rather  than  as  preposi-ions  or  adverb.>». 

382."  All  words  used  ii.s  prepositions  are  followed  by  au  objective 
case,  and  may  by  this  be  distinguished  from  other  words. 


PARSING . 


'183.  A  preposition  is  parsed  by  statlnf^  what  part  of 
speech,  and  between  what  words  it  shows  the  rehition  ;   * 
tinis,  "■  The  waters  o/ Jonhm."    O/is  a  preposition,  and 
shows  the  rehition  betsveeii  Jordan  and  ivatern. 

Here  Jordan  is  the  rogimpn  of  the  preposition  of  ;   of  Jordan  U  th« 
adjunct  of  toafe/-»;  an  I  iya<<;>-a  is  the  principal   tj  which   the  a<ijanct* 
belongs. 


fit^MOLOGY — INTfeRjECTTONS.  95 


EXEllClSifiS. 

In  the  following  sentenoea  poiot  out  Ike  prepositions,  aud  tbe  wordj 
between  which  it  sbowd  the  relation.  Name  the  f((//</«ct  and  jyrinci' 
pal      In  what  sentences  has  the  principal  m)re  than  one  adjunct. 

He  went  tVom  Roston.  He  went  tp  WaBhington. — 
He  went  from  Boston  to  ^Vashiniiton.  We  renide  in 
the  oouniiy.  All  rivnrs  flow  into  the  sea.  He  gave  his 
book  to. me.  He  gave  [to]  me  his  boolc.  Flowers  bloom 
in  summer.  In  Bumnui  flowers  bloOm.  He  gave  part 
of  his  dinner  to  a  poor  man  in  the  street.  He  was  trav- 
elling towards  liome  when. w^  met  him  at  Milan,  with- 
out a  single  attendant. 

QUESTIONS. 

What  is  ft  preposition?  By  what  nuiy  it  b»^  followed?  What  is 
an  adjuiut''  What  do  adjuncts  exphiin  ?  Thej  are  eqiiivKlent  to 
what  parts  of  speech  ?  Uepeat  moat  of  the  prepogitions.  What 
is  the  force  of  the  prefix  </ .^  What  is  said  of /o?  When  does 
a  preposition  become  an  adjunct?  Give  some  examples.  By  what 
must  apreposiiiou  be  followed?  Howls  a  preposition  parsed  ? — * 
Point  out  the  subject  and  predicate  of  each  proposition  in  the  exer- 
cises. 


interjectio:ns. 

384.  An  iNTERJEOTroN  ifl  a  word  used  in  exclama, 
tions,  to  express  an  emotion  of  the  mind  ;  as,  "  Ob  I 
what  a  fall  was  there  I" 

836.  The  Intfi-jf^'Hion  ia  so  called,  because  it  is,  as  it  Were,  ihrotcnia 
fimou;/  the.  words  of  a  sentence,  without  an^'  grammatical  conaectien 
w\tb  them.  Sometimes  it  stan<ls  at  the  beginning  of  a  Eentence,8ome- 
times  in  the  middle,  and  s!ometimes  it  stands  alone,  as  if  the  emotion 
were  too  strong  to  admit  of  other  words  being  spoken. 

A  LIST  OF  INTEllJECTIONS. 

386.  The  followirg  is  alitt  uf  ihe    in  erjections  most   commonly 


y6  ENGLISH  GRAMilAE.      ♦ 

c-  '      •    .  • 

used.     Thej  express  various  kinds  of  emo'iou  but  in  so  vague  find 
indefinite  a  way,  as  not  to  adnut  of  accurate  classiGcation  : — 

Ah!  alas!  0!    oh!  ha!    fudge!   tush!    pshaw!  poh  I    pugh  !   fie 
avannl !  ho!  liolla !    aha!    hurrah!    huzza!    bravo!    his!    hush  i^ 
heigho  !  htjdaj  !  hail  !  lo  !  welcome  !  halloo  !  adieu  !  &c. 

387.  Also  sonic  words  belonging  to  other  parts  of  speoeh  when  ut- 
tered in  an  unconnected  and  forcible  manner,  toexprefs  omotii.n,  are 
called  interjections  J  as,  nonHcnne  !  tstrai}<jc  !  icuudo/ul !  Hhocliity  ! 
irhat  f  hah  old  !  off.'  a  wo  if !  harh  :  come!  will  done}  tvelcohie  !  'd-c, 

888;  0  is  used  toexprefs  wishing  or  exclumation,  and  shou+d  bo  pre- 
fixed only  to  a  noun  or  pronoun, in  a  direct  address;  as,  O  virtue  !  how  . 
amiable  thuu  art  !"     Oh  is  used  detached  from  the  word,   with  a  point  , 
of  exclamation  after  it,  or  after  the  nrxt  word.     It    implies   an  emo- 
tion of  pain,  sorrow,  and  suprise  ;  as,  "Oa  !  what  a  ^^ght  is  here  !" 

PARSING. 

389.  An  intnyctton  is  parsed  b}-  staling  the  part  of 
speech',  wh}^,  and    the    emotion  expressed;  as,    "Oh! 
wl^at  a  sight  is   here!"     OA— an   interjection,  because 
used  as  an  oxelc'imatlon,  and  expresses  an    emotion  o]^- 
pain.  ', 

QUESTIONS.  ','.^ 

What  is  an  interjection?  Why  so  called?  Why  are  they  tiot 
classed  ?  Repeat  tlieni.  What  other  words  are  so  used  ?  Explain 
the  use  of  O  and  oh.     How  is  an  interjeation  parsed? 


CONJUNCTIONS. 

390.  A  CON^^NCTio^-  is  a  word  which  connects  wordi* 
or  sentences  ;  as,  "lie  and  I  must  go  ;  hut  you  may  aiay." 

891.  litre,  and  connects  the  words  //t  and  /,  and  hut    connects  the  j,^ 
sentences,  **  He  and  I  miiHt  t/o"  and,  ''i/ou  may  ntcii/." 

392.  Cupjunctions  aometimef  begin  Bentences,  even  after  a  full  pe^ 
rlod,  to  show  a  connection  between  sentences  in  the  general  tenor  of 
discouise. 


ETVM  >LOGY — CONJUNClTOS.  97 

I  o3>  Coiijiinotivnii  are  divided  iuto  two  classes  :  Cop- 
'  7'^ ///r<;  and  D'sj'unc'ive.  ^ 

'•'i  [.  Copul.itive  conjimctioas  connect  things,  that  are  to  be  con- 
si  I 're>Vt;J!.i^'.nUei\     Thev  are,  and^  hoi/ij^as,  heeause^for,  if,  since,tha&i 

:  I")  I V  /  i^  tlie  princip.il  copulative,  and  connects  what  follows 
H  ^  h)  that  which  pr'Ocedes.     The    oihers    connect    what 

(uIImw.^  ;i:i  w  ■  yidltioii,  'f.fi^osUion ,  caus/",  motive,  Si'c. 

;  '  yp'D'y'ifirUec  co'-^n'wAiom  connect  tliiag.j  that  are  to  be  con- 
>    ;   ;el  st'poritely.     Tu.t Jeading    disjunctives    are,   or,  nor,  either^ 

.  r,  (hvi,  I'lO'ij'i,  aWi^i/h,  i/'it,  ha',  excqH,  whether,  Icsf, unless, 
.;'i''an  ti.ij.  nar-\  prori  '(■^•1,   ichereas.  i 

PAUSING. 

oOT.     A  conjiiiciion    i^    par.-ed    by    stating  the  part  of 
iiU;  if  J  ( 1-IS3,  an  1  the   words  or  Gontcuces  which  it  con- 
rio  'ii'-I  r  nrnt  g»  ;    '>;i'  you  imy  stay/' 
Ind—ii  (■•.)[nilati vt."  co* "ju'iclion  ami  connects  Jle  and  /. 
/;  /.' — i  fR  jiinotivo  <:oi)juMClion,  nnd  coniiect.?  the  sentences,   *'  He 
ill  f  ^<l  1  ;t  g),''  b.tf,  ''  yri  nwy  st.»y,"'  j| 

?,'.)d.  onsr.isv.vTiONS. 

1,  Wbeu  two  nouns  or  pr-m   uns  arc  ccnooo'.f  rl.they  are  in  (he  same 

V;!;,'  ,  »itl  i'l   the  fa-Jie  «s>iistrm"tM»ii. 

2.  ^Vhf'i  (  >  >  verbs  aro  onticcrrtl,  they  have  the  saiuo  subject;    as 

•'  .f  i!';   r-  :<;;.l;  and  writes." 
li     \Vlieii  liv»  a.lj  !v.'t'ves  are  comcctHl,  tlic^y  ((tialify  the  fame  noun 
,. ,     or  i.i'  Ji.i'un. 

4    Wh-Mj  »>v'.  ahcibs  nro  connected,  <hoy  nr  dil'y  the  same  word. 
4»    W!j-n  <MM.j'i:!c!i>ns  connect  «t'»r:,»ccs,  they  do  not  conncrt  indi- 
,  '^       vi<!o  .1  w  rds  in  t'  c  scntrneo. 

■  1.  I'!  the   foil  wirg  fciitcRce^,  ptint  out  the  copjunctions,  and  etato 
htit  words,  ..r  s:5!\le:'!iei:.  or  phriso?,   t'joy  connuct.       f'omstiuics  the 
order  U  S)  iuvrle  I,  tie^  thy  co'ij  I'ictLv:  clause  stands  Grst; 

•5 


98  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

2.  Parse  the  words  in  their  order. 

Time  and  tide  wait  for  no  man.  The  evening  and  the 
morning  were  the  first  day.  The  memory  of  the  just  is  bless- 
ed, but  the  name  of  the  wicked  shall  rot.  If  thou  faint  in 
the  day  of  adversity,  thy  strength  is  small.  Two  and  two 
make  four.  George  or  John  will  go.  They  will  succeed 
because  they  are  industrious. 

QUESTIONS. 

What  is  a  conjunction?  How  many  classes?  What  is  a  copula- 
tive? A  disjunctive  ?  What  is  said  ol  andl  What  of  the  other^  ?-» 
>'ame  the  copulatives.  How  is  a  conjunction  parsed  ?  Repeat  ac- 
curately the  live  observationB  (398.) 


PARSING.  ': 

399.  Parsing  is  the  resolving  of  a  sentence  into  its  el- 
ements or  parts  of  speech. 

400.  Words  may  be  parsed  in  two  ways:  Etymologicdllify 
and  SijntacttcaVi/. 

1.  Etymological  parsing  consists  in  stating  the  parts  of 
•speech  to  which  each  word  in  a  sentence  belongs,  its  uses 
and  accidents,  its  inflection,  changes,  and  derivation. 

2.  Syntactical  parsing  adds  to  the  above  a  statement  of 
the  relation  in  which  the  words  stand  to  each  other,  and 
the  rules  according  to  which  they  are  combined  in  phrases 
and  sentences. 

EXERCISES  IN  PARSING. 

401.  Parse  the  following  exercises  etymologically  as  di- 
rected un^ler  the  various  parts  of  speegh,  in  tb«  r^receedin^ 

part  of  the  book, 


ETYMOLOG^Y — PARSING*  99 

1  State  what  kind  of  a  proposition  tlie  sentence  is  ;  point  out  the 
subject,  predicate  and  object  or  descriptive,  where  these  two  latter 
Bzist. 

3.  Read  the  proposition  without  any  qualifying  words,  that  you 
may  see  the  essential  parts  more  clearly;  thus,  Servant  tvill  study  in- 
tereat.     Cloud  overhamjn  city. 

3  Observe  that  all  other  words  in  any  proposition  directly  or  re- 
motely qualify  the  essentials,  viz.  subejct,predicate,  object,  or  discrip. 
tive. 

4.  Articles,  adjectives,  adjective  pronouns,  participles  and  ad- 
juncts belong  to  nouns  and  pronouns  ;  verbs  can  be  modified  by  ad- 
verbs and  a'^juncte.  Nouns  in  the  possessive  case,  and  nouns  iu  ap- 
position modify  or  explain  the  nouns  to  which  they  refer. 

6.  State  what  words  refer  to  the  subject,  predicate,  object  or  des- 
criptive. 

Note.  Every  proposition  has  both  subject  and  predicate;  if  the 
predicate  is  a  transitive  verb  there  must  be  an  object;  if  the  predi- 
cate is  the  verb  to  he,  there  must'be  a  descriptive. 

6.  Study  carefully  the  explanation  over  each  exercise. 

7-  Parse  each  word  accurately. 

EXAMPLES. 

I.  Two  or  more  atljectives  in  succession,  either  with  or  without  a 
conjunction  qualify  the  same  word  ;  us, 

1.  A  wise  and/aithful  servant  will  always  study  his  master's  in- 
terest. 2.  A  dismal,  dense,  and  portentous  cloud  overhangs  the  ci- 
ty. 3.  A  steady,  sweet,  and  cheerful  temper  affords  great  delight 
to  its  possessor.     4.  He  has  bought  a  fine  new  coat. 

2.  When  an  adjective  precedes  two  nouns,  it  generally  qualifies 
them  both  ;  as, 

1.  They  waited  for  a// /me  and T^Z^/rf.  2.  I  am  delighted  with 
the  sight  of  green  woods  and  fields.  3.  He  displayed  great  pru- 
dence and  moderation,  4.  He  was  a  man  of  great  wisdom  and 
moderation, 

3.  When  an  adjective  comes  after  a  verb  intransitive,  it  generally 
qualifies  the  nominative  of  that  verb;  as  , 

1.  John  is  wise.  2.  Thcf/  were  temperate.  3.  The  sky  is  very  clear. 
4.  These  rivers  are  deep  and  rapid,  5.  The  apples  will  soon  be 
ripe.  6.  We  have  been  attentive  to  our  lessons.  These  mountains 
are  very  high, 

4.  Whatever  tb«  verb  to  he  serves  to  unite,  referring  to  th«  saoiQ 


100<r  ENGLISH  GRAMMA.R. 

tbiog,  most  be  of  ihe  sam«  care:  as, 

I.  Altx'indcr  ia  a  student.  2.  Mary  is  .1  beautiful  paiiiior.  3.  HiiTpei 
is  the  balm  of  life.     Content  is  a  great  Ijlessinj:^,  envy  a  ^reat  ciirs^.^ 
f)    Knowledge  is  ppwer.     6.   His  meat  wai  lociidts  and  wild  honey." 
T.  He  was  the  life  of  the  company. 

5.  iJ^ouns  Bod  pronouns,  placetl  together  f.r  Ihn  s.iVe  of  cmph»8i8 
or  explanation,  ami  donating  the  same  obj'ct,  aresiid  to  be  ia  nppn- 
ttition,  and  always  agfie  in  chec;  as, 

1.  Alexander  the  coppersmith,  was  not  a  friend  to  the  Apostle  raid ^ 
2.  Hope,  the  balm  of  life,  is  our  greatest  friend.  3.  Thompson,  the 
author  of  the  Seasons,  is  a  delightful  poet.  4.  Teniptiruuce,  the 
best  preserver  ol  health,  should  be  the  study  of  all  men. 

NoTK.  In  parsing  s-'ch  sentences  as  those  above,  a  re^aUve  and  a 
verb  may  be  inserted  between  the  words  in  appositim.  JAy«f'{/',  thif' 
ielf,  hinus<tf,  &c  ,  ott-m  Stan  1  at  a  considerable  distanco  from  llie 
words- with  which  they  ajreo;  a?,   • 

5.  TViowai  dispatched  tiic  letter /»m«f//.  G.  They  gathered  the 
flowers  in  the  garden  themselves.  7.  Ann  saw  the  transaction  lier- 
self,  and  could  not  be  mistaken. 

U.  Mifse!/,  thi/»et/,  hhtiHrlf,  <tc.,  nft'-n  form  the  objeclivo  a  Her  aclivo- 
♦ramsitive  verbs,  when  tha  words  they  reprcent  arc  tbfi  S'lhj-ct  or 
lawwinative.  They  are  in  Euch  cases  g-^nora  ly  called  Rrtitxict  pro  • 
XMxans;  ad, 

1.  J  hnrt  mt/self.     2.   //e  wronged /<?/H.yr'//',  to  oblige  us.     3.  They 
i\'ill  support  themselves  by  their  industry.     4.  She   endeavored    to,,,< 
show  herself  off  to  advantage.     5.  We  must  confine  ourselves  more  .  rj 
to  our  studies.    0.  They  hurt  themselves  by  their  great  anxiety.         .} 

7.  Adjectives  taken  as  noutiS,  and  used  in  reference  to  person*,  are 
generally  of  the  plural  number  ;  as, 

1.   The  valliant  never  taste    death    but  onCe.     2.  The    virtuous 

arc  generally  the  most  happy.    3.  The  diligent  make  most  improve-  f 

ment.     4.  The  sincere    arc    always    esteemed.     5.  The  inquisitive  '• 

are  generally  talkative.     6.  The  dissipated  are  much  to  be  pitied.  •• 

8  Nouns  and  pronoans,  taken  in  the  same  onr.ection,  mnst  bo  of 
the  same  case ;  as,  .  '  ' 

1.  The  master  taught  him  and  i7ie  to  write.     2.  He  and  she  wer0 

schoolfellows.     3.  My^  brother  and  he  arc  tolerable    grammarians. 

4.  He  gave  the  book  to  John  and  Thomas.     5.  I  lent  my  knife  and    ' 

pencil  tQ  Qqc  of  the  scholars. 


ETYMOLOGY — PARSING,  101 

1)  A  relative  generally  precedes  the  verb  that  govoths  it;  as,^ 

1.  lie  is  a  friend  u-hom  I  greatly  reapcct.     2*  They    whom  luxury 

an»    litis  corrupted,  cannot  relish  the  simple   pleasutes  cf  life.    3.  The 

I       Looks  vvliich  1  boiight  yesterday,  1  have  not  jet  received.     4.  The 

lifis  \vliic)i  he  pljjnted  in  the  spring  have  alldicd. 

10    Wlicn  Imth  n  rolptive  r.rid  its  ovitectdent  Lave  fath  a  verb  he- 
ir!' -I'lingiag  to  i',  the  relative  is  coinmonly  noiniiiative    to    the  first  verb, 
aud  (he  antecedent  to  the  sicond  ,  as, 

I.  IIb  loho  aits  wisely  deserves  praise.  2.  He  who  is  a  stran- 
ger to  industry  may  possess,  but  cannot  enjoy.  3.  They  who 
art  born  in  high  stations  are  not  alwavs  the  ii;ost  happy.  4.  The 
man  who  is  faithfully  attached  to  religion    may  be   relied  on  with 

confidence. 

»•  ■ 

II.  ll'Aa/ always  refers  to  an  an  tec  dent  omitte<1,  and  may  be  re- 
garded as  equivalent  to  that  trhk'h,  or  ilf>  ihhxj  nhirh,  and  in  parsing 
iii..y  be  so  rcsofvf d.  It  lUHy  represent  two  cases,  ciihcr  both  nomi- 
li.aivo,  or  both  objective  ;  or,  the  one  nominative,  and   the  other  ob 

j  joliv.c  :  as, 

1.  This  is  precisely  ichai  was  necessary.  2  \Vhat  can  not  be 
prevented,  ninst  be  endured.  3.  "We  must  not  delay  till  to-m'onow 
wiiat  ought  to  be  done  to-day,  4.  Choose  what  is  most  fit ;  cus- 
'  torn  will  make  it  the  moSt  agreeable.  5,  Foolish  men  are  more  apt 
to  consider  what  they  have  lost,  than  what  they  pessess.  6.  What 
he  »aineil  by  diligence,  he  squandered  by  cxlravigancew       . 

\'Z.  ^yhncccr  and  uJionoerer  are  equivalent  to  a  simple  relative,  and* 
:i  gener;il  or  indefinite  antecedent,  and  in  ])irsir^  may  be  so  resolved; 
I  litis,  ichoerct'^niii/  one  irho.  The  :Si  me  is  ihe  case  with  uhalerer  and 
'   /,    tm)erc)- ;   irhntero^^cic  ytliin'j  which  ;   a?, 

I.  Whoever  told  such  a  sttiry,  must  hare  been  misiwiormed. — 
2.  Whoever  is  not  content  in  poverty,  would  not  be  perfectly  happy 
in  the  midst  of  plenty.     3.   Wlioever  pa  his 

make  but  little  improvement.  4.  Whatever  gives  pain  to  others, 
doserves  not  the  name  of  pleasure.  5.  Whatever  is  worth  doing  at 
;ill,  is  worth  doing  well. 

NuTR     ir/taV'fTr  is  m' at    frequently    u  ed,    as    ivhut   sometimes  is» 

.•^iiiijdy  t<j  (lualif}' a  r.oun  ;  as, 

G.  Aspi:c  at  perfection,  in  whatever  date  of  life  you  may  b»  plac- 
ed.    7     I  forget  V(hat  words  he  uttered.     8    By  what   meaus    shall- 


102  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

we  obtain  wisdom?     9.  B^  whatever  nrls  we  may  attract  attention, 
we  can  secure  esteem  only  by  an  amiable  disposition. 

13.  Though  pjtrtirip'es  DeVer  directly  declare,  yet  they  always  im- 
ply somctbiDg  either  done  or  doings;  and  are  used  in  reference  to  Bonce 
noun  or  prun<  un  ;  as. 

1.  Admired  and  applauded^  he  became  vain.  2.  Having  finished 
6ur  lessons,  we  went  to  play.  3.  Proceeding  on  his  journey,  he 
Wiis  seized  with  a  dangerous  malady.  4.  Being  engaged  at  the  tidoe 
of  my  cull,  he  had  not  a  moment  to  spend  wtih  me. 

14  The  past  participle  of  a  few  inti-ansitive  verbs  is  sometimes 
joined  to  the  verb  *  to  be,"  which  gives  such  verbs  a  passive  appear^ 
ancj ;  as,  '       . 

1.  I  am  coce,  in  compliance  with  your  desire.  *  2.  If  such  max- 
ims and  practices  prevail,  what  is  become  of  decency  and  virtue  ? 
3.  The  old  house  is  fallen  down.     4.  John  is  gone  to  Boston. 

15.  lutransitive  verbs  are  often  followed  by  prepositions,  making 
what  are  sometimes  called  compound  transitive  verbs  The  verb  and 
preposition  may,  in  such  cases,  be  parsed  either  together  or  separate- 
ly in  the  active  voice  In  the  passive  voice,  they  must  be  parsed  to- 
gether ;  ap, 

1.  He  laughed  at  such  folly.  2.  They  smiled  upon  us  in  such' a 
way  as  to  inspire  courage.  3.  He  struck  at  his  friend  with  great 
violence.     4,  He  was  much  laughed  at  for  such  conduct. 

16.  A  noun  or  pronoun  is  often  used  with  a  participle,  without  be- 
inf(  connected  in  grammatical  cnn8truct.on  with  any  otber  words  of 
the  sentence.     It  is  then  called  the  nominative  absolute;  as, 

1.  f\\e  father  being  dead,  the  whole  estate  came  into  the  hands 
of  the  eldest  son.  2.  He  destro}ed.  or  won  to  what  may  work  his 
utter  loss,  all  this  will  soou  follow.  3.  Whose  gray  top  shall  trem- 
ble, he  descending. 

17..  7o,  the  8ign  of  the  infinitive  ,  is  omitted  after  the  verbs  hid, 
dare,  need,  muhe,  set;  hear,  feel  and  let  ;  and  sometimes  after  j)erceive, 
behold,  observe,  have,  know,  Ac.  in  the  active  v<  ice,  but  is  retained  af- 
ter the  same  verbs  in  the  passive  ;  as, 

1.  Let  me /ooA;  at  your  portrait.  2.  \\q  hade  me:  go  with  him. — 
3.  I  heard  him  assert  the  opinion.  4.  I  like  to  see  you  behave  so 
well.     5.  Let  him  apply  to  his  books,  and  then    he  will  make  im-. 


ETYMOLOGY— PARSlKa.  103 

proveoient.  6.  Let  us  make  all  the  haste  in  our  power.  7.  I.saw 
bim  ride  past  at  great  speed.  8.  I  have  observed  some  satirists 
use  the  term. 

18.  Verba  connected  by  coDJunrttions,-are  usually  in  the  same  mood 
and  tense,  but  in  the  compound  tenses,  the  sign  is  often  used  with. 
the  firot  oaly,  and  untlerstood  with  the  rest ;  as, 

1..  He  can  nehher  read  nor  lorilr.  2.  He  shall  no  longer  tease 
and  vex  me  as  he  has  done.  3.  He  ^commanded  theta  that  they 
should  not  depar.  from  Jerusalem,  but  wait  for  the  promise  of  the 
father.  4.  His  diligence  should  have  been  commended  and  reward- 
ed. 

19.  N»uns  and  pronobns  are  often  'governed  by  a  preposition  un- 
derstood; nou  8  denoting  time,  value,  weic/hf.  or  iiuasin-e,  are  used  to 
restrict  verbs  or  apjecfvcs,  without  a  governing  word  ;  as, 

1.  He  gave  (to)  me  a  full  account  of  the  whole  affair.  2.  Will 
you  lend  m<?  your  knife?  3.  It  ia  not  time  yet  to  go  home.  4.  He 
returned  home  at  a  very  inconvenient  season.  5,  He  travelled  on 
foot,  last  summer^  as  far  as  London. 

*20.  The  conjunction  tJmn  and  as,  implying  comparison,  have  the 
same  case  after  them  as  bafore  them  ;  aod  the  latter  casa  has  the  same 
construction  as  the  former;  as, 

1.  He  has  more  books  than  my  brother  (has).  2.  Mary  is  not  so 
handsome  as* her  rister  (is).  3.  They  respect  him  more  than  ^ii.iey 
respect)  us.  4.  James  in  not  so  diligent  as  Thomas^  5.  Tliey  are 
much  greater  gainers  than  I,  by  this  unexpected  event. 

21.  The  class  of  words,  or  part  of  speech  to  which  a  word  belongs, 
dcpatids  of>eu  on  its  application  ;    as, 

1.   (7i//m  was  the  day  and  the. scene  delightful.     2.  We   may  ex- 
,  pect  a  calm  after  a  storm.     3.  To  prevent  passion  is    easier  than  to 
calm  it-     4.  Better  is  a  little  with  content,  than   a  great  deal  with 
-anxiety.  0.  The  gay  and  dissolute  think  little  of  the  miseries  whicu 
are  stealing  soltly    after  Ihcm.     6.  A  little    attention  will  rectify 
BOpie  errors'     7.  Though  he  is  out  of  danger,  he   is  still  afraid.- 
8.  He  labored  to  ttill   the  tumult.     9,  Still   waters   are  commu 
deepest.     10.   Lamp  air  is  unwholesome.     11.  Guilt   often    casts  . 
^♦damp  over  our  sprightliest  hours.     12.  Soft  bodies  damp  the  souna 
much  more  than  hard  ones. 


104  EXGLI?il     GRAMMAR. 

^'Z.ff>»,  have,  nriHiho,  arc  principal  vrba  when  used  by  themselves, 
bnt  auxiliaries  when  connected  with  other  verbs  :  as, 

1.  He  (Joes  all  in  his  power  to  gai>i  esteem.  2.  He  did  bis  utmost 
to  please  his  friend.  3.  We  must  do  nothing  that  will  sfllly  oor 
leputation.  4.  She  has  a  strong  claim  to  our  re.<?pect.  5.  The  man' 
who  has  no  sense  of  religion  is  little  be  trusted.  G.  He  who  docs 
the  most  good  has  the  mo.=t  ploasiue.  7.  He  is  at  home.  B.  They 
arc  all  well  there. 

!i3.  An  infinilivc,  a  pnrti'^iplo  n^cd  «.«'  a  noun,  or  a  mrmbfr  of  » 
sentence,  which  may  bo  callod  nsnh.^faiifirr  phra/t",  is  oftm  the  nomi- 
native to  a -verb,  or  the  objective  after  an  ■  active  transitive  verb  or 
preposition;  a.s, 

1.  Xominalive. — 1.  To  study  hard  is  the  best  way  to  improve. — 
2.  To  endure  misfortune  with  resignation  is  the  characteristic  of  a 
great  mind.  3.  To  advise  the  ignorant,  relieve  the  needy,  and  com- 
fort the  distressed,  are  the  duties  incumbent  on  all.  4.  John  being 
Irom  home  occasioned  the  delay.  5.  His  having  neglected  oppor- 
tunities of  improvement,  was  the  cause  of  his  disgrace. 

2.  Objeclioe. — 1.  He  that  knows  how  to  do  goo>i  nnd  does  it  not, 
is  without  excuse.  2.  He  will  regret  his  having  neglected  cpporta- 
nities  of  improvement  when  it  may  be  too  late.  3.  He  declared 
that  nothing  could  give  him  greater  plcai'ure.  4.  Of  making  ma- 
ny books  there  is  no  end.  5.  You  will  never  repent  of  having  done 
your  duty. 

2't.  When  a  substantive  phrase  is  govrrnfd  by  a  verb  orprepoai- 
tiop,  this  regimen  does  not  affect  the  case  of  indiviJual  notins  or 
pronouns  in  that  phrusc,  but  leave.'!  them  subject  to  tha  inlliience  of 
other  words  within  the  phrnso  itself;  a?, 

1.  He  had  the  honor  of  being  a  director  for  life.     2,  By   being  a 
4liligent  student,  he   soon    acquired   eiuiienco   in   his  profe.^^sion. — 
v..  Slany  benefits   result   to  men  from    being   wise    and    temperate 
(men). 
2.25.   It  often  refcrs^lo  persons,  or  to  an  irfinitivo  coming  after;  os» 

1.  //  is  John  that  is  to  b^arae.  2.  It  wns  T  that  wrote  the  letter. 
V,.  It  is  the  duty  of  all  to  improve.  4.  It  is  the  business  of  every 
Bian  to  prepare  for  death.  5.  It  was  reserved  for  Newton  to  dis- 
cover the  law  of  gravitation.  0.  It  is  easy  to  form  good  resolutions 
but  difficult  to  put  them  in  pravticp.     7.    It    is   incumbent    on    the 


ETYAtotOGY — PARSING.  105 

young  to  love  and  honor  their  parents. 
20    Words,  especially  in  poetr'-,  are  much  transposed;  a?, 
1.  Grcrtt  is  Diana  of  the  Ephesians.     2.  On   yourself  depend  for 

aid.     ?>.  Happy  the  man  who  puts  his  trust   in    his   Maker.     4.  Of 

night  the  gloom  was  dark  and  dense.  y 

5.  Or -whefe  the  gorp-eons  pastrwirtfrtpbest  hand,  ^' 

Showers  on  her  kiosrs,  liarbarie,  pearls  and  gold, 
fi.   No  hive  hast  thou  of  hoarded  sweets. 
7.  A  tranhient  Ciilin  the  happy  '^ccncs  bestow. 


i 


bn 


106  SNQLISH    QRAMMAR. 

PARTIIL 


SYNTAX. 

402.  Syntax  is  that  part  of  Grammar  whicli  treats  of 
tlie  proper  arrangement  and  connection  of  words  in  a  sen- 
tence. 

1.  A  SEXTBNCE  is  such  Ati  assemblage  ot  words  as  makes  complete 
lense ;  as,  "  Man  \<i  mortal." 

2.  A  PHRASE  is  two  or  more  words  rightly  put  together,  but  not 
making  complete  sense  ;  as,  "  In  truth" — "  In  a  word" — "To  say  the 
least." 

3.  Sentences  are  of  different  kinds,  according  to  the  nature  oftbe 
thought  intended  to  be  expressed.     They  are — 

4.  Declaratory,  or  such  as  declare  a  thing ;  as,  "God  is  lore." 

[  ^5.  Interrogatory,  or  such  as  ask  a  question  ;  "  Lovest  thou  me?" 

6.  Imperative,  or  such  as  express  a  command  ;  as,  "  Lazarus,  come 
forth." 

7.  Exclamatory,  or  such  as  contain  and  exclamation  ;  as,  "  Behold 
how  he  loved  him  I' 

8.  All  sentences  are  either  timpte  or  compound. 

9.  A  simple  sentence  contains  only  a  single  affirmation  ;  as,  "Life 
is  short."  • 

10.  A  compound  sentence  consists  of  two  or  more  simple  senten- 
ces connected  together;  as,  "Life,  which  is  short,  should  be  w«H im- 
proved." 


ANALYSIS. 

401  A  setitence  may  h€  ceraposed  of  many  parts  or  clauses;  from 
one  pUrlctUatioB  point  to  another  generally  constitutes  a  "clause. 

Note.  Punctuation  does  much  more  than  simply  indicate  pauses 
for  the  reader ;  it  separates  the  whole  sentence  into  clauses  correal 


SYKTAX — ANALYSIS  107 

|)onding  to  the  ideas  of  w'hich  it  is  composed,  and  indicates  their  re- 
lation to  each  other. 

404.  Clauses  are  named  from  the  leading  part  of  speech,  or  from 
the  office  which  they  perform,  and  must  be  well  understood  before 
the  thought  ot  the  writer  can  be  fully  and  accurately  comprehend- 
ed. 

405.  Proposilion.  Any  clause  that  contains  a  finite  verb,  is  a  prop- 
osition.    There  are  four  kinds  of  propositions. 

1.  Transitive.  When  the  finite  verb  is  tiansitive,  it  makes  a  transi- 
tive proposition.  Tbia  proposition  has  three  essential  parts,  viz, 
gubject,  predicate,  and  object.  See  No.  337.  "The  good  man  lorc^ 
his  enemies."  (502.) 

2.  Intransitive.  When  the  verb  is  intransitive,  the  proposition  is  in- 
transitive, and  has  only  two  estential  parts,  viz,  subject  and  predi- 
cate.    The  obedient  shall  lire  long  in  the  land. 

Passive.  When  the  verb  is  passive,  the  proposition  will  be  passive^ 
and  will  have  only  t\To  essential  parts,  viz,  the  subject  and  predicate. 
Tha  town  icas  captured  by  the  enemy. 

4.  Descriptive.  When  the  verb  to  he,  or  any  equivalent  is  the  predi- 
cate, the  proposition  is  descriptive,  and  has  three  essential  parts  viz, 
subject,  predicate,  and  descriptive  (3.37)  (499-500). 

Note.  Propositions  denoting  simply  existence  have  no  descriptive- 
When  the  descriptive  word  is  a  noun  or  pronoun,  it  is  in  the  same 
case  with  the  subject. 

406.  Propositions  are  Independent  or  Dependent.  An  indepen- 
dent proposition  makes  complete  sense  in  itself;  a  dependent  propo-  - 
sition  can  be  used  only  in  connection  with  an  other.  We  left  when 
the  sun  set.  "We  left,"  is  an  independent  proposition  ;  "wl  en  the 
«un  set,"  is  dependent.  Every  sentence  must  have  at  least  one  inde- 
pendent proposition. 

407.  Propositions  are  Simple  or  Compound.  A  simple  proposi- 
tion has  only  one  subject  and  predicate  ;  a  compound  proposition 
has  more  than  one.  « 

1.  There  may  be  two  or  more  subjects  with  one  predicate  ;  as,  "Jvhh 
and  Charles  were  at  home." 

2.  Two  or  more  predicates  with  the  same  subject  5  as,  ''The  farmer 
planted,  tilled  and  gathered  his  corn."    (669-670.) 

3.  Two  or  more  subjects  and  two  or  more  predicates  ;  as,  "Z*«  and 
Jackson  fouyht  and  conquered  the  enemy." 


108  ENGLISH    GRAlVtMAR. 

4.  Two  or  moreo''.ioot3  onloscTiptives ;  as,  •' The  a>Qrcba!\tbaught  * 
corn  And  HiJieat,  which,  were  sc/tre^  and  ih.tr." 

5.  Two  or  more  simple  ]>ropsitions  conncc'ed  by  a  coi.junction  ;  gL9,\ 
•'John  lenrnoil  these  rale8^  but  did  Qot  /-evitf^f  the  u. 

408.  lidative  Clauses.     Every  relative  pronoun    ami    the    wonls 
connected  with  it,  make  a  relative  clau.^e,  lliouii^li    not  ahvaya  aepA- 
Tated  frotn  the  proposition;  a3,  "  Qcn.  Hoke,  icho  ctijjlure<l  Phimoulh;' 
is  a  brave  man."  "The  man  iv'ii  *.•*.''  i.<.l(,  deserves  praise."   (006  )  "* 

409.  AfJJrctivc  Cluus,'.  When         ■  .-jictivc  and  the  words  explain'-"* 
jng  or  modifying  it,  are  scparat'jd  lioni  the  noun  to  which  it  refers, 
ihey  make  an  adjective  clause  ;  as,  'LMrd  Halifax,  rich  in  nil  (lie  grd-^ 
ces  and  culture  of  life,  zealously  defended  the  Ijishons."  "('n2  )        *■'  ''* 

410.  Parliciplr  Clause.  When  a  particijile  and  tho^words  depend-, 
jng  upon  it,  are  separated  from  the  proposition,  thr'y  make    a  |):»rVi- 
«:iple  clause ;  as,  Tiie   Albemarle,    Imcinfi  hern  seriously  diiiiuiyed  b]i 
a  round  shot,  retired  up  the  river."  (672.)  ,  ,^ 

411.  Adjunctive  Clause.  A  preposition  and  if.s  case  with  the  words': 
depending  thereoDj  may  make  at:  adjunctive  clau.se  ;  a.«,  ^'Chaile^, 
in  the  hurry  and  confusion  of  I  lie  accidi^iit,  lost  his  pur.se-"   ^0^/.) 

412.  Connected  C'ausc.  A  proposition  connected  to  anothf-r  oener- 
ally  has  one  or  more  wordi  understood,  .and  makes  a  cornected 
clause;  as  "Mary  came  to  town,  and  departed  the  same  dayj'    (Go8  ) 

413.  Ajppositiunal  Cl'tusc.   A  "houn  in  apposition,  with    its  depen- 
dant words,  makes  an  appositional  clauBo  ;  as,  "Thompson,  ihs  au- 
thor of  the  Seasons,  is  dead.""^62)  i  i^»>j  v^ft  y;-   . 

414.  Cumulatioe  Claucc.  Several  words  of  the  same  purt  of  speech 
governed  in  the  same  v,-i\y.  make  cumulative  clauses;  as,  'A  dar/:, 
dense,  and  portentous  cloud  everhangs  the  city. "(OCO) 

4l5.» Independent  or  Absolute  Clause.  This  is  made  by  a  noun  in 
the  nominative  case  independent  or  absolute  ;  fts,  "  Thomas,  lake 
this  letter."  (CG^) 

416.  Conditional  Clause.  This  is  formed  by  any  conjuiiction  or 
adverb  separated  fr  m  the  words  in  the  sentence   (C65.) 

417.  An  Infinitive  Clause  is  formed  by  tlie  infinitive  mood  and  its 
dependent  word3,,when  separated  tVorn  the  rest  of  the  sentence  ;  as 

^■''To  find  out  the  iruth  of  the  report,  I  sent  a  mcsSeagor   to    the  army." 
(671. 


SYNTAX — ANALYSIS.  109 

418,    DIRECTIONS  FOR  ANALYSIS. 

1.  ISUilc  wLat  kuid  of  «  seutence,  and  whether  simjile  or  com- 
pound.... .  i,.    iy 

2.  If  compound,  tell  what   kind  of  ft  compound  it  is,  arMJtliie;'a5t>\ 
ferent  members'.  -  '■:.  '^^' 

3    State  what  kind  of  a  clause  each  one  in    the  sentence  i3,  and. 
shoAv  what  word  any  subordinate  chiuse  modifies. 

4.  Tell  what  kind  of  a  proposition  you  have,  Jiow  many  essen- 
tial elements,  and  what  they  are. 

5.  Show  to  which  of  the  essentials,  all  the  other  words  in  the 
proposition  belong. 

QUESTIONS. 

Wh:it  is  syntax  ?  ^Vhat  is  a  sentence  ?  A  phrase  ?  Flow  many 
kinds  of  sentences  ?  What  is  the  use  cf  j'unctuatioh  ?  Whvt  is  u 
chiu?e?  From  what  are  they  named  ?  How  many  kinds  of  propo- 
sitions ?  What  is  the  test  of  each?  How  in  my  essential  parts 
has  each  ?  What  projKjsitions  have  have  no  descriptive  ?  What  is 
uu  independent  [)ro})Osition  ?  A  di  [»eiiuant  ?  How  many  kinds  ot 
cwnipound  propositions  ?  Ni>n;ie  t  o  ch*-. 'icter  of  each.  What  is  a 
relative  clause?  Anadjecti\o  cl;  use  ?  A  participle  clause  ?  An 
adjunctive  clause?  A  cumulative  claase?  A  connected  clause? — 
All  Hp[tositional  clause ?  An  iudejiendent  clause?  A  conditional 
clause?  An  infinitive  clause  ?  Wliat  is  the  test  ot  each  clause? 
Kjtdte  the  live  directions  for  analysis. 

EXAMPLES  FOR  ANALYSIS. 

>^<)lomon,  the  son  of  David,  built  the  temple  at  Jerusalem.  Jose- 
phus,  the  Jewisli  historian,  relates  the  destruction  of  the  temple. — 
That  picture  is  a  tolerably  gootl  copy  of  the  orig^inal.  Pride,  that 
never-failing  vice  of  fools,  is  not  easily  defined.  The  author  of  Ju- 
nius's  letters  is  still  unknown.  Pride  and  (^nvy  arc  the  first  two  of 
the  seven  sins — gluttony  and  libidinonsness  the  last  (wo.  Truly 
great  men  are  far  above  wo«ldly  pride.  Few  men  can  be. said  to  be 
truly  great  in  all  things.  That  which  is  most  diflicult  in  perform- 
ance, is  most  praiseworthy  in  execution. 

All  things  tliat  are  durable,  are  slow  in  growth.  Human  knowl- 
edge is  progressive.     A  mind  open  to  flattery  is  always   in  danger 


110  ENGLISH   GRAMMAil. 

Our  knowledge  of  a  future  world  is  imperfect.  Time  is  money. 
Righteousness  eialteth  a  nation.  A  soft  answer  turneth  away  wrath. 
He  that  despiseth  his  neighbor,  sinneth.  He  that  hath  raerc-y  on 
ihe  poor  is  happy.     Do  they  not  err  that  devise  evil. 

According  to  some  ancient  philosophers,  the  sun  quenches  his 
flames  in  the  ocean.  Sincerity  and  truth  form  the  basis  of  every 
virtue.  The  coach  will  leave  the  city  in  the  morning  at  sunrise. — 
The  Spartau  youth  were  accustomed  to  go  barefoot.  The  attrocious 
crime  of  being  a  young  man  I  shall  attempt  neither  to  paliate  nor 
deny.  Trusting  in  God  implies  a  belief  in  him.  His  pretence  was 
that  the  storm  prevented  his  attendance.  His  intention  was  to  de- 
stroy the  fleet.  Time  flies  rapidly.  I  confess  that  I  am  in  fault. — 
William  has  determined  to  go.  I  wish  that  he  may  succeed  in  his 
enterprise.     Theysaid,  "Thouhast  saved  our  lives." 

Ignorance  moves  our  pity,  and  that  modifies  our  aversion.  If  we 
hare  not  always  time  to  read,  we  have  always  time  to  reflect.  The 
poer  is  hated  even  of  his  own  neighbor,  but  the  rich  hath  many 
friends.  The  eyes  of  the  Lord  are  in  every  place,  beholding  the 
evil  and  the  good.  Righteousness  exalteth  a  nation  but  sin  is  a 
reproach  to  any  people.  Pride  goeth  before  destruction,  and  a 
haughty  spirit  before  a  fall.  Death  and  life  are  in  the  power  oftho 
tongue.  Though  he  slay  me,  yet  I  will  trust  in  him.  The  slothful 
man  saith,  "There  is  a  lion  in  the  way."  When  the  righteouis  are 
in  ftuthority,  the  people  rejoice. 


COHSTRUCTION  OF  SENTExVCES. 

419.  Words  are  arranged  in  sentences,  according  to  cer- 
tain rules,  called  the  Rules  of  Syntajc. 

420.    GENERAL  PRINCIPLES. 

.  tn  every  sentence  there  must  be  a  verb  and  Its  notnindltve. 
3.  Every  article,  adjective,  adjective  pronoun,  or  pariicip'e,  must 
have  a  substantive  expressed  or  understood. 

3.  Bvery  nominative  or  subject  has  its  own  verb,  expressed  or  un- 


/sr-^i^J-Ii 


SYNTAX — APPOSITIOI^.  Ill 

derstood. 

4.  Every  finite  verb    (that  is,   every   verb   not   in   the  infinitive) 
has  its  own  nominative  expressed  or  understood. 

5.  Every  possessive  case  is  governed  by  a  noun  or  substantive 
whose  signification  it  serves  to  limit. 

6.  Every  objective  case  is  governed  by  a  transtive  verb  in  the  ac- 
tive voice,  ora  preposition,  or  denotes  circumstance  of  time,  value, 
weight,  or  measure. 

7.  The  infinitive  mood  is  governed  by  a  verb,  adjective,  or  lioun 
The  exoeptioDS  to  these  general  principles  will  appear  in  the  Rules 

of  Syntax. 

PARTS  OF  SYNTAX. 

421.  The  Rules  of  Syntax  may  all  be  referred  to  three 
heads,  viz  ,  Concord,  or  agreement,  Government  and  Poii- 
tion. 

422.  Concord  is  the  agreement  which  one  word  has 
with  another  in  gender,  number,  case,  or  person. 

428.  Government  is  the  power  which  one  word  has  in 
determining  the  mood,  tense,  or  case,  of  another  word. — • 
The  word  governed  by  another  word  is  called  its  regimen. 

424.  Position  means  the  place  which  a  word  occupies 
in  relation  to  other  words  in  a  sentence. 

43&.  In  the  English  language,  which  has  but  few  inflectiuns,  th0 
meaning  of  a  sentence  often  doponda  much  on  the  position  of  thd 
words  of  which  it  consists. 


SUBSTANTIVES  IN  APPOSITION. 

426.  Rule  I. — Substantives,  denoting  the  game  person  of 
thing,  agree  in  case  ;  as — 

"  Cisero  the  orator.^' — *•  I  Paid  have  written  it.'* — "  We^  the  peo- 
ple of  the  United  States." — "  Ye  woods  and  wildn,'^ — "  This  was  said 
to  us  men>" 


112  EN0LT<?I1   GRAMMAR. 

427.  The  word  annexed  is  said  U  bo  in  tippn^ltion  Avith  tVie  other^ 
and  is  added  to  exprc-s  some  attribute,  det cription,  or  appcllati-  n,  be- 
longing to  it-  The  word  so  related  must  a'wnys  ba  iu  the  same  u.t  m- 
ber  of  the  ecnteuce— that  is,  both  in  the  subjtct,  or  in  the  diucriptive 
or  object. 

428.  Two  or  nr  ore  words  forming  one  comp'ex  name,  or  a  name  and 
a  title  prefixed,  though  really  in  apposition,  are  propvrly  inflected 
and  par-sed  as  one  worJ;  a?,  '  Oeori/r  ]Va>ihiiii/i<j,i' — '(itiwrnl  Wush- 
iiHjton's  tent.  ' 

429.  A  noun  is  cometimcs  put  in  apposition  with  a  sentence,  nn<l  a 
sc!  tence  or  infinitive  mood  sometimre  in  apposition  with  a  noun  ;  as^ 
*'  77te  ireathcr  forbids  icalking,  a  2>roJtibition  hurtful  to  U3  both." 

430.  A  plural  term  is  somfctimes  used  in  apposition  with  several  . 
substantives  singuiar,to  cnjliiue  and  give  thtni  cmphanis;  as,"  Tinie 

labor,  woiKij,  all  were  lest.'' 

4S'.  Distrilutive  words  are  sometimes  put  in  apposition  with  a  plu- 
ral substantive ;  a"?,  **  T"!"'.'/  went  enth  of  them  on  hi.s.  way." 

i'^'l.  Of  this  character  are  such  exprassitns  as  the  following  :  "They 
stood  ia  eacli  other's  way" — that  i?,  ilny  stood  cocA    in  the  ether's  way. 

Throughout  the  exercises  in  syntax— first  correct  the 
errors;  secondly,  analyze  orally  the  sentences  so  corrected; 
thirdly,  parse  any  word  etymologioally  ;  and  last,  j.ane  syn- 
tactically the  word  or  words  to  which  the  rule  refers. 

EXERCISES. 

qiTM  puB  'uoiiisodJxr  ni  OitJ  spjoii  -jutiAi  'saouaiuas  Suimohoj  eq-^  ai 
what?     lu  what  case  do  they  agree?     Give  the  rule  ;  — 

Religion,  ilie  support  of  adversity,  adorn,^  piosperity.     Byron,  the 
poet,  the  only  ECU  of  Captain  John  Byron,  was  born  in  1*788.     Cole- 
ridge, a  remarkable  man  and  lich  iuiaginalive  poet,  wa3  the  f.iend 
of  Worddworlh.    My  brother  William's  estate  has  been  sold 
''And  on  the  palace  floor,  a  lifclesi  c-  rse  she  Isty." 

EXERCISES  TO  BE  CORRECTED. 

As  the  nominative  and  the  objective  cas«>.s  in  ncuns  are  alike  in 
Ecigliah,  there  ia  no  liability  too.ror  under  this  rule,  except  'n  the 
case  of  pronouns. 


£*tYMOL0GY — ADJECTIVES.  llB 

t*lease  give  that  book  to  ray  brother  William,  he  who  stands  by 
the  window.  The  gentleman  has  arrived,  him  whom  I  mentioned 
before.  Do  you  spf  ak  so  tome,  I  who  have  so  often  betriended  you  ? 
I  speak  of  Virgil,  he  who  wrote  the  ^neid. 

QUKBTIONS. 

How  arc  wor-.ls  arranged  ?  What  mn-^l  be  in  every  sentence?—' 
What  of  f'very  article,  Ac  ?  What  of  every  nominative  ?  Of  every  ti* 
iiite  verb?  Of  every  posEessive  Y  Of  every  objective  ?  Of  the  in* 
finitive  mood  ?  To  what  he.id3  may  the  rules  of  syntax  be  referred  ? 
What  is  concord  ?  What  is  government?  What  does  pdsitioti 
mean?  What  is  Rule  1  ?  What  is  the  use  of  apposition  ?  What 
ofa  conplexname?  Explaio  429.  What  word  expl  .ins  430  ?  What 
governs  each  in  4:52  ?    What  direction  is  given  for  the  exercises? 


AN  ADJECTIVK  WITH  A  SUBSTANTlVJi:] 

48o.  Rule  II. — I.  An  mljectlvp  nr  partinple  qualifies 
the  suhatnutive  to  vhich  if  heloriys ;  ap,  "A  good m&n." 

2.  Ailjectives  donotivg  ONE,  qu^klifi/  nvvns  in  thesmgular : 
adjectives  denoting  MORE  THAN  ONE,  qualify  nnun^  in  the 
plural ;  as,  "  This  man." —  These  men." — "aS'/:/  feot." 

434.  Wben  ony  of  these  is  Joined  with  a  plural  noun,  the  whole  i 
regarded  as  sre  aggregate  ;     as,    'The    first    hco  ii:ee/:i"—"^verytfH 
miltit" — The  last  four  linen"  -"The  last  dai/v  of  aummer,"  JlO.     But  tha 
verb  after  aoob  subjects  is  usually  plural. 

435.  Two  or  more  adjectivep,  expressing  qualities  that  belong  each 
to  diffe  ett  objects  of  the  same  nam'',  and  that  name  expressed  ou\y 
with  the  last,  should  hav«  an  article  bifore  eaob  ;  as,  *•  The  red  aijd 
the  white  loEc" — that  is,  tiio  rises,  the  one  icd  aui  the  i.ther  while. 
So,  *Tbe  first  and  the  second  page." 

43ft.  Atljectives  without  a  substantive  expressed,  are  often  used  as 
nouns  ;  a.",  "  The  rich  and  the  poor  meet  together." 

437.  An  adjective  aometimes  qualifies  the  subject,  not  considered 
simply  as  a  fubslantive,  but  as  a  subbtantive  afl'ected  by  the  action 
of  the  connecting  veib  ;  as,  "  That  ti/pf  stands  low."  "'this  fruit  tastes 
bitter.'* 


114  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

438.  Adjectives  should  not  be  used  as  adverbs  ;  thus,  "  mUerable 
poor,"  should  be,  ^'■miserably  poor'" — "sings  elegant^^  should  be,. 
^^  sings  eli'ffantlt/.^'  So  also,  adverbs  should  not  be  used  as  adjec- 
tives ;  thus,  "  He  arrived  safely,"  should  be,  "  He  arrived  safe.'^ 

Afi9.'  Thin  here,  that  there,  them  books,  aro  vulgarisma,  (nr  this,  that 
those  hooka. 

440.  Sometimes  an  a<lJ6ctive  modifies  the  meaning  of  another  ad~ 
jective;  as,  "  reil  hot  iroo,"  "a  Iriyht-reil  cjlor." 

441.  Several  aijectives  frequently  qualify  the  same  substantive  ;  as 
"A  lor<je,  stroiKj,  hluck  horse.'. 

This,  that — these,  those. 

442.  When  two  or  more  objects  are  contrasted,  this  refers  to  the 
last  mentioned, //«// to  the  first;  as,  "  Virtue  and  rice  are  opposite 
qualities  ;  that  ennobles  the  mind,  thi.t  debases  it." 

443.  Farmer  and  latter  are  used  In  tho  sxme  way.  So  also  the  one, 
the  other,  referring  to  words  in  tho  singular. 

444.  When  no  contrast  is  expressed,  this   refers    to  things  near,  or" 
just  mentioned,  and  that  to   things  mora  remote,  or   formerly  men- 
tioned. ■     , 

CONSTRUCTION  OF  CO.MPARATIVilS  AND  SUPERLATIVES. 

445.  When  one  object  is  compared  with  another  of  the  name 
class,  or  with  more  than  one  of  a  different  class,  individually,  or  in 
the  aggregate,  the  comparative  is  used  ;  as,  "  James  is  the  ioeaker  of 
the  two" — "He  is  taller  than  his  father/' 

4  40.  When  one  object  is  cotnpared  with  more  than  one  of  the 
same  class,  the  superlative  is  used,  ami  commonly  has  the  prefixed  ; 
aa, "John  is  the  tallest  araongsl  us" — "He  is  the  best  scholar  in  a 
class  of  ten." 

447.  When  tho  corapara  ivo  is  used,  the  latter  term  of  comparrison 
muit  always  cu-<  Utile  the  foimcr  j  thus,  "Eve  avas    f;iirer   than   any  of  I 
her  daughters  " 

448.  When  the  superlative  is  used,  the   'atter  term  of  comparison   i 
must  always  cxo/«(ie  the  form  r;    as,    "  Russia  ia  the  largest  country 
in  Europe." 

449.  Double  comparitives  and  superlatives  are  improper. 


eTYMoL0(5V— ADJECTIVES.  115 

460  The  double  comparative  ^€«'*er,  however.is  saBciiuuid  by  good 
authority;  as,  "Lesser  Asia"  -"Every  lesser   thirg."— A\   }'.  liiview. 

POSITION  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

451.   An  adjective  is  commonly  placed  before  its  substantive  ;  as, 
"  A  ffood  man" — "  A  virivous  woman." 
*      1.  Adjectives  ah-ubi  be  placed  as  noar  as  possible  to  iheir  s  .bstan- 
tives,  and  so  that  it  may  be  ceituin  to  what  noun  they  belong;  thus, 
"A  new  pair  of  shoes,"  should  be   "A  pair  of  new  .shoes." 

2.  When  an  adiective  qualifies  two  or  mor©  substantives,  connect- 
ed by  and,  it  is  usually  cxpres.scd  before  the  first,  apd  ULdtraood, 
to  the  rest;  as,  "A  man  of  </i€<i(  wisdom  and  uihdtvatlcti." 

An  adjective  is  placed  a/fcr  its  substantive — 

1  Generally  when  it  qualifies  a  pronoup  ;  a»,    "We  saw  him  fain 
and  ir  ary." 

2.  When  otbcr  words  depend  on    the  aljcctive;   as,   **  A  man  sick 

of  the  palsy"— "A  p(de  ten  feet  long." 

3.  When  the  quality  r<tiulls  from  the    action    expressed  by  a  verb ; 

as,  "  Extravagance  makes  a  mun  poor" — "  Virtue  makes  a  poor 
man  happy." 

4.  When  the  adjective  is  prelicated  of  the  substantive;  as,  "  (Jod 
is  (jood" —  '  We  are  fcppy." 

EXERCISES   TO   BE   CORRECTED 

Correct  the  errors  in  the  followirig  sentences,  and  g've  a  reason  Lt 
the  cbanee:  — 

These  kind  of  books  can  hardly  be  got.  I  have  not  been  from 
home  this  ten  days.  We  walked  two  mile  in  half  an  hour.  I  or- 
dered six  ton  of  coal,  and  tbes§  makes  the  third  that  has  been  de- 
livered. This  lake  is  six  fathom  deep.  The  garden  wall  is  five  rod 
long;  T  measured  it  with  a  ten-foot  pole.  Twenty  heads  of  cattle 
passed  along  the  road.  It  is  suid  that  a  fleet  of  six  sails  has  just 
entered  the  baj'.  That  three  pair  of  gloves  cost  twelve  shilling  — 
A  man  who  is  prudent  and  industrious,  will,  by  that  means,  increase 
his  fortune.  Charles  formed  expensive  habits,  and  hy  those  means 
became  poor.  If  you  are  fond  of  those  sort  of  things  you  may  have 
them.     There  was  a  blot   on  tte   first   oi-   second   page.     The  first 


-16  ENOLL^H   GRAMMAR. 

and  second  verse  arc  better  tlinn  the  third  ami  fourth. 

(438.)  .  Come  quick  and  do    not  hindir  us.     Time  passes  s\viff>*^ 
though  it  appears  to  move  plow.     Wo  jrot  home  sntily  before  daik, 
and  found  our  friend.^  sitlinp;  comfortably  around  Ihi'  fire.     Ti'ieboitt 
plides  smooth  over  the  lake.     Magnesia  r(  els  ?mootl:ly.     Oj-on  the 
door  widely.     Tlie  door  i.=  painted  greenly. 

(4'.0.)  Hand  nie.that  there  pen,  for  lhi.=;  here  one  i?  worse  LhnnalL 
Them  books  were  sold  for  a  Jojser  price  than  they  cost. 

(H2  )  •'  For  beast  and  hi  d  ; 
These  to  Lhcir  grassy  couch,  those  to  their  tests,  repai'." 
**  Night'jj  shadows  h- nee,  from  tho   ce  tho   mor   ings   shine; 
That  bright,  this' dark,  this  earthly,  that  divine." 

(414)  That  vej-y  su^je  ;t  which  we  are  now  discussing  is  s'ill  in- 
volved in  mjstery.  This  vessel,  of  which  you  spoke  ofjesierdny, 
sailedMn  the  evening 

(4;T.^  That  merchant  is  the  wealthiest  of  all  his  neighbors. — 
China  has  a  greater  population  than  any  nation  on  earth.  That 
ship  is  larger  than  any  of  its  class.  Theie  is  more  gold  in  Cali- 
lornia  Llian  in  any  part  of  North  Am'-'rici*.  The  birds  uf  Brazil  are 
more  beautiful  than  any'Jn  South  America.  rUiUidelphia  is  the  most- 
regular  of  any  city  in  Europe.  Israel  loved  Josepli  more  than  all 
his  children.     Solomon  was  wiser  than  any  of  ihe  ancient  kings. 

(410-50.)  A  more  worthier  man  you  c:innot  find.  The  nightin- 
gale's voice  is  the  most  sweetest  in  the  grove.  A  worser  evi)  yet 
awaits  us.  The  rumor  has  not  spread  so  univer.'ally  ns  we  snjipos- 
ed.     Draw  that  line  more  perpendicular.     This    fiigure    is    n  more 

•  -perfect  circle  than  that  is.     He  is  far  from  being    fjo  ])eifeet   as  h® 

-tllinks  he  is, 

QUESTIONS. 

What  is  the  rule  for  adjectives?  When  should  the  adjectives  be 
expressed  belorc  each  noun?  What  of  adji'ctives  without  a  sub- 
stantive? E.xplain  4'J>1.  Miiy  adjectives  be  used  a.s  adverbs  ?  Can* 
■  one  adjev live  modify  another?.  How  nuir.y  may  the  sanie  noun 
b.a;ve?  K.xpiain  the  use  uitkks,  tluil,  thef^e,  those.  When  is, the  com- 
piu:ilive  used?  Wlien  the  superlative  ?  Which  excludes?  Wiiat 
of  »h)uble  comparatives?  VVli.it  is  the  position  of  the  rttljecfive?- 
W  hen  may  it  lie  placed  after  the  noun? 


ETYMOLOGY — ARTICLE.  117 

THE  ART  CLE  AND  ITS  NOUN- 

452.  Rule  III.  — 1.  The  article  a  or  an  is  put  be /ore 
common  noiim^  m  the  aivgnlal'  nmnher^  ichru  used  INDEFI- 
NITELY ;  a3,  "  A  man"— ".l/i  apple;"  that  is,  '  an^  man', 
— *'a??//  apple/' 

2  The  art  iele 'ill  r.  is  j)nt  h  ./ore  cornmon  noiina,  cither 
sifujiilaror^yhiral^ichfnusejl  DEFrxiTELY;  as,  '^Vftsua 
rise."— ''7'Ae  city  ot  llilei^li.'' 

433  A  common  noun,  in  the  siiignljir  number,  without  an  article 
or  limiting  word,  is  usu;Uly  tuken  iu  its  widest  sense;  as,  '■'■Man  is 
mo'.tal" 

404.  Every  article  belongs:  to  a  noun,  expressed  or  understood 
except   IS  in  (l^Sand  4r)t>). 

45).  When  several  rouiis  aro  combined  in   tbe  same    construction 
the  articlo  ii  commonly  expressed  w'tb  the  li:s?,  and  understood  wi«h 
the  rest;  ap,  'Tbe  men,  wonin,  and  children,  aro  rxpeefcd." 
~liG.   But  when  several    n'uns   in   tbe  same    c<  nslructicn    arr  dig*'' 
junclivcly  connected,  tbe  nrtide  luu-t  bo  repeated;  a?,  "The  mcr,  or 
the  woiMjjr,  or  the  cbi'dren,  aro  expected  " 

4o7.   The  is  commonl)'  put  before  an  adjective  used  as  a  noun  ;  as,  . 
"  Tlie  ritjldcoux  i s  in  >rc  e.vcolb.ut    than    bis    ne'ghbor."     Also  before  ^** 

a'ljcctives  io  the  Fuperlative  degree,  when  comparison    is    implied. 

But  when  comparison  is  net  implied,  the  iurerlativo  is  ei  lev  with- 
out an  article,  or  has  a  or  un  preceding  it  ;  us,  <  A  mo.«t  rxf'ellent 
man.*' 

458  T!.e  is  somctimt s  put  iytrnnice^i/  before  rdjoctive^  and  adverbs 
in  tbe  comparative  degree;  as,  "  The  higher  the  mountain,  tht;  colder 
its  top." 

ih'J.  An  adjective  placed  aTt-.r  its  poun  rs  an  (pitbet;  commonly 
hns  tVe  arti-le  ihe  bef.re  i(;  as,  "Alexander  the  Great  " 

460.  ^  orara  is  somelimrs  put  before  the  a''j'.-ctivcsyV*'-,  hiiudro/ 
thovmoidf^qllovnd  by  a  plural  noun  ;  as,  "  A  fen-  meii" — "A  hundtxa 
acres"-  "A  /hotiscmd  miles.' 

4fil  When  two  or  more  adjectives  bclorg  to  flje  s-'me  noun,  the  ar-; 
tide  of  the  noua  i.-^  put  with  the  first  adjective,  but  not  with  tbcreet; 
as,  *  A  red  upd  uhilc  roMc,"  that  is,  vitc  rose,  partly  red  and  partly 
tchiit. 


118 


ENGLISH  GRA3rMAR. 


4^2.  When  two  or  more  adjectives  belong  each  to  a  different  object 
of  the  same  name,  the  article  of  the  noun  is  put  with  each  adjective ; 
aji,  "  A  red  and  a  white  roso''=r-"A  red  rose  and  a  white  rose,"  that 
is,  Uno  roses,  one  red  and  the  other  white. 

463.  So  also  when  two  or  more  epithets  follow  a  noun,  if  both  des- 
ignate the  game  person,  the  article  precedes  the  first  only.  If  they 
designate  different  persons,  the  article  must  precede  each  ;  an 
"Johnson,  the  bookseller  and  stationer,"  means  one  man,  who  is  both 
a  boekfeller  and  stationer;  but  "Johnson  (he  bookseller,  and  the  gla- 
tioner,"  moans  two  men,  one  a  bookseller,  named  Johnson,  and  the 
other  a  stationer,  not  named. 

464.  When  two  nouns  after  a  word  implying  comparison,  refer  to 
the  same  person,  or  thing,  the  last  must  uant  the  article  ;  as,  '*  He  is 
a  better  soldier  than  statesman."  But  when  they  refer  to  different 
persons,  the  last  must  havf  the  article  ;  as,  "Ho  is  a  better  soldier 
than  a  statesman  [would  be]  " 

465.  The  article  «,  befcre  the  adjectives /<*«  aud  little,  recders  the 
meaning  positive  ;  as,  "A  few  men  can  do  that" — "  He  deserves  a  lit- 
tle credit"  But  without  the  article  the  me&u'vag'xsneyative ;  as,  "/"'«te 
men  can  do  that" — "He  deserves  little  credit." 

466.  The  article  is  generally  omitted  before  proper  name»,ab$trae 
nouns,  and  names  of  vlrtiiee,  vices,  arts,  sciences,  Ac,  when  not  restrict- 
ed, and  such  other  nouns  as  are  of  themselves  so  manifestly  definite 
ae  not  to  require  it. 

EXERICSES  TO  BE  CORRECTED. 


Change,  or  omit,  or  insert  the  article,  where  necessary,  and  give  a 
reason  for  so  doing  : — 

(452.)  The  fire,  the  air,  the  earth,  and  the  water,  are  four  ele- 
ments of  the  philosophers.  Reason  was  given  to  a  jman/.o  controll 
his  passions.  A  man  was  made  to  mourn.  The  gold  is  corrupting. 
The  silver  is  a  precious  metal. 

(455.)  Neither  the  man  nor  boy  was  to  blame.  A  man  may  be  a 
mechanic,  or  farmer,  or  lawyer,  arjd  be  useful  and  respected ;  but 
idler  or  spendthrift  can  never  be  either. 

(458.)  We  should  ever  pay  attention  to  graceful  and  becoming,—^ 
The  memory  of  just  is  blessed  ,  but  the  name  of  wicked  shall  rot. 
Best  men  are  often  those  who  say  least,     Your  friend  is  a  ipan  Qt 


ETYMOLOGY — PRONOUN.  119 

the  most  brilliant  talents.     Keep  good  and  throw  bad  away. 

(4<>I.)  A  red  and  a  white  flag  was  the  only  one  displayed  from  the 
tower.  A  beautiful  stream  flows  between  the  old  and  new  man- 
sion. A  hot  and  cold  spring  were  found  in  the  same  neighborhood. 
The  yonng  and  old  man  seem  to  be  on  good  terms.  The  first  and 
second  book  are  difficult.  Thompson  the  wfttchmaker  and  the  jew- 
eller made  one  of  the  party. 

(464.)  A  man  may  be  a  better  soldier  than  a  logician.  There  is 
much  truth  in  the  saying  that  fire  is  a  better  servant  than  a  master. 
He  is  not  so  good  a  poet  as  an  historian. 

(465.)  It  is  always  necessary  to  pay  little  attention  to  business. — 
A  little  respect  should  be  paid  to  those  who  deserve  none.  Let  tbe 
damsel  abide  with  us  few  days.  Are  not  my  days  a  few  ?  A,  few 
naen  of  his  age  enjoy  so  good  health, 

QUESTIONS. 

What  is  rule  third?  How  is  a  noun  without  an  article  taken  ? 
Must  the  article  be  used  before  each  of  the  several  nouns  combin- 
ed? Explain  457.  How  is  the  article  used  intensively  ?  When  are  a 
and  an  used  before  plural  nouns  ?  How  rau!*t  the  article  be  used 
with  two  or  more  acjectives.  Does  Branson  the  publisher  and  the 
stationer  mean  one,  or  two  men  ?  What  is  the  force  of  a  before 
few  V    Before  what  nouns  is  the  article  omitted  ? 


A  PRONOUN  AND  ITS  ANTECEDENT. 

367.  Rule  IV. — Pronouns  agree  with  the  words  for 
which  they  stand,  in  gender,  number,  and  person ;  as,  "All 
that  a  ?rt//n  hath  will  Ae  give  for  his  life." — ^-A  tre4X^ 
known  by  its  fruit," 

SPECIAL  RULES. 

'""-iosTRuLE  1. —  When  a  pronoun  refers  to  in-o  or  more  word*  iakm 
together,  andof  different  per&o^nSy  it  becomes  plural,  and prefen  the  flrtt 
person  to  the  tecond,  and  the  $€<:0T\d  to  the  third  ;  as,  John  and  you  and 
/  WJU  do  qur  duty,  . 


120  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

•v->oiOK-:'ir 

Rl'LK  2. —  Warn  a  prnn.)uiir^]frrs  to  two  or  mtrc  ironJ.^   in   the  sin- 
■gnlar  takenrSffava'tdif,  or  to  one  of  Ihain  exdHsicdfi^yil  mMt  he Hiigulax-;  <,<:> 
>as,'*  A  clock  or  a  Wiitch  moveij  merely  .13  il  in  niored." 

f>i;i^l'  3;: — ]iu(  if  rifhcr  of  iM  ivnnb  referred  to  is  plurcd.  (he  pro-'ir 
nouti  mist  be  jilural  (Hio  ;  sis,  "  Neitlior  he  nor  thrtj  trouble  them-'-*'^^ 
sclrrJ:'\    '     '   •'-  ■:■'.-: dT 

400.  Nouns  :iire    tnken    together   when  connecled    by  and— pop ^y>^ 
aratcly  when  connected  by  or  or  nor.  113  above  :  filso   after   each,  ev^''  '^* 
erylno,  though  connected  by  and ;  as,  "  E.ich  boot  and  eacH  p^ipef) 
is  in  //6-  place."  ../-"" 

470.  When  singular  nouns  of  dilTjrynt  genders  *are  taken  scp  rate- 
ly,  they  cannot  bo  r-.-p-escnt©  '  by  a  pr<»n<.>ua,  for  want  of  a  J^ipguJar 
jtroaoun,  common  gcnlcr,  except  by  a  clum?y  rojtelitinn  of  pronouOii'  •■ 
of  corresponding  Venders  ;  th'r?,  "If  any»j'f»i  or  woman  sha'l  ▼{•olftt*' 
h\M  or  her  p'edge,  he  or  i<he  shall  pay  a  fnio."  The  us©  of  th9|>//(rf  { 
pronoun  in  fuoh  cases,  though  somatiincs  used,  !s  tmpr«j|ef. 
,  471.  Pronouns  referring  to  singular  n(iUi;S  or  other  words,  of  the 
<><)tumon  goudcr,  taken  in  a  general  s  ;ri.^e,  are  c.)0)monly  u\asculino  : 
as.  "A   parent  shouSl  love  his  child." 

47?.  Pronouns  representing  nouns  jxrsonifiod,  take  thfl  gender  of 
the  noun  as  a  jjimhoh  ;  as,  "Au/hi.  s..ble  gt  diess,  fri^ui  her  cbisii 
throiib." 


4/3.  It  is  iinpr"p^r  in  ihepr')gros:  .  ,'  :i  ientcvco  (o  dor.oto  On-  sa 


mo 


pers-'Ds  by  pror.ouns  of  different  nnmbrr?  :  a.'',  '■!  lahrtrcd  long  to  make 
thee  hai'iiv,  aid  now //o«  rew-i'd  ma  ly  iig"  at  i'ude."  It  sh-  u'd  bo 
either  '  t'«  m-ik(7/-/«  happy,"  or''  thou  re.virdo.n." 

EXERCISE.Vt  >  BJ"  r        iicjted. 

Id  cb.ch  sen-CMce,  state^  tho  woKis'  k^'whi  h  the  pronouns  rflPor, 
change  the  prorjouns  v.'biuh  aio  i^r.njr,  aid  give  a  reason  fi^r  t'.o 
changf-  :  — 

(4(3.0.)  A  persons  succe-5  ill  life  depends    on    their   exertions.;  if ,. 
th«y  aim  at  nothinjr,    they  sb  :'I    certainly  a<-hieve    nothing.     Ex- 
tremes are  not  in  its  nature  favorable  to  happinci^s.     A  man'.'?  rec- 
ollections of  the  past  regulate  their  antit  ipnlions    of  the  future— r 
Lat^evecy  IJoy  aqswer  for  themselves.     I'^ach  of  us  had  more   thiui  - 
w6>wanted!.     Every  one  of  you  should  attend  to  your  own  business. 

;(fl67  1.)  Dircontcut  and  gonow  pmailcsted  itself  in   bis  counte- 


Sl^NTAS— PAESIxa.  121 

nance.  Both  cold  and  heat  have  its  extremes.  Yqu  and  your  friend, 
should  take  c;ire  of  themselves.  You  and  I  must  b*3  diligedt  in  youi: 
studies, 

(46Y-2.)  John  or  James  will  favor  us  with  their  company.  Ona 
or  the  other  must  relinquish  their  claim.  Neither  wealth  n6r  honor 
confers  happiness  on  their  votaries.  Every  plant  and  every  Howep 
proclaims  their  Maker's  praise.  P^iich  day  aud  each  hour  brings 
their  changes.  Poverty  and  Avcalth  have  eaeh  their  own  tompta- 
tioBi.  No  thought,  no  word,  no  action,  can  escape  in  the  judgment, 
whether  they  be  good  or  evil.  >     . 

(467.)  Let  every  man  and  every  woman  strive  to  do  tlieir  best. — 
If  any  boy  or  girl  shall  neglect  her    duty,  they    shall    forfeit   theiir' 
place.     Nolady'or   gentleman    would    do    a  thing  so  unworthy  (rf 
them. 

(4'?0.)  One  should  not  think  too  highly  of  themselves  A  teach- 
er should  always  coneult  the  interest  of  her  pupils.  A  parent's 
care  for  her  children  is  not  always  requited.  Every  one  should  con- 
sider their  own  frailties.  Let  each  esteem  others  better  than  her- 
self. 

(471.)  The  earth  ig  my  mother;  I  will  recline  on  its  bosom.— ^ 
That  freedom,  in  its  fearless  flight,  may  here  aunounce  its  glorious 
reigu.  Policy  keeps  coining  truth  in  its  mints,  suoh  truth  as  it  caa 
tolerate,  and  every  die  except  its  own  it  breaks  and  casts  away.  Aa 
time  advances,  it  leaves  behind  him  the  traces  of  its  flight. 

(472.)  Though  you  are  great,  yet  consider  thou  art  a  man.  Caro 
for  thyself,  if  you  would  have  others  to  care  for  thee.  If  thou  wert 
not  my  superior.  I  would  reprove  you.  If  thou  forget  thy  friend, 
eau  you  expect  your  friend  will  remember  theo  ? 


QUESTIONS. 

What  is  the  rule  for  the  pronoun.'  When  does  a  pronoun  i^fer 
to  twe  or  more  words  .'  If  eithei*  of  the  words  is  plural  ?  V/heii 
ure  words  taken  together  .'  When,  separately  ?  AVhat,  whonsia- 
gular  nouns  of  difl'erent  genders  are  taken  separately.'  Explain. 
17^.  Wkat  of  pronouns  representing  personified  nouns  .'  What 
must  must  be        erved  in  the  progress  of  a  sentence? 


3^2  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

THE  RELATIVE  AND TrS'^&rKCEJDENT. ' 

474.  Tlu-LE  Y. —  The  rdative  ag.rees,v^Uliii&MiiteGed,e,ii{,i 
in  number  andj^erson  ;  as  "Thou  who  speakost." — ••Tlua 
book  which  was  lost.'' 

475  The  number  of  the  relative  can  be  determined  only  rtbm  ta6' 
number  of  the  antecedent.  *  <  >       -  -    ■ 


O") 


476.    Who  is  applied  to.pcrs'ons'or '  things  ;^er^o}}  ijUd ';'  tf  Ji',J 
*^The  man  tvho^' — ^'Tha /btc  lohS  had  n'^ior'  seen  k  li'on.*''^ 
^  477.  Which .u  applied  to  thitigs\a,HdJnferioffanimals,-:ty^ 
sonietimesHo  children — to  .collecti\^e  nouns  ju  the  lin- 
gular, implying  unity — ajid,oal&o  to  ])ci-&o!ns  in  asking 

<XUCStionS.  -  :.i'j7.     i:i::  "{ 

479.  That  as  a  relative,  is  used  instead  of  jrZ/o  or  irhich — 

1.  After  adjectives  io  the  superlative  diBgi^'eS—afiet  the  word^  ct<.,. 

same,  and  all, — often  after  no;  feo^t^   jin'd*'Vifrty~irand   generally 
io  rcstrittivo  clau-scs.  :-,m:.-.;     ..•  .i   .'.  i"t;. 

2.  When   the  antecedent  includes.  b<>-th   pctirsbiia  and    things;    a^- 

"The  man  and  the  horse  that  we  savf." 

3.  After  the  interrogative  who,  and  pften  after   tbo  personal  pro- 

nouns; a.?,    "Who  that   knew  Kim    could  ,'ibia^  so'?'j'-—*'I'<7t('^ 
speak  jn  righteousness."  ''*'''  ^■'''  '''  '""-*^-  '■■  ■^' 

4.  Geaerally  when  the  propriety  ^fw// a  or  iohi(W\i  Itfoilbled/'ft^, 

"The  little  c/it"W  f7to  ^was  placed  in  the  miilfet.'*'     '*=^J -'•'-' 

479.  The  relative  in  the  objective- cs[se'iS''6fteil'6inittoay''ks/'*'']^ro 
as  the  book  I  promised  you."  •  ■';    i.,'!t:'  s/;  no^  dgiu.  'i'      ITl- 

480.  ll'Vmi  should  not  be  used,  for  t^e  eoojxmctitvn  that:  "Wbue,' ''"  I 
can  not  believe  la\xttchat  it  jp  so/'  shq^ild  be,;'|  Intji  thai  it  iq.-ao.^:  i     > 

EXERCISES  ON  THE  RELATIVE, 

481.  The  relative  is  <>:encrally  ]>I:i('ed  nUor  its  ai)le 
cedent. 

«42.  To  prevont  ambiguity,  the  rolativ.o,  should  bo  .placed  as  near 
•its  antecedent  as  possible.  When  the  anlep.^/^|e^t,)cau  Jvofc  b,«:  d«ter- 
mined  by  the  sen>ie,  it  should  bo  detcj,mtne4  bj;,  tl«5; ufW'i^8%< <>^'  .*!^9 
relative.  '       '    '     •'""'..-■•••■  ,'  .. 


SYNTAX— ^XOMINATIVE.  128 


EXERCISES  TO  BE  CORRECTED. 

la  the  foliowiug  sentenoea  which  are  the  relatives  ?  Whatislho 
antecedent  to  which  each  refors':'  Correct  thr.se  which  are  wrong, 
and  give  the  lule,  or  the  reasn  for  the  eh  an  go  : — 

(475.)  Those  which  seek  wisdoAi  will  certainly  find  her.  This  is 
th«  friend  which  I  {oVo.~(47C)  That  is  thfe  Tice  whom  I  hate.  The 
tiger  is  a  beast  Of'prey  who  destroys  without  pity.  The  court  who 
gives  c6Tr«Jircy  to- sach  luAnners  should  be  exemplary.  The  nations 
who  have  the  hcstrulera  arc  hajipy.  Your  friend  is  one  of  the  coin- 
mittee  who  was  appointed  yesterday.  The  family,  with  whom  I 
liV6d  has  left  the  city.  Tils,  father  set  him  np  as  a  meccluxnt,  who 
was  what  he  desire,(|!.to  be.  ,If  you  intend  to,  be  a  teacher,  who  you 
can  not  be  without  learning,  you  must  study. 

(477.)  It  is  the  best  situation  which  can  be  got.  That  man  was 
the  first  who  enter^t^.j .  This  is  the*  same  horse  which  we  saw  yester- 
day. Solomon  was  tho  w  iscst  king  whom  the  world  ever  saw. — 
The  lady  and  the  Inpdog,- which  we  saw  at  the  window,  have  disap- 
peared, TJie  man  aiid  the  things  which  he  has  studied  have  not  im- 
proved his  morals.  1  who  speak  unto  you  am  he.  No  mAn  who 
respects  hi-nigeif  would  doao  mean  an  action.  I  can  not  believe  but 
whatydii  have  been  sick.  It  is  not  impossible  but  what  you  Hre 
mi.<5takeu.'  :    V'-'f  "  '    i'  -   .  .     -■  ;  . 

(481)'"''The'king'dismIssed  h^sl  minister  without  inquiry,  who  liad 
never  bcfot-e  committed  so  unjust  an  act. 

QUIESTIONS. 

What  is  the  rule  for  the  relative  ^  For  who  .'  For  which  ?  Give 
the  four  rule.ri  for  the  use  of  thftt.  St^ite  471>.  What  should  bo 
the  position  of  the  relative.'     Explain  481. 


I 


'VHE  SUBJECT  NOMINATIVE* 

483.  KuLK  Vf. —  The  subject  of  a  finite  verb  is  put  in  the 
nominative  -;  as,-  ^'' / ain'^ — ^^ Thou  art'' — ^'TTe  is" — " They 
are'' — ^'Timc  flics.'' 


124  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

48 1.  A  ftnito  verb  is  a  verl>  in  tho  indicative,  potential,  subjunct- 
ive or  imperative  mood. 

485.  The  subject  of  a  finite  verb  may  be  a  noun,  a  pronoun,  an  in- 
finitive mood»  a  participle  used  as  a  noun,  or  a  clause  of  a  sontencw 
All  these,  when  tho  aubjeet  of  the  verb,  are  reg^arded  as  the  »omiua- 
tive. 

4<6.  It  13  improper  to  use  both  a  noun  and  its  pronoun  as  the  nom* 
inative  to  the  same  verb.     The  nominative,  especially  in  the  answer 
to  a  question,  and  after  than  or  «»,  often  has  the  verb  understood  ;  at 
•' W7(o  said  80  ?" — *'Hc    [said  so]." — "James  is    taller   than  /[am] 
but  not  so  tall  as  ynu  [ar^]." 

487.  The  subject  is  commonly  placed  before  the  verb.     But   in  im- 
perative and  interrogative  sentences, and  in  sentences  inserted  for  tho 
sake  of  emphasis  or  euphony,  the    subject    in    often    placed  after 
verb  ;  as,  ''Go  fkou." — "Did  he  go  ?" 

EXERCISES  TO   BE  CORRECTED. 

Which  nouns  or  pronouns  in  the  following  sentences  are  tho  sub- 
ject of  the  verb  ?  IfHotinthe  proper  case,  change  them,  and  give 
the  rule,  or  a  leason  for  the  change  :  — - 

[■483.]  Him  and  me  are  of  the  same  age.  Suppose  yo»i  and  me 
go.  Them  are  excellent.  Whom  do  you  think  has  arrived?  Them 
that  seek  wisdom  will  find  it.     You  and  us  enjoy  many  privileges.; 

[486..]  John  is  older  than  me.  You  are  as  tall  as  her.  Who  has 
aknife?  Me.  Who  came  in?  Her  and  him.  You  can  write  a^ 
well  as  me.     That  is  the  boy  whom  we  think  deserves  the  prize. 

Virtue,  however  it  may  be  neglected  for  a  time,  yet  men  are  so 
constituted  as  to  respect  genuine  merit. 

QUESTIONS.  t 


U'b»*  is  the  rule  for  the  subject  ?  What  is  a  liuitc  verb  ?  What 
may  th^if  subject  be.'  Explain  480.  When  is  the  verb  understood  .•' 
AVkere  sbouid  the  subject  be  placed  ? 


THE  NOxMIXATIVE  INDEPENDENT. 
4-8S,  lluLE  Vll. — A  suhatantloe  whose  case  depends  on 


SYNTAX — NOMINATIVE.  125 


no  other  word,  is  put  in  the  nominative.     This  occurs  un- 
der the  following — 

SPECIAL  RULES. 

489.  KuLE  1. — A  substantive  iclth  a 'participle  whose  case 
depends  on  no  other  word,  is  jmt  in  the  nominative  also- 
hite  ;  as,  "  He  being  gone,  only  two  remain." 

4^0.  In  this  construction,  the  substantive  is  sometimes  understood; 
as,  "  His  conduct,  viewing  it  even  favorably,  can  not  be  command- 
ed;" that  is,  ice,  a, person  viewing  it,  &c.  Pometitues  beiitg  and  hao- 
intj  been  are  omiUed  ;  a.",  "Iler  wheel  [/>t('»y]  at  re?t" — "He  de$troyed 
or  won,  rf'C.  that  is,  "lie  hnvtnr/  hccn  dtstroyed  or  won,"  &0. 

491.  lluLE  2- — A  person  or  thing  addressed^  without  a 
verb  or  governing  word^  is  put  in  the  nominative  uidqicn- 
dent ;  as,  "  I  remain,  dear  sir,  yours  truly" — '^  Flato, 
ihou  reasonest  well." 

492.  Rule  3. — A  substantive,  unconnected  in  mere  ex- 
clamation, is  put  in  the  nominative  indeiiendent ;  as,  "  O, 
the  times .'"  *'0  the  manners  .'" 

494,  Rule  4. — A  substantive,  used  by  pleona&m  before  an 
affirmative  is  put  in  the  nominative  independent ;  aii,  "The 
bog,  oh  where  was  he  ?" — ''Your  fathers,  where  arc 
they  ? — the  prophets,  do  they  live  forever?" 

exercises  to  be  corrected. 

Point  out  the  noun  or  pronoun  whose  case  depends  on  no  other 
word — put  it  in  the  case  required  by  the  rulo,  and  give  the  special 
rule  requiring  it. 

Me  being  absent,  the  business  was  negloted.  lie  made  as  wise 
proverbs  as  any  body,  him  only  excepted.  All  enjoyed  themselves 
very  much,  us  excepted.     Whom  being  dead,  we  shall  come. 

-  '  Whose  gray  top 

Shall  tremble,  him  descending. 
The  bleating  sheep  with  my  complaints  agree  ; 
'J'hem  parched  with  heat,  and  me  inflamed  by  thee. 


126  EN&LISH  CtR-V^IMA^, 

Her  quick  relapsing  to  bor  Corracr  sta^e. 
Then  hII  thy  gifts  and  grace?  we  display, 
Thee,  ouly  thee,  directing  all  our  way,  : 


THE  VERB  AND  ITS  NOMINATIVE; 

494.  ^VrX'E.Ylll,--4.'VepJ)^qgrefis  loith^  its  n()mtnative^^\nf^ 
n umber  aiHiiKrson,; ■. a^„ , ^*I, xmi,^' , "Thou rmd^sV^  otB<> 
reads,''  <'We  ;Ta<^/"  &c. 

SPECIAL  RULES. 

495.  lluLE  1. — A  aingulnr  fiotcn  used  in  a  jf^^n^^al  sehsc, 
lias  a  verb  in  the^^lural ;  as,  "I'on  snif  ork  ixi  sight.'' 

496.  llULE  2.'—  TWo  or  iriore  substantives,  *  singular,  ta- 
Icr.H  tog  ether,,  have  a  verb  lit  the  plural  •'  as]''-*^J^or»><?s  khd 
John  are  liGvo.'^  .-;.«,•"?    /""f 

{497.  A  singular  nominative  and  an  objective  connected  by  7t'j>«, 
sometimes  tavc  a  plural  verb;  as,  "The  ship  witb'th9  crow  ir^re  ]o&t.'' 
This  construction  is  incorrect,  and  should  not  be  imitated-! 

498.  "When  substantives  connected  by  ami  denote  one  person  or 
tbingf,  the  verb  is  singular  ;  as,  **Why  is  (h)8t.  and  tJsAes  ptoud  ?"^' 
*  The  saiiit,  the  father,  and  the  /i utiha nd, prai/nJ'-'-Biimv.-    ^     *■'      \ 

49d.  Singular  nouns  preceded  by  ^toA,  ercr^,  jiOjthougli  fcorJ.no'Cted 
by  and,  have  the  verb  in  the  singular;  as,  "Each  book  and  each  pa/>er 
ivaa  arranged."  When  a  verb,.having  soVsval  nomiualivos  connect- 
ed by  and,  is  placed  after  the  first,  it  agrees  with  that,  and  is  under- 
stood to  the  rest;  as,  -.,     ,  , 

"Forth  in  thp  pleasing  8pri"g 
Thy  beauty  loalhs,  thy  iciiderncix,  and  hcc" 

500.  When  ^he  substantives  connected  arq_  of  dillereiit  /^<?/fio/t.<!, 
the  verb  in  the  plural  prefers  the  first  to,  Jhe  .second,  and  t|ie  sc^con  d 
to  the  third,     this  can  be  perceived  pnljr,,in  the  pifpftO^ii.  ii„^,  ^^  -. . 

501.  lluLE  3. —  Ttoo  or  more  substantives,  singular,  ta- 
ken separatcli/,  or  one  to  the  exclusion  of  the  rest,  have  a  verb 
in  the  singular. 


SY:nT.\Y — XOMTXATIVE.  12T 

.    502..  Nouns  ta^xense^yaiaifty^,  are  ponnected   by    or,   nor,  as  wM  a 
and  also,  it'-?^     A  noun  taken  so  as  to  exclndcoVnQxs,  is  connected  with 
by  such  phrases  as  and  not,  hut  not,  not,  &.  In  ?uch,  the  verb  agrees 
with  the  subjcctallirmcd  Off,  and.  is,' understood  with  the  others. 

504.  But  whan  two  or  raoro  subdtailtivss,  taken  separately,  are  of 
(liiforputaupih^rs,  the  verJ)  agrees  with  the  one  n-ext  it,  and  the  phi- 
rivl  fcubJQGt  is.,v^ui|ly.i)Iatied  P9?t  t^^Q  verb  ;  as,  "Neither  the  captaiu 
nor  the  saiIyi;s:Jt'_tye  ,suved.','     ,  ^,  _ 

Jf^4^.^^1^\]ihz4:^-r^JYI\cnH^hM^^  separately,  are 

of  dlfftir^M p(\rs-})iy,thc.  c^iirhngvecs  with  the  one  next  to  it;  as^ 
'•.Jaiiiocj.or,  X.^/w  iu.tlio  wrong'.' — '^Either  you  or  ho  2> 
ftii^thkiepif^'-^*^!  ckp  then  ort  to  bUimc." 

.^(^5.  'fetTLV.  t^.^^^  A  collective  noun^ejcpressinj  mani/y  as 
ONt  WilOLE,  Ki'ix^avei'h'm  the  sing vJar  ;  as,  ''  TIic  compa^ 
////  ivas  lar.:(\  ' 

50G— ^.  B lit  iciieiKja.cpUective  noun  expresses  mani/  as, 
indiviihmhythc  verb  wui^t  he  plural;  as,  ^'^ly  peoj^l^.do 
not  c'on,si(.l!er.''  ;^,,^  I.f,;? 

i>:i7.  It  i^  S(7naotiw93  jlifllcult  to  determine]  whether  a  col'etftire 
tiuuaiQXuresses  «/(/(y  qj:,^il^raliiy.  .  It  is  now;  considered  gtneraily  best 
to  US©  the  plural.  wLere  the.s,iag.aiar  is  manifestly  required.  ^    i 

60,^.  A'nominatlvoafter  '^many. a"  has  a  verb    in  the  singular j  a?* 


EXERCISES  TO  EE  CORRECTED. 

■  '■'■/,  '■.'.■'-■"' 
"What  is  t'le  verb  in  each  of  the  following  sentences  ?  What  is  the 
Fubjcct'/  ceo.  if  they  iugroe..  If  they  do,  give  the  rule  and  show- 
how  it'kpplios-.  If  tbey  do  not,  change  .the  verb  so  as  to  agree  With.; 
ii.s  nolffihativo,  andC  give  the  rule.'  1?hus.^ores  should  be  love,  to  agree 
Avifc"Si''//ia  Ihefit'st;  ^'(ir^uii/'sin'gular.' ''i^jV^e--"  A  verb  agrees,"  &c.' 

'(^l04.f  t'^tives  JreadinV.    "K  soft  answer  turn    away  wrath.-T-.[ 
^Vo  is  bat  of  yesterday,  and  knows  nothing.     The  days   of  man, 
is  as'giNfe^.    •'Thrfii^s3e>'ho\v  Vi'tlle  ha^'  been  dWc.     He  dare  hbt 
act  (Hh<¥T\Viso.     Fifty  pburtds  'of  W'he'atpTodtfc.es  forty  pounds  of  ^ 
flour.    ""^A  Vari<ity  6f  lilbii'sin,^  objects  charm  the  eye.     So  mucli 
oi'  ability  and  merit  arc  seldom    found.     A  judicious  arrange- 


128  ENGLISH  GRAM^IAE. 

'{C  • 

rcikni  of  studies  facilitate  improvement.  Was  you  tliere  ?  Cir- 
cumstances alters  caj?es.  There  i?  sometimes  two  or  three  of 
las.  I,  whn  are  first,  Ints  the  best  claim.  The  derivation  of 
these  words  are  uncertain. 

(40Q.)-  Forty  head  ot  cattle  was  sold  in  one  hour.  Tlie  horso 
■was  sent  forward  to  c':ij:..ge  the  enemy.  The  foot,  in  the  mean- 
time, was  preparing  tor  an  attack.  Fifty  sail  was  seen  ap- 
proaching the  coast,  "iwo  r^ozen  is  as  many  as  you  can  take. 
One  pair  was  spoiled  ;fjve  pair  was  in  good  condition, 

(496.)  Patience  and  diligence,  like  faith,  removes  mountains. 
Life  and  death  is  in  the  power  of  the  tongue.  Anger  and  im- 
patience is  always  unreasonable.  Out  of  the  same  mouth  pro- 
oeedeth  blessing  iind  cui-:ing.  Idleness  and  ignorance  produces 
many  vicos.  'I'cmpc'ranco  and  exorcise  preserves  health.  Time 
nod  tide  waits  for  no  mun.  Our  welfare  and  security  consists 
in  unity.  To  proCoss  re  .jard  and  to  act  diflferently  marks  a  base 
mind.  To  bo  good  and  to  seem  good  is  difierenl  things.  To  do 
good  and  to  shun  evil  is  equf4.11y  our  duty. 

(498.)  That  able  scholar  and  critic  have  died.  Vour  friend 
and  patron,  who  were  here  yesterday,  have  called  again  to-day. 

(499  )  Every  leaf,  and  every  twig,  and  every  drop  of  water 
teem  with  life.  Every  man  and  every  woman  were  searched. 
Each  day,  and  hour,  and  moment,  are  to  be  diligently  improv- 
ed. No  wife,  no  mother,  no  child, soothe  his  cares.  No  oppres 
Bor,  no.  tyrant  triumph  there. 

(501.)  Either  the  boy  or  the  girl  were  present.  Neither  pre- 
cept nor  discipline  arc  so  forcible  as  example.  Our  happinoss 
or  misery  depend  much  upon  our  own  oondact.  When  sick- 
jjess,  infirmity^  or  misfortune,  affect  us,  the  sincerity  of  friend- 
ship is  tried.  Neither  ability  nor  inclination  are  wanting,  A 
man's  being  rich,  or  his  being  poor,  do  not  affect  his  character 
or  integrity.  To  do  good  or  to  get  good  are  equally  neglected 
■by  the  foolish. 

'.(502.)  His  time,  as  well  as  his  money  and  health,  were  lost 
jn  the  undertaking.  .  He,  and  not  we  are  to  blame.  James,  and 
«lsp  his  brother,  have  embarked  for  the  gold  region,     Books,  not 


SYNTAX — I^OMINATIVE.  129 

pleasure,  occupies  the  niind.  He,  an«jt  not  they,  are  mistaken. 
*  (503  )  Neither  the  sciiolarft  nor  tjic  teacher  was  preseat. — 
Whether  the  subjects  Qr  the  king  isi  responsible,  makes  no  dif' 
fere n CO. 

(504.)  Either  he  oc  T  are  willing  to  go.  Neither  thoa  nor 
he  art  of  ago.  You  o^  yoiij  brother  are  blamed.  Neither  James 
nor  1  lias  had  a  letteo'  tliis  week..  Either  Robert  or  his  sons  has 
me«  with  great  lossc^.  Thou,  or  he,  or  John  art  the  author  of 
tliat  letter. 

(505.)  Stephen's  party  were  entirely  broken  up.  The  meet- 
ing \.ero  larg^e  .nnd  a  espuctable.  The  people  often  rejoices  ia 
that  A'rhich  wiU  prftve  iheir  ruin.  The  British  .parliament  are 
cooijiused  of  lofda  and  commons.  Congress  consists  of  a  sen- 
ate and  house  of  ropre^otative!^.  Never  were  any  nation  so  in- 
fiitaattid.  The  noble  :wrmy  of  martyrs  praisath  ihee,  O  God  !  — 
A  great  nuci?)er  of  vvouien  were  present.  The  public  is  respect- 
fully informed.  Tho  audience  was  much  pleased.  ThecouDoii 
was  not  unaniHious.     •Congress  Iiave  adjourned. 

(508*)  Many  »  one  have  tried. to  bo  rich, but  in  vain.  Many  a 
broken  ship  hitv^  coimi  to  laud. 

QUESTIONS. 

Whnt  i.s  the  rulv?  for  tlic  verb  .'  For  a  singuUr  noun  used  in  a 
plural  sous- e  .'  '1  wo  or  more  substantives  singular  taken  togeth- 
er ?  A  BinjuJaa*  nQrumntive  and  with  ?  When  can  noun«  connect- 
ed by  aT.d  have  a  sint^^lar  verb  ?  Ot*  several  connected  nomina- 
tive^ with  which  docs  iJieverb  agree?  When  the  nominatives  are 
of  ditfcront  pers«n;s  with  whicli  does  tlic  verb  agree  i*  WI>at  is 
special  rule  3  ?  Hiovr  are  nouns  connected  separately,  exclusive- 
ly .'  The  rule  for  oouns  of  different  numbers.'  Tb«  lules  for 
eolieetive  nouns  ?    l^^xplaiu  507.     Nominative  after  7««7?y  a  ? 

*■■  :\  (\-  '■•■* 
.'  M.:ovr 

THK  PREDICATE   NOMINATIVE. 

i){)9^  ^Vh^lXtiT^  The  desonptice  ioor<7^  after  a  verb  is 
put  in  thg  same,  cfist  an  i]it  subject  l\e/ore  it ;  m^-'^ 

'♦Jt  i»  1"^'*^'  Hc^gh^ll  be  cfvUed  Juku'^'-r-n"  She  walks  a  quettOi' 


130  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

—'-Si  took  it  to  bo  /«:»»"— -He  seema  t6   be  a  :?c%^/tfr-'^"The' 
oipmion  IB,  that  he  willlive."     HoAce — 

Note.  As  th2  su'^joiit  oi' tho  vorb  can  he  only  in  the  nd-ioativiir 
objective,  tho  descripiivo  word  eaa  be  ouiy  iu  tho  nomidativo  or'ob- 
jective.  "  ^ 

510.  Any  v?rT>  may  be  tho  copula  betw  leu  tbe  subject  and  tbi  des- 
criptive word,  exoaj.t  a  transit  ve  verb  in  the  active  v<.ice.  But 
tbose  most  commonly  used  in  tbis  way  are  tboWerbs  to  lie,  to  bevomtt 
io  sctm,  to  appear  ;  intransitive- verbs  of  iiiotiuu,  position,  Ac,  and 
passive  verbs,  denoting  to  cnV,  name,  ■*ti/If,  appoint,  choose,  make,  ««- 
item,  reckon^  ti,ii.<i  the  like. 

POSITION. 

511.  The  usual  position  of  the  descriptivG  is  after  tho  verb, 
as  that  of  the  subject  is  boforo  it,  ami  this  is  alway,9  the  ovdav 
of  construction.  But  in  both  the  direct  and  the  indirect  (ques- 
tion, and  in  inserted  sentences,  its  j^lace  is  often  different ;  as, 
"  Who  is  he  f" — '-We  know  not  who  7ie  is '— '•  l.s  7a' a,sTLT- 
DKNTV'--"He  is  the  srime  that  Ae  Waa'^-  '*=The  dog  if  w.Vs 
that  died"— "A  man  7a <i  was  to  all  the  cohhtry  xlear"'— '•F'ek't '' 
was  I  to  the  lame" — 'Far  other  scenk  in  Tarasymene  now." 

EX2RCISES  TO  BE  CORRECTED.  • 

In  tbe  following  sentences,  what  is  its  subject? — wbat  the  descrip- 
tive ?  C:)rrec:  whore  it  is  wrong,  and  give  tho  reason  for  the  corret- 
ti.on.  Thus,  we  id  tbe  dancriptive,  and  shou  d  ba  /,  because  the  sub- 
ject it  is  iQ  the  uDminative.     Rule  -"The  predicate,"  k'>i. 

(509  )  It  is  mo.  It  was  me  who  wrote  tho  letter,  and  him 
who  carried  it  to  the  post  office.  I  am  sure  it  could  noi  have 
"been  hei*.  It  is  them,  you  say,  wlio  deserve  most  bli\n\e.  Vfui 
-would  probably  ilo  the  same  thing  it  you  were  him.  I  under- 
derstood  it  to  be  he.     It  may  have  been    him,,, bui.  there  is  no 

proof  ot  it.  ,  .  ,   ,  .  ,     / 

Whom  do  you  think  he  is?     Who  do  you    think  him.  to  be  : 

Whom  do  men  say  thai  I  am  X  She  is  the  per«6nN«'ho  t  under- 
stood it  to  be.  He  is  the  man  whom  you  said  It  was.  Lot  him 
"be  whom  he  may.  Can  yoa  tell  whom  that  man  is  ?  Is  it  not 
him  whom  you  thought  it  was  '\ 


PARSINOpTrY^RB.  131 

THE  OBJF.CTi  V' E  GOVERNED  BY  VRPJSS. 

512.  Rule  X. —  ,1  ..hsitive^  verh  in  the  active  voice  gov- 
ems  (he  ohJecUiecosc  ;  iis,  *'Wc  \o\Q  Ji'wi." — "He  loves 
Ks"— "  Whom  did  tluy  send?" 

513.  Th'e  infinitive  moo  i  nr  participle  used  as  a  noun,  or  pare 
of  a  sentence,  may  be  i'.>e  object  of  a  transitive  vfti'b,  as  well  as 
a  noun  or  pronoun  ;  bb,  -'boys  love  to  play."—'-''  I  know  lolio  is 
there.'' — "  I  wiaii  that  th^>j  v^nr  nvV-'." — ''You  see  ho^  few  have 
returned. 

srECIAL  RULES. 

14  r  Rule  1. —  An  fnfravsilive  vrrh  does  not  <jovcrn  an 
ohjec.tive  caar.      Thus — 

"  Repenting  hivi  othis  design,"  blioukl  be,  "  Repenting  of  bis 
design  "  Still  a  fe-w  anomalies  of  this  kind  are  to  be  Tound  ;  af* 
^Tbey  laughed  7f/wi  to  scorn.' — 'The  manliness  to  look  the  iu6- 
Jcct  in  the  face."' — '-Talked  tho  nnjht  away 

515.  Rule  2. — Intransitive  verbs  in  a  transitive  seme 
(257)  govern  the  objective,  case  ;  as  "He  runs  a  race*' — 
'^They  live  a  holy  ///." 

r>lG.  To  tbid  usage  may  bo  referred  such  eypressions  as  tbefol'ow- 
iug  :  ''The  brook  ran    ntctur."     "The  Iro^s  wept    gum»    and  lalme." 
'  "  Jler  lips  blush  deeper  mocetfi,"  &c. 

h\1.  To  this  rule  also  belongs    the   objective   after  caiiso'Vif^  ;  as, 
*'Ilo  runs  a  nfcf/e.      ''John  walks  bis  horse  "    "  He  •works  him   harfi/ 
L   &e.     Such  exprssiiion?,  how-aver,  as,  *' yroicn  corn,"  aro  inelegant,  ai;d 
[i  should  be  aroi'Ie  1, 

h       518. •Rule  3. — Litrandtive  irrhs  do  rtot  admit  a%ass've 
voice,  ejxept  7chen  nsrd  transitive/^.     Thus — 


I 

k       'I  am  purposed"—'!  am  perished,"  should  be/*  1  have  pur, 

'posed" — "■  I  am  perishing.'     iJut  we  can  say,  "My  race  is  run.i 

becnu-c  rvn  is  used  transitively. 

519.  A  transitive  verb  in  the  aotive  vo^ce,  without  an  object,  eith- 
er has  an  obj  .ct  understood,  or  is  used  intransitive'y. 

520.   Rule  4. — A  traiuitive  verh  does  not  admit  a prep" 


132  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

tf9ki&n  a/Ccr  it  ;  tluiH,  "I  iDTist   premi  it    a  fow  oli- 

jservationsi."     "I  M'ill  not  allow  of  it."      Omit  with  aad 

521.  Rult:  5. —  Verbs  si<jnijy.ing  to  n^me,  ,  noosE,  AP- 
TOINT,  COx^i'  '.,:  U/iC,    (jeneralJi/' ^q\         Uvooh-^^ 

jeotives.viz.,  t.-.c  I'iuLCT,  (Uiioiinri  the  jiersoii  oi'  A'l^U  o.cted 
uipon,and  fhri^'iiy-^'''':  '^ffotin^  the  result  of  fie  avlxxj.)icss' 
^d;  as,  ■■  .      ^  iJp^iiiJ',  ffTh,Q  peapl,e fleeted 

52'^.  In  such  i.3ntano<?s/*'^i-t^e  passive,  vqic«,  tha  ilircet^  object  is 
xiiade  the  8ulij:ct,  aud  cl-'' indireul,  remains  as  the  descriptiv.6  after 
the  verb,  a.^cordiig  to  Eiilo  IX.  Thus,  "  Ho  n^s  named  Johu."  "lie 
"was  elected  J)?■esn'k')i^"  '"It  w^  i^^-f^^  ^.l'S'^^\' 

523.  BcsiJestbei  itnTneiiate  cbjcet  in  the  objective  case, seme  verbs 
Ijaye  a /•«mofe  object  bit vva^jj  ^t1)ewwec/m'e  and  the  verb,  govwDcd 
"by  a  oreposition  understood  ;  as,  *' John  p>v8r'Ws  o  {loqk."  But  when 
the  ramota  obj-jct  conifcs  bvst,  the  preposition  must  be  expressed  ;  as, 
*'John  gave  ji  &oici?Jto  :.rn'"     Thb  verbs  thiis  used  are  such   .ae  sigDify 

to-  Wsft,  <^cA{  y^<^/'y  provkli^y^iv^j  ''2ittif,'uil,  ulUw,  dcft^/,  an'd'Somo  oih- 

^,j-      ,     ,  .,    ,;  .,...,..,■;,.,,.,,!■;«  ...'•  ...f,,.  .,-.'  >,■,..;,.,:-'•./..-  ' 

rosiVipJf  V 

524.  As  t lie  nominative  and  objective  case  of  nouas  are  alike, 
the  arrang^amcnt  of  the  sen;epcp  shpulcl  clearly  distingpjgh  th*) 
one  case  from'  tbc  o'tuer.  The  nominative  i'enerAi.]y»/'(t;cj2df!.v  tlie 
verb,  and  the  ohjecCwb  follows  it.  .•    ;,,;;,,,••,.'; 

525.  Wlien  theobj^c'.ivo  is  a  relative  or  interrogative  pro- 
uoun,  ifcprc^ii'^'les, both  the  verb  und  its  nominative;  as,  .'•'  The 
3tnan  «v^o/«.,we'!5awi^.iddad."T'^"  jr/i07»  did  you  send  ?^  *  ' 

526.  The  objective  sh on] u  not,  if  pDSPibie,  be  separated  Vroni  ils 
▼erb  by  iatcTVf^nintj'clauScJs.  Thu:^,  "  We  could  hot  discoLur,  for  tb>^ 
■want  of  proper  tQ^,riitff<^lii^  of  them  tal.*'  Better,  "We  could 
japt,  for  the  wiint  of^pfoparvfejits,  discover  Ihc  q^iality  of  the  lutital." 

iXEttWsfis  TO  PE  COHIIECTED. 
"^  tho  foUor7ia«:  semsxi'^es.  c-errect  thccrrora  jiccordirj:  to  the  rule. 


SYNTAX — VERB.  133 

and  gire  a  reason  for  thie  change:   'Parse  the   sentences  corrected.-^  "" 
Thus,  /  should  b« //«c,  because  gover::ed  by  lovtu.     Rule,    *-A  transit- 
tiv9  verb,*' Jk«. :-  .    /ii  <i.i  .CJiM  ^  -  ■     . :  ,  i  1 ' -^  1  i.w(  -   .i  li'i^ 

(512.)  He  lovGs  I.  'He  and  they  we  know,  but  who  art  thou  ?' 
She  that  is  idle   and    inischievoua.    reprove  sharply.     Ye  only- 
have  I  known.     He  who  committed  '  the   offenco  thou  shoulds^  " 
correct,  not  I  who  am  innocent.     They  that   Imnor   me    1  will    » 
hopor.     Who  do  you  thitik  \  daw  yesterday  i     Who  did  he  mar- 
ry }     She  who  wo  met  at  the  Spring   last   giunmer.     Who  hav- 
ing not  seen,  wo  love.     Who  siiould    f    weee  th-^  mher  dsy  buf^'* 
myxoid  friend  ?     Who  dost  thou  take  to  De  su(?!i  a  cnT.ird  7         -^ ' 

(514  )     You  will  have  reason  enoug'i    to  rppcfit  you  of  your,  " 
foolish  coiidiict.     They.did  nol  fail  to  enlarge  themeclyes  m\  the 
subject..    Go,.^e<?  thee  away  into  the   land  of  Judoa.  -  ifupten.ij 
thee  home.     Sit  thee  down  and  rest  thee.  •  > ".  ^va»» 

(515  )  Several  p  .if-ons  wore  entered  into  atjonspiracy.     Fi^'^ 
ty  men  are  dq.scrted  trom  the  army.     1  am  purposed  thftt  I  wiW''<T 
notrtin.     Hoi"  ilnnst  perished  with  cold.     1  am  resolved  to  go.^ 
HGi8retirtH^to  '  v  '^■  -vS      The  plague  was  then  entirely  ceased^ 
Is  your  fatMr  r^E'^r  ie  tv<is  not  returned, an  hour  ago. 

I  (52(J  )  iVo\; )  nur;,'  w>u  allow  of  such  aprftctice..  False  accu- 
sation cannot  diminish  from  his  real  mofitv*..  His  servants  ve are 
to  whom  ye  obey. -  He  iogratiatos  with  some  by  traducing  oth- 
ers, Thsy shall  nOt  want  for entjoura^^onient.  We  donot want 
for  fifnythin^.    -OoVe't'^af nearly  for  ^he  'lj^j?t  gifts.' '    *    ''    ' '" 

(5'2'oy  docket  could  ncit  better  discover,  ,  tiiun  by  attacking^ 
s)  powerful  an  interost,  his  resolutioxi  to  maintain  .his  rigjil. — 
Tli^^troops  j2,ar.3«Gi,  without  waiiing,l:p.  r^st,  the  enemy  to,, Ihfiix? 
gate's.  '  '  ■  '         ' 

Wliat  is  the  rule  for  the  transitive  verl.  :  WhatfHkrt  of  speech 
may  thc./i^j  ict  be  .'  Th<?  three  ruks  for  ii^tran.sitiv.e  verbs  ?_  Ex- 
plain .>1^^':T.  Why  may  a  transitive  vc^b  not  h;^.ve  a  preposition  ? 
WI>WlVfrrb.%'^^ovei-h  t'.vo  objljcts  .'  HoW  aV>J•!^ngcd  iu  the  passive  ? 
■\V hat  ocher  form  of  remote  obj'jci- .-'  What  id  the  vtpsition  of  tl»e 
nomiaatiy9  .^nd  objective  [ .,  Explain  o'l-]. 


134  ENGLISH    GRAMMAJl, 

THE  OBJECTIVE  GOVERNED  BY  PREPOSITIONS. 

526.  Rule  XI. — A  prepoaithn  (jfoccrns  tlte  objtctivc  cas^; 
as,  '*  To  whom  much  is  ijivon,  oi'  him  uiuvh  tliail  bo  re- 
quired."-mi  i    TDH. -ii    JUfi)   •  ' 

Tha  obje«i  !df  ftf'pripoiilion  is  ponjotimes  an  iDfinit're  mood— a  par- 
ticiple u-ed  as  a  nouu — part  of  a  sentence— a  pbraao,  or  dependent 
clause,  M  well  ae  a  noun  or  proaoun  j  as,  ''lis  is  about  to  dtfart.' 
*  *  ktT%Vi  %ee  cam:'"  "Os  rcceiviiitj  hit  dlftloiua."  "  Muoh  depends  on 
«*A«  art  hit  advitvKt.'' 

^27.  As  a  general  ru\e,  it  is  considered  inelegant  to  eonneot  either 
an  active  transitive  verb  and  a  preposition,  ortwo  prepositions  with 
the  same  object.  Thus,  "I  wrote  to,  tkxnl  icameU  him."  Better,  "I 
mrott  to  htm,  and  uonied  him." 

529,  When  ihe  preposition  to,  at,  in,  stand  btrfor*  names  of 
places,  the  following  usaj^e  .••houUl  be  cirefully  observed,  viz   : 

1.  To — 18  used  after  a  verb  of  rootit  n    towards:    as,    "  He  went  f*> 

Spain,"     But  it  is  omitted  before  home  ;  as,  *'  tto  hmme." 

2.  At — is  used  before  names  of //".(«*«,  viUag>:t,  tomht,  and  /vreign 

cities  ;  as,  *'He  resides  at  the  Aluusiwii  House."  ''At  SaratO|;« 
Springs."  "^<  Lisbon." 

.3.  In  is  used  before  coiintrie*  and  Ivgo  cities  :  as,  "  He  lives  in 
England,"  *  In  Lond'm,"  "  In  N-» ar  York."  But  at  is  used  be- 
fore the  names  of  places  ana  lar^e  ci'ios  aftdr  the  verbs  iouvhy 
tirrive,  lanil,  and  frequntly  after  the  verb  to  he;  as,  ''We  touch- 
ed at  Liverpool,  and  after  a  short  rassiijre,  lande  i  at  New  Or- 
leans." "Iwas  a(  New  York."' 

4.  In  speaking  of  one's  residence  in  a  city,  at  is  used  before  the 
No.,  and  iu  before  the  street;  as,  "  do  resides  at  N  ;-. — ."  "He 
lives  in  Stata  street."  Wtien  both  are  mentioned  together,  the 
preposi  ion  is  conamooly  understood   b-^fore  tbe  last ;   as,  "He 

lives  «t  No. ,  State  street,"  or  "  He  lives  in  State  street, 

No. ." 

f»36.  The  preposition  is  froqiionily  understoo.l.  as  follows  :  — 

1.  A  preposition  expressed  with  the  first  noun  or  pronoun  of  a  se- 

ries, may  bo  understood  to  tho  rest ;  a9,  "Be  kind  to  Juhn  and 
Jarneis  and  Mart/.'' 

2.  When  the  reraoto  object  of  aver>>,  governed    by  a  preposition,  is 

.placed  between  tjc  verb  and  its  immediate  object,  the  preposi- 


SYNTAX — PREPOSITION.  135 

tion  id  ofteH  omitted;  as,  *'Qivo  ot«  your,  .l^tnid."  *' Bring  hip  a 

chair,"  "Get. 7<e  ;i,book."''''-   J '•::.'■••{  '!•"  otly 
3.   y't»  is  commonly  oinlt-ted   after ^^A'*, ' »»««>•>    nijfh'^'M,  "£ikt  hii 
lathor,"  '•iW(</- a  river,"   &e  ,   and   p/  I'requvatly  after  worlAy 
aud  untiiorthif,  ,-,.,. 
531.  The  ph^.l^e^,  inrahi,  in  is«cr«t,  at  Jtrtt,  at  lait,  inahort,  on  high, 
and  the  like,  luaj'  eiiber  bo  pAtated  toge'.her  as  adrerbs,    Or  the  Uoun 
may  be  supplied,  ifid  each  word-  parsed  separately;   as    *'Iq  a  raia 
manner,''  "Id  a  aectat  plaet,'*  Ac.     Tf.e  pbraiie  in  a  teord,  has  the  pre- 
ceding tsrm  or  relation  uoderiitood  ;  ai,  "[lo  say]  ia  a  wurd." 

SPECIAL  RuiiB.  ' 

532.  Rule. — Xouns  denotinn^  TiMs,  value,  weight,  or 
MEASURE,  are  coiiwionlt/  jmt  in  the  ohjuativt  cait  without  a 
i/ovenLi'nr/ word ;   aa- - 

''kin  vfti.6  ah^tfM  iiix  months  \u»t  year. '^  "It  eost  f^  shilling  J"* 
It  is  not  wartb  a  cgnt."'  "It  vreigUs  a  pound.""  ''  Tlie  wall  is 
&\xj't:€i  liigl),  and  two  feet  thick."' 

IMii.s  may  be  called  the  objaciive  of  iimg,  value,  &c.,  as  the 
case  may  be. 

583.  Nouns  den -ting  timehom  lo'-y  are  generally  without  a  prepesl- 
tioQ;  at,  "  He  is  ten  i/ears  old."  Alt'.*  conus  denoting  time  tfh«n,  m  a 
gefoeral  or  indettnito  \yny  ;  as,"  Me  came  last  wttk."  But  nouns  de- 
nojjLag  the  time  uhcn,  deliuitely  cr  with  precision,  generally  have  tho 
pr,ppoiiion  expressed  ;  as,  ''He  came  last  weeJs.  on  W«dne»day,  in 
th4  er^ninij."  .  ,.- 

POSITION. 

534.  Prepositions  should  be  placed  before  the  words  which 
they  govern,  and  as  near  to  tlicin  us  possible  ;  bui  nev«r  before 
thai  as  a  rehitive, 

535.  The  preposition  v/ith  its  regimen  should  be  placed  as 
near  as  possible  to  the  word  to  wl\ic)i  it  is  related. 

EXERCISES    TO  BE  COIIRECTED. 
In  the  following  sentence*,  point  oat  the  preposition,  and  the  word 


136  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

sfoverned  by  it.     Correct  the  vtrort,  and  gire^a  rcasoa  for  the  cbau^e. 
Parse  the  sentoncss  when  Gorro  ted  : 

(527.)  To  who  will  you  give  that  pen  I  Th.ati^a  smftU  inat- 
tcr  between  you  and  1.  lie  came  tilong  with  James  (iDd  I,  He- 
gj^ve  the  book.to  some  on&.  I  know  not  who.-^[524j  VVhodoes. 
it  belong  to?     'j'hat  book  which  f  read  the  story  in  is  lost. 

(529.)  I  have  boen  to  Boston.  They  live  at  Saratoga  Spring;?.. 
VY«..tA»ohed  io  Liverpot>l  on  oor  way  to  New  Vork.  He  ha* 
been, to  home  for  some  d^>y^rt.  Ho  Ievks  at  Uudsou  t^trcGt,  in  No.. 
42.     ^Ve  remained  in  a  village  in  the  vieinitj  of  London. 

(530.)  Bo  80  good  as  lend  ta  m-e  your  gmnimar.  Get  to  him 
a  book  like  that.  A.^k  ot'  uie  that  Cjueation  again..  This  ha* 
tauglyt  to  me  a  lesson  which  i  will  ulwaj^  Ix?  mindful  of.  t'ay 
lome  what  yon  owo  to  me.  I  shall  be  pleased  to  do  to  him  a 
kindness.     Will  yuu  do  to  me  a  favor. 

(53j.)  The  naiui-e  of  the  undertaking  was  $uch  as  tp  render 
th«  progress  very  slow  of  the  work,  l^eyond  this  perl^  tho  artg 
i^aw  not  be  traced  of  civil  society. 

The  wronR  posUioii  of  the  preposition  and  its  regimen  often  pro- 
duces very  liidi«rotig  senteDees.     Ta«  ft>ll.>Kying  are  a  speciuien: 

,VV,ante<i  a  yo«og  mar^  to  Jake  cfvre  of  ^onie  l^orses,  of  ft  reljg- 
io»is.turn  of  mind.     The   following  vt^rses    were    written    by  «.^ 
y()Un<*  man  who  has  Ion*;  lain  in  the  grave,  for  his  own  amusLwIi" 
mfeht.*'  A  public  dinner  wa?  given  to  the  inhabitants,  ot  roAi^^'^ 
beef  and  plui.a-pudding.     1  saw  t!»at  ihe  kettle  had  been  soou'r^  ' 
«d,  with  halt  an  eye.     He  rode  to  town   and  drove  twelve  cows, 
on  horsoback.     The  man  was  digging   a    well,  with  a  Romaa 
tio£e> 


qn  EST  IONS. 


What  is  tl'.e  rule  for  i\\t  preposition  .'  What  uiiiy  he  governed 
by  a  preposition  ?  State  52&).  Narac  the  four  dli-ecnonfj  under  529. 
Wlien  may  the  prcpositior)  bo  tuider.stnoa  .'  Kipluiu  the  phrases 
Vm  vain,  &c.  What  nouus  have  jio  goY$riii»g  wv»rsi  '  Whi^-re  sho^l.<J 
fhepvepvisitoin  bt>  placec]  ? 


SYNTAX — PREPOSITION. 


13T 


539.  Rule  XII. —  Certain  words  and  phrases  should  he 
foUewedhi/  ajiprojwiate  prepositions.^^ 
j?  J  ^'       The  following  ligt  may  be  useful  for  refcreB«e:~ 


Abhorence  e/./ 

Abound  m,  iciih. 

Abridge  ^orr. 

Absent  from. 

Access  to. 

Aceommodate  io. 

Accord  with. 

Accui9  of. 

Acquaint  teith. 

Acquit  of 

Acqwicsce  tn. 

Adapted  ^0. 

Adequate  to. 

Adhere  to. 

Adjudge  to- 

Admonish  of. 

Address  to. 

Admission  (access)  tc. 

Admission  (entrance)   into. 

Aspire  io,  after. 

Aisociate  with,  seldom  to. 

Assent  to. 

Assure  of. 

Attain  to. 

Averse  to,  from. 

Banish  from,  io. 

Believe  in.  sometimes  07i. 

Bereft  of. 

Bestow  upon,  on. 

Betray  io  a  person  ;  into  a  thing. 

Boast  of. 

Bind  to,  in. 

Blush  a  t. 

Border  upon,  on 


AdTRDtnge  over,  of. 

Affinity  to,  with. 

AffectioB  for. 

Agree  with  a  person  ;  to  a  propo- 
sition from  «noth«rj  upo*  a 
thing  among  thticselref. 

Agreeablt  to. 

Allude  to. 

Alter  to,  alteraticn  ii. 

A  mere©  in. 

Annex  to. 

Analogy  to,  wth. 

Antipathy  ?o  agamst. 

Approve  of. 

Arvstj  teith,  in. 

Arrive  at. 

Ascendant  ovtr. 

Aik  0/ a  person  ;  for  a  thing;  after 
what  vft  Irish  to  hear  of. 

Dtmand  of. 

Denounce  against  a  person. 

Depend,  dependent  M/on,  on. 

Deprive  of. 

Derogate  from,  derogatory  /•. 

Derogation  from,  of. 

Despair  of. 

Despoil  of. 

Devolve  on. 

Die,  perish  of  a  disease;  by  an  in- 
strument, or  violence  ;  for  an- 
other. 

Differ,  different/?ow. 

Difficulty  in. 

Diminish /row,  diminution  0/, 


138  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

Call  on  a  person  ;  at  a  place.  Disabled ./>o>?). 

Capacity /or.  Disagree  with  a  person;   to  a  pro- 

Careful  of,  in.  posal  i 

Catch  at.  •  Disagreeable  to. 

Change  (exchange) /o;-;  (alter)     Dis.ippoiiitfcd    oAwhat    we  do  not 
to,  into.  get ;  in  what  does    not   answer 

Charge  on  a  person  ;  with  a  thing.      when  got. 
Compare  m</i,  in  respect  ofquul-  Disapprove  of. 

ity  ;  to,  by  way  of  illustration.  Discouragcy?ow;  discouragement 
Comply,  compliance  with.  to. 

Composed  of.  Disgusted  at.  with. 

Concede  to.  Dispose  of;  disposed  (;ulj.)  to. 

Concur  with  a  person  ;  /nameas-  Dispossess  of. 
ure  ;  <o  an  effect.  Disqualify  ybr, 

Condescead  to-    '  Dissent  from. 

Confer  on,  upon.  Distinct />om. 

Confide  in.  Divested  of. 

Conformable,  conformity  to, with.  Divide  heticccn  two,  (niung  more. 
Congenial  to,  Eager  in,  on,  of,  for ^  after. 

Congratulate  upon,  on.  Embark  in. 

Consonant  to.  Employ  in,  on,  about. 

Consist  (to  be  composed)  of,  .^to  Enamored  with. 

be  comprised)  in.  Encroach  upo7i,  on. 

Consistent  with.  Endeavor  after  a  thing. 

Contrast  with.  Engage  in  a  work  ;  for  u  time. 

Conversant  with  men  ;  in  things  ;  Enjoin  upon, 
about  and  ainong  are  less  prop-  Entrance  into. 
er.  Equal  to,  with. 

Convict  of  &  crime  ;  in  a  penalty.  Equivalent  to. 
Copy  after  a  person;  frovm.  thing.  Esponsc  to. 
Correspond    (to  be  consistent)     Estimated  at. 
with;  (answering  or  suitable)     Exception //o?",  to. 
to.  Exclude,  exclusion. /ro/«. 

Correspondence  with.  Exclusive  of. 

Cured  of.  Expelled  from. 

Debar  from.  Exp#rt  at  (before  a  noun)  ;  in  (be- 

Defend  (otbers)/ro/?i;  (ourselves)      fore  an  active  participle  ) 
against.  Fall  under   disgrace  ;  from  a  tree  ; 


Syntax — prepositions. 


139 


iFarailiar  to^  with  ;  a  thing  is  fa- 
miliar fo  us — we  w///t  it. 

Fawn  upon,  on. 

Followed  hij. 

Fond  of. 

Foreign  to,  sometimes y)o7«. 

Founded  upon^  on,  in. 

Free /row. 

Fruitful  in. 

Full  of. 

Glad  o/something  gained  by  our- 
selves ;  a(  something  that  be- 
falls another. 

Grateful  tea,  person  ;. /"or  favors. 

Hanker  offer. 

Hinder /ro?/i. 

Hold  of;  as,  "Take  hold  0/  me." 

Impose  ujjon. 

Incorporate  (active  transitive) 
into  ;  (intransitive  or  passive) 
with. 

Inculcate  on. 

Independent  of. 

Indulge  with  a  thing  not  habitu- 
al ;  in  a  thing  habitual. 

Indulgent  (0. 

Influence  on,  over,  iciih. 

I u form  of,  about,  concerning. 

Initiate  into  a  place  ;  in  an  art. 

Inquire. — (See  ask.) 

Inroad  into. 

Inseparable /ro?7i. 

Insinuate  into. 
Insist  uj)on. 
Instruct  in. 

Inspection  (prying)  into  ;  (super 
intemdence)  over. 


Intent  upon,  on^ 
Marry  to. 
Martyr  for. 
Militate  against. 
Mistrustful  of. 
Need  of. 
Obedient  to. 
Object  to,  against. 
Observance,  observation  of. 
Obtrude  upoii,  on. 
■  Occasion  for. 
Oflfensive  to. 
Operate  upen,  on. 
Opposite,  opposition  to. 
Partake  of;  participate  o/,tn. 
Penetrate  into. 
Persevere  in. 

Pitch  upo7i. 

Poor  in. 

Prefer  to,  over,  above. 
Preference  to,  over. 
Preferable  to. 
Prefix  to. 

Prejudice  against. 

Preside  over, 

Prevent /rom. 

Prevail  (to  persuade)"it*<A,  on,  up- 
on,  (to  Overcome)   over,  against. 

Prey  on,  upon. 

Productive  of. 

Profit  bg. 

Protect    others   from ;   ourselves 
against. 

Pronounce  against  a  person  ;  on  t^ 
thing. 
-  Provide  with,  for, 

Proud  of. 


UQ 


ENGLISH       RAMMAR. 


Interfere  with 
Intervene  between. 
Introduce  into  a  place  ;   to  a  per- 
son. 
Intrude  into  a  place  enclosed  ;  iip- 


Purge  of,  ftway. 
Quarrel  with. 

Reduce  (subdue)  under ;    (in  oth- 
er cases)  to. 
Reflect  upon,  on. 


on  a  person    or    thing  not  en-  Regard /or;  in  regard  ^o. 


to 


cloBed. 
Inur«d  to. 
Invested  trith,  in. 
Lame  of. 
Ltrel  with. 
Long  for,  after. 
Look  on   what    is 

what  i8  absent ; 

distant. 
Made  of. 
Made  mue b  of. 
Rich  in. 
Rob  of 
Rule  over, 
Reckon  on,  upon. 
Reconcile  (to  friendship) 

make  consistent)  with. 
Share  in,  of. 
Sick  of. 
Significant  of. 
Similar  to. 
Sink  into,  beneath. 
Skilful  (before  a  noun)  in 

f«re  a  participle)  at,  in. 
Strain  out. 
Strip  of. 
Submit  t«. 
Sent  to. 
Swcrv*'  frotn 

537.  What  preposition  it  is  prpper  to  use,  often  depends  as  much 
upon  what  follows,  as  upon  what  goes  before.  Thus,  "To  fall /row 
a  heiyht,"    " into  a  pii/'  "in  battle/'  "to  work,"  ^'vpon  an  fnemy," 


Rely  upon,  on. 

Replete  with. 

Reproached  for. 

Resemblance  to. 

Resolve  on. 

Respect  to  ;  in  respect  to. 
present ;  for  Restore  to. 

after  what  is  Tax  with  (for  example,  a  crime,an 
act)  -.for  [a  purpose,  the  skate] 

Taste  of,  means  actual  enjoyment  : 
taste /or,  mean?  capacity  or  ge- 
nius for. 

Thankful  for. 

Think  of,  on. 

Touch  at. 
(toUnite    [transitive]    to,    [intransi- 
^  tive]  with. 

Union  with^  to. 

Useful  for, 

Value  upon,  on. 

Vest,  before  the  possessor,  in;  be- 
fore tUe  thing  possessed,  with. 
(be-  Wait  upon,  on. 

Witness  of. 

"Worthy,  unworthy  of.  But  after 
these  o/is  generally  omitted. 


SY9TAX — POSSESSIVE. 


ui 


638.  Into  is  used  only  after  verbs'of  motion^  and  implies  «Mfr«i»(?'«^ 
In  is  tised  after  verbs  of  motion  or  rest,  and  denotes  iifuati«n,  bttt) 
never  entrance;  as,  "  He  went  into  a  carriage,  and  rode  in  it." 

539.  Bomet,  approve,  and  disapprove,  are  often  used  without  a  prep* 
osition  following ;  so  also  worthi/  and  unmorthy.  i 

540.  The  same  preposition  that  follows  a  verb  or  adjective,  usually 
follows  the  noun  derived  from  it,  and  vice  vtrea  ;  as,  "  Confide  iv," 
''Confident  in,"  Confidence  in." 

EXERCISES  TO   BE   CORRBGTKD. 

In  the  following  sentences,  point  out  the  preposition  and  the  an- 
tecedent term.     If  not  appropriate,  correct,  and  give  the  rule  : — 

This  remark  is  founded  with  truth.  He  was  eager  of  recommend- 
ing him  to  his  fellow-citizens.  I  find  great  difficulty  of  writing. — 
Every  change  is  not  a  change  to  the  better.  Changed  for  a  worte 
shape  it  cannot  be.  It  is  important,  in  times  of  trial,  to  have  a 
friend  to  whom  you  can  confide.  You  may  rely  in  the  truth  of 
what  he  says.  Many  have  profited  from  good  advice,  but  have  not 
always  been  grateful  of  it.  I  have  no  ocmsion  of  his  service.  Fa- 
vors are  not  alwaj^s  bestowed  to  the  most  deserving.  This  is  very 
different  to  that.  Virtue  and  vice  differ  widely  with  each  other. — 
Come  in  the  house.  We  rode  into  a  carriage  with  four  horses. 
The  boy  fell  under  a  aeep  pit.  Such  condnet  cannot  be  reconciled 
to  your  profession.  Go,  and  be  reconciled  with  thy  brother.  A 
man  had  four  sons,  and  he  divided  his  property  bet\v(en  them.  I 
an  now  engaged  with  that  work.     He  insists  on  it  that  he  is  right 

QUESTIONS, 

What  is  rule  12  ?Be  prepared  to  gfve  the  appropriate  preposition 
after  each  word  or  phrase  in  the  list.  Repeat  &37,  IS^plaia  the 
use  of  into  and  in.     What  is  said  of  boatt^  worthy^  &c.  ?  Repeat  §40. 


THE  POSSESSIVE  GOVERNED  BY  SUBSTAN- 
TIVES. 

541.  Role  XIII. — One  substantive,  governs  another   in 


142  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

the  possessive,  xclie.n   the  latter    suhstanticc  limits  the  signi/j- 
cattonofthe  former  ;  asy  "  Virtue's  re  in  trd" — ^^  John's  hook." 

542.  A  BubstantiTe,  limited  by  the  T  osaessive,  may  be  any  coun  in 
any  eaie,  or  a  verbal  noun  either  alone  or  witli  its  regimen,  or 
modifying  words  ;  as,  *  On  eaglea'  iriiic/t."  "  He  wna  rpposed  to  John'a 
tcridug,"  "I  am  in  farar  of  apnpil's  composinij  frcquentli/,"  "John's 
hmviny  devoted  himtelf  too  miicii  to  sliidi/,  was  the  cause  of  his  sick- 
n«t8." 

54K  The  noun  gevernini;  the  possessive  is  often  understood;  aa, 
"  This  book  is  John's  [book]  "  It  i«  always  omitted  after  the  pos- 
s«i«iT«  ease  of  the  person  il  pronoan  ;  as,  "  The  book  is  mim-,  thine, 
our$,"  A,9. 

544.  When  several  nouns  come  together  in  the  poaressive  cafo.  im- 
plying common  possessing,  the  feign  of  the  j)ossej!8ive  is  annexed  to 
the  last,  and  understood  to  the  rest;  hS,  "Jano  and  Lucy's  book." — 
But  if  common  possession  is  not  implied,  or  if  several  words  inter 
vene,  the  sign  of  the  possessive  should  be  annexed  to  each  ;  as,  ''Jane's 
and  Lucy's  book,"  that  is,  books,  some  of  which  are  June's  and  oth- 
«ra  Lucy's.  "  This  gained  the  king's  as  well  «s  the  people's  appro- 
bation." 

&46.  When  a  name  is  complex,  consisting  of  more  terms  than  one, 
the  sign  of  the  possessive  is  annexed  to  the  last  only;  as,  "Juliua 
Csssar's  Commentnries,"  "John  the  Baptist's  head."  "His  brother 
Phillip's  wife,"  'The  Bishop  of  London's  charge." 

546.  When  a  short  explanatory  term  is  joined  to  a  name,  the  sign 
of  the  possessive  may  be  annexed  to  either  ;  as,  "  I  called  at  Smith'.s 
the  bookseller,"  or,  "at  Smith  the  bookpeller's."  But  if,  to  such  a 
phrase,  the  governing  substantive  is  added,  the  sign  of  the  posecss- 
ive  must  be  annexed  to  the  last;  as,  1  called  at  Smith  the  booksollor's 
skop." 

547.  If  the  txplanatory  circumstance  be  complex,  or  ooneistiug  of 
more  terms  than  one,  the  sign  of  the  possessive  may  bo  aunexed  to 
the  name  or  Irst  BubsVantiva  ;  as,  "The  Psa'ni  is  David's  the  king, 
priest,  and  prophft  of  the  people."  "That  book  is  Smith's,  the  book- 
teller  in  Maiden  Lane." 

640.  When  two  noana  in  the  pogsessivo  are  governed  by  differ- 
ent words,  the  sign  of  tht»  possessive  must  be  annexed  to  each  ;  as, 
"He  took  refuge  at  the  governor's,  the  king's  representative,"  that 
i8,j"atthe  governor's  heuse." 

649.  The  s  after  the  apostrophe  is  sometimes   omitted,    when   the . 


SYNTAX — POSSESSIVE.  14^ 

first  word  ends,  and  the  following  word  begins,  with  an  »,  or  when  the 
use  of  it  would  ©acasion  a  disagreeable  repetition  of  »  sounds;  as, 
*'For  righteousness'  sake,"  "For  censcienco'  pake"  "For  Jesus'  aak*.' 
In  other  cases,  suoh  onaissions  wttuld  generally  b©  improper;  as, 
"James'  book,"  ''Miss' shoes,"  instead  of,  "James's  book,"  "Miss's 
shoes. 

550.  A  clause  of  a  sentence  should  noter  come  between  the  possess- 
ive case  and  the  word  by  wbiph  it  is  governed.  A  noun  governing 
the  possessive  plural,  or  two  or  more  nouns  severally  in  the  possest- 
ive  singular,  should  not  be  p'nral  unless  the  sense  require  it.  Thus, 
"The  men's  health  (not  healths)  sufl'ered  from  the  climate."  "JohH'« 
and  William's  wive;  are  of  tho  s.trae  »^e." 

551.  The  possessive  irJiosoever  ia  sometimes  dividing  by  interposing 
the  governing  wod;  as,  "whose  house  soever."  This,  in  general, how- 
ever, is  to  be  avoided,  and  to  bo  admitted  only  when  eupbonj  and 
precision  are  thereby  promoted. 

EXERCISES  TO  BE  CORRECTED. 

Ill  the  following  sentences  show  which  is  the  limiting  substantive 
and  which  is  the  one  limited — where  wrong,  correct  according  to  the 
rule  or  the  observation. 

(541.)  Virtues  reward.  One  mans  loss  is  often  another  mans 
gain.  Mans  chief  end  is  to  glorify  God.  My  ancestors  virtue  is 
not  mine.  A  mothers  tenderness  nnd  a  fathers  care  are  natures 
gifts  for  mans  advantage.  On  eagles  wings.  For  Christ  sake. — 
For  ten  sake.  Which  dictionary  do  you  prefer — Webster,  Walker, 
or  Johnson  ?  Asa  his  heart  was  perfect.  John  Thomson  his  book. 
Lucy  Jones  her  book. 

(531.)  He  was  averse  to  the  nation  involving  itself  in  war.  Much 
depends  on  your  pupil  composing  frequently.  He  being  rich  did 
not  make  him  happy.  I  am  opposed  to  him  going  on  such  an  expe- 
dition. 
i'  (543.)  That  book  is  James  book  ard  that  one  is  Roberta.  That 
^  knife  is  your  knife,  but  T  thought  it  was  my  knife.  My  book  is 
old,  but  your  book  and  Roberts  book  are  new.  Which  is  the  best 
book,  your  book  or  my  book? 

544.)  William's  and  Mary's   reign.      Cain  and   Abel's  sacrific 


144  ENGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

were  not  the  same.     David  and  Solomon's   reigjn    were  prdspcrous, 
John  and  William's  wife  are  cousins.     Men,   women,   and  cbildrens 
ihoas  for  sale.     He  cared    for   hia  father  and    also  for  his  mother's 
nlerests.     The  Betsy  and  Speedwells  cargoes  we're  both  saved. 

(545.)  Messrs.  Pratt's,  Woodford's  <fe  Co.s  hookstore  is  in  New 
Tork.  Thompson'a  &  Company's  oflicQ  was  on  fire.  Jack's  the 
Giant-killer's  wonderful  exploits.  The  bishop's  of  London's  charge 
to  his  clergy.  The  Grand  Sultan's  Mahomet's  palace.  The  sec- 
retary's of    war  report. 

(647.)  Call  at  Smith  the  bookseller  and  stHtioner's.  The  par- 
cel was  left  at  Johnson,  a  merchant  in  Broadway's.  He  ennilatrd 
Ceesar  the  greatest  general  of  antiquity's  bravery.  General  Taylor 
president  of  the  United  States,  an  excellent  man  ana  bravo  sol- 
dier's residence. 

;  (548.)  That  house  is  Smith  the  poor  man's  friend.  We  spt-at  an 
agreeable  hour  at  Wilson,  the  governor's  deputy.  The  coach  :itop- 
ped  at  Mr.  Brown,  Henry's  father. 

(B49.)  James  father  arrived  yesterday.  Charles  books  are  com  • 
plctely  spoiled.  King  James  translators  meiely  revised  former 
translations.     For  conscience's  sake.     For  righteuueness's  sake. 

(856.)  They  condemcd  the  judge's  in  the  case  of  Bardwell  d»^cis- 
ion.  The  prisoner's,  if  I  may  say  so,  conduct  was  shameful.  Pe- 
ter the  Hermit's  as  Iro  was  called,  opinion.  Ail  men  have  talents 
committed  to  their  charges.  It  is  tbe  duty  of  Ohrisfians  to  submit 
to  their  lots.  We  protest  against  this  course,  in  our  own  names 
and  in  tho  names  of  our  constituents.  A  father's  and  mother's  lovea 
to  their  children  are  very  tender.  The  gcnt.emans  and  ladys  healths 
are  imp'-oving. 

•     QlJESTlONai 

l^he  rule  for  the  possessive  ?  What  niay  bu  limited  by  the  po.'- 
sesslve?  Is  the  governing  word  ever  understood'.^  What  is  tho  rnU) 
for  the  pdssessivfe  sign  when  several  nouns  come  tojrMher  imply! !•• 
common  possession  ?  What  is  common  possession  ?  Wh';,^^  t\1k^ 
the  pbSseBiiott  is  not  common  ?  When  a  name  is  cotr-^,',p^^  Wliei 
ashorte-^planatory  term  is  added?  If  the  explo^,^^,^,.'.  eireumstaTir. 
be  conaplex?  When  two  nouns  are  govev^^j  j,y  (liflVrcnr,  words  r 
When  is  the  s  omitted?  When  a  u^^.^f^  governs  the  possessive  plu- 
ral?    May  wAoiOfvr  be  divided  ?  ^' 


SY^TTAX— SUBJtrXCIIVB.  145  j 

suBauxcTiyj^  *mgop. 

byt   Iltrpi:  2IIV  —^Tho  su^Junclt've  mo^d  li'used  ifi  </e#:\;: 
p'tndent  c'auiCf^  wh^n  hoiu  cnntinji^nci/  cr.dauhfy  and  faturi'. 
f(/,  in'o-^xprcs3:d  ;  as,  ''If  ho  continue  to  stuJy  howilliin* 

5>V3.-  W\ion  conlinjency  or  doubt  only,  and  not  futuvitr,  isiia* 
plied.  tViei  indicative  is  used  ;  as,  "  If  he  has  money  he  keeps  it." 

i5  t  CoBtingjtey 'or  doubt  is  n«^iially  expressed  by  the  connectives 
*;/,.  tlHMtyh,  HiiU  9,  ex:cpf,  whether.  &(i.  ;  but  wheihsr  futuri  y  is  implied 
t-f  Qot,  must  be  g^ithesed  from  tli©  context. 

Ibh.  Formtrly,  t'- e  fcubjuKC;ive  wps  used  to  express  contingency, 
ordfubt,  whit-er  futur.ty  vfa3  ini;  lied  cr  not.  0'' tbis,  theJiigliall 
Bible  furnish' 6  CNampIvs  in  a'tuo.-t.evcry  p 'go. 

liZ.G.  Lest  and  that,  jinncxcd  to  <i  conmiaud,  require  the  siibjiinc- 
live  ittcjjd  ;  a?,  '-Love  not  sleep,  k»s,t  thoii  come  to  uovei  ty"' — "Taka 
ht-ed  that  thou  speak  not  to  JaeoV),  ciihi  r  goi.d  or  bad  "  .And  sonic- 
limei  *slthout  a  t-oniinnnd  ;  '-They  ih;'.li  bcur  thee  i:p,  Icsi  hou  dush 
thj  foot  .»\a;ain3t  u  stor.e. 

557.  //".with  iuf  fidb)\ving  it,  when  fujnrity  is  denoted,  rpquirea 
ih9  subjunctive  mood  ;  jxs,  .'  If  he  do  but  torn  h  ;lie  hill-,  ihfy  .■•haU 
fnaoie."  But  wlsen  futuri*  time  is  not  implieil.ilje  indicative  is  Used; 
as   •'  if  ht  doea  but  wliif^por,  every  word  is  heard  dist  nctly." 

5  3  The  subjun  ;  iv^  mo  'd  is  U3u  I  to  eriv  ss  n.  wish  or  dcairej  a?, 
*  I  V  isb  I  «,e/«  fit  home."     ''0,  t'lat  be  tcera  vi\  v." 

Q  9.  A  8urp"sitiin  or  wit-b,  iaiply  ngji  prcRentdfninl  o'' tbe  filing 
siipposed  vr  depire<l.  ia  tsprrs  td  by  ti  i  pa.-t  suVjuiciive  ;  as,  "If  my 
kio^doaj  v*r«  of  thii  wwrli,  thiaw  ul  1  my  iervuuts  fight.'* 

EXT.RCISES  10  L2  CORP.ZCTED. 

Whatrerbs  Iq  the  following  sentofc?,  shoul,<1;iecordi'>5'fo  thera^e 
be  in  tie  subjunctiro  mood,  and  w'.iat  ia  the  iiidicative  ?— corrcot  lUeia 
aecorJinjjly— p  irse  tho  scnieacoi  coirectol. 

552.)  If  ij»  man  smites  hi3  servant  and  he  d  C3  he  shall  surely 
\>e  put  to  death.  Wu  umiit  go  to-tnorro«-,  un'cs  if.  ;siin3.  Tl:ere 
will  be  0  .euglito  do  next  week,  if  t!io  wea'.her  is  good.  Thoujrli 
\beaky  '  ©clear,  it  ia  cold.  lie  vv-ill  iniiutaiu  hi3  cause,  thouLjIjhe 
iQ^m  Ua  f 9tate«  Wo  may  g(ii  tliQ  IclWxv  U'  ilic  mull  umvvs  in,  Uttd*  1 1 
7 


14^5  -^  KNOUSU  ORAUilAR. 

jobn  ba  come,  why  UiJ  you  not  tell  mc?  It' it  stiows  all  nijrUt,  tUd 
road*  will  be  imp!\ssilile,  A-k  John  if  he  kno>^  wlieu  Jhe.legiflla- 
T.ufe  meet.  If  he  know  anything,  be  surely  knows,  ihat  unlers  he 
gtti  better  he  can  not  be  removed.  Ifthonbe  the  Son  or(ji)<],  com- 
mand that  these  stones  be  n\  uie  bread. 

^.^)56.)  Take  cure  that  the  lior^e  do>.'S  nm  niii  iiuny.  .^i-i- ilitit  l!r<»!i 
do§t  it  not.  Let  hiiu  ihat  btundei^i  taUo  h(  e<t  U':it  1;,)  lut  s  Khs  thv 
►Son,  lest  he  is  an^^ry.     liepiove  not  a  f\  (trii<-r,  h-it    h«  btUOi   tl.u^.f. 

(5j7.).  If  he  be  but  in  liealtli.  it  \v:ll  be  :he  (.'.iii-e  of  great  thHtk- 
Inlneia.  If  he  does  but  ran,  he  will  s  >i)a  oreitake  thiMii.  if  he  t«* 
but  in  health,  I  am  coiiteiii.  O,  \}ui\  lie  was  wise'  I  wish  1  wa^ 
at  home. 

(550.)  If  I  WMS  not  Ale.xamlcr,  I  vo-iUl  be  niticf^i"'-?-  If'il  ft'i-*-<» 
not  so,  1  would  havu  told  yon.  If  he  wan  a  yfa:  olJci ,  1  would  Sfud 
him  to  pchool.  Was  gold  m  ivc.  aliuii>iaiii.  ii.  wt»uld  be  of  le.^s  vaJ- 
iie.  If  he  was  an  impostor,  lie  inusl  bavtr  lieeii  delected.  If  1  v  us* 
li*,  I  would  ac.-eplilie  ofT.r.      \V;is  I  ht',  1  wouM  accept  tip  uflcr. 

Q.U  i:  .ill  OXS. 

"Wliftt  ij;  t!ie  rulf»  for  the  subjun  tive  ni.*>:il  '  \V1ti:r  (.:?:•)  v.biMi 
doabf,  only  is  iinpH'»d7  How  i.^  C'tntincenf  y  cxpi  eiicd?  Mnw  vrai 
The  subjunclive  formerly  utcd?  \\"h;it  cf  /fsf  ;',\a\  tfiai  K  A^hat  of 
»/ with  A/'.M'o!lowing?  How  i  atli.-iif  or  ui-b  e.xprcSaeu  ?  Ei- 
plftiu  f).",l». 


TITK  TXFIXlTi-\-l-:  Mr,Oi>. 

500.  rtULT:  W . —  TJie  i:  /u(i/'ce  mnnd  U  ijft'rruc'l  ly 
V6KBS,  NOIJNS  Of  ADJECTIVKS  ;  flS,  "  t  <li?Jie  to  lertPli" — 
*'A  deaire  to  Icavn"- — '^An.tious  to  learn   ' 

561.  Th«  J^infinitivc  is  a  !<ort  of  veiual  n  ur.y.iU  t  l-dS  tie  eoi.3l;:tvLiyu 
wfHoth  a  uoun  and  a  verb.  '    .  , 

.162.  A-t  a  noun,  the  infinitive  may  be  :  1.  T]ie.  subjeet  of  a   rertj 

A9,  ^'■To  plan  18  pleasant  "  2.  The  ohjn-t  of  a   verb  ;  ap,   '•BTr»y3  tut«  io 

play."     3.   The  t/e.?c//y>'//r(' after  a  cojMilutive  veib  ;  as,    '-'Jle  is.tO  be 

m 9i):t[9^."  ■  A.  la  tJij>2^osi (ion  with  uttOlhot  noun;" as,  "'SpaYe',   Spiift' 


I 


SYNTlX—lNFr^trTlVB.  14? 

.YOijr  frlemi  the  tesk,  to  read,  (o  no'1,  io  acnjf]  /n  cMirfff^.n."  :■>.    Thet-i. 
Jcef  of  a  prpposilion  ;  .ms,  "  About  fo  r/rp'irf,'^      '"What  weiit  ye  'out 

for  Io  .tee  Y" 

SVVX'IAL  nt'ij-.s. 

oi\i,    V.i  i.K  2.  —  Oi}*'  vi'i-l)  ijnri-,-n.<  iinnihcr  u.^  iU  cbjict.  or  com- 

■  -I 

yltuiy'iti  ini'if.  lufmiUce;  us.  -JJ  -ys  love    to jih/i/'—'-Thoy  seciu 

fi<55.  Vcrhs  wliifh  t  ike  tlie  inliai  ive  as  tbelr  ohJr.<'l  are  transitiva 
\  orf>8  in  tlio  netiv«;  voioo  »Tid  tlif  iiiliirfix  f,  tiib^r  j>I<»nf,  or  ttioditled 
by  otlier  vordji,  b  equivHltml  t*^)  Uu*  oVjetiive  cufcc  (^(.'3  )  Verbs  which 
t:ibe  tbeinthnuvf*  as  their  c<)</ij»-'«;///m'\  tList  Is,  in  vxAeTjUl  our  ur  coiu. 
ji!etc  rhe    id**!!  iTitomleJ.  aro  intransitivo  cr  pa^tiivo    vtrl'S. 

i»0.j.    W  \\.y.  ;>  — 7//C'  iiijinilli'f,  a  ^  t'n-  .^uhl-rl.    or  th^  oUjcrt  of'  a 

t>iirrb,  sOiKrfin.c^-  hu.s-  a  suUj.-.'vl  of  i(.i  Oivu  in  iht ohjertivecoi.se. 
,  •  -  ♦  ■■     , 

5rt7.  TeehUer  ronstrucHoi^  thtj,  infiuU'vc,  witi  its  ?u''jt>ot,  U  an 
iibridjr<^^l  de;)en'l'^«»t  cUufS-.-.  nnd  when  iHtvl  as  \\i<^  s»n^-JHft,  is  ititro- 
duoed  by /./#•.  Tht.8,  S'thjeci  —  *  V  ,r  m  t.t  d)  ?<i»  would  b«  impn^pir.'' 
^iaB*'Thit  we  sluiu'.d  (in  i  i  wmiM  h^.  iunp'v.per."  OfJif<-(  •-"]  know  him. 
to  bd-vQ.H^*)!!'  Ht  m«ri".«:'r  kuow  »,Uat.  At  i.s  hd  ho««at  man,"  taken  to' 
^ether,  cqu'v^leut  r<t,  '<tbat  he  is  ti'i   honest  roan  " 

n08#  Hulk  4.  --The  ihtinitive  r?  iistxJ  a.'i  a  dt-sr  /iplice  afUr  any 
V.H\)  :l;  a'-<jjtf.ll-l  ;  fl-',  •■'^'■>i|   .iPi'  fo  hLim^." 

3)9.Wh3!i  ujvi  u3  ;i  I  i-ripnvtf  i'"tc<r  tb  )  \r  rb  i»  be,  the  infinitiya 
daij-^tes — 

1.   A»i  9^1  uvalirit  oxp;-).?'!  m  ;   a**  'To  obey  i«  '■>  e.ijorf." 

t,  *V*hi*;  is  po»sidrt  or  o'jIs.^  it»f?  ;  a^,  '  ll^ld  is  to  b«/(,uuof  in  Call 
ff^mia'. — "The  liws  are  ^v  fr?  c't^-»rn»^."  ■    •' 

3    What  18  settled  ail  dotormiiod*  u^i'jh,  n'n  roif  (*-)urJse,  ('af>nf.  ;  a-j. 

The  ^b'p  i.^  ^»  *io7  ^o•la  trrf'\f ."  •     ^ 

570.  Fit  ».«•:  r*. -'!'(•,  //<{-  ,s«'///j  o/'Me  iiifin-if.ivf,  it  not  lued  afit-r 

t!t9  C^trhs   01U.   DAKf,  N'EKP,  MAKK,  SKE,   ftR\B,    FBK.L,     afifi    LfIT,  i/< 

/A€  actu"^  t'olee,  nyr  after  let  i;i  the  pa.'tsia ;  as,    'I  saw  hioi  do 
ii"    ''Yell  n^erl  ntd  go." 

571.  To  ttis  rule  there   are    s:me    exceptions.    As  it  relartes  only 


14^^  E^'iiUar  .^liiAMJklAB. 

to  euptooy  aTjd  uaas?,  ^o  may  be  inserted  when  barBbnesa  wUl  not 
thereby  be  produced ;  tbu?,  ''CocfoloaB  that  his' o^*tione'need'^^■be 
disguircd." — M':Keiyi{t. 

57  3.  For  the  satue  roa:on,  to  x-i  so-.uetiine«i  omitt*?!  aft«r  the  rerbs 
^terceire,  behold,  obnrrvo,  have,  aud  hnow. 

675.  Wbeu  eovori^l  Irfiratlvea  ooa>b  t-getber  in  tba  sauiR  conbtnio. 
tinn,  the  Kicjn  fo  cxprcsod  iritb  ibo  lir5>  is.ei'mitlines  omitted  vith 
those  (bit  f  How  ;  tbus,  "It  is  better  tj  be  a  king  and  dre,  tban  to 
live  and  be  a  vrlDor«,"  Tbi^  aliould  re?er  boVlurie  when  tiibr  barsb' 
nePS  or  c-hicur  ty  wonld  bo  tborooOlr.  '    ' 

574.  To,  the  sign  of  th.»  infif^itlve,  s'loiM  never  hy  u'^od  furtbelo/ 
fioitlve  itself.  Tliaa,  '  I  bavo  net  ■wrriiton,  aud  do  not  intend  to,"  ia 
a  coTloquial  vulgirlsm  for,  "I  bav«»  not  written,  and  I  do  not  iotood 
to  ■write  '' 

575.  RuL»:-5, —  Th<i  injinUioe  i^  umd  ti)  express  i/tc  fCrtro««. 
KND,  oz-DF-.-oTGN  uf  tkc  pricfdln'jaci  :  a*".  "Si^mc  wbo  came*  to 
scoff,  vomaino.l  io  proj:' 

570.  Run:  l.-^Li  comparnaous,  the  inftriiiioij  m^od  U pui  after 
»o  AS,  Tno.or  THAN  ,  ft^  ''Bo  80  %i\K>\X  !is  to  r<\,vi  ih\^  letter"  'Too 
uM  ioUixrn.^^  "vViscr  than  ioundcrkd:eit.*' 

3'8<,  The  i  flnitiv*  J8  Pom»jtiii ea  usoi  to  a»^ign,  lu  aa  abridged 
f,»nn,tb(»  rf;)*»on  «  ftha^  which  g*>i:?  before ,  a9,  'Bate  coward  tbattbe^ 
art /o _/?««.'"  ''Vograteful  raRn  !  fa  ua«.*e  rnj  fortune^  rot'  me  of  icy 
peace." 

AT8.  1b«  ioilnUivc  it  5' Dielancs  put  absolutely,  wlthoul  a  g^T^rn 
inj5  Vscr.l ;  " /'(/  ca-j  the  truth,  1  way  in  fault.'* 

a79.  The  inflniiira  i*  scraetitiiefi  omiiLd:  as,  '*I  oonsi  ler  hiqi  (to 
bs)  a!i  bonffit  man.*' 

58  K  ib©  inii.  i  ire,  in  tbeFeeeveai  foustructioas,  in  parsing  maybe 
britfiy  elated  tbua ;  •  Tiio  iufinifive  as  the  subject  of--^— "     "ntthecd, 

^tct  o*"-— -"  *'ae  the ;»,"e'iHcaf6  aftor— - — "  "The  luSnitivo  o/ j/>n,r^c9i^^ 
«o»»/)ari5Q» —cause— iw«rf  ubsofutefy  *' 

KXERICPES  TO  »JE  CoRBKOTEb, 

Tb<r«  U  but  llttU  liability  to  err  in  the  use  of   tbio   uio.-d,   etsa^'t 
in  its  tense,  and  5n  the  i.'n proper  u*ie  or  omlealon  of  the  sign  <«.  WUcb 
there  ie  no  rule  to  authoriau  the  cmisaloa.U  should  V<)  i&stried« 
.    (J>1i.)  You  need  not  to  bs  lo  serious.   I  have  teen  lomo  yoapg 


c 

SYNTAX— FAETIGUPLE8.  149 

pereoni  *<s  eondac^  themgelrei  rerj  disoreotly.  lie  bid  m«  to  go 
henifl.  Tba  boys  -Kere  fill  let  to  go  fit  cnce.  Let  -no  man  to  think 
too  bijfWy  oi  hlmJiolf.,.  T-T.^jflll  hoc^d  lim"tc>sflj  it.  He  ^  as  heard 
say  it  bj  «verTb»dy.  SoDiaoue  b?it  iLem  to  jiass  il^ehoase.  Tbey 
were  seen  pa B6  the  bo'.ise.  I  hare  observed  some  gaiirisca  to  us«~ 
tb»  torra.  D*ire  ba  wise.  They  wore  bii  Gom?  into  the  bouip.  -  B^ 
safe  to  wfito  yourself,  tiud  tell  bL'»i  to.  And  Uv«  M  Ood  designed 
«9  to. 

P'  In^  rtt»t  tH«  tiseoft^e  SriBDH'Tfl  3*1  f^*^   ff  iLo-cpir^.  scd'^c^c?.   and 
sliow  bow  it  l8  gortrned.    Analyze  fbe  ienteacesi 

it  too  often  happens  tbat  lo  be  ftbore  tb«  reach  of  want  just  pla- 
ces uft  within  the  reavjh  of  am;  ico.  It  does^  no  good  to  prea<!h 
g^'ntrosity,  or  «^tPD  justice,  to  tho«?rivho  have  neitberscnpc  nor 
9OQI.  He  WOP  born  to  be  grjat.  To  a^complihh  thcpo  end**, 
{^avagps  resort  to  cunning.  Thpy  thought  fo  n^.nke  themselvea 
rich.  Great  <ie.-iiro^  are  dlficnlt  to  be  f!;rftfifipd.  Some  people 
rife  difiicalt  to  pU^ftt?.  To  knox©  OQr.;clve^,  we  muft  con:nienc*> 
by  knowing  our  own  \^'ea}ines6fb».  If  we  have  not  nlwnje  time 
to  read,  we  hats  always  time  to  ir#»fi€5i,  To  be  of  Jud  t«  be  ■ 
that  ie  ib«  tjuestion 

Whatie  {ha  tn\«  k^i  tbc-lftfinitive?  Fr.  what  vfayh  if  Hi«.  uifuiitlre 
nied?  Uppeat  rule  1  ftnd  ?,  What  verbs  take  the  Intiniiivt-  «san 
obje:t?  Ap  A  cotnplemont?  Repeat  rule  3.  Wh:U  is  thO  lufiiii* 
tive  wirh  itt*  subject?  Repeat  rule  4.  What  UotiS  the  -infinitive 
denote  wben  used  as  ft  doscriptivo  ?  riepoat  rule  5,  What  except- 
i-jas?  May  the  siy-n  of  tiie  infinitive  be  tised  without  the  verb? — 
Repeat  ruie  6  ftnd  T.  Wh.vl  ia  the  infinitive  absolute?  How  ftife 
tl^^  ^iffrieoT  vonitrncrioris  parsed  '' 


TKF.  PARTIOIPLE. 

,  581.  Rvi'f-Xy I.— i^2iic'(^r€*  havt   ih^  t'^n${/u('tk>H  q/ 
ngun$^  adf€ciiv€»^  and  verh* 


50  ENGLISH    GRAMMAR. 

♦-    .  .    '    . 

SPECIAL  RULES. 

Rule  1.  —  .1  pnrticipfe  v.^ed  on  n  n.ixn  mrty  h^  I'hfi  nrrlHi- 
r\atioeto  <t  ffrb,or  fhe  ohji^cl  or  deS'^ripln-r  aftfr  a  crrh  f^r 
preposition.      .  .  ^..  .-,',■, 

RuLK  2. — A  p.irdr'ph-  nofmidrasanouVf'Jt^lffn^iiMjX 
noun  or  proit.iun.  -     -       i-i»^a 

Note.  Whoa  a  n'-t.icplo  forms  part  of  a  f!ul)slaiiti  «  pbrif4;'llll 
jj.tit  to  boijargfr^  vOwparaK'ly.tbc  whole  phrapo  is  purscfl  a«one  woxtU  A 
no'jn  or  pronom  folloviing  %  participle  oJ"  tbo  vexh  <o  .&«,  must  )»•  'm 
the ''oaainative  oaae  ,  . 

582.  The  });irf,j«'iple,  wljile  u-^ed  !H  a  n.>nu  or  :•.  flfootive."  fn;vy 
be  modified  in  all  rt'HpectH  as  ihe  v«rh. 

srKriAf.  nrT,EP.  - 

583  Rulk  i.~  W/,ni  thr  present  or  per/rrf  pnrtidpU 
is  iised  as  a  nov.n,  a  noun  hcfure  it  i§  pntin  the  po^^e-fif^'ive 
ease-ySiiy  "Much  deponils  on  the /)<//-»/r.s  eonipOMin^- fre- 
quently." '•  y/t.v  hji\ing  (Icne/so  is*evicfou*t.'* ' 

584.  Hut  ji  pronoun,  in  this  construction,  must  V)e  iho  p<>S'^R- 
fiive  pronour»,  arvl  not  the  possossivo  cupo  ;  us,  '-Muoh  doppiids 
on  your  coniposinj;,"  &o.  ;  v\ot  i/uur.s. 

.7»5.  lu  ma'<y  oasa.",  tlie  nowHiativtj  or  ^oVi.^otive  casa  hQ''<)ro  tbe 
prueeut  participlo  as  an  n^ljcitii-e,  wUl  express  pearly  tbe  ^nuio  i.Ooft. 
Thuf,  "  .M'loh  wll  d<>)»  «u>l  on  the  jmpil'n  comp-isinir,"  and  '^Muoh 
will  (iepedil  on  the  jxip'f  c  iiH;><Mi)i^,"  mean  Hulmtantially  th«  same 
thing.  Stii!,  the  tH)n£tructinn  ia  different  :  i>)  the  lirst,  thoi/tju <;*;/<'/'<«! 
is  on  the  c<> //»/>«* •'w.y,  in  lh*»  flooyn«l  if  is  «tu  l\nij.)npil  ;  and  thoutjh  in 
these  examples  iL^  souse  ia  iie  irly  l'«o  saute,  yot  there  are  ofton  ex- 
amples ia  wbirh  the  801130  id  eutirely  <HfFcrftnt.  Thus,  "What  do 
yon  think  of  my  Ao/y('*'<  rnanin;^  t  )-uay  ?"  implies  he  hua  run,  «)itl 
asks,  *'tiow  do  you  think  bo  ran  V  iJut,  **  What  do  you  think  of  my 
/m>/-«<?  running  to  d;iy  ?"'  implies  he  /<"<»«  nol  ry.n,  and  ask^,  '*  Do  you 
think  ho  should  run  ?" 

586.  Btle  2.— TlV^^rt  tin:  present  pa rticipU  n»ed  as  n 
noun,  has' :an. \nfictVi  o/' itl)^ECTiyE  pefortifyihe^prf'jfdsi' 


SYNTAX — PAKTICIPLE6.  -1^1 

i      tron  OT  follows;  AR, '  By  tJ\e  obf^erving  of  tkrsc.  xu\ei." 
"This  was  a  romplrfe  f(irv*;u'<ing  of  the  truth." 

bil.  Bo'b  the  artu^le  n.n^'\  n/'ui  iv  l.e  oiiiitiv-'l,  bat  not  the  on*  witb- 
•^iit  the  ©titer.  By  thii  ouii.s«i<tn.  the  participle  bst-oiuep  a, partieipal 
rf'Eiw,  ait'J  Cisn  bo  m  >tl  li-  i  .^^  lUi'  vcrij.  (>/cj,n  Lot  be  used  whan  a- 
prcp^sitr  ij   fol'ows. 

5^"8.  T^v,hw.Z  —  yi':it.n\t!i''rcrhal  nonn  expresses  some- 
I  'ili.i):(*'fifu'!i'CfiVer)iyii:nfolorri7i(]  is  t l.e  rotR,  it  should 
lnr,^f!tA  ariij:fe^andfhej>ri:j)(>Jtio));  iu<,  "It  was  said  in 
rAfiiir^i^r/^^^o/ilie  \vuiu!>s/'  But  v  hen  it  (Xfi^sc^  ^i^mc- 
*'(''*[!  'f  e-  hich  ilie  raun  ("II'iU'Iikj  is  not  the  doer,  bid  tlie 
f^y.iiCT.  O'ifh  ahoviii  be  01,, i  ted ;  iis,  '"The  court  ?pcut 
f^oine  fiijic  ii>  huir  wj.  tlie  v.  itjioss.'' 

089    Ki'L"  4.-»- '/V<e  j)a>ii  participie  and  not   the  pa^t 

U:.iiSe,  Siiovld  hciis-d  ii/ter  the  avxHiories  uavk  and  UEja's, 

'I  have  y-rff'tM'  Xiiot'wru^r)— "Tlio    letter   is   written*' 

^not  w,oe:)' 

500'  .S  I, :jts;),_the  pai^l  participle  Hiumld  not  bo    iiseil   for  tlie 

,      j>;igt  ,terise:,as,  -"'iin  /^;<,"   not  run — -I  saw,''  nut  aecn-^'^ldid'^' 

"tiutdoue. 

.7^1.  Til'.  jKii  1  jiple  iif  3om-tiuie=i  used  absolutely,  having  no  de- 
p^D'i«7t:c  o  I  aoy'other  Wiv.l  ;   a.»,    "Prcpciiy    Kpeuki«<j,    thcr«    ip  BO 

F.xr«rTs:.8  to  we  conR?:rrED. 

tn  rii-  f  .1  ,.  v,;  ^  ,  .  r  "jc/'--,  corrcot  the  errvTS,  an  1  give  a  reason 
f*)  "■  li.e  •liiaii  <ie. 

(5S  i )  rts  being  me  need  make  no  (iilTerence  We  could  not  be 
'n  e  of  its  being  him.     Tiic  whole  depended  on  its  being  them, 

t^HSj  Mm  xe.>tlljaj;  a^aini^t  his  Maker,  brought  him  into  rirrir. — 
.|4>fv}.'h  h  irir.g  been  sold  by  hii!  brethren,  was  overruled  for  goo<l- 
^oJ  upholding  all  lliinj^s,  is  an  evidence  of  his  power.  Il«  beipc 
a  gre-af  man  did  not  make  him  a  happy  mrtn.  A  man  being  poOf 
doGd  DOt  Uiake  him  nii.serable.  AVhat  do  you  think  of  my 
Horse  running  to-day?  Did  he  tun  well?  What  think  yon  of  mj 
ho.r8«  B  ronnlng  to-day?     Will  it  b©  safe? 


1!j2  EXGLisn  cnAMMAR, 

(r)8G  )  TTo  ppcnfl^  rnrt  orins  timo  j'l  stndylnjt  ©rtho  cl.i?sio«. 
By  ilie  (iliTjiiiiiii;-:  wixl'inj  y«Mi  will  coniiunrnl  respo  •%  ,  D^  ob- 
l:iinin;r  "T  ill"  |.i-i)jii>s:,l  '«Iii.!*  was"  ( qi!:.l  -o  rcji'Ciing  nf/lha 
jimnosiil.  'I  jio  t<'iH'))ni;r  :'.Myiliii!;i; well  i  ('qnlrcs  {.ivrnl  npttllca-* 
ti'ni.  Lo:n'"fi:g"f  njivtliiii-  wtll  rfqMirijs  jiih  lit-ation.,  .i\lfitf'k* 
ncss  is  in;inir«'Moci  in  Miff'iii.;:  (.fil-s  |.:itientlv^-i:j  tl.e  suffering 
alls  pfiri('ntl_v--i!i  ilif  m.C"  r'w^n;  ,,f  ilis  juiir-jiily.  .  In  the  pttiient 
pufF.-ritin  ills — ill  j  aiictii  Miif.'i-iri;i  (if  ilis.  RocatJiie  of  piuVi^king 
Ills  .sons  jiikJ  dati;;litovs.  jlio  l^urd  al»honed  tliem. 

(oH8  )  In  tlip  licarin;:^  (  F  tlic  will  i-oad-  nrul  in  .the  csaininjrj]; 
orMiM'lry  piipcrs,  n.iuli  i'.v.a'  wis  j^pctit.  Tl.c  greattBt  phin  it 
guff  vimI  ill  rhi'  cnttiii;:;  of  ihi*  skin.  ^ 

(o8D  )  l.'s  has  i.rdke  li:s  c:ip  i  hnvo  dranl?  rnough.  "The 
tret!  \v..»  sIkioIv  hy  tlio  w  nd.  'I'he  tree  has  K-il.  S<>ino  (jno  hns 
t<)M>:  TTiy  pen.  I  f^ooh  the  rn:»n  who  d^no  it.  lie  llH^•  brgjin  the 
Avoik-  Some  rt'll  liv  tho  waysi'le  mid-  \vji<  trnde  down.  Th« 
Fronoh  lan;:uaj^o  isspi»k(;  m  ovt'»y  rart  of  Kurt.pe. 

(50  \)  Th«'  fortri'S^  was  hoinj;  builr.  '!  ho  ppf)C  whrre  this 
new  and  "tranjre  tva;rf'dy  wa.^  hein;:;  actpd.  An  ntteinpt  wns 
"beinj;  made  in  ihc  Kii;^li~h  pavliainnnt.  T!ic  ».ia;:;nificent  ehuroh 
now  h.'lng  fM'OUfcd  in  ihe  oi'3M)f  New  York.  VVhile  thcpe  thing* 
Were  holng  transactod  in  Ki  glaiid.  Wliile  tho  crrcniony  was 
neinjr  pP'h)i'niod  The  enn?t  was  ihcn  iieing  held.  And  fitill 
lie  l»t'i»ig  dnn"  and  irovor  done.  \V!iG:it  is  being  stdd  Jit  a  fuir 
prirc.  G' IJ  is  being  foniKi  in  great  qnaiiiitics.  A  report  18 
n"W  being  prrpavcd.  G'lnds  arc  b^ing  Kidd  « ff  ut  first  cost.-i^* 
While  the  Ilcee^^a^y  mcvcn.cnt  vmis  bi-ii  g  made. 

.QUESTIONS. 

TThilt  is  iho  rule  Tor  the  pai-tiflple?  rtcp^at,  the  two  ppcciAl  rnles. 
Ilepejii  tlip  notp.  WIumi  nri^t  'ho  nom  befoi-o  the  pnrrioiple  he 
in  tlio  possessive  case  ?  Kcpr^at  ilu'Suh.etani'e  of  585.  Whfo  must 
offo  low  the  paiti('i|)Ic  ?  vriuU  is  the  rule  for  iijsinjr  or  omitting 
the  Hrti(de  and  ^>r(•po^ilion  ?  U'hat  is  tlio  rule  lor  the  past  partl» 
Ctjile?    VVIiiit  is  tin  absolute  participle  ?  .  -V^' 

■Vin  i'J  !'J'.(  r    ;•••;..,   '    .  t-  ■•.  .: 


CONNEXIO:^  OF  TENSES. 

502    Rr LE  X  V I L — //<-  (he  u $6  r>f  v n- js ^  and  wor4^ '  '^tfaf,  ■ , 
in  point  of  (hue  r<.late  to    each.  rtJier,  f/'«  order  of  time  mvM 
ht  chhercfd  )  fls.  "I  hiivo  known  liim  these  ni.'iur  yenrB,"' 
not,   **I  know  him  these  mar^  rcfir?  ;"    nor,  '•'I  'knew 
him  these  many  je.irs." 

A^'8.  liKXSAfK. — The  part'«u^or  ttnsc  nc:f  p--arv  to  bo  uj^*  1  n  nst  "p- 
p<jn<l  rpoa  tLfe  lenee,  8i*<]  do  luloS  csn  te  ^;5ren  tuat  w  il  wpp}/  to 
fill  oasce.     iiut  it  nifty  b*  proper  to  wbsarve  - 

ft04.  An  ^bfervatiou  whicb  ifi  alTrave  trnc  niupt  be  express?!  in  ttie. 
prcselt  ifcse;   as,  'The  3l<ft;T  bcli-Ter!  tliat  'hH  crimes  ore  f([\\9\^     ' 

505.  The  prsfent  p  tfc  t.  u^d  i/Ot  the  p-e'ent  tcnjc  fbr-uld  b"  Bjed 
in  coaTiexJf'n  witb  words  denoting  an  exter.l  of  lin;t'  cortjtuetJ  to  tb« 
present;  ihn",  "  Tbey  contintie  with  ma  now  tLieo  dftyi^.'  ehcul.i  b- 
'  /t«r«  eoiiiiiitted." 

5&6.  Tbc  pr«Sfl2t  perfift  tciii*  cogbt  nertr  to  bf  used  in  voDn<5; 
ion  Vflh  WorrgtvLich  expfccs  past  liiue  ;  ILup.  "I  tavo  jartxerl^ 
metttuned  bis  ftttachment  to^tuuV/*  fkculd  fee,  "Ifurajcrly  ui«>ntiijD- 
ed/'  '     ■  ■       '' 

f67.  Tbc  pr'if«Dt  and  post  of  tie  a\  xiiiari'if,  »/.///.  %ciff,  >*//»^.  rM»,, 
sh'uJd  never  ho  afaocUted  in  the  j?anic  ftr 'e'>oo;  a  d  carcJJL>u^t  J»o 
taken  that,  the  eubBet^u«'nt  verb  be  expr*  teed  iii  iLu  fame  tinse  with 
t'>e  antecedent  verb  ;  tbne,  *'I  HK<y  or  cm  do  it  coir,  if  I  ,/iroro"  — 
'  I  might  or  cirvld  dt/it  now,  if  I  tlwst.' 

fi'-^S,  It  dOj')'}<ida:if.  ol  t  is^':,  t'lo  past  porfcct  JquIc^^Ijt'c  or  p'Men.'inl 
ie  n»ei  toexpiosean  event  arteccdint  fn,  luf  ri'rt'r  cor  f<  ir.pTnry 
witb^  cr  bii'-e-'quoTit  fo,  tbnt  txprofsod  ly  t>  reib.  in'' fTn»  piij't  toiihe 
in  the  Jeuuiug  ulnuse.  TLu',  w«  can  i^y.  '*I  be'itvod  la;  }ifl,<  d(Mi©  ii," 
I  at  not,  "I  hvp?d  ho  bad  dono  it  j",  bccuuse  //?.<>/ U5u.v  re^er  lo  <»lt*t. 
i-  pBPl^  but  /i"//e  always  vortT?  tw  sjoiolhiug:  ii»  the  futui«.     ^  ,        , 

M3y.  When  sfujaul  is  uBci  i^u'teud  of  o-"^?,.t  it  i  xp**t »»/>/■**<>/<<  du*y, 
it  may  be  fyll:.w?d  ?y  t>.c  prcff^nt  or  prr^cut  poritct ;'?..«,  "Yuu 
nhnuKi  study,  iliRt  y..a  TRdj/bcoom-j  lo>lfll^^l  " 

ilOO.  Tae  SadLoativJ  pr-^tf  t  is  fri'^uwutly  xxft'-n  af  ?.r  f  o  wtrd,--«<l«>«, 
</7i,  le/yrf.  (1$  *'v,Tftos,  (ly'/e/",  f»  oxpr^si  tho  <i'.uire,iitEo  uf  a  furure 
ftotion  ;  ft?,..*'  Whoa  he  come?,  Iq  fi  dl  be  ?vo'.coUi«.''  V/hon  beforo  the 
pr«*«nt  porfcc-l  indicative,  thcyvlen-.ta  tbe  o  -Tf  ploripn  of  a  future  an-. 
tion  ot  ©vent:  a>,  '-'Hc:  wi'l  nsror  be  bettor  ti,li  h.'ihaf  W.t  the  pan»a 
tjf  pfsTcrty,'" 


K. 


154  ENGLISH  GRAJIMAB. 

601.  A  rerb  in  the  infiaiiirj  mood  must  be  in  the  ;>re»enf  Vns^.when 
It  expresses  what  is  a^utemptjrarif  ip  point  of  time  ^^itb  its  govcraing 
verb,  or  unUfq'Knt  to  it:  35,  '' lle'appelifed  f  •  A-^  a  man  of  letters. "— 
"The  apa-tlefl  were  dtiterruined  t'j prench  the  goov''^  ".  H»;uoe  T«rb» 
denotiftg  hope,  dzxirf,  ii.fett  u>n,  or  command,  Jnuet  b«  foUowetl  br  fba 
P'-eKrnt  iufiuitke,  ftod  not  tb«  ptrffrt. 

fiftj.  "But  th^  porfert  tnfiiiitiv*  mupt  bo  used  to  cM»rc8S  wha'  }i»  ">». 
rt ffrf^Mf  to  the  fime  <'f  the  iJov«rDiiig  v*rl»;    hf.    "  KoruuJus   li«  jJHivHo 

fiuvfJ^Hiihfl  Home." 

EXERCISES  TO    BE   CORTIECTED 

(594.)  Tl»e  "ix^tor  f^aid  t^iat  fevrr  always  pnHUooil  thirst. -- 
The  philosopher  ttiid  tliat  heal  alwnys  pspanfied  inotalj*.  He 
Knid  that  truth  wafi  immuLib'e. 

(595  )  1  knotv  the  family  mare  than  tweniy  vearjs.  I  am  ir»w. 
at  f^chool  six  months.  My  brother  was  sick  four  week-*,  and  i«' 
110  better.  He  tells  lioslono;  enoiij:;h.  Thoy  oontinne  with  nW 
noTv  three  d'lys. 

(oOIk)  He  has  lately  lo^t  nn  only  <^on.      He  has  ]»r>en  formerly.,^ 
very  disorderly.      I  hav*' been  in  Lrvndon  last  year,  anil  seen  iIip 
king  li^st  J'ummer.     1  have  once,  or  twice  told  the  story    to    our 
friend  before  he  went  away.     He  ha.s  dona  it  bofoie  yesterday. 
Some  one  has  lon«r  a^^o  t«dd  the  samo  story. 

(507.)  I  should  bo  obliged  to  him  if  hcwill  gratify  me  in  that 
particular.  Ye  will  fiot  come  to  me,  that  yo  toi«i;h(  have  lif<\  — 
Vm  v;\>c  and  good,  that  ytai  mi^^ht  be  happy.  Ho  was  tuld  his 
danger,  that  he  may  shun  it. 

(503.)  We  had  h. pod  that  Lord  Xu-eat  would  have  been 
able  to  collect  much  new  rtnd  interesting:  informati(»n.  Tolunj- 
l)us  hoped  that  he  >vould  have  rendered  the  natives  friT)U!ary 
to  the  crown  of  Spain.  We  expected  that  ihey  would  have 
come  to-day.  We  tru<^tcd  that  it  had^been_^?fe  who  should  have 
redeemed  Israel. 

(599.)   He  should  study   dili'j;eiiLly    ihtU    he    might,    become 
lefti'ned.     We  should  rest»ect  those  per.?ons,  because    ttiey  oiftVt-  '' 
linued  long  attached  to  i>*.  .    .         . 


PARSING — ADVERBS.  155 

'  "  r 
[600  ]   We  shall  welcome  him  \vhf*n  he  shall  arrive.     As  soon 
as  be  shall  return  we  vill  vecomnioncc  our  «t«{Jio».    A  prison- 
er is  not  accMunte-l  guilty  till  he  he  convicted. 

[GDI. 3  t^'riHn  the  litl  le  CJtnvorsation  I  had  wiib  him.  heap-  .. 
peared  to  have  hrcn  a  m.»n  nf  le:nnin^.  Our  friends  intended  tOi^ 
have  met  n^^.     Up  m  ns  iirrtiid  lie  would  l::ive  died.  j 

|'6<'2.]  Kirfita!!  Aldif-y,  ikjw  in  ruin«,  :ipjioar55]to  be  an  o:*ton-i  * 
sive  huiidinu;.  r.)'Ctii;;iis,i he,  Spar-tan  lawgiver,  is  said  to  h©  " 
h<irn  in  ihe  n'twe  iiundred  and  tucuty-sixth  year  before  Christ.  .^ 

(.iUl-STlONS. 

R^-pfiat  rule  IT.     Uow  cm  {ii-^  (.-oirt'Ct  ten-e    be    ascrrtalued  ? — , .-, 
Whxl  oi)?erv:iMO'i  is.  mn'le  on  liu'  use  of  the  present?     Tht^  prf?ent. 
perfe-.-i  ?     The  :uiKili»ii  i«'s  si'ta/i,  wi'l,  oco.?       l)i'jK-ndt'nt  clau.'^es  ?-^  ' 
Shovlf-'infiienA  of  m/t/hf  ?     'f  l<e  pre.-^er.t  alter  n-lan,  till,  kr..  ?     Wh'en^ 
mnsx  the  infinilMe  present  be  U£cd?     ihe  iutinitivc  perfect ?  '• 


rON-TRfTTIOX  OF  ADVERBS. 

603,    Hl'L'^.    XViW.^A'JrfrU     UKulhij     VKllBS,     AD.JilC- 
TiVRS    un>1  •■//A   r  .Altvf;i'.r>s  ;   :is.    ^'  ,}i]\n  sjhnks  (lUfivrt/j/  ;    "■ 

»>)4.  Aff"**  adv^irb>  .•<(  uiclimes  modify  a<;/'.i.<  or  ;>ro/JOJni>^  Mi  ^ 
'S'otn}ili!iioiieii.\>\\n\\c  iru)n£n  also,  were  prese^^  '^'^1,  ^ 
f-f:>z  I.  A'  briuo;  H  ti  od 

Sii'Kfi.vi.fiuie.^  an  :..:•.■...  •^•Mi-'O' rt.  prcpofitio".    ^^^    Fonictimos     - 

^Ch!).   Til  Lri  1  —/(/'■(:///,>•  i^h-  iCdnot  in  nacd  as  <i(fject\ves^  ' 

»i  7     Tua  3'^'®'^^  hence,   thtikCc,    uhciicr^    meaciug  yVo«<   //</«  place 
/■'i'u-n  thit/*'''^^"^  /  om  whUh  pht  e,  uroperly  should  not  have^row  b©- 


^ 


15(J  ENGLISH    Gr.AMJfAIl. 

0  8.  After  verT)S  firm'-tion  the  ji'lrQibs  7i//'/cr.  thUKnr,  Klitlnsr,  ure 
jjoT  used  only  in  8'>leti  n  ptyl*.  In  otdinarv  flis"!.  U'?^,  "hrre,  there^ 
8r<l  fcA«re.  nr-  11  «  ri  in- t<'a"l  of  <}ieni ;  as,  'MVc  came  here."  "  Taej 
waUel  th'-re."  "  ]7/jc;e  rikl  ho.go*' 

C  9  ir/ic/e  -hou  d  uo  b ',  u.'cd  f">r  i»  trhich.  crc^rt  t^c  rtfor'nco  Is 
to  place  T  us,  •■•  They  friiCTe-?  a  protest.aion,  irAere  [in  uhich]  ibcy 
r»:peaifd  their  fonn^'r  o'ulias  " 

filO  The  a  Ivo'b*  iioin,  tho,  icVn,  ichcre.  in  pu-'b  vbrase?  BS  tVl  nfnt, 
til  tlietifSitice  whev.  to  wh  re  &  ;  ,  nre  snmoiin-.cs  used  by  •.O'^d  wr.lerB 
as  nouns.  This,  how<ivrr  i^vac  io  prose,  acd  should  not  bo  jmita* 
ttd.     Jn  poetry-  ic'is  moo  corcinon. 

Oil.  Of  this  '  a  i-a<ilei' aro  t^o  exp-c-sions  rrf  <^ncc.  f-'r  from  Jitn^e, 
Ac,  bu*  t'^e^M  an  nuw  established  iai.om.«,  mil  m  paroing  are  regard' 
od  ai  on""  w>rd. 

61.'.  Ti.e:''},  nrip  r'y  an  aWar^  tf  Vi'?-,  *h  ohii  unl  ai  aa  i3!:r>- 
dnctory  oX  l-'tlve;  /.a,  "  T/icre  cvmo  to  the  beaob."' 

C13.  KuLs  2  —  Ttfo  vrjnf'ces  nrc  cqivv^lf-nf  fo  an    nflr* 

ed ;  as  '•[c:inuot  drink  n^j  ['/??;.]  moR^,"  t-r,  '-lean  drink 
no  nioro  " 

ft'4  One  nc|;:atir<5  is  rom'-t'ir!'-?  m-non'od  w*tb  nn'-tbcr  iTplicd  in 
tbe  ne^'tiv^  ir(fi.v  dU,nn  im.  in,  il!  ir  &o.;  af,  "Tboii  a't  tint  «no«- 
tjiiainted  with  his  werits,"  t:iat  U,  "'Yiu  are  acquiintod,"  Ac.  In  this 
■w»y  apb'a-^ipg  variety  v)f  exproesion  is  S'^racti'ne':  produced.  Butth* 
•word  ^rtiy  wifi  the  noga+ivo  ^rcso-vee  the  nogatiun;  ae,  *^  wasnot 
cn?i/  llibe.al   but  ccvotous." 

615.  Th**  adi't-rbs  na>/,  no.  ynn,  ya,  of  pti  stand  a'or!0  .1^  a  Tippntico 
or  «ffi-matirea  .«^vr.,  ,,»:.  qirst!Mo:«s,  "I?  hf>a^.  hom>?*'  '=rcV  — 
"He  18  a-  h...„..."  Amer^u  an  a3.-iiiaii.vo  alvcrb,  <quiv.Ucnt  to  •' i?« 
l7  •o,  '  O',  "M'tyt't  be  HO." 

f.lfi    X..,  bef  .re  a  n-Rn,  53  nn  n  Vf,Vg  ;    a^  «.V.>  man"     "n^fore  an 

»d.jj.-.ti<r'nrn,h'erSinf..,oonn.ira.ivb^,j,^  c.it    i.   an   ndverh ;    aP, 
«Awa;^er."    -^'.  «..„«.•'    I,   all  otW  t^,  tbc  proper  negative 

rosTTio:;. 

C17  PiULn  C  — .4  Zi'.^-^.'f  rrr\fr,  fie  m-isf  pnrl  p^acci  l^. 
/orecpdjechvs;  tificr  a  verb  U   t.'ie   simple  /arm,  and  a/t^r 


tTNTllflC— XE*N^5i.  157 

I 
the  first  auxiliary  In  tliekomponnd  form  ;  as,  ''  He  is  very 
attentive,  behaves  iic/l  find  is  much  esteemed" 

C18.  This  rule  appli^s^enerally  to  acljuuot  phrases  as  well  as 
to  adverbs.  /  , 

6i9.  Never,  o/(«:i,  <^'^ hj^,  eomttirrts,  geiierully  preecde  tb«  rerb.— 
Not,  with  the  participl/or  in&uitivt',  ehculi  gectraUy  be  y-Uccd  b». 
fure  it.  / 

?ra  The  improper  Ir.sitlon  of  the  alrerb  ont^  often  oeoasioas  am- 
biguS  y.  This  wiii  giorallj  be  aroM'^d  whea  it  r.fers  (o  a  eeiitcao^* 
or  c'ausp,  by  placiuait  at  the  b  gipniDg  of  tfcat  rettetce  t«rclau?«; 
nh8D  itrecrs  to  a  Ffl^icate,  by  {iaoi-igit  lefore  tUe  preUicating 
term ;  and  when  it  rfera  to  a  fubje<.t,  hy  placing  it  after  it^  r.ftme  or 
descriptiofl ;  as,  "Gn\(  B'^kaowicdge  thine  iniqai-y."  "Tho  tbought.*? 
o(  bia  heart  are  cnJy  efil.'  '  Tahc  notb'Bg  for  your  journey^but  your 
etd£fo/»'y."  These  olpervatioDg  ^i  1  generally  be  applicable  to  the 
wori^  meetly,  solelj,  ^i^'/y, ^rsf,  at  h^af,  aoJ  p^rhap^*  to  a  few  oth- 
ers. 

621.  lu  prose,  to,  t)^-6i.;i  of  the  inSnit're,  shou'J  never  be  B^pftrv- 
tei  by  plaoiog  an  ad"«irb  imaiedi.itciy  afisr  it. 

C?2  The  adrerb  tf/»4'.?7\  is  o^m  aoa!y  p'aced  after  ih9  »lject4r« 
which  itmodiSeB;  as,l' A  hoiHelurgo  enough  fur  all.'' 

623.  Ever  is  Bometiiea  ituproperly  used  for  nether.  Tbup,  "  Aik  me 
ever  60  much,"  ehoul(^e,  "x\Bk  ojc  nrvtr  $o  much"-— that  i*  bo  leach 
as  never  before. 

EXERilSES  TO    BE  COERZCTED. 

Ab  aAverbj  are  iuieclhablc,  m'stakcs  aro  liable  to  be  male  ehiefly 
ia  their  p-^giti  jd,  or  in  Mmg  as  a-iver'is  worJ?  that  are  in>t  s"",  or  i& 
ueing  adverbs  where  oth*-  wordf<  .arc  required-  Correct  the  ©rroni  itt 
the  foll'owiug  >--  i 

006.  They  hoped  for  i  soon  and  procporous  isguc  to  the  war. 

The  then  emperor  was  ibtcd  lor  his  evuoUy.     He  ^'hk  befriend* 

;    ftd  by  the  then  reigningjukc^   ^"»^"^"^'^s  graceiully.  He»poke 

■V  eloquent.     She  did  il^^'i'^  well.     Our  frie.nds  arrived  Pafclr. 

'    The  boat  move- -^^-     »^v.i  expressions  sou ndod  lijirshly.     She 

is  a  re--*^'*^''  P'^^'^  S''^'     '^'-^  ^*^t  ^^'^?V^l  and  I  prPf.j  n^^t 
_  **ii  down. 


'158  EXGLISH  GRAMMAR. 

■^^  ■"  ,  '-  ■  .    "-Z^i  *  "..4 

[GOT  ]  He  departed  from  thence  inb  a  dcpert  place.  T  will 
send  thee  far  from  hence  to  the  Gentie*.     Fiom  hence  1  awa^^r^ 

[608  i  Where  art  thou  gene  '  Andhesnid  unto  me.  '  Qomt^ 
up  here."  The  city  is  near,  oh  !  K-'i  mr  ctoape  there,  n'berr 
I  a>rt,  there  ye  cannot  come  \  -'•^•'  ""''  •''*'^'    ^'*  "^ 

fOOf>.]   He  drew  i«p  a   petition,  where  lie  represented  h\«!  own 
TnVrit.     The  coiidifioii  where  I  found   hi<u  v^s  deploniMe'.     He^ 
went  to  London  last  year,  sin^re  whon  I  hav5  not  seen  Itim. 

[C13. 1  I  can  do  no  more.  He  will  never  be  no  laller.  H»--  • 
did  not  say  nothing  at  all.  Neither  he  nor  »o  one  else  can  do.  f 
that.  I  have  received  no  infjrnjatittn  on  tte  subject,  neither' » 
from  hint  nor  froui  hiy  friend.  1  nov-T  (lid  r«p<^nt  ftr  'doin^  * 
good,  nor  shall  not  now.  I  can  not  >»'i>  towrte  lidrcifrc^  ''f^ortt-"* 
)ng  never  can  justity  ingratitude.  Hi'  Ko*kInd  ae  t<i  tell  tne" 
whether  he  will  do  it  or  no. 

[017]   We  should  not  be  ovor<;onrr'>tall\by  present  evt^ntij, -^ 
"'.Ve  always  should  prrf»r  ourdu^y  to  .a>r  pleiHurc      it  is  inipviwi-* 
pibJe  coniinu;illy  to  l^c  at.  work.   Not  only  tiefoimd  her  employ* 
ed.  bof  pk-asod   ar.tl  Ii-um'^uiI  al.«*o       In  i\io  poper  difp»N*ition'oi>» 
adverbs,  the  ear  yiroi'uily  reijaircs  »o  l.  ;    cvksuIumI    ii«    ac!l  a> 
the  sense      They  Keenied  to  \h\  nearly  dr«>.<^rd  alike.     The  brttik*^ 
Chtri5<ea  is  soon  expect. 'd  to  set  ^ail.     I    \^  iMcd    tnat   trnf.   on* 
would  hang  !»ie  a  hundred  times.  >  x'i  * 

(<>18.)    riio  w«Mnen  .  o.)utri!)u?cd    all    ih«r    ring-;  and  j.•w^!8"'* 
voimt.irily,  to  as.~i.st  tlie  ;::^«»veinnient.      !lt<!ef<rminod  to  invite 
back  the  kin^;.  an\l  to    eall    t«i;j:;('r]ier    hi.s    'riet'dsl      llavini^  nul 
known  or  havin;;  not  o.-nsidered  th-.'  inoa>-'vos  nrnpus^ed.  he  fail- 
ed of  PUCCess, 

[6121*.].  Tlu'isin  can  (Uilv  be  op p used  to  >oi yrlje;.<iii.  Hy  greai.-.,,, 
nc^-ip,  I  do  not  only  m.'a'i  tlio  bulk  o'  any.-'inij^h,'  object,  but  th«.  , 
dihtiucin^^jt  of  t!i«'  whoK.  viow.  Only  yai  have  1  known  «»f  all 
the  nations  oCiho  e.ii-th.  In  p:oni(>tir»«the  public  j;ood.  wc«»r»- 
ly  di.sohurge  our/au..>.  M..  ,,nlv  rcad'Mio  book,  ml  two.  ).  e 
u  vly.  read  the  book  but  r\A  the  letter,  y«  j.^^  |  tiie  b"ok  only 
batdid  not  keep  it.  He  chiefly  ppyfce  oT  vu-  ^^^^  ^^.  ^^^^.^  J. 
H^only  reads  English,  not  F»'^n"f»-  '  ^ 


syntax-7-conjuxcti6ns.  169 

[621.]  Scholars  8Hou1^1Se*taugnvfo  careTullj  scrutinize   tne"*" 
sentiments  advant^ed  in  all  the  books  thev  r«ad.   "To  make  t^iirf 
scnterioe  perftpieuous,  it  \irould  l>e  neeesi^.jfy  to  entuelj  remod'eV^ 
it. 


QUESTIONP. 


^^bat  i^  tlie  r;iio  for  alverbs''  Do  thr'y  ever  modify  nottns*''-^ 
What  othet  pait^  <-tApVecli  do  they  someiini^s  Tiko«iify  ?  May  ad-  ♦ 
verbs  be  used  as  a/ij.;ciivi!S V  WIih*  is  ^'av]  o\  heucc-.  ihcvc.^  &c,  ?  .^ 
^^'l^en  are  hUhrr,  !h'!f,tr,  kc,  iisod  •'.'  Wbut  is  ^fli<l  ol  ichcif?  What. 
Dt'iill  nou\  kv.'f  Wluttort^vo  nip^atives  ?  What  13  nu  implied 
iK'g;Uiv<^  ?  W1):vt  ,'tre  «/?//  f/o,  f7m*«,  •&f.  ?  W'liat  is  ?u>7  Wtint  is 
ttmriile  of  poftitio;*  '     VVIihi  ii  the  ruif»  tor  oiiiui'       Wbnl    is   9rti«i 


CONSTRUCTjOX  OF  <  •<  )X.I  rxOTIOXS. 

624.  Rule  XfX  -•  ('■.v/it-irn'>  up  conncrf  woni',<i  or  se>- 
TF:Nrb;P. 

■'>2').  N^'nj-vN  nl'du' s,"»tM'  ciUM-;,  tin  viu'j;  a  siniili»r  rphilion  to 
anorhor  to  wliifli  tlu-y  lirl(.»i!%;.  aw  runneolcd  hy  a  fonjiiiu'tiitn. 
Thus  - 

t.  N«»iin'fi  or  p'tin<.\i''.'fi :  afi,  **J>intf:s  and  .h-lu   jvihI  /  are-hcre.'* 

2.    Adjecfivef :   a?.  "A  {•nuLnf.  Junvr,  f\\\\  llmtoroli'c  !n;t)i." 

■A.  Verbs:  o^,  *•  t'jvo'r 'ir.v,.   and  «'(»•  ;hk\  r-<ii((i:''i--'<l.'' 

I.  Aiivt-rbs.  ot-  ii-ivc.-h.s  aiid  ft  Ijunrl.-* ;  ;i!».  •'  fie  w»n  flio  prir-^  /V»fr- 
/.'/  nivj  fir,  II  I,  ml  I  •J."'  or,  "f'tnlt/  ho<1  »'•»>/(  A*/;.  .,  " 

ft.  rr«^pr)>.itioi)f* ;  a.^  *•  7'.»  nr^d /c.^i  t  Hfl  '•ity"— "  T;-  nn.l  ./nc/i  the 
hill  •' 

fi2ti.  \'^erbi!  conncfted  :j;\v/!  (h  :  .  .uae  ir.miii;i  ;ive  :  '-.Jiuiics  /ffii/K 
an  I  MTiVeW.""'     "  •■■-'' 

027.  N'iiinf'ir  pT*)noun'?  ciinni'rted  ia -tlift  uarrtinativc  cose,  either 
}>«  su'jjpct^  f^v  dc^criptivf:  itr-*  rel:ii*»-d  a.s  !»jnh  t)  th/»  .'?tQi«,yer\> }  as, 
"./.».'. n  and  ./«;«r*  are  c  )u^ins."     '    H  ■»    i»  a  •/.■'/m /.'<"/i    and  s./,o/ i;.." 

t}-8,  Noun.<<  or  pronuutis  CO  rn'c^ed  in  the  possessive  caso  arag^ov-- 
ened  by  tbe  same  ni>uo  :  aa,  ••Juun'v  and  ,/.j///r'«  Imoiv." 

6iy.     NoviDS  orproaouaa,  conneoted  in  the  objoctire  ease,  are  gov- 


ertied  by  the  eaTne  verb  or  p?eposi'/ioa;  as,  "He  studies  grammar  a.ni 
lo^ic."  "Give  the  books  to  h{}i%  and  ?n«." 

ft30.  AVbcn  uAminatirefl  belon?  fo  fliffofeot  i^crbs,  or  verbg  to  dif- 
ferent noaaiotttives,  the  conjunct-oa  crnntcts  the  seutecces,  not  t^je 
word«;  as,  **Joht,  reads  and  Jamee  tcriie^.'* 

631.  Simple  eentences  or  clauses  arc  connected  by  conjun«. 
tions^  so  Qd  to  form  one  compouod  sentence  j  vm.  '  JBaiA  that  ye 
me  Goc/s'.-  but  ijr  ah  all  Oicy 

ftSa.  SioiiUr  sentencef,  whether  defoauoiit  or  indcpcalen*,  are  cob- 
iv««'od  bj  the  ooTijuuctioHS  h-n.d,  o^,  nor,  hut,  y^t,  ^n. 

633.  CoBJanetioae  are  frequentlv  uudaratooii  bitw«ea  the  w.^tde  or 
8*uter-oeB  eoitaocted  ;  us,  "Caesar  €Of?;e,  ««fr,  and  «c7>^»«e''x.'V  "Th* 
•.s*#h,  f«>o.'T?€>»^  and  fJiH(h-«it^  were  precect.' 

SPECIAL  RULES. 

634.  RuLa.- — Oorijuncticm  connect  the  same  moods  and 
tenses  of  verbs^  and  cases  oj  ii.oun^  or  pronouns  ;  as,  *'i?o 
g^od  and  s^c/ispcace/^—** Honor  thyjather  s'nd7nothcr.'* 

635.  Verbs  of  fhe  eame  mood  aad  tenj^,  under  this  rule,  are  geH' 
©rallf  ale  >  la  the  sa-nti.^  form ;  "He  readi  'XuAtcrifei."  (ttot  tloes  writ4  I. 

636,  When  verbe  cofinecLel  ara  not  of  the  j-ame  Diood,  tfiise^  o* 
•form,  a»d  eppLcial^y  if  contraet  or  opposit'oa,  txpres-jied  by  bvti, 
though,  f/'cf,  is  intended,  the  nominative  is  repeated;  ae,  ''He  caioa 
but  h-e  would  not  stay." 

6»)7.  After  expressions  imply  iag  fZowy ',/««*■,  or  denial,  (he  ooDJuua- 
tion  thnt  is  properly  osed—not  lest  bu(,  hu(  t\(H ;  a^,  '  i  do  not,  doubt 
t*mt  he  is  hunest"— "I  am  afraM  that  ho  will  die."  Also,  ahut  should. 
Tjot  be  used  in  tV«  t  U«e  of  t?,rt.*.  'Th-^e,  'H^  will  not  bt?l'evo  but  uhm 
V  am  to  blame,"  shouid  b»i.  "but  that  i  uua  to  bluUie. 

GB8.  lllTLK  2. —  Certain  worot'.  m  the  (tntcvuhnt  memb'-t. 
tif  a  sen(euc€f  require  vorrcifponding  connectives  in  the  ^ubr 
itrqufnt  onf  ;  thus — 

1.  In  clauses  oiword,^  simply  Ov^tunected  — 
Il>-h        requirea  oftti;  as,  "i?(ifA  he  an?  I  i-ain*-.  ■ 

U'th-^r       '- or  :  n.s,  *  EitJirrha  or  I  whl  come." 

JftUher      • t,(,r  ,•  ft)*,  "  Scith'^r  tie  n  /  I  cftmfl," 

[__     Xyh^th^r- f,r  :  as,  "  Whcthf:r  h©  f-r  I  «ft!a«." 


ytf.i  ac^'Tiioa^^lie  ilay  mc,  y  t  will.  I  trust  in 

-»  h^ifaho,-  E%  ''iVof  oiV  ^^  ^^  «?«o  hit  broth- 
er goes." 
2.  In  c^aa?e8  <j' onr etcd  80  as  t>  imjly  eompsrJsoc^- 

fbc  romparnHr^  d'gr^^  requires  r' <>.'/ ;  ap,  "He  iB^#^^#>  ♦/*/^ftif  «  "^ 
OfXe,"  require?  if^'^n;  a?,    "  It  ii  no  ot}^er  than  h*."  ' 
i'/gf      — —  -- .  fi^fln;  ag,  ''^  li.if  tUi  do  yon  expect  t^tn  Itis.'' 
A»         .=-!»....  o«  (expressing  fqualitj?) ;   tkf,  "He  is  e«  tall  «  I 
am  " 

Af'         '—- M  (•  xt-rcseiDg  equftUtT; ;  6f,  "yie  ibj  doy  ♦#«   « 

etall  iby  Btrenglh  bti."    . 

P':  — • A*  (wiih  a  nygatirc,   cxp-esting  iti^quality) ;  «*, 

"Jlrt  is  not  »©  learned  «•  hie  ferotber." 

3'j  *h/it  (elpresslng  ccnfe^ucnoe)  ;  ftf,  "He  is  •©  Irwifc 

^^«i  be  can  not  walk." 

5'?.'e,^ —  <r«  (fiprcBsirg  tim'larity);  a#,  "Fe  or  r'f'fj^  «»  be.'^' 

630.  In  scntentce  implying  compflripon,  there  is  eommonly 
an  clipBis  in  the  Fccond  member,  ofier  u'lan  and  'at;  "My  pun- 
ishment is  greater  ihf^n  [that  i*  u-Inc'i)  I  can  bear." 

d40.  A  relative  flfjer  than  input  in  tbe  objtctire  enie;  tf,  '  PtUft. 
than  H.hoin  uone  higher  eat  "  This  ftnoni&ly  haw  not,  lecn  fatiKfae- 
torily  expUiiied,     In  this  case,  flomo  regard  thou  ae  •  prepo8i»ioB. 

641.  RtLE  8. —  When  a  lulsfqucnt  chv9e  or  part  of  a 
genfencets  com'*non  to  two  cHjJc^cut  hut  couvccted  anfccedtnf 
^lavseSj  %t  must  he  cq^iQUj/ ajjplicah'e  to  hoth ;  ftp,  ''Thai 
work  always  hns  been,  and  always  v.ill  be,  (lamirtd** 
—"He  isns  Iftll,  though  Doteo  handBome,  m  hit  brofh^ 

f>43.  When  thiJ  ruleia  vijiatou,  tie  crrcctioii  Is  m,'A>\f,  cjtli«r— 
1.  By  altering  one  of  the  nstccoJeni  c  RUres,  so  that  the  9ttl>>>e<iicni 
may  bo  RppUcabl©  to  bcih.  Tziup,  ""^he  etory  has  and  will  be  be* 
lUved,"  i«  Bot  correct,  because,  though  w«  cgu  eay,  nili  h*  t«'<'tV»W, 
fre.can  not  Bay,  Acs  he  believed.  It  ahouldte,  "The  «tarj  h**  Uten, 
ikftd  will  be.,  beiieyed."  or—    . 

^ ;«.  Jf  ^i«  ««n  »ot  b©  d?ac,  we  may  complete  the  constiootiooof  Uie 
tatt  part  by  ennesiujf  its  Appropriate  subscquont,  a&d  le^re  ihe^f^b,-- 
It^uect  of  the  le^ocd  vcderetooi.     TJiUS,  •  Se  wai  ttor*  be'^-.ttd,  but, 


1-62  ENGLISH  .GRAMMAR. 


Bftt  sn  ranrh  a^tn-rod  as  Tyntbio,"  i?  nof  crrpct,  because  w8  nttsa^, 
"'Br«  iray  more  heloA-e*!  »9  C^atbin."  It  sbauM  bo  -^^He  wipttjoreb*- 
)*>V:d  thxn  C^ntbi  >,  but  not  bo  muob  aliui-di  " 

FXFRrjSE.S  TO  nr  r;i>RlA«;f  TED. 

^Jnith**  f  Hawing  s^rifeucoa  p«vint  out  the  '.'07jjii;i,ctioq'^,  Ibe  w^  a  or 
ii->nte>ic  p  connected  Uy  them — se  wix^tber  tbe^  jcorresp'HjdpedyTditig 
t  '  iV»«  rul^fi,  «.ofl  -f  n't   f   rre  t  an*  j.''v3  a  re  iPfrP  t«'r  the  cban^fif. 

>  '-f*><4  )t-ila  reaL^  aid  vvrjio,  well.  Atij;<M^'  }rU4c»3  ir>iH  the 
V.jp.iRt  «;f  a.wist^  n»:n,  lujt  wili  ro<l  (inly  lii  the  '."■'•('Hi  wf  fo«>N. 
U  he  fi1id('rsiriii!l  rfip.  4io>>jcct  irrl  Ml  tends  lo  it.  he  can  ^ciVeflv 
fiil  alhuccem.  t/u>ylM2  lto;ilth  iintl  tu  \\\  p.  in  peaco  are  trre-a  t 
hU;8'<ings.^^^jlt|'^aw>ry  fmx)i)^.'i  .U' .yV'j[\»V'"i^  !<'<»«■ '»'«^lge  than   ab<ait 

to  h\\u\%  it .  .  ■.,»..  ?4-  ■ 

\'ot»  and  rnft  !tre  pT'^at  fj-if-:i«ls  Thij..  i>a  ^iv.hU  mat-fcr  be 
twet'n  jou  and  i.  My  f.uhfT  and  liini  arc  rery  in'imate  ''^tje 
is^ti^ller  than  rne  ,  but.  i  am  i.Ki<  r  than  hitn. 

(645  )  He  reads  a^d  wriSfMli  uril.  IJe  toads  and  does^wH^f 
wf.ll  He  icij,:is  and  in  vMvt'n.i^  vvod  Hne-s  he  not  rca^.Hinrl 
wr;toft  vrell  ?  Did  h-j  («>!.  lell  ihef  l»i»  fuijU,  and  euheattd  ,h«e 
to  forgive  him  ?      F.-irth  has  her  MdliudeSj  and  so  ]\hh  lifo,;  , 

(017.)  1  do  iK.t  deny  bal  ho  U.'.8  ujurit.  dhoy  \\vv<i  ^4*yii''l 
)est  vou  would  I'O  off'ui'^d.  AVo  wove  sjpprehenMvo  kat  s,«.nit' 
acciclent  ha<i  hapPiMicJ  to  iiiivi.  \Vc  oan  no!  deny  hut  whaf  hp 
\va*s  ilt-trt'.'it'-d..  Wc'can  not  dou'.t  hat  w>ia(  hi>  is  wrll  t '(•{»* 
n.trs^fr  t.iiii  whalMi^  Is^Vfdl 

'  t^j'f!*  IV^  tt*isV^i\h!*-t*'r^M- f.r  h..r.  It -is  >«>  ci.-ar  r. «  I -n.f«-.f! 
not  cxphiin  it.  'Jho  rriisiim.x  an'  so  uiM.'itain,  a?!  that  U. (•;*'■'*♦• 
•juii't!  mmdi  vxan)ina;  t;in.  'i  h*-  '.m.:  i^  iqually  (K'.x'J'n  lu^g  iifj  »)ip 
tdiuT.  r  «mi«it  h«;  jju  I'ai.dld  l<Mini»  ihut  I  huv?  h<«-'u  niiiifa^fn. 
He  vv(.»uld  not  do  it  h.iniselt"  noi-  lo'  ni<'  du  it.  Ho  wa.-^  rt't.rfn'gi-y 
nh-hi'  «v!uhl  not  speak.,  ^'o  as  i  h y  days  so  .-)h»H  ihy  .-itreiigth  fa*. 
'rht>u;;h.ho  f?hiy  mo  to  wdl  I  tiusi  in  hiiil.  HfliBuet  gorliiniself 
or  sond  his  torvani.  'I  horo  is  no  contntlon  so  secure  fts  can  r.6t 
admit  vf  change.     He  in  not  ns  eniinont  and  fio  muoh  PHteerfied 


I  SYNTAX — iKTERo^ECTION.  163 

(648-2.)  He  Ims  little  rnoro  of  thf  echolar  besides  the  name. 
Be  I'parJy  to  sacof)r  suc'i  p^'Wof^s  who  need  thy  as«i>~tarice. — 
Jficy  hj.i«l  jio  siopnorrrscii  ht»t  thf'V  anpiu-d  thcnisplvcs  to  iheir 
Phillies.  '  'f  fiOJ^^  ^avH'^t'  pnoph;  -iet^urfMl  to  huvo  no  ether  clemen 
i>!if  vfiir'.  Buch  ujpf  i!i:>t  :icUhMc'i«rw»isly  mi*ht  to  heavnid'- 
p.I.  He  i^aiBC"!  noihijij;  funhtnby  IjJH  5pei.'C-i,  b;it  ol''^v  t»»  l^ 
<!->rn!ii;jnfleit  for  hi^  td<»4.'i<;ii<je.- .   'I'lii--^  re-Hv>ne  vfl»ifiv>>|j>,!il  '•^'J^-^'i!^ 

(651.)  I  ah^ays  !iavo  and  j  ;i]'.vnj9  (shtill  hn  of  this  rtpinicn. 
MeHs  liotder  bur  riot  so  w.iie  al  bis  en.-npariinn,  Siu-JOiity  '*  hm 
vtilnable  and  even  more  so  tluin  knowiedgi?.  Tbfi.r  inle»>ii<-tis 
Ml  ij;ht  and  probably  wcr^'  r'nuA  TIip  revv.ird  has  already  <t 
Mill  hereafter  be  -^iven  tu  liiiu.  .\V11J  j{  i>o^  ingcd  ibivrdu^^o 
I' '  )ks  arc  Ks  ul.i-or  evo;'»  older  than  tradifioo  Pbis  l)o«jk  xa 
preferably  jind  etioap^TThan  ibe  other,  lie  t.i«r.^  no  er.re  fuT 
mtero.vt  in  the  nt  itrf^r;  '■  -'  " 


Wiiat  i?  the  rul?  tor  coMj!i(if;tion.g  ?  Wh  it  iM\y  ho  ronnecto_d? 
What,  if  verbg  tir6  ro:\neoteU'?  ■S'ni-A?  flri*!  pr-dilonns  ?  If  thn  nom- 
iiiRfives  heU)usf*to  d-mereut  varbs  V  How  Hfc  rompoii-vd  sewtenees 
f'ormvd?  Aie  ciinjaii-.tiions  uudtr.-tood  ?  Whuf  is  the  rule  tor 
niouds  iiiid  lousfi?  W  i.iL  id  ruMiit  l)ji;  vys-liK  ot  the  Siiiu-  loriu  1' 
Wliea  mUiil  the  nomiuative  T)o  iVpenled  ?  ^Vhen  is  that  projieriy 
usi'd?  Uope.it  Ihe  e<>rre.-pondiuj[2:  eonJHuelit)i)8.  WhiU  oevuis  in 
^^nStoeftri  of vonip;i"'i>ijn y  AVh:V.  wFit'ii  a  ebtnsx;  h  corhmon  fiy'rwo 
ditforent  p;»rfpi  ot  jt   sentence?     ito^v  can  «Ti«»rs   ii' 'I  if  tx-  o«rr»«ti. 


.<i4'>..  Ul'LiK  XX. — /.•i,icrjecu'>jiis.hfifc  n>  <jrii/JiniafH-4,.il  ccm- 
tir.ri.on  With  the  other   wor(fs  \ii  a  stii<r:rr(. 

(')44.  After  interjocti«..n-,  prouovins  ot  the  tirs»t  person  :)rc  coni- 
!*nif)irfly  in  thie  o)))ectivo  ea«o;  iho^o  ct  {he  second,  in  the  wOfHi" 
:  mihe  ;  as,  "Ah  roe  !^'— "  0  thoti  I"  «         '  ' 


164  ENGLISH  (GRAMMAR* 

645.  /7i  evejy  senUnce^  flie  tifords  emphjj^f^t  (tnd  th$  orifi 
in  zphich  ilt^^  'are  arranged,  sho%-2d  he  such,  ng  clearly/ . (ftnd 
properly  fo  express  the  uha  intended  ;  and  ai  ^he  tame  tini« 
ull  the  parts  nfthe  ientmc^  fJiouId  correspond,  and  a  r$^ 
far  and  dependent  constrmfion  hs  preserved  throughoiit. 

64e.  Among  Ibe  <5ylls  to  be  gnarded  ftfaiost  flB(l«r  \\«  g<?iiet»!  rtil« 
sre  tbe  foHowiog  ;-— 

1.  the  use  of  ^rords  whIeTi  do  Bolcoi-fCGf-y  or  properly  ftrta«'ey  Ibt 
iJea  iofe*ide<?,  or  tvbieh  convey  «n<;«/i.er  with  equal   propriatjr 

3.  Tbe  avrft&gement  of  trords  and  elatiscg  in  ?n?b  r  vay,  that  theh 
rejatioa  to  ofehet  T^ords  aiid  ^lattfics  is  dottbtful,  or  djfficult  te 
he  perooiVtsd. 

3.  The  separating  of  adjuhotg  frv-^m  t^eir   prm'ipale,   and   I'lae-lag 

ihcm  60  that  fbey  may  ho  joieed  ;o  ^ords  bi  which  tb*y  do  Eot 
hclong. 

4.  The  sepa-aUeg  CL^telailte  ci2U*«3  Improperly  TTcaa  tfatlr  ftBtte«- 

dents. 

5.  IJfiing  injudioiouely,  or  Uo  fr©<jQ©atly,  the  third  pertefiat  •!  !>•♦- 

rcpive  pronoun,,  e^ipcipially  la  indirect  dlfr«ou.r»ft. 

£IX1:RQIS£S.  '_.^' 

The  following  »6ateiiod6  aro  not  gramm  .t;citll,y  iaoowect,  but  frwni 
some  of  th©  causes  mentionod  above,,  a.ro  ohivurt,intitigant,  anirtffiton$, 
fit  nHintfUigihle.  Let  the  pupil  point  oat  the  error  aud  eorrect  it.  fend 
give  a  reftson  for  the  oorrectioiu 

Tho  son  said  to  his  fjither  that  he  had  '^inncMlaj^fau.st  Heaven, 
A  fsirmcr  wentioa  hiwyor,  and  t-olJ  him  timt  his  bull  hfiUo:or©4 
h{»  ox.  The  Greeks  fearing  to  be  surrounded  on  nW  -^ides  wheel* 
ed  v'ibout  find  hidiPil  with  the  river  on  their  b-iek.'^,  Nor  was 
PhilHpTwftntinj!;  to  corrupt  Deraosthenea,  as  he  had  most  of  the 
ieadinji;  men  of  (Ireece.  '  Parmenio  hnd  served,  with  ^reai  lid"?]- 
it?,  Fhillip  the  f.ither  of  Alexander,  as'woU  a*  himself,  for 
whom  hefirat  opened  the  way  inU>  Asia.  .  Belisovius  M-aiJ.gen* 
ftral  of  all  the  forces  under  Jasti-nian  the  Pirsi,  a  tnatj  ofrw^ 
t«loi'.  Lvsiss  pro.mifte4  Uii  f*th»r  i3©T«r.tc  ahAftdf^n  l»i*  frleprt* 


Carthage  was  demolished  to  the  ground  »o  that  ^TC  are  anablt 
to  say  where  it  stood;  at  this  daj.  Thus  ended  tha  war  \rith 
A Btioohus,  twelve  years  oftor  the  second  Punic  war,  and  two 
after  it  had  begun.  Claudius  v;as  canonized  among  the  ^od€, 
who  scarcely  deseiVGd  the  nar/ie  of  a  man.  He  was  nt  a  win- 
'low  jn  Litchfield-,  where  a  party  of  the  roynli^ts  had  fnnifie^i 
th**^ selves,  luking  tv  view  of  tho  cathedral. 

ELLIPSIS 

Heaptctiog  tbe  use  of  tliis  flguiw  notbitg  wore  Jvfinil*  cau  he  \aH 
JtuvD  lliJiB  wtiat  H  eotitHi'.ed  in  tbe  following. 

J5 VEf.'I  A L  RULES' 

[  047.  IxiLi:  1  —  *d *'£?/'}>£ '«,  «?•  omaaion  a/ uofxh,  is  ad- 
mifsaht^  when  thrf/  can  he  tnipvh'cd  hy  the  mind  with  suek 
a^taintj/  and  rc^d.iness  atvot  to  ohscure  th*t  i'^}sf. 

64S.  HuLB  2. — All  tllipsis  i«  not  aUowalU^wken  xtaoM 
.  0t*»eur6  the  iGiitencf^,  weakot  ii^  force,  nr  be  attended  with 
«H  iinpropricti/  ;  a$.   'W«  9pealc  Ibat   we  do  know,"    fot 
that  whkh^  &c.  • 

eJ0.  Articles,  proncaea  sni  prciositi'»DP,  should  aiwaya  be  re^ttat- 
»\  T»be«  the  words  with  which  they  staad  eonneotedareusad  emph^t 
ical  y.  Under  sucb  cli'.UDastaucos,  even  nouns,  adjectlree,  and  rerba, 
mast  often  be  repected  !  as^  "     ot  oiilj  the  year,  but  ths   day  aud   th* 
bour  were  appointed.'' 

650.  It  is  gcnerilly  Improper,  except  in  poetry,  to  omit  the  aatd- 
e«dent  to  areUtive  :  aad  it  i»  alv.iys  go,  to  omit  a  r«latiT0  wbes  i%  is 
in  the  fiumvuatire. 

EAEECTSK6  TO  SE  er>BBF.OTE©. 

Iti  the  ioDowing  sentenci^a.  omit  9ueb  word-d  as  arc  j)»t  aeo6g9aE>/ 
t«  the  eenee  ;— 

Cicero  wps  an  eloquent  man,  an  able  man,  a  generous  aiafi, 
aad  he  was  truly  a  pauiolie  U3an,  Avarice  and  onDoiog  may 
gain  an  estate,  hut  avarice  aiid  cunning  can  not  gain  friends.  I 


6  »  ENQtiSH  (JKAiitAR 


166\ 

tFrcp  •■'  •  -.  '    .♦:  ;■  .3« 

vwierntti  hini,  IjOM'cot  liim,  I  lo.vo  him,    on  iio.nunt.  ot  "his  vlr^ 

tuc's  -.         ^.^  ,_  .  ;; 

H«j  !);i»  nn  aEfjctiunate  ))rpllier  and   jin  affoctiona-'ft    sistpj-.^ 

Cenuhie  virt«i«.' supposes  our  be)u-vi»h«j.ro    to  \te   stfcnj^theuod 

rindto  b*.' oo'^tfirnVc'.  i>y    |'nnc»{>:t\      Ppi-s;'V(*r('nce    in    lnu<i;ib^e 

piii^Kijils  will  r.'w.iV'l  .'.11   fiur  f"IL<.  unl  will  pt'o<liu:(i   c^ffi'6'..M   )>o 

y»»n<!  0;il<M)l:5tioM.      W'l;'  cfUMi  ronimfnd  imprMilcritly.   ns  well  :«h 

«^i.>!i'^ii>-<»  iinpiii'lf'tiily.      (.'!i:ni<r:-?!  !ivi«    nlm-i^t    Cinistun' ly    tiikin^f 

li!;i«*f  in  Mii'M  and  in  isMunfr.s.  in  (^niui'"!^  nm]  i:iou-t»ims,  in  ini- 

rate  Curtiino-!  !inJ  lo  i)ji|i1io  .oo.n.hjcL       lie    i-*    toinjiprnlf,  *l<' is 

(lisjiiterpsl'f'l,  he  is  bonovolent.     llf>  irgavtls  tlie  truln,  Vmt  tlioii 

(Ji»«t  not  r(';>:!U'<i  it.     W'e  t^iR'^c-eiliMl,  biUtlipy  diil  not  siu'OPcd. 

la  the  f -llowiii-r  scT^tenee'',  supply  t^u  w  ordu  5iui'r<.jierly  ciiii'tcd, 
all. I  srarc  »vliv  tbi?y  sioul  I  ba  rjsfo.al  :  — 

\V(>  iirri  nirnjMi'y  inciiir'l  t.o  pr.ii<:^  \v")o.  pr.iiso  n-i,  im;!  I  a 
tiiiti.'i-  wlio  llittor  u-<.  Who  be^s^■  «.v»u  sisfVin""  be:>t  «:jn  »ln.  A 
beaufiru!  a;arJori  and  tn;"S  woro  ?^f)l'i.  Ills  honor.  iJifori-^f,  re- 
ligion, vvero  ill!  nn>.b:ivki'd  in  this  irid.^r^akinji;.  IMr.l^y  days  and 
tM'en  npi^ks  pass  awn y  nniroprov^ d.  !  iu-  ('apa'irt  lunl  sovotm  I 
men  di-'d  in  his  shjp.  I  !i.<  con>lni't  i«  lutt  .« oandiklin^  ?♦,'••,«  nd  l-hat* 
is  ihe  \)"st  r.an  be-  -lid  ofiL.  '!  hoy  i>r.i  <y*a  tVvic  e-Vrwt.lfution  aai. 
laW8.  'i'hat  i-t  a  pi'i();M'i  y  M»o-=t  >n;-n  have.,  oral,  lya'^it.  may  a-t* 
t:»in.'  .  Thi:-;  prop'.-'rty  hn.s  or  uiil  hi  sold  Y.<u  9ni>pr)se  biai 
V?iunge!' than  I.  It  ro«i!iirps  T-.v  tnl.-^nt"'  t-vwhioh  most  men  a'e 
not' horn.  Vi-'abvii'^t  hiiy  not  iJCi.i'iit'o.  He  rn  ly  be  said  to  buvo 
Mayp^l,  the  lii"'*^  of' u  tn^/.;^a.  and  consoqaently,p,ntit1o  I  Vo  t,1i<^  fp- 
vv)|r4.,.  '1  hi'  ii:'Opi.'^^or  t!ii.so.njjU.lcy..|iQH<eit:'»A  bea.liby  ell^uafy  find 
suil.  I  have  purehaspd  a  houri.j  arid  ori>lnird.  A  noh!/3  .spirit 
di.sdiir»L!th  the  malice  oi  turJui-.i;  ;  his  gieatness  of  u.ul  is  not  to 
be  cast  down.  -  .< 

QIK/TDNS. 

Whnt  is  tlie  rale  tor  inftMJf^-'iions?  Wiiat  lor  proti*)ari«!  of  tli« 
first  person  ?  What  ia  the -ieueral  rult^  for  constraciioii  ?  What, 
are  the  five  evil?  to  be  avoidfii?  Wjint  is  ellipsis  ?  Whatai  th« 
rules?     Tbs  rules  for  nouasaud  pronouns  ?     For  thec'uiiiparativ©" 


•■"*.' *.':&!* tf  ■  if   ***:    '  :*^   .5r>  •••'^ :?  c ";•"■■  -' '1^*"^  ♦"^T 

i^jC;?rce?  FortA'^a.or  mur;!  adjeclirea?  An  jpidjective'rin.l  ai^icle/'^ 
A  verb  with  t'ijo  Gonv\  imMs'e"  ?  S.veril  cU-trses  hnriifio:  the  Sitrof' 
))  eilit";itf*  ■?  Tiie  ver*)  '-/o  '>^'''  For  (>r>f»rry"?  The  seconri  clrtii^^e 
II ',H  3«nfp;iJ;».'     Alver')r.'     "I'ft>[t  >  ill  ions''     Oonjuodion  ?     loiiir- 


nV\.E^  OK  SYNTAX. 

R»'t,ii  1.— Siiijsl.intivos  *]on(Ming  the  sauu-    ]>cr.-*ciij  or 
ih  lii^  Hjree  in  case. 

Pau.sir.  — I.    An    fi 'j.>.-!.ivo  or   ]):n"ti('i]!l(>   liii.'ilifi  ■*  •;  be 
'  suSs'iinllve  to  \^  Uich  it  l)eli)nL!;s. 
t     2.    A<ljo(*ti\'os  (li'Motinir  (Hit,  quality    noifn^*  in  llic  Mu 

li!    tie  plil'lll. 
k     •  . 

f      lil"LE  III.— 1.    1  he  article  d  ov  .m  \n  pit  hek)re  coift- 
li. on  nouns  in  tlie  .sihi^ular  number,    when  used /^.cft;/^ 

-.  TliO  ai  {\'e  ^7*r  is  put  hofiijc  eonnnon  noun^j  citiicr 

iif)  j:ui:1!'  orplui-a',  when  ii-icd  iU-ji nit  I ;j. 

liVL^  IV.  — Piuii   uns  agree  witli  the.n/Huis  fuiv*  l*iL«.^hjr 
tlit.y  .stand  in  i!;endf'r,  number,  and  per-rau^      v  ^  ,  »r 

Rile  V. — Tlie  relative  agrees  with  ilfl  anleeedeut  >u 
number  and  person. 

BUL":  Vf. — The   ;<u]>jeet  of  a  linitc  \cib  i.'i  put   in  tli^ 
nomi'ativc. 

Rlle  All. — A  substajitivij  \n  hcjse  case  ciepWds  on.  no 
Other  word  IS  piit  in.  the  nominative.       .^  '    : 


KtTLE  Till. —A  verb  agrees  trith  ite  tio-^itts^ivo  In 
number  au<i  p^r:oi:.  .  ,•,..,'/ 

Rule.  IX  —  Tbo  descriptiro  noun  after  a  verb  ia.p^- 
in  tbe  Bamc  ca^o  as  the  subject  befon}  it. 

KuLt  X. — :V  trane^itivc  vorb  in  the  artiv*-^  vciro  .j;.rv- 
erns  tbo  objective  case. 

Hulk  XI.*-A  pi'^iv^silior!  irovorn^tbi'  nhjoctivc  «M!so. 

Hulk  XIT. — Certain  words  nnd  ]->br.]>^t!8  ^bi»u!d  bd 
followed  by  np})ro])riatcprepo:>iiiou?. 

KVLE  XIII.— One  subetantivo  '^(,vcr\\^  .inoiber  i« 
t.ho  poBsessivc,  Mbcn  tbo  b-iKor  inuhstantjvo  bmit**  tLd 
ftignificatioi)  of  the  fbiinor. 

KuLE  XIV  — Tbo  subjur.ctivo  mood  is  itf.^.)  In  d.t|>©n-  ' 
dent  clauses,  \rhon   liolb   oontin}.^onc\»    or   .!ri«il.i,   ui»d 
fqtHrit}',  are  expressed.  .^ 

Jivht,  XV.— Tbo  Inianitivc  mood  ia  governed  by  tcf'j, 
ic-QUHS,  or  ttdj^ctioes,  • 

Kci.K  XVL— Paniciples   bavc   the  cotistructiou   of 
B0U118,  adjeiitive!^,  and  verba. 

Rule  XVII.— In  the  use  of  verbs,  and  wordd  ihat  . 
in  point  of  time  relata  to  each  other,  the  order  of  timo 
m'ust  b©  observed. 

RuL^XVlIL— Adverbs  raodify  verls,  aJJ&  tices,  and 
otber  adverbs. 

EtJLS  XlX-^Conjooctlotis  connect  uorJs   or  itruiin- 

RutE  XX. — Interjactiona  have  no  gramsi'^atieal  con- 
nexion with  the  oth«r  words  in  a  uQutenQo. 


*!£?    ilcI^i'ZS  911 


SQfNmX — PARSlmj.     ^      -  ^»9*i 


In  every  senteiiRe,  tb€f."V\^cird^  em  ployed,  ar.d  the  or- 
der in  wliich  tlie}^  are  arranged,  slioukl  be  suc^  as 
clearly  and  properly, tq oxpress  tlie  idea  intended  ^and^ 
at  the  same  tioic>  all  the  parts  of  a  scntciK-e  should 
correspond,  and  a  regular  aad-depfJ4i4^nfecftn^f;u§itiou 
-be  preserved  tkroughout.     • .  '<f;Ji  imIa!  ^  &^\  X     .io 

EuLTi:  1. — An  ellipsis  or  omission  of  words,  id  admis- 
sible, when  they  can  be  supplied  b}^  the  mind  witli^STich 
tiertainty  and  readiness  as  not  to  obscure  the  sense;  as^ 

"Wo  walked  by  fait'j,  not  by  sight." 

Rule  2, — An  ellipsis  is  not  allowable  when  it  worald 
obscure  the  sentence,  weaken  its  force,  or  be  attended 
With  an  impropriety. 

SYNTACTIQj^L  PARSIIi^q^^  ^„  "  ^_^   ' 

651.  Syntactical  p.»rsing  inciudcB  eff/rnoUgih'piJj  «nd 
:adds  to  it  a  statement  of  the  relation  in  which  Wordii 
stand  to  each  othcr^  and  the  rules  accprdin^., to :. which 
they  are  combined  in  phrases  and  sentenc<is. 

Before  parsin-;  the  following  examples,   l©t  them  b«  corre««- 
•cd  in  all  cases  g;iving  the  role  violated  or  requiring  thecbange^ 
V  then  analyze  them  thoroughly  (403  &c.),  and  then  parse  thtai 
i  fully,  applying  and  repeating  the  rules  of  syntax, 

1. — 1.  Too  great  a  variety  oF  studies  perplex  and  w«ikentli» 
jadgment.  2.  I  called  to  see  you,  but  you  was  not  at  hoin«,— 
3.  To  act  with  caution,  but  with  steadiness,  and  vigor,  distin- 
guish the  manly  character.      4.  The    crown    of  virtu«  i»  peac« 

•  and  honor.     5.  In  the  hamarr. species,  the  influence   of  instinci* 

*  and  habit  are  generally  assigfed  by   the  suggestions  of  rea«#n. 
'  C.  The  train  of  our  ideas  are  often  interrupted.     7.  They  wero 

both  unfortunate,  but  neither  of  th.cm  were  to  blam§. 

2.— 1.  VVe  arrivfd  safely  at  our  journey's  «nd.  2.  TliEi  il» 
waiter  of  no   consequence    between  you  and  1.  3.  This  ihoiild 

I  «t happen  between  such   friands  as   him  and  me.     4.  Them 
.8 


1T#  BN^LISH    GRAMMAR. 

that  seek  knowledge  will  find  it.  5.  Such  aro  the  men  whom, 
wo  might  suppose,  know  better.  6.  Our  welfare  and  secnri:/ 
oonsists  in  unit/.  7.  The  love  of  virtue,  and  derotion  to  pleas- 
ure, is  opposed  to  each  other.  8.  No  oppressor  and  no  tyrant 
triumph  there.  9.  Eyery  le-^f,  every  twig,  every  drop  of  water, 
teem  with  life.     10.  AH  the  world  is  spectators  of  your  conduct. 

3. — 1.  Nothing  is  more  lovelier  than  virtue.  2  His  associ- 
ates in  wickedness  will  not  fail  to  mark  the  alterationof  his  con- 
«lact.  3.  He  is  taller  than  me,  but  I  am  stronger  than  hfm. — 
4.  Neither  riches  or  beauty  furnish  solid  peace  and  contentment. 
r>.  The  abuse  of  mercies  ripen  us  for  judgments.  G.  John,  WiK 
)iam,  and  Henry's  hats,  were  stolen  7.  A  man's  manners  fre- 
r,aently  influence  his  fortune,  S.  Much  depends  on  this  rule 
I'oing  observed.  9.  Such  will  ever  be  the  effect  of  youth  asso- 
ciating with  vicious  companions,  10.  Give  to  every  one  their 
Hue.  11.  It  has  been  fully  shown  that  neither  of  them  are  cor- 
rect. 12.  Every  bone,  every  muscle,  every  part  of  man,  are 
tknown  to  Him  which  made  him. 

4. — 1.  He  writes  tolerable  well.  2.  Three  monihs'  notice 
are  required  to  be  given  previous  to  a  pwpiTs  leaving  of  the 
sohool.  3.  That  rose  smells  sweetly.  4.  He  employed  acoth- 
rr  friend  of  his  father  to  assert  his  claim — (whose  claim  1)  5. 
'A  soul  inspired  with  the. love  of  truth  will  keep  all  his  powers 
iiitentive  tothe  pursuit  of  it.  C.  It  is  remarkable  his  continual 
endeavors  to  serve  us.  7.  It  is  the  duty  of  every  one  to.  becare- 
iu!  of  their  reputation.  8.  Whatever  antiquities  he  could  pro- 
.cure,  he  purchased  them  at  any  price,  9,  I  am  not  so  well  a» 
Avhen  you  was  here.  10.  It  is  three  days  yesterday,  since  you 
Have  promised  that  money.  11.  This  mode  of  expression  has 
l)cen  formerly  in  use.  12.  He  promised  long  ago,  that  he  had 
1.1 'ended  to  that  matter.  e3.  He  was  expected  to  have  arrived 
earlier. 

5. — 1.  Twice  threeare  six.  2.  Six  times  three  are  eighteen. 
3.  As  two  are  to  four,  so  are  six  to  twelve.  4.  Five  are  the 
half  of  ten.  5.  The  half  of  ten  are  five.  G.  Nine  are  not  an 
even  number.  7.  One  man  and  one  boy  is  sufficient.  8.  Two 
boys  is  equal  to  one  man.     9.    Two  boys  ore  less  than  t  r^f— 


SYNTAX— PABfliiNO*  171 

iViixe  arc  better  Uian  nothing.:  ,.10.  Two  i^  better  than  onc.-- 
il.  Two  are  an  even  number — three  are  rot.  12.  Two  are 
twice  one,  13,  Two^and*two  makes  four.  14.  Throe  fourths 
are  more  than  one  Iiaif.  15.  Five  n-.en  is  too  many  for  such  a 
j)ieoe  of  work— 'three  is  too  few.  IG.  Thre« shot  was  fired  with- 
out effect.  17.  Thefieet  consisted  of  six  sails.  18.  A  drove  of 
forty  heads  of  catthi  passed  along. 

6.— 1.  Molasses  are  thicker  than  water.  2.  The  mcaslcsare 
spreading  throup;h  the  <;ountry.  3.  Wheat  is  Ix^ing  sold  for  a 
dallar  a  bushel,  and  oats  is  in  demand.  4.  "fh-e  newg  by  the 
iast  arrival  is  better  than  we  expected.     5.   We   hoped  to  have 

*'-'heard  from  you  before  this.  G.  Do  yon  not  think  he  writes 
^good  "?  7.  The  wind  blows  coldly  from  th<!  nwth.  and  tlie  snow 
lies  deeply  on  tlio  ground.  8.  James  is  as  tall  if  not  taller  than 
'1  am. .  9.  lie  never  has  and  he  never  will  do  so  well.  10.  Ho 
"Whoever  said  so  was  mistaken.  11.  There  are  a  heroic  inno- 
cence as  well  as  a  heroic  -courage.  12.  He  puts  down  the  migh- 
ty and  exalteth  the  humble.  13,  Piety  toward  God,  os  well 
as  sobriety  and  virtue,  are  necessary  to  happiness. 

7. — 1.  Tak«  care  who  you  admit  into  your  friendsl)ip.  2.  I 
ifilways  understood  it  to  be  ho,  whom  they  said  wrote  that  book. 
3.  If  1  was  him.  I  v.-ould   take  more  care    for  the  future.     4. 

;  There  is  two  or  three  of  us  who  have  been  at  Europe  last  year. 
5.  We  were  in  Havre  when  ihe  revolution  broke  out  in  France. 
C.  1  have  been  to  Bost<;n  for  a  few  days,  and  spent  the  time 
very  pleasant.  7.  That  is  the  man  and  the  horse  which  wc 
met  before.  8.  George  was  the  most  enterprising  young  man 
whom  I  ever  knew.  9.  All  who  were  piresent  were  pleased 
with  the  entertainment. 

,  8.— 1.  This  excellent  person  w\as  fully  resigned  either  to 
have  lived  or  to  have  died.  2.  Between  be  and  I  there  is  somo 
disparity  of  years,  but  none  between  he  and  she.  3,  To  bo 
moderate  in  our  views,  and  proceeding  temperately  fnthe  pur^ 
suit  of  ihem,  is'ihc  best  way  lo  insure  success,  4,  Enjoying 
health,  and  to  live  in  peace,  are  great  blessings.  5.  Which 
dictionary  u/iyou -prefer,  Webster  or  Walker?     7.  Thoughthis 


IKfi  ENGfLISr     GRAMMAR. 

6vent  te  strange,  it  certainly  did  happen.  7  If  he  docs  but  con- 
sider the  subject,  he  uill  no  doubt  change  his  opinion  .8.  Igno*' 
ranee  is  the  mother  ot  fear,  as  tvell  as  admiration.  0.  Let  him 
he  whom  he  may,  I  can  not  \fart  for  him.  10.  Wo  have  no 
need  for  his  assistance.  II.  Among  every  class  of  people,  self- 
interest  prevails. 

9.— 1.  Many  have  profited  from  the  mislortunes  of  othe'rs.— 
Many  ridicul&as  customs  have  been  brought  in  use  during  the 
)inndred  last  years.  3-  Is  there  no  pe?st)n  who  you  can  send 
•  1  rl. at  business  1     4.  Little  attention  to  business  is  necessary, 

^•«);l  wou-ld  succeed.  5.  Truth  is  a  virtue  to  vt'hich  we  should 
>.;iy  littTe  regard.  6.  Without  firmness,  nolhing  that  is  great 
e^n  be  undertaken  ;  that  is  hazardous,  accomplished.  7.  That 
is  property  most  men  have,  or  at  least  may  attain.  6.  The 
pyramids  of  Egjpt  stood  more  than  three  thousand  ycar»«.  9. 
It  is  thought  they  have  been  built  by  the  Egyptian  kings.  10 
When  the  nation  complain,  the  rulers  should  listen  to  their 
Tojce.     11.  Whom  say  the  people  that  I  am  "^ 

10. --1.  They  that  honor  ine,  I  will  honor.  2.  He  only  got 
the  muney  for  a  few  days.  3.  He  was  mistaken  evidently  in  his 
calculations.  4.  No  man  is  fit  for  free  conversation,  for  the  in- 
quiry after  truth,  if  be  be  exceedingly  reserved,  if  he  he  haugh- 
ty and  proud  of  his  knowledge  :  if  he  be  positive  and  dogmatic* 
al  in  his  opinions;  if  he  be  one  who  always  affects  to  outshine 
all  the  company ;  if  he  be  fretful  and  peevish  ;  if  ho  affect  wit, 
and  IS  full  of  puns,  or  quirks,  or  quibbles.  5.  A  good  end  does 
not  vrarrant  the  using  bad  means.  6,  A  good  end  does  not  war- 
rant using  of  bad  means.  7.  Humility  neither  seeks  the  last 
place,  or  the  last  word.  8.  Either  wealth  or  power  may  '  rain 
their  possessor.  9.  Avoid  lightness  and  frivolity;  it  is  allied  to 
lolly  10.  Do  you  know  who  you  are  talking  to?  11,  Atfc 
thou  the  man  who  hast  dared  to  insult  me  *?  12,  Oh  that  the 
winter  was  gone. 

11.— 1.  We  are  often  disappointed  of  things  which,  before 
possession,  promised  much  enjoyment.  2.  We  can  fully  con- 
fide on  no  one  but  the  truly  good.  3.  You  may  rely  in  that.— 
4.  The  Saxons  reduced  the  greater  part  ofBritain  to  their  poi^ 


f  ^ 


PUNCTUATION.  173 

er.  5,  He  was  accused  with  acting  unfairly,  nt  least  in  a  man- 
ner ill  adapted  <or  conciliating  regard.  6.  If  there  was  better 
oaanagement,  there  would  be  greater  eccurity.  7.  The  ship 
Panama  is  early  expected  from  Canton  in  the  spring.  8.  Every 
year,  every  day,  ev<jry  honr,  bring  their  change.  9.  Whom 
say  ye  that  f  am  ? 

12. — 1.  Many  a  youth  have  ruined  their  prospects  for  life  by 
one  imprudent  step  2  N<j  power  wii-s  ever  yet  intru'sted  lo 
man  without  a  liability  to  tibuse.  S.  A  conceited  fool  is  more 
abominable  than  all  fooK  4.  My  gravity  never  did  no  one  any 
harm.  5  A  constant  display  of  graces  are  fatigueing  to  a  so- 
ber mind.  G,  These  coins  of  compliments  and  flattery  circulate 
everywhere  in  society:  the  true  is  of  gold,  the  base  is  of  brass* 
7  Expectation  and  reality  makes  up  the  sum  <;ot4il  of  life.  8. 
Music,  the  love  of  it,  and  the  practice  of  ib,  seems  to  pervade  nil 
creation.  9.  All  soils  are  not  adapted  for  cultivation  10.  The 
vain  abhors  tlie  vain.  11.  The  author  dreads  the  critic  ;  the 
miser  dreads  th«  thief,  the  criminal  dreads  the  judge,  the  horse 
<lreads  the  whip,  and  iho  lamb  dreads  the  wolf — all  after  their 
kind.  13.  The  intellectual  and  moral  censor  both  have  thesacne 
ends  in  view. 

13. — 1.  1  was  engaged  fcwiaaerly  in  that  business,  but  I  never 
«hall  be  again  concerned  in  it.  2.  We  do  those  things  fre*» 
quently  which  wo  repent  of  afterward.  3.  Not  to  exas;  erate 
him,  I  only  spoke  a  few  words.  4.  Shall  you  attain  success 
without  that  preparation,  and  escape  dangers  without  that  pre- 
caution which  is  required  of  others?. 


PUNCTUATION". 

652.  Punctuation  treats  of  the  points  and  marks 
now  used  in  writing. 

(553.  The  use  of  these  points  is  to  mark  the  division  of  asenteii«e 
in 'order  to  show  the  meaning  more  clearly,  and  to  serve  as  ag.uide 
in  iiua  pauses  and  inflecticns  required  in  readiug. 


174  ENGLISH  ORAMMAK. 

654,  The  pvincipftlrtiarks  used  far  this'ptJt^ose  are  ttic' folio  win  jr, 
the  comma  (,),  iha  s(m'.colcn  (•),  the  eoJen  {'.),  Xha  pdriod  { .),  th» 
note  of  inierroffdd'cn  (  ?  ),  the  note  ofcxtlawiftfioti  { ! ),  the  da^h  ■  (— ) 
the  parenthesis  (  ),  the  hrOcItets  [  ]. 

655-  With  respect  to  the  length  of  the  pauses  indicated  by  these 
marks,  no  very  definite  rule  can  be  given — the  same  point  iueer- 
tain  kinds  ofcomposition,  and  in  certain  poaittons,  requiring  some- 
times a  longer  and  sometimes  a  shorter  pause. 

G{)0.  As  a  general  rule,  tlie  co^lma  marks  the  shortest  pause  ^ 
the  semicolon,  a  pause  double  that  of  the  comma  ;.  the  .colon,  a 
pause  double  that  of  the  semicolon  f  and  the  period,  a  pause  still 
loBger  than  that  of  the  colon. 

Kemauk.  The  system  of  punctuation  uowused  in  English,  is  com- 
mon to  neatly  all  the  modern  languages,  and  also  to  the  be§t  editions 
•f  Latin  and  Greek.  The  chief  design  is  to  m^rk  the  divisions  and 
clauses  ©f  a  sentence,  and  indicate  their  relations  both  of  scnee  and 
of  construction.  Without  a  knowledge  of  the  system,  it  is  impossi 
ble  either  fi>r  the  writer  to  eonvey  his  own  meaning  with  certainty, 
"♦y'for  the  reader  accurately  to  comprehend  what  iS  written  by  anoth 
'  ■■'.  A  goad  knowledge  of  punctuation  is  absolutely  essoctial  in  trana-i 
1  .ting  Latin  and  Greek- 

COMMA. 

657.  KuLE  1. — In  a  s-lio:t,  simple  piopositiou  tlie  comm,a  is 
not  used. 

When  the  subject  or  a  transitive  or  descriptive  predicate  i^  fol 
lowed  by  an  adjunct,  the  adjunct  should  be  separated  by  commas. 

NoTK.  When  a  short  adjunct  follows  the  subject,  only  one  comma  is 
used,  and  that  is  placed  before  the  verb. 

EXERCISES. 

The  Lord  is  good  to  his  people.  The  young  often  ruin 
themselves.  Tho  way  of  the  transgressor  is  hard.  The 
punishment  of  the  reckless  disturher  of  ?03iety  tends  to  se- 
cure peace.  The  want  of  some  pursuit  to  occupy  rpw  time 
is  often  productive  (;-f  lasting  evil.      The   inte'mix'ivc  oi 


^' 'Tt/NOttTATlON.  175 

fcvil  into^Qcietv'  seems  to  exercise  the  noblest  virtues  oflhe 
suul.  A  steely  and  undivided  attention  to  one  purttiit 
commonly  gives  success.  Indifference  to  the  ordinary  pur- 
suits of  life  is  indicative  of  a  defective  judgment.  The  voice 
of  reason  and  mercy  prevailed  over  strong  passion  and  re- 
venge. The  belief  that  God  is  merciful  affords  us  relief  in 
time  of  distress  and  trouble.  Propriety  of  conduct  and  un- 
divided allention  to  your  profession  will  make  you  popular 
and  esteemed.  The  son  and  daughter  of  the  emigrant  per- 
isfied  in  the  conflagration. 

C58, — RuLB  2.  In  compound  sentences,  the  clauses  amd 
members  aro  usually  separated  by  coniDftas  :  but  when  tbo 
clauses  are  short  the  comma  is  not  used. 

Dependent  propositions,  usually  introduced  by  if^  though,  izeeft^ 
tcAm,&c.  must  be  separated  by  commas.        \  »^>^ 

EXAMPLES.  "'•TT 

We  som'itimes  forget  our  faults  wlien  we  are  not  remind- 
ed of  them.  Virtue^supports  in  adversity  and  moderates 
in  prosperity.  Your  patron  though  he  might  have  had  large 
possessions  was  poor  and  in  gicat  want.  The  principlei 
that  had  been  instilled  in  his  mind  in  boyhood  influenced  the 
whole  conduct  of  his  life.  Revelation  teaches  us  how.  we 
may  attain  happiness  both  here  and    hereafter.      Love,  not 

*^',  *leep  lesfc  you  come  td  poverty.  ?^ensuality  cent aminatei  the 
body  depresses  the  understanding  deadens  the  moral  feel- 
ings and  degrades  man  from  hisrank  in  cieaticn.     The  path 

«  \of  piety  and  virlue  pursued  with  a  firm  and    constant  spirit 

^oewilllead  to  honor.      James  would  have  gone  with  yqu.to 

fcsT.the  fair  if  you  had  iuvited  him. 

G59. — Rule  3.  Two  words  of  the  »ame  class,  connected 
by  a  conjunction  expressed^,  do  not  admit  a  comma  between 

jjyg  them.  Wi!ei;i  t^e  coTij unction  is  not  expressed,  a  comma 
^is  inseirted,,^  ^^  ^^^^  . ;  '  ,      ' 


<^IT5  ENGLISH  ORAMMAJt. 

r^      NoTx.  If  the  coBnected  words  hava    adjuncts,  a  comma  may  be  in- 
,  isfted.     Two  w«rds  making  a  compound  name  do  not  ta^e  a  comma' 

EXAMPLES. 

6).'.. 

-0     A  man  of  integrity  and  honor  may  be  trusted.     The  great 
:  41<J  oak  has  fallen.     Long  and    doubtful    was  the   conflict. 
-i.A  mind  of  great  acculene^s  and  a  heart  of  the  noblest  impul- 
A  $es  were  conspicuous  in  Henry  Clay.  Lend  lend  your  wings 
-  J  mount  I  fly.     Sir  Waller  Scott  copied  his  scenes  from  na- 
ture.    Victory  in  life  triumph  in  death  are  visions  of  faith, 
ij.f    660, — Rule  4.  More  than    two   words   of  the  tame  class 
f;  connected  by  conjunctions  exj^ressed  or  understood,  have  a 
comma  after  each  ;  but  when  the  words  connected  are^ad- 
jective.%  the  last^should  not  be  separated  from  its  noun. 

631.  KuLE  5.  Words  used  in  pairs,take  a  comma  after  each 
pa'F. 

''"  IXAMPLEi.' 

•-'  'Industry  honesty  and  temperance  are  consideied  cardi- 
nal virtues*  Wilt  thou  love  honor  serve  and  keep  her?— 
o  -She  is  neither  handsome  talented  nor  agreet'.ble.  Truth  \% 
''■  hit  and  artless  simple  and  secure  uniform  and  consistent. — 
^he  old  and  the  young  the  grave  and  the  gay  the  rich  and 
f  the  poor  are  alike  ohjects  of  Divine  mercy,  That  lady  is 
-I  .ol>«autiful  modest  unaffected  and  lovely.  Ihat  large  florid 
d  >  ^mpous  man  is  a  tyrant. 

^  662, — RuLB  6.  Nouns  in  apposition  are  separated  by  a 
fomma,  when  the  latter  noun  has  words  or  adjuncts  connect- 
«d  irith  iti  but  a  simple  noun  in  apposition  is  not  separated 
by  a  comma. 

663. — EiLn  7.    The  ncntinative   independent,    and   the 
nominative  absolute,  with  the  M-eMs  dependent  otithem,are 
cparatcd  by  commas  from  the  rest  of  the  sentence. 


I'uNCTu  ATioir .  177 

^Q^. — KuL-E  8..  Comparative  and  antithetical  clause:  !":•> 
separated  by  commas 

EXAMPLES, 

Herscbel  th«  greatest  astronomer  of  bis  time  discovcredi 
Uranus.  Paul  the  apostle  sufiered  martyrdom.  Ilen-ry 
bring  me  some  water.  Continue  my  son  to  w^lk  in  I  be  path 
of  Virtue.  I  remain  sir  your  obedient  lervant.  Sbame  be- 
i'lg  lost  ruin  is  inevitable.  Deft ated  and  forsaken  Le  abJJ- 
catcdtbe  throne.  The  Lord  the  preserver  of  his  people  is 
graci'^us  to  all.  My  son  give  mc  thy  heart.  Youth  wasted 
middle  age will  be  miscrbale.  Though  deep  j-^t  clear  tbougk 
gentle  yet  not  dull. 

665. — KuirE  9.  Adverbs,  adverbial  plirascs,  and  conjuunc' 
tions  used  as  adverbs,  wlien  they  modify  a  whole  clause  and 
not  any  particular  word,  and  especially  at  the  beginning  of 
a  sentence,  should  be  separated  by  commas;  \iz.,  nai/,  so, 
hence,  again ^  secondly^  moreover^  consequently^  hoicever,  in- 
deed, d^'C. 

CG6. — Rule  10.  A  relative  with  its  cl  use  should  be  separa* 
ted  from  the  rest  of  the  sentence. 

667. — Rule  11.  That,  used  as  a  conjunction,  and  prece* 
ded  by  another  clause,  has  a  comma  before  it. 

Examples. 

i  proceed  thirdly  to  give  my  reasons.  I  saw  tlie  man  who 
did  me  that  great  favor.  He  came  to  town  that  he  might 
meet  his  friend.  Such  undoubtedly  is  my  inteniion.  The 
trees  which  he  planted  are  dead.  Well  do  that  and  I  am 
content.  Attend  first  to  your  du'y  that  you  may  be  entitled 
to  pleasiire.  Moreover  the  dogs  came  and  licked  his  sores. 
I  said  so  consequently  I  must  abide  the  issue.  The  m;  n  wh© 
made  that  application  is  sometimes  in  great  d;str©<s 


17S  EHQLISil    GRAxMMAK. 

668. — Eui.E  12.  When  a  verb  is  understood,  a  coniitfa 
must  be  inserted. 

.669. — UuLE  lo.  Words  repaated  arc  separated  by  a  com 
ma. 

^;70  — KuLB  14  Invented  leniences  generally  require  a 
coiivimato  separate  the  part  inverted. 

G7l. — EuLE  15.  A  short    expression   in   the  manner  of  a.> 
fj^uotation  is  separated  by  commas  ;    also  the  words  my,  re- 
ply and  similar  expressions,    introducing  a  quotation  or  re- 
mark, arv».  separated  by  commas. 

EXAMPi-LS, 

Ypu  succeed  by  flattery  ]  I  by  meiit.  Holy  holy  holy  is- 
the  Lord  Almighty.  Yerily  vt  rily  I  say  unto  you.  Ta 
avoid  his  debts  he  left  the  country.  T^e  book  of  nature; 
said  he  is  open  before  thee.  In  the  midst  of  ihe  debate  he 
replied  that  the  hour  had  come.  Homer  leads  us  by  power 
Virgil  by  attraction.     In  hope  of  victory  I  prepare. 

()T2. — EuLE  16.  Adjectives^  participles,  adverbs,  infini- 
tives, conjunctions,  and  prepositions  with  their  cases,  when- 
separated  from  the  w'ord  on  which  they  depend,  or  when  ac- 
companied by  several  explanatory  Avards,  must,  uith  the 
words  dependant  upon  them,  be  separated  from  the  rest  of 
the  sentence  by  commas. 

673. — EuLE  17.  VV  hen  a  sentence  or  an  infinitive  is  the 
subject  of  the  verb,  and  the  verb  stands  after  it,  the  verb 
must  have  a  comma  b'  fore  it. 

674. — EuLE  18,  When  the  subject  of  the  verb  consists  of 
many  words,  a  comma  should  be  placed  before  the. verb. 

675. — EuLE  19.  Except  dates,  figures  consisting  of  four 
or  more  characters,  must  have  a  comma  before  eve-y  three 
from  the  end. 


i^Ui^CTUATlON.  1^9 

676.  Rule  20.  When  no  rule  applies,  the  Gomnia  must  nofe 

*  be  used. 

EXAMPLES. 

A  man  desirous  of  military  fame  will  generally  aot  brave* 
ly,  Murat  with  all  his  military  grdatnesi  was  fond  of  gau- 
dy dress-  To  win  her  esteem  is  the  object  of  my  life. — 
Length  of  days  success  in  life  a'.id  glorious  peace  are  the 
jfruits  of  virtue.  To  save  my  countiy  1  would  give  and  dare 
all.  The  old  man  leaning  serenely  upon  his  staff  seemed" 
happy  in  his  poverty.  I  saw  the  senator  but  in  a  room  so 
crowded  I  could  not  approach  him.  The  population  of  Chi- 
na is  148897000  ;  Corea  8463000.  The  old  general  gate 
all  his  vast  wealth  to  his  grand-soa. 

QUESW[ON«. 

What  is  the  rule  for  a  8im{>l©  proposition?  For  a  compound 
proposition?  For  dependent  propositions  ?  Two  or  more  words 
of  the  sacie  class?  When  are  words  of  the  same  class  ?  Thtralc 
for- words  in  pairs  ?  What  is  meant  by  pairs?  The  rule  fertieUDB 
in  apposition?  The  nominative  independent?  Absolute  ?  How 
will  you  know  when  nouns  arc  independent,  absolute  ©r  In  appo- 
sition ?  The  rule  for  antithetical  clauses  ?  Make  such  a  tlaiit. 
The  rule  tor  adverbs,  conjunctions,  &c.  ?  When  is  a  eonjunctiaa 
nsed  adverbially?  The  rule  for  the  relative?  What  if  the  rela* 
tive  is  compound  ?  The  rule  for  that  ?  The  rule  whem  the  verk  i* 
understood  ?  For  w«rds  repeated  ?  The  rule  for  inverted  seBt««- 
ces?  Make  such  a  sentence.  Tfee  rule  for  quotations,  &e.?  Gi^ 
tke  rule  for  adjeetives,  participles,  &c.,  and  naake  a  sentenetfor 
each,  shewing  the  application.  When  a  sentence  or  infiailir»ic 
the|8ubject?  Give  an  example  of  each.  The  rule  for  figurei  ?-i^ 
What  is  the  chief  use  of  pnnctuation  ?  What  languagea  h&T«  Xh^ 
game  system? 

SEMICOLON.  ' 

677.  The  aemicolon  is  used  to  saparate  the  parts  of  a  sentience 


ISO  ENGLISH    GILLMJlAb. 

which  are  l(ss  closely  connected  than  those  which  are  separated  bjr 
a  eomma,  and  more  closclj  than  those  which  are  separated  bj  the 
ettlon. 

GENERAL  RULE. 

Th«  parts  of  a  sentence  sjeparated  by  the  semicolon,  shouU 
f^ntainin  themselves  a  complete  and  independent  proposition,  but 
•till  having  a  connexion  with  the  other  parts. 

SPECIAL  RULES. 

♦78.  Rule  1. — When  the  first  division  ofa  sentence  contains  a  coDi- 
pi«t«ptopositIoY»,  but  is  followed  by  a  clause  added  a9  an  inferone* 
•r  reason,  or  to  give  some  explanation^  the  part  t'lus  added  mast  be 
separated  by  a  semieolon;  as,  "Perform  your  duty  faithfully;  f©r 
tkii  will  procure  you  tho  blessing  of  Heaven." 

$f9.  RuL*  2. — When  several  short  sentences,  complete  in  tkem- 
selrei,  but  having  a  slight  oonnexion  in  idea,  follow  in]  suoeessioB, 
iJk»j  should  be  separated  by  a  semioolon ;  as,  "Ike  epic  peem  recites 
tk«  exploits  of  a  hero  ;  tragedy  represents  a  disastrous  event;  com- 
edy ridionles  the  vices  and  follies  of  mankind  ;  pastoral  poetry  de- 
««ribe8  rmral  life;  and  ele^y  displays  the  tender  emetions  fcif  tbo» 
keart.' 

$99.  Bulb  8  — When  a  sentence  consists  of  several  members,  ao4 
thweBiembers  are  complex,  and  subdivided  by  eomas,  the  larger  dlr 
ritieas  of  the  sentenoe  are  gometlmea  separated  by  a  semicolon;  a^ 
**  As  the  de«ire  of  approbation,  whan  it  werks  according  to  reason, 
improres  the  amiab'o  part  of  our  species  in  every  thing  that  is  lau- 
d»kl«;  8<»  nothing  is  more  destructive  to  them,  when  it  is  governed 
Vf  ramiiy  and  folly." 

Ml.  EuLE  4. — When  a  generkl  term  has  several  others,  as  partie- 
vlftTS,  in  apposition  under  it,  the  general  term  is  separated  from  th« 
partiealars  by  a  semicolon,  and  the  particulars,  from  each  ether  by 
••mmas ;  an,  '^  Adjectire  pronouns  are  divided  into  four  classes  j 
pvisessive,  demonstrative,  distributive,  and  iadefinite."  Bi^t  if  the 
word  namely  be  introduced,  the  separation  is  made  by  a  comma  only. 

COLON. 

682.  The  colon  is  used  to  divide  a  sentence  in  two  or  more  parts, 
less  connected  than  those  which  are  separated  by  a  semicolon  but 
Bfi^j^independent  as  to  require  a  period. 


Punctuation.  1^1 


SPECIAL  RULES. 

683.  Rule  1  — A  c^lon  is  used  when  a  seutence  is  complete  in  it- 
ielf,  in  both  sense  and  construction,  but  is  followed  by  eome  addi- 
tional remark  or  illustration,  depending  upon  it  in  sense,  though  not 
in  Syntax;  as,  "A  brute  arrives  at  a  point  of  perfection  that  he  can 
never  pass  :  in  a  few  yoars  he  hasall  the  endowments  of  which  he  is 
bftpable." 

684.  Rule  2. — When  several  short  sentences  follow  in  EuccestioDi 
each  containing  a  complete  fensq  in  itself,  but  all  having  a  common 
dependence  on  somt  enhscqueyit  clause;  these  sentences  are  separated 
from  the  subsequent  clause  by  a  colon,  and  from  each  other  by  a 
ifemicolcn  ;  as,  "  That  Nature  is  unlimited  in  her  operations;  that 
ehe  h  1.8  inexhaubtible  resources  in  reserve  ;  that  knowledge  will  al- 
ways be  progressive;  and  that  all  future  generations  will  continue  to 
make  discoveries  :  these  are  among  the  assertions  of  philosophers.'* 

•85.  Rule  3. — Either  a  colon  or  semicolon  may  be  used  when  ail 
example,  a  quotation,  or  a  speech,  is  introduced;  as,  "  Always  re- 
member this  ancient  maxim;  'Know  thyself/" — "The  Scriptures 
give  us  an  amiable  representation  of  the  Deity  in  these  words  :  *Qod 
Is  loVe/  ** 

686.  Rule  4. — The  insertion  or  omission  of  a  conjunction  before 
the  concluding  member  of  a  sentence,  frequently  determines  the  use 
of  the  colon  or  semicolon.  When  the  conjunction  is  not  expreesed 
befere  the  concluding  member  which  would  otherwise  be  separated 
by  a  semicolon,  the  colon  is  used  ;  but  when  the  conjunction  is  ex- 
prafised,  the  semicolon;  as,  "Apply  jourself  to  learning:  it  will 
redout  d  to  your  honor." — "  Apply  yourself  to  learning;  for  it  will 
redound  to  your  honor." 

PERIOD. 

68?.  Sentences  which  ate  complete  in  sense,  and  not  connected 
in  either  meaning  or  grammatical  construction,  are  separated  by  a 
period;  thus,  •'  I^ear  God.     Honor  the  king.     Have  charity  toward 

ail  men." 

688.  But  when  short  sentences  are  connected  in  meaning,  but  not 
in  construction,  they  are  sepaTated  by  a  semicol»n. 

689.  Long  sentences,  if  com])lote,  even  though  grammatically  coa- 
nfectcd  by  conjunctions,  often  insert  a  period  ;  thus,  "  He  wke 
lifts  up  himself  to  the  notice  and  observation  of  the  world,  is,  of  all 
men,  the  least  likely  to  avoid  censure.  F«r  b«  draws  upon  bisrs*!!  a 
thousand fyes,  th^it  will  narrowly  inspect  bim  .•  every  part." 


iSi  ENGLtSU   GRAMMAR. 

690.  A  period  uiust  bo  used  at  the  end  of  all  books,  chapter*,  let- 
lions,  Ac;  aUo  after  all  abbreviations;  as,  A  D  ,  M.  A,  Art.  II», 
Obs.  3.,  J.  Smith,  Ac. 

INTERUOOATION. 

C91.  A  question  is  regar^led  as  a  complete  sentence,  and  the  otark 
of  ia'er'-ogatJon  as  ciual  to  a  period. 

692.  The  interrogation  is  always  put  at  the  end  of  Adrect  question} 
as,  *'  What  is  truth  ?"  But  the  indirect  question  do*s  not  require  the 
interrogation  ;  as,  "  Pilate  inquired  what  is  truth.'* 

OTHER    CHARACTERS    USED    IN    WRITING; 

693.  lihe  Dash  ( — )  is  used  where  the  sentence  breaVs  off  abruptly  | 
also^  to  denote  a  significant  pause— ah  uue:^pected  turn  in  the  senil- 
tnSnt — or  that  the  first  clause  is  common  to  all  the  reet,  as  in  thif 
definition. 

694.  The  Exolamation  (1)  is  used  after  expressions  of  sadden  emo- 
tion of  any  kind;  also,  in  invocations  or  addresses;  as,  ** Eternity  I 
thou  pl'asing,  dreadful  thought"  Ok  has  the  mark  immediately 
after  it,  or  aft^r  the  next  word  ;  as,  "  Oh  !  that  he  Would  come."  Bat 
when  0  is  used,  the  point  is  placed  t  fter  some  intervening  words  j 
as,  "0  njy  friends!" 

695.  Parentheses  ( )  include  a  clause  insertsd  in  the  body  of  a  ien» 
tence,  in  order  to  convey  some  itseful  or  necessary  information  or  re- 
mark,  but  which  may  be  omitted  without  ii^juring  the  construction  of 
the  sentence  ;  »s,  "  Know  ye  not,  brethren  (for  I  speak  to  them  that 
know  the  law,)  bow  that  the  law  hath  domi  .ion  over  a  man  as  long 
as  he  liveth."  In  reading,  the  parenthetic  part  is  distinguished  by 
a  lower  or  altered  tone  of  voice. 

The  use  of  parentheses  should  be  avoided  as  much  as  possiWe  ^jj^l 

696.  Brackets  []  are  properly  used  to  enclose  a  word  or  phrase  in* 
tCTpolatcd  tor  the  purpose  of  explanation,  correction,  or  supplying  a 
deficiency  in  a  sentence  quoted  or  regarded  as  such,  f  nd  which  did 
not  belong  to  th«  original  cotnpcsition  ;  thus,  It  is  said,  '*  The  wiieat 
men  [and,  it  mijht  be  added,  the  bast  too]  are  not  exempt  from  hu- 
man fraiUy." 

697.  The  Apostrophe  (')  is  used  When  a  letter  ot  letters  are  omiUed  J 
as,  e'tr  for  ever,  tho'  for  though;  or  to  mark  the  possessive  caio. 

698.  Q  lotatton  marks  (*  ")  are  put  at  tho  boginaing  and  en4  of  .a 
passage  qaotei  from  an  author  ia  his  own  worde>  or  to  aark  a  pal- 
age  regarded  as  a  quotation. 


I 


ftlKcTUATlOX.  18^ 

^99.  Tao  Hiji^hen  (-)  is  used  to  connect  eompound  words  which  afd 
h.f>i permanent  compounds,  as,  lap-dog;  aloo  at  the  end  of  a  line  to 
shotv  that  the  rest  of  the  word  tot  completed,  is  at  the  beginning  of 
the  next  lino. 

700.  Section  (^)  is  used  to  divide  a  discourno  or  chapter  into  por- 
tions. 

701  Paragraph  (^)  w^iS  fo-uierly  use  i  t-^  denote  the  beginning  cf  a 
new  parn>rrapb. 

70  .  The  2?race  ( — -— >)  is  used  to  conneefc  T^ords  whi)h  have  one 
comm'U  term,  "rtlirce  lines  in  poetry  h-ving  the  same  rhyme,  called 

a    Ir'ph't. 

703.  EUpxis  ( )  is    ust  d    wLeu    soiu^    lettc-ra    s'.ro    otfiiUcd  ;  ag 

K g  for  King..     Soveral  aster'sks  Ae  somctimeB  us'/d  for  tho  same 

purpose;  a:? . A''**^/ 

704.  The  Card  (A)  is  usod  'o  show  that  some  word  is  either  omit-" 
ted  or  interlined. 

705.  The  Index  {^^'^)  is  used  to  point  out  anything  remarkable. 
7P6.  The  vowel-marks  are:  Th-^  Diceresia    (..)  oa    the  last   of  t\^o 

concurrent  vowels,  showing  that  they  aru  not  to  bo  pronounced  as  a 
d3pth'-»n|?;  the  Acute  acc-rM  {')  ;  the  Grave  {') ;  the  Long  sound  (-) 
the  Short  soan<l  ("). 

707.  The  marrs  of  refere-^co  arc  :  The  A^terink  (*)  ;  the  Obelisk  ;  or 
Dagger  {-f)  ;  the  Doubcl  Dagger  {%)  ;  the  Parallels  {\).  Sometimes*,- 
aU-o,  the  §  and  ^i-  Als  »,  sma  1  letters  or  figu:es  whicli  refer  t»  notes 
at  th«  foot  of  !he  page. 

QUESTIONS. 

What  is  tl  e  U33  of  the  'Semicolon  ?  What  is  the  general  rule  ? 
How  many  sj^^Jial  rules.'  Recite  each  of  them  ?  Make  an  exam- 
ple for  each  rule.  For  what  is  the  Colon  used  .'  Give  each  of  the 
rules.  Make  an  example  for  each.  When  is  the  period  used  ? 
Give  the  rules.  Give  the  rules  for  the  use  of  Ihe  Interrogation. 
The  Dash.  The  Exclama'ion.  Parentheses.  Brackets.  Apostro- 
phe. Quotation  marks.  The  hyphen.  The  Section.  The  para- 
graph. The  I3race.  Ellipsis.  The  Caret.  The  Index.  Name  the 
marks  of  reff  rence. 


184  ENOWSn  GRAi^mAlt. 

PART  IV. 

TROSODY. 

^08.  Prosody  treats  of  the  laws  ot  versiiication.  I'he  udag'^ 
of  grammarians  is  very  irregular,  as  to  what  things  ought  to  be 
embraced  under  this  head.     We  sliall  limit  it  to  versificatrdn. 

709.  A  Verse  is  a  certain  number  of  accented  and  unaccented 
syllables,  constituting  a  line  of  poelry. 

710.  A  Couplet  or  Distech  consists  of  two  lines.  A  Triplet  con- 
sists of  three  lines  rhyming  together. 

711.  A  Stanza  is  a  combination  of  several  vcrses,  variable  in 
number,  making  a  regular  division  of  a  poem  or  song.  . 

712.  Rhyme  is  similarity  of  sound  between  the  last  syllables  of 
different  verses. 

713.  Blank  Verse  is  poetry  that  does  not  rhynie. 

714.  Feet  aie  regular  portions  into  which  a  verse  is  divided, 
each  feet  having  two  or  more  syllables. 

Every  accented  syllable  is  long,  and  evory  unaccented  syllable 
is  short.  Monosyllables,  when  alCne,  are  regarded  as  without  ac- 
cent, and  may  generally  be  long  or  short  at  the  option  of  the  poet. 

715.  Metre  OR  Measurb  is  the  arranjrement  of  a  certain  nVim- 
ber  of   specified  feet  in  a   verse,  and   certain   verses   in  a   stanza. 

When  a  verse  is  complete  it  is  called  Acatalcctic  ;  when  deficient,  it 
is  Calaleclic;  when  it  has  more  than  the  proper   quantity,  it  is  Hi/' . 
percaleciic, 

716.  A  verse  of  one  foot,  is  called  monojneter ;  of  two,  dimeter  ;  of 
three,  trimeter;  of  four,  tetrameter;  of  ^vt, pentameter ;  of  six,  Aex- 
ameter  ;  'Of  seven,  heptamcter. 

717.  Scanning  is  dividing  a  verse  into  the  feet  of  which  it  is 
composed. 

718.  All  feet  in  poetry  are  reducible  to  eight  kinds  ;  fouv  ot  two 
syllables,  and  four  ot  three. 

719.  A  Trachae  has  tho  first  syllable  accented,  and  the  last  unaC- 
oeutdd,  as,  nolle,  music. 

720  Ah  Iambus  has  the  first  syllable  unaccented,  and  the  last  ac^ 
'cented  j  as,  adore,  defend. 

721,  A  Spondee  has  both  the  words  or  syllables  accented,-  as,  vain 
mmn. 

722.  A  P^rtKie  has  both  the  wcrds  c*  syllables  unaoeented;  as,  "wt 


PROSODY.  I'Sf) 

723.  Ji Dactyl  has  tha  first  syllable  acoentad,  aui  the  list  two  ub- 
aaceoted  ;  as,  virtuous. 

724.  An  Amphibrach  has  the  first  and  the  last  syllable  unacoented, 
and  the  midd'e  one  accented  ;  as,  contentment. 

725.  An  Anapoest  has  the  two  first  syllables  unaccented,  and  the  last 
accented  ;  as,  intercede. 

726.  A  Tr ih raah  ha.3  all  its  syllables  unaccounied;  as,  num—era- 
lle. 

727.  Of  all  these,  the  principal  are  the  lamhns.  Trochee,  Anapszeat, 
and  Dactyl.  The  other  four  feet  are  used  chiefly  in  connection  with 
these,  in  order  to  give  variety  to  the  measure. 

728.  A  verse  is  usually  named  from  the  name  of  the  foot  which 
predominates  in  it,  thus.  Iambic,  Trochaic,  iC',. 

1.      IAMBIC    VERSES. 

729.  An  inambic  verse  consist?  of  iambuses,  and  consequently  has 
the  accent  on  the  second,  fonrth,  sixth,  &c.,  syllable.  It  has  diffier- 
eut  metres,  as  follows  : 

1.  One  foot,  OV  Monometer  ;  as —  » 

'Xis  sweet 
To  meet. 

2.  Two  feet,  or  Diemeter  ;  as — 

With  thee  |  we  rise, 
With  thee  |  we  reign. 
t.    Thre« feet,  or   Trimeter;   as—* 
In  pla  I  ces  far  |  or  rear, 
Or  fa  I  mous  or  |  obscaro. 

4.  Four  feet,  or  Tetrameter  ;   as 

How  sleep     theb'ave,     who  sink     te  rest. 
By  all     their  conn     try's  wish     es  blest 

5.  Five  feet,  or  Pentameter  ;  as 

For  me    your  trib     uta    ry  stores     combine ; 
Crea     lion's  heir,     the  world,     the  world     is  mine. 

6.  Six  feet,  or  Hexameter  ;  as 

His  heart     is  sad,     his  hope     is  gone,     his  light    is   passed 
He  sits     and  mourns,     in  si    lent  grief,     the  ling'     ring   day 

7.  Seven  feet,  or  Heptameier  /  thns 

When  all     tby  mer    cies,   0     my  God,     my  ris     ing   soul     surveys. 
Transported  with  tto  view  I'm  lost,  in  won  der,  love  and  praise. 

730,  Each  of  these  kinds  of  iambic  verse    may  have  an  additional 
ihort  syllable,  and  so  be  called  i a i}iZ»('c  hi/perrheter^,  thus 

1.  Disdain     ing. 

2.  Upon     a  moun     tain. 

3.  \Vhenon     her  Ma    kei'd  bo     som,  Jl«. 


186  ElfGLISii    GRAMMAR. 

73  L  It  often  happens  that  a  trochee,  or  sr.tnetimes  a  spondee,  is 
ailmi't-d  in  plar'c  of  the  first  f-iot.  whic>»  gj'von  a-p'riaelttg  yariety  to 
the  A'prse;' as        ''       ^    '-"'■  •!'.•!•;     •  •' 

Planets     and  suns     run  law     less  thmugh     the  sky, 
Fierce,  hard     y,  proud     in  con     scions  free     dom  bold. 
7.32.  Itxmhic  rentametcr. — Iambic  ve^se  of  five  feet  is  called  Heroic 
verse.     S'uch  is  Miltf^n*^s  "Paraclise  Lost,"  <fec.     By  the  admission  of 
tr.^chees,  anapass's,  &c  ,  in  certain  places,  it  is    capable  of  mary  va- 
rities. 

733.  Tamhic  Hexameter. — A  verse  of  sItc  feet  is  called    Alexandrine, 
734-.  The  Elec/iac  stanza  consists  of  fyur  p:;ntameter  lines  rhyming 
alterdately  •  as 

The  cur     few  tolls     the  knell     of  part     iug  day, 

The  lowing  herd  winds  sl^^wly  o'er  the  lea; 

The  ploughman  homeward  plods  his  weary  way, 

And  leaves  the  world  tu  darkness  and  to  mc. 

735.  The  Spenserian  scatiza  (which  takes  its  name  from  the  poet 
Sj,enser)  con  ists  ot  eight  pelit'Jmeter  or  heroic  verses,  followed  by 
one  hex-meter,  or  r.lcxandrine  verso.  This  is  the  staLza  in  whick 
the^'Fairle  Queen?,"  "Childo  Harald,"  &c.,  are  written. 

TROCHAIC   VERSE. 

736.  Trochaic  verss  consists  of  Trochees,  and  consequently  has 
the  accent  on  the  jf?r«<,  third,  fifth,  Ac,  syllables.  It  has  different 
metres. 

Go  whore     glory     waits  thee ;  .  -' 

But  when     fa-xe  e     latcs  the®.  '  "• 

On  a    inouDtaiE,     staetchedbe     ncatb  a    hoary     willow, 

Lay  a     shepherd"    swain,  and     viewed  the     rolling     billow. 

737.  Each  of  these  may  take  an  additional  long  syllable,  and  so 
hecoiae  Jiypercataleciie,  or  Ji^2)crmeter.  •'  \     . 

1  Restless     mortals     toil  for    nought, 

Bliss  in    vain  from     earlh  is     sought. 
2.  Idle     after     dinner,     in  his     clrair, 

Sat  a     farmer,     ruidy,     fat  and     fair.    -'i*od  BrH 

AN^PASTIC   VERSE. 

738.  Anapcstic  verse,  consists  chie^y  oi  ancepcesls,  and,  when  pure, 
has  the  accent  on  every  th»rd  syllable.-    It  has  different  metres. 

0  ye  wood?  !  |-  spread  jour  branch  |  es  apace, 
To  your  deep  ]  est  recess  |  es  I  fly;  _  •, 


prtOcODY,  187 

I  would  hide  |  rvith  the  beasts  |  of  the  chase, 
I  would  van  |  ish  from  ev  |  ery  eye  • 
T39.  This  also  admits  -an  addition'al' syUablC:  "which    often  has  a 
pleasing  effect  ;  as —         v^  ^''  ""  '  •'  '    '"'  '  U .    ,     -■  :* 

On  the  warm  |  cheek  of  youih  [smiles  and  res  j  es  are  blend  |  ing. 

DACTYLIC     VERSE. 

740.  Dactylic  verse  cons.sts  chiefly  of  dactyls,  and  has  many 
vaaieties  : — 

Wearing  a  |  way  iii  Lis  |  youthfulncss, 
Loveline33,  I  beauty,  an!  ]  truthfulness. 

741.  Each  variety  sometimes  takes  an  additional  long  syllable, 
and  so  becomes  hypermeter. 

742.  A  dactylic  verse*  seldom  ends  with  a  dactyl  ;  it  more  com- 
monly adds  a  long  syllable,  sometimes  a  trochee,  aa  in  the  following 
lines  : — 

Brightest  and  [  best  of  the  |  sons  of  the  [  morning,- 
Dawn  on  our  |  darkness  and  |  tend  us  thine  |  aid. 

MIXED    VERSES.' 

^743.  Scaicely  any  poem  is  perfectly  regular  in  its  feet.  Iambi 
verse,  for  example,  sometimes  admits  other  feet  into  the  line,  par 
ticularly  at  the  beginning,  as  has  been  already  noticed. 

744.  In  odes  and  Ij'ricr'pieCes,  TetseS  erf  different  kinds  and  differ- 
ent metres  or  measures'are-often  intermingled,  after  the  manner  o^ 
the  ancient  choral  odes,  with  a  pleasing  effect.  'Alexander's 
Feast,"  Collin's  "Ode  to  the  Passions,'-  fee,  are  examples. 

POETIO  PAUSES. 

745.  Besides  the  usual  p^usesrequired  to  mark  the  sense  in  read- 
ing, and  which  may  be  called  sentential  pauses,  indicated  by  the 
punctuation,  there  are 'other  pauses  in  poetic  corapositicMJ,  required 
by,  and  necessary  to  give  proper  effect  to,  the  movement  of  the  line- 

74G.  These  are  chiefly  the  Final  pause  and  the  CccswraZ  pause. 

7  1 7.  The  final  pause  is  required  at  the, end  of  -every  line  of  poe- 
try, even  where  there  is  no  sentential  j^ause.  'When  that  is  the  cas 
it  consists  in  a  brief  suspension  of  the  voicjfe/without  any  change  in 
ts  tone  or  pitch.     When  a  sentential  pause  occurs  at  the  end  of  the 


188  ENGL-ISn    GRAMMAR. 

line,  as  it  docs  very  often,  it  takes  the  place  of.  and  supercedes  the 
final  pause. 

748.  The  cccsural  pause  is  a  suspension  of  the  voice  somewhere  in 
the  line  itself,  for  which  no  rule  can  be  given,  but  which  will  always 
be  manifest  when  poetry  is  well  read.  It  does  not  occur  in  very 
short  lines.  In  lines  of  some  length,  it  generally  occurs  near  the 
middle  ;  sometimes,  however,  nearer  the  beginning,  and  sometimes 
nearerthe  end  ;  often  in  the  middle  *f  a  foot,  but  never  in  the  mid- 
dle of  a  word.  Sometimes,  besides  this,  a  sort  of  demiconsural  pause 
is  required,  to  give  full  effect  to  the  expression.  The  following  lines 
furnish  examples  of  the  ccesural  pause  in  different  parts  of  the  line, 
and  also  of  the  demiccesural  pause.  The  former  is  marked  ("),  the 
latter  (')  :— 

"  The  steer  and  lion  "  at  one  crib  shall  meet, 

And  harmless  serpents"  lick  the  pilgrim's  feet." 
"  Warms'  in  the  sun,"  refreshes'  in  the  breeze, 
Glows'  in  the  stars,"  and  blossoms'  in  the  trees; 
Lives'  through  all  life,"  extends,  through  all  extent, 
Spreads'  undivided,"  operates'  unspent." 
149.     L'evoiional  Hymns. — These  maybe  composed  of  any  foot 
but  are  generally  iambic. 

1.  Long  Metre. — Each  stanza  has  four  verses,  and  each  verse  hag 
four  iamcic  feet ;  hence  long  metre  is  iambic  pentameter. 

Let, not  the  wise  their  wisdom  boast; 

The  mighty  glory  in  their  might : 
The  rich  in  flatt'i  ing  riches  trust, 

AVhich  take  their  everlasting  fliglit. 

2.  Common  Metre. — h^s  four  verses  in  each  stanza  ;  the  first  and 
third  each  have  four  feet ;  the  second  and  fourth  each  have  three. 

Were  I  possessor  of  the  earth, 

And  caird  the  stars  my  own, 
"Without  thy  graces  and  thyself, 

I  were  a  wretch  undone. 

3.  Short  Metre. — has  four  verses  lo  the  stanza  ;  the  first,  second 
and  fourth  have  three  feet  each,  the  third  has  four. 

The  men  of  grace  have  found 

CJlor}'-  begun  below ; 
Celestial  fruit  oh  earthly  ground 

From  faith  and  hope  may  grow 


PlWSODY.  189 

EXERCISES. 

750.  The  following  exercises  may  be  used  for  practice  in  scan- 
.  ning,  reading  or  transposition. 

(For  want  of  proper  type,  Prosody  cannot  be  well  presented.  In 
the  next  edition  the  subject  will  be  amply  treated  ) 
Jesus  shall  reign  where'er  the  snn 
Does  his  successive  journeys  run  ; 
His  kingdom  stretch  from  shore  to  shore, 
Till  moons  shall  wax  and  wane  no  more. 

Watta. 
.'Tis  the  last  rose  of  summer, 

Left  blooming  alone ; 
All  her  lovely  companions 

Are  faded  and  gone  ; 
No  flower  of  her  kindred, 

No  rose-bud  is  nigh, 
To  reflect  back  her  blushes. 

Or  give  sigh  for  sigh  1 

Moore. 
Go,  ye  messengers  of  God  I 

Like  the  beams  of  morning  fly, 
Take  the  wonder-working  rod, 
Wave  the  banner-cross  on  high  1 

Marsdeti. 
Then  in  a  nobler,  sweeter  song, 

I'll  sing  thy  power  to  save, 
When  this  poor  lisping,  stammering  tongue 
Lies  silent  in  the  grave. 

Cowj^er. 
THE   STAR    ABOVE    THE   MANGER. 

BY   THEO.    H.    HILL. 

One  night,  while  lowly  shepherd  swains 

Their  fleecy  charge  attended, 
A  light  bursfo'er  Judeas  plains. 

Unutterably  splendid. 

Far  in  the  dusky  orient, 
A  star,  unknown  in  story, 
Arose  to  flood  the  firmaraeat, 
Wi\h  more  thaa  morning  glory. 


190  liNGLISD  GRAMMAR. 

The  chisto.ring  constellations,  erst 

So  gloriously  glcftwing. 
Weaned,  when  its  sudden  s[)lendor  uuist 
Upon  their  paler  beaming. 

And  Heaven  drew  nearer  E4rtJti,tliat  iii^'lit- 
Flung  wide  its  pearly  portals—, 

Sent  forth  from  all  its  realms  of  light, 
Its  radient  immortals-: 

They  hovered  in  the  golden  airi 
Their  goldeu  censers  swinging,  , 

And  woke  the  drowsy  shepherds  there 
TFith  their  seraphic  singiiig. 

Yet  Earth  on  this — her  gala  night 

No  jubilee  was  keeping  ; 
She  lay,  unconscious  of  the  light, 
In  silent  beauty  sleeping. 

No  more  shall  brightest  cherubim 

And  stateliest  archangels 
Symphonious  slug  such  choral  hymn — 

Proclaim  so  sweet  evangels  i 

No  more  appear  that  star  at  eve, 
Though  glimpses  of  its  glory 

Are  seen  by  those  who  still  believe 
The  shepherd's  simple  stury  : 

In  Faith's  clear  firmament  afar — 

To  Unbelief  a  stranger — 
Forever  glows  the  golden  star 

That  Btoodabove  the  manger. 

Go:— let  the  eagle  chs,n£e  his  plumo, 
The  leaf  its  hue,  the  flower  its  bloomj 
But  ties  around  this  heart  were  spun 
That  could  not,  would  not  bo  undone. 

The  one,  fantastic,  light  as  air, 
'Mid  kisses  ringing, 
And  jo>ous  ringing, 
Forgets  to  say  her  morning  prjy^r! 


Cam  xihsU. 


LiJf/tihit* 


PKOfcODT. 


11)1 


And,  lo  !  f.-om  tba  heart  of  that  far  floating  gloom, 
Whatglramson  the  darkaeaj  soswSnIikc  aoi  white? 
-    Lo  !  aa  arm  and  a  neck,  g'anc  ng  up  from  the  tomb  !  — 
Thej  battk— the  JMaa's  with  t-e  E  e men t*s  might, 
he— it  ia  be  f— in  his  left  hand  behold, ,      °  ' 
As  a  sign— as  a  joj  i— shines  tb«  goblet  of  gold  i 

.    :.••  •     ■        -  H  -,,..  .  Schiller. 

One  more  .Unfortunato, 

Weary  of  breath,  'f 

ila&hlj  importunate, 

Gone  to  her  death  ! 

Talcc  her  up  tcnderlj, 
Lift  her  with  care  ; — 
Fashion'd  so  slenderly, 
Young,  and  so  fair  J 

With  fingers  weary  and  worn, 

With  eyelids  heavy  and  red, 
A  woman  sat,  in  unwomanly  rags, 

Plying  her  needle  and  thread— 
Sh'tch  !  stitch!  stitch  ! 

In  poverty,  hunger  and  dirt 
And  still  with  a  voice  of  dolorous  pitch, 

She  sang  the  "song  of  the  ^"hirt !" 

THE  FATHER'S   SOLILOQUY  FOR  HIS 
PATRIOT  SONiS. 


HooJ. 


Hood. 
FALLEN 


BY    DR»    S.    G.     WARDv 

Ah  I  I  had  fondly  fancied,  that 
I'd  spead  the  remnant  of  my  days 
Ifith  my  beloved  sons  in  peace, 
And  share  with  them  the  rich  reward 
Oi  all  their  long,  long  years  of  toil 
And  conflict  on  the  the  tented  field 
Fhen  peace,  with  healing,  balmy  wings. 
My  bleeding  conntry's  wounds  should  close, 
But  God,  in  wisdom  and  in  love, 
For  us  haih  otherwi-e  oruained, 
The  last  1  ed,  pfecious  drop,  that  coursed 
Tbl-ough  my  descendants,  now  hath  flowed 
In  ra«Bae«d  freedom's  sacred  cause 


192  ENaLISH    GRAMMAR. 


Now,  all  alone,  t  must  descend 
The  hill  of  life,  without  a  son 
To  guide  my  weary,  tottering  steps. 
I'd  not  recall  them,  if  I  could. 
To  fight  life's  dubious  battle  o'er, 
And  risk  their  chance  for  Heaven  again. 
IFithout  a  murmcr  I  submit 
To  God's  all-wise  and  holy  -will, 
Tfhoge  eye  surveys  all  time  and  space, 
Directs  the  currents  of  events. 
And  brings  the  greatest  good  to  all. 
1  dedicated  them  to  God, 
And  to  my  country  s  sacred  cause, 
But  little  thought  that  they  co  soon 
Jf  culd  fill  the  great  commission  up, 
And  wear  the  patriot  martyr's  crown. 
1  thank  m}  God,  that  in  the  morn 
Of  their  young  life  and  hope,  they  both 
Obeyed  the  Heavenly  Spirit's  call, 
And  heard  their  country's  first  appeal. 
They  died  as  heroes,  not  as  bpies 
Or  traitors  to  their  native  land. 
'i  hey  chivalrously  lead  the  van 
irhere  fiercest  raged  the  battle-storm 
And  death  held  highest  carnival, 
And  won  a  nation's  gratful  praise. 
If  vandal  hordes  from  every  land 
Must  sweep  resistless  o'er  these  plains, 
(  Tfhich  Heaven  forbid  to  such  a  foe) 
The  darksome  glass  that  hides  from  view 
All  boundlesss  and  eternal  things, 
May  consolation  give,  to  know 
The  "Free  indeed"  can  never  live 
Poltroons,  nor  slaves  of  tyrants  die. 
I  know  not  on  what  gory  field 
They  sleep,  I  only  know  they're  dead, 
And  with  them  is  my  broken  heart. 
I  know  His  everlasting  arms 
H^ere  underneath  them  when  they  fell. 
For  parent's  heart,  nor  virtue's  self 
Could  vi^ish  no  more,  so  pure  in  heart 
And  life  were  my  brave  patriot  boys, 
<  )h  !  thou  Eternal  God  Supreme, 
By  Thy  unerring  wisdom  guide 
The  father  to  his  martyrd  sons, 
That  we  may  rest  in  realms  of  peace. 
Where  war's  discordant  trump  no  more 
Shall  break  the  reign  ol  endless  bliss. 

BND. 


r 


1  Branson  &  Farrar,  ! 


l'i:i5LlsHK!i^    AMI   bK.AI.KiiS    IN' 


I  SCHOOL  HOOKS 

J  OF  ALL  KINDS, 

i         SHLICET  MUSIC 

\  FOR    ClilLDKKN,  I 

\  STATK)NARy  | 

!  PAII^TiN(is,PH0T06H^PHS,  i 

j  W  R  1  T  I  N  G    A  N  D  { 

SF  ;>rhW^^|)  BEAUTIFUL 

Maps  of  Mortii  Carolina, 


kv 


t^'O., 


J  (]ij^-  Tlie  us\ia)  (ieductions  made  to  tlie    ! 

I   Trade.  ^       " 

)  Xo.  4(L  Favettcville  St.,  Raleigli,  N.  C. 


Vvi.-"^»-s-s>a«er 


